Home

User Manual - Full Compass

1. The SONGBOOK button The SongBook Selecting the desired entry from the Main List Selecting the desired entry from the Main List A large database is already included with the instrument and you can later customize it You may browse through this database in a variety of ways 1 While you are in Style Play or Song Play mode press the SONGBOOK button to open the SongBook window Style or Standard MIDI File s currently assigned to the arranger or sequencer s SONGBOOK sonceoor T B no chord B Es D Use the scroll bar to see all Songs in the list Keep SHIFT pressed and touch ih ii T the Up Down arrow to ET A day in Paradise Ballad scroll to the next previ pee tees D ous alphabetic section SongBook Main GTP A gigolo pop As an alternative you List TA hard day night Pop can use the DIAL Press this check box to turn the view filter on Press this button to Press this button Adds the selected entry select the current entry to edit the view to the Custom List if to play filter activated see page 67 2 Browse through the entries Icons in the Type column will help you identify the type of the entry The Genre column is shown by default but you can switch to the Artist column see Displaying Artist or Genre below 3 When the entry is visible in the display select it and press the Select but ton in the display After selec
2. Turning the instrument on Turn the Pa500 on by pressing the STANDBY button located on the back panel After you turn the power on a welcome screen is shown for a few seconds and then the main display in Easy Mode appears STYLE PLAY z T T PEasy Beat 1 Grand Piano Ed Bank 8 16 Beat Meter 4 4 t Dark Pad s mmm E ee Chord na chord B P Strings Ens 2 G M Pert Stereo Grand k Analog Strings 2 ERICK IHG Fl 1 Effects Split HERI 515 3 ctave Piana 5T5 2 Electric Guitar STS d Organ Distortion Gtr rn H M1 P T Ed MUTE ES e P HUTE Gi Oo Ga Dm E i Turning the instrument on and listening to the demos 3 Turning the Easy Mode off Turning the Easy Mode off To follow the lessons of this tutorial please turn the Easy Mode off For more information about the Easy Mode see the Easy Mode chapter starting from page 6 1 Touch the little rectangle on the top right corner of the display to open the page menv STYLE PLAY 2 When the page menu appears touch the Easy Mode menu item to make the checkmark disappear ow Write Performance Write Single Touch Setting Write Current Style Perf write Global Stule Setup solo Track Essi Made o gt Easy Mode 32 Turning the instrument on and listening to the demos Playing the demos After you have turned the Easy Mode off t
3. MA li d ELE Stule British Pop 1 Measure number Beat counter Style in record edit Style in record edit Name of the Style currently in edit or record Beat counter This indicator shows the current beat inside the current mea sure Measure number Current measure you are recording Style Record mode 107 Main page Record 1 Recording parameters area Element Style Element This parameter lets you select a Style Element for editing Each Style Element corresponds to a button on the control panel car rying the same name After selecting a Style Element select a Chord Variation for actual editing see below Varl End3 This is the selected Style Element Chord Var Chord Variation This parameter lets you select a Chord Variation for editing after selecting the Style Element this Chord Variation belongs to Note When this parameter and the assigned value is in small let ters cv1 cv6 the Chord Variation is empty when it is in capitals CV1 CV6 it is already recorded If Style Element is Varl Var2 Var 3 or Var4 you can select one of 6 Chord Variations to edit If Style Element is Introl Intro2 Intro3 Filll Fill2 Fill3 Endingl Ending2 or Ending3 you can select one of 2 Chord Variations to edit Resolution Use this parameter to set the quantization during record ing Quantization is a way of correcting timing errors notes played too soon or too later are
4. M CARD gen Pi Close Storage device Song path This line shows the path of the location where you are saving the Song Directory This is the list of the selected device s content File status File size Type Hame Modification File or folder file or folder name date Type of the Use the scrollbar to scroll the list items As an alternative you can select one of the items and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to scroll Storage device Use this pop up menu to re select the card and deselect every thing CARD Secure Digital SD or MultiMedia MMC memory card The actual name label of the device may appear within square brackets Open Opens the selected folder item whose icon looks like this P Close Closes the current folder returning to the parent upper folder Sync P Synchronized Path Press this button to see the Song assigned to the Sequencer This is useful to quickly return to it after you have browsed through long directories and dug into different folders Save Press this button to open the Save Song dialog box and save the Song to the current directory Song Mame Canyon KORG USER f no file has been selected in the display prior to pressing Save the NewSong default name will be automatically assigned to the Song Note If a file is selected just touch the card name to deselect it If a file has been selected in the dis
5. gt MIDI IN l MIDI OUT x E E mote um Ls ial B Mo Doo DOE 44 Bae ta ee ee Se em l aoe E EBGSB KORG S00 tdo dodo 000 o0 FOO 0000000 Pasco Im il lj ll ji il AMI 3 Activate the MIDI Thru function on the external sequencer 4 Press GLOBAL and go to the MIDI MIDI Setup General Controls page uncheck the Local Control On parameter see page 208 This is called the Local Off status 5 Press SEQUENCER to go to the Sequencer mode Go to the Preferences Sequencer Setup page see page 195 Select the Extern Seq MIDI Setup T Note Settings may change when new Global data is loaded from a card To protect settings from loading use the Global Protect function see Global Protect on page 225 6 Select the Write Global Seq Setup command from the page menu to save the assigned MIDI Setup to the Global 7 Play the keyboard Notes played on the keyboard go from the MIDI OUT of the Pa500 to the MIDI IN of the com puter MIDI interface or go from the USB port of the P2500 to the USB port of the computer Notes generated by the computer i e a song played by its sequencer are sent through the MIDI OUT of the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN connector of the Pa500
6. Tempo From E To 25H Clear All Press the T Text Edit button next to the search criteria you want to edit Name Genre or Artist You can also select a Meter or a range of Tempo values Press the Clear button next to the search criterion you want to delete or set to a default value Press Clear All to reset all search criteria excluding Tempo Add to list Select an entry then press this button to add the selected entry to the current Custom List see Custom List on page 171 Select Press this button to confirm selection of the highlighted entry in the main list After pressing this button the name of the selected entry appears in the left upper corner of the display N When you select a song in any of the SongBook lists its name appears in reversed text over a black background While in this situation the song is selected but not yet loaded When you press the Select button in the display the song will be loaded Numeric selection of entries When in SongBook mode you can select a SongBook entry by means of an unique number Numbers associated with each entry are added in the Book Edit 2 page see Book Edit 2 on page 170 To see the numbers while in the Book page select the Show Song Numbers now Key command from the page menu Show Artist now Genre nari py Mipu Q Show Song Number now Key p gt Sort by Key Ascending Descending Sort by Tempo Sort by Type So
7. won a 8 Riz S Rises 9 ending S jedms2 fends Note The above Program Change numbers are given according to the 0 127 numbering system Style and Player controls Note You can remotely send various commands to the Style and Sequencers of the Pa500 by sending them Program Change messages on the Control channel see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 209 Style Element Style Element Style Element Style Element Style Element za MES 99 sneru 99 syiechange 100 Starestop tie 101 Playstop Ply 1 102 PlayiStop Piy 2 Note The above Program Change numbers are given according to the 0 127 numbering system Single Touch Settings STS Note You can remotely select Single Touch Settings STS on the Pa500 by sending it Bank Select MSB CC 0 Bank Select LSB CC 32 and Program Change messages on the Control channel see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 209 If a Style 1s already selected just send the Program Change message CCHO CCH32 STS STS STS STS The same as the Style to which the STS belongs 64 STS 1 STS 2 66 STS 3 STS 4 240 Factory data Sounds Bank order Sounds Bank order The following table lists all Pa500 Factory Sounds as they appear in the Banks accessed by pressing the SOUND buttons on the control panel Legend The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely select the Sounds CC00 Control Change 0 or Bank Select
8. Pan PERF PERF gt STS Track position in the stereo field L 64 L 1 CO Center Left stereo channel R 1 R 63 Right stereo channel Volume of grouped Style tracks gt GBLSY This parameter is a general offset applied to all Styles While the balance between the individual Style tracks can change when choosing a different Style the average volume set here will not change This is useful to avoid sudden changes in volume when choosing different Styles Volume of individual tracks MPERF gt PERF Y sTs Track s volume This is the relative volume of each track as saved in the Style Performance or STS It may change when choosing a different Style Performance or STS 0 127 MIDI value of the track s volume Play Mute icon PERF PERF STS Track s play mute status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Q Jg c Q L Q Q cc 88 Style Play operating mode Mixer Tuning FX Send Mixer Tuning FX Send This page lets you set the level of the track s direct uneffected signal going to the Internal FX processors The effect processors included in Pa500 are connected in parallel so you can decide which percentage of the direct signal can be effected In case you want to send all of a track s signal to the effect as when using insert effects like Rotary Distortion EQ just set the Dry parameter to Off see Dry abov
9. _ _ 264 Factory data Performances NS om gw tue em BEN NENNEN MN E si NENNEN Ea KB NENNEN oo mmm A EN E KM NEM E NENNEN A o m LL poo EN DI EE NEN NENNEN ce NENNEN E NE A NENNEN EN E am Nd EN NA PO A DI EE NENNEN e A amp m SFX quu ice DK e o B NNNNN 5 _ h Md a Na IA o Mica IU I GIN Nr E MN NA Ed T E 15 12 3 15 Factory data 265 Pads Pads You can assign the following Hits or Sequences to the four Pads Older sounds might be still assigned to the Pads when loading musical resources generated with an older operating system see the following section Drum HIT Percussion Lus World 1 Hit Wold2 9 HIT Orchestral HIT li es Cowbell Agogo rear rra ee jas Lr eese er room Y vna IE east FE eanez EC forbuet 4 amp e4 EC orne EC ETT sjem VEN TL 5 pwhuaz 5 forent s CTE E coma e Rex Gribal S Congatow S parous S Ramazana S Oh sn Roll New Agere Erw 7 forame 7 oorun 7 Ramacana 7 impart 7 ritos Rea s Congesiap e parues S RekDomak S rmen 8 ue a CEEI s CN TEN pwbuas FE RkT S CTE S CI ofen wm uiai T oeer fop E CTE E mes ree m pes ks E pesene E poro C mmu jme u 9 CE ad Tom F
10. m rz ew if c m wo t Strings Ens 2 GM WS CAE gt OOO Changing the split point If you are not comfortable with the selected split point you may set the split point to any key 1 Press the Split tab to see the Split Point panel 2 Touch the keyboard in the display then play a note on the keyboard Or press the Split Point parameter to select it and use the DIAL to select the new split point TEMPO VALUE Split Point C4 T E a LOWER UPPERS UPPERS UPPERI Playing Sounds 39 Raising or lowering the Upper octave Raising or lowering the Upper octave If all Upper tracks sound too high or too low you can quickly change which octave they are playing in 1 Use the UPPER OCTAVE buttons on the control panel to transpose all Upper tracks at the same time i Note The Octave MEPER OUTAVE Transpose value for each of the keyboard track is gt shown under the Sound s name T pur gl Each press of this button Each press of this button m 1 will lower the pitch by one will raise the pitch by one octave Octave 2 Press both UPPER OCTAVE buttons together to reset the octave 40 Selecting and saving Performances Selecting a Performance Selecting and saving Performances The Performance is the musical heart of the Pa500 Unlike selecting single Sounds selecting a Per formance will recall several Sounds at the same time the needed e
11. Operating System updates to load new features and enhancements Don t let your instrument get old Solid State Disk SSD for any system update a smart way to replace the usual ROM memory SD Secure Digital and MultiMedia MMC memory card drive to store your data on the most up to date and reli able support General MIDI Level 2 Sound compatible e 880 Factory Sounds and 56 Factory Drum Kits plus 128 User Sound and 64 User Drum Kit locations available e Four multieffect processors for the internal MIDI tracks with 124 effects and a selection of fine guitar effects cre ated using Korgs REMS Resonant structure and Elec tronic circuit Modeling System technology to deliver truly great sounding effects i Final semi parametric Master EQ to customize your own sound 256 Performance locations and about than 1 280 pre loaded Single Touch Settings STS for fast setting of key board sounds and effects e Approx 320 preloaded Styles 448 Factory locations 64 User locations available Welcome Live Performing 19 Style Record and Edit including Guitar Mode Pad Record and Edit XDS Double Sequencer with Crossfader Full featured 16 track sequencer Fully editable music database for fast song retrieving sup plied by the SongBook High quality input ADC and output DAC audio con verters TouchView Graphical User Interface Fully programmable slider and swi
12. Windows Computer A computer with an USB port that satisfies the requirements of Microsoft Windows XP or Vista Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Vista a driver for the x64 Edition is in beta release Macintosh Computer An Apple Macintosh with an USB port that satisfies the requirements of Mac OS X PPC or Intel Macs supported Universal Binary Operating system Mac OS X version 10 3 or later Please note before use Copyright to all software included in this product is the property of Korg Inc The license agreement for this software is provided separately You must read this license agreement before you install this soft ware Your installation of this software will be taken to indicate your acceptance of this agreement Windows Installing the KORG USB MIDI Driver Please connect the Pa500 to the computer via an USB cable only after having installed the KORG USB MIDI Driver Tools Note You must install a separate driver for each USB port you will use 1 Insert the included CD into your CD ROM drive 2 Normally the KORG Pa500 Application Installer will start up automatically If your computer is set so that the installer does not run automatically double click KorgSetup exe on the CD w Please follow the installation instructions appearing on screen gt Restart the computer and turn on the Pa500 Connect the Pa500 to the computer via an USB cable ad Select the
13. 158 Song Play operating mode Mixer Tuning EQ Control Low Gain PERF STS gt GBLS 9 This parameter lets you adjust the low frequencies equalization on each individual track This is a shelving curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Play Mute icon gt PERF STS gt GBLS 9 Track s play mute status See Keyboard track status on page 150 for more information Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Mixer Tuning EQ Control This page lets you reset or bypass track equalization pro grammed in the previous page Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to the Song tracks and vice versa SONG PLAY SE01 Hixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 PGrand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 SONG PLAY SEQ1 Hixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano B Piano 121 883 888 SONG PLAY SE01 Hixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piano 121 885 888 3 g Tis 2 IB Track Reset buttons Use these buttons to reset 1 e flatten equalization for the corresponding track Reset All Tracks button Press this button to reset ie flatten equalization for all tracks Bypass PERF STS Check any of these checkboxes to bypass equalization for the corresponding track When bypassed equalization has no effect on the track but all parameters are preserved When the box is unchecked equalization is activated again with the origina
14. 1 1 s mno 1 2 MUT K 0 RG IL Pa 500 Split button Selecting a Sound and playing it on the keyboard 1 Be sure the Upper 1 track is selected and set to play Co Note Be sure tracks STYLE PLAY TUE Upper 2 and Upper 3 are i A selected track is shown with a EH Qai ee M b di E Prang A black background In this example play d 8 16 Beat the Upper 1 track is selected If it is ing If you hear more Bieter 4 4 L5 PRENNE not selected press it once to select than ed see also EA i M The absence of the HEFTE icon over the bank icon shows that the Upper 1 track is set to play If it is muted press the bank icon to set it to play 5 ETIAM Stereo Grand Bore stereo erana bnatos Strings 2 ERCKIHE ug am DR PERC LOWER UPPER3 UFFE Sub UPPER T 127 ACCOMP BASS 2 If you want to play the Sound on the whole keyboard be sure the key board is in Full Upper mode If it is split in two parts press the SPLIT but ton on the control panel to turn its LED off d m O C 34 Playing Sounds Selecting a Sound and playing it on the keyboard 3 Press the Upper 1 track s area in the display to open the Sound Select window
15. Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to delete If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single note or a single percus sive instrument in a Drum track Note These parameters are available only when the All or Note options are selected Song Edit Copy Here you can copy tracks or phrases SEQUENCER Edit Lw Copy ve DENN Fram Track Lr All To Track To Measure Start Measure 1 End Measure 1 Repeat Times Tas aoa os After setting the various parameters press Execute to start the operation Note If you copy too many events on the same tick the Too many events message appears and the copy operation 1s aborted Mode Use this parameter to select the Copy mode Merge Copied data are merged with the data at the tar get position Overwrite Copied data replace all data at the target position Warning Deleted data cannot be recovered From Track To Track Use these parameters to select the source and target track to copy All All tracks The target track cannot be selected Track 1 16 Selected source and target tracks Start Measure End Measure These parameters are the starting and ending measure to copy For example if From Measure 1 and To Measure 4 the first four measures are copied To Measure This parameter is the first of the target measures Repeat Times Num
16. Preferences General Controls In this page you can set various general parameters SONG PLAY SEQ1 Preferences Lw General Controls Global 5ong Play Setup Midi Setup BS Sequencer 1 We pert Recalls FX co __JLyries Mark Balance Link Seq 2 FX Mode gt RM Link Mode Measure L Fast Play Track ENDE Setting METH Note These settings are stored in the Song Play Setup area of the Global file together with all the other parameters marked with the gt GBLS abbreviation through the manual After changing these settings select the Write Global Song Play Setup command from the page menu to save them to the Global Midi Setup gt GBL MIDI channels for the Song Play mode can be automatically configured by selecting a MIDI Setup with this parameter See MIDI on page 230 for more information on using MIDI Set ups Note To automatically select a MIDI Setup when entering the Song Play mode select the Write Global Song Play Setup command from the page menu For detailed information on MIDI Setup settings see MIDI Setup on page 269 Note After selecting a MIDI Setup you can go to the Global mode and apply any change to each channel setting To store these changes to a MIDI Setup while still in Global mode select the Write Global Midi Setup command from the page menu All MIDI Set ups can be freely customized and overwritten Hint To restore the original MIDI Setups lo
17. Sequencer 1 2 area This is where Songs assigned to the two onboard sequencers are shown s Dus m pau I lt no song FA no songs Song name Song name Name of Songs assigned to Sequencer 1 S1 and Sequencer 2 S2 You can select Songs while playing Styles to have them ready when switching to Song Play mode The icon shows the type of the selected Song qus Standard MIDI File often abbreviated as SMF file extension MID or KAR GE Only assignable to Sequencer 1 A Jukebox file file extension JBX can be assigned to Sequencer 1 but its name is not shown in this area The JBX icon appears together with the name of the cur rently selected Song in the Jukebox list Performance STS area This is where the latest selected Performance or STS name is shown FE 5 Perf Stereo Grand Selected Performance or STS Selected Performance or STS This is the latest selected Performance PERF or Single Touch Setting STS Press the name to open the Performance Select window see Performance Select window on page 76 As an alternative use the PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT section to select a dif ferent Performance To select a different STS use the four SINGLE TOUCH SET TING buttons under the display Keyboard tracks area This is where Keyboard tracks are shown Sound name Ferand Piano n o b Dark Pad EN Track name Sound bank s icon t Strings Ens GM us d ATIA
18. Songs area Despite a different layout it works as the Song area in the Nor mal view Selected Track Info area This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track Not only it is shown on the main page but also in several edit pages Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piano 121 818 386 Track name Sound bank Sound name Program Change Track name Name of the selected track Sound name Sound assigned to the selected track Press anywhere in this area to open the Sound Select window and select a different Sound Sound bank Bank the selected Sound belongs to Program Change Program Change number sequence Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Program Change Sounds area This area lets you see the octave transposition and Sound bank icon for the eight tracks currently displayed Song track octave transpose Sound bank icon Song track octave transpose Non editable Octave transpose of the corresponding track To edit the octave transpose go to the Mixer Tuning Tuning edit page of the Song Play mode see Mixer Tuning Tuning on page 89 for more details Sound bank s icon This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to Touch an icon a first time to select the corresponding track detailed information are shown on the Selected Track Info area see above Touch it a second time to open the Sound Select win dow Song Play operating mode 151 Volume panel Volu
19. gt GBLS This flag lets you turn the Master Transpose on or off for Note messages received from MIDI IN Transpose applies to Midi In notes Position Scale and Transpose position The Scale and Transpose Position allows you to define the rela tion between the Scale and the Master Transpose Post KB Pre Scale When this option is selected notes will be trans posed immediately after they leave the keyboard The Scale will be applied to the transposed notes For example if you altered an E and then set the Master Transpose to 1 the E key will play E and the altered key will be F that will play an altered E Tone Post KB amp Scale When this option is selected all notes are trans posed immediately before they enter the internal tone generator or are sent to the MIDI OUT but after the Scale For example if you altered an E and set the Master Transpose to 1 the altered key will still be E that will play an altered F Tone General Controls Scale This page lets you select the main or basic scale of the instru ment GLOBAL General Controls Main Scale Main Scale V Equal User Quarter Tone SubScale TAM Transp MAS Main Scale Main Scale gt GBLG This parameter sets the main scale or temperament for the whole instrument apart for tracks where a different sub scale has been selected by a Performance or STS see Scale Mode on page 99 Style Play mode See S
20. mas O tet 10 Jess m 121 EE 121 EN 4 M NN TES IE 121 HEN o m HN ERES ERES ER EXE Ls ub o 66 frenorsexom sex Piet a es ffenorsexnower sex wn 2 eee fee um 3 8 eee m un 3 8 feenGed sex wr s ek sem ur e 9 eene sx ur 7 eors pm un s TEE sex 121 Jazz Tenor 1 Sax NONE Sax 121 10 66 azzTenor2 sex 121 11 66 ReedofPower ax 121 0 67 j BartoneSaxGM lax Y 1231 1 67 BaritoneGrow sex 121 2 67 BreathyBaritone Sax tar 3 67 BaritonesaxPro sex 121 a 67 Baritonesax2 sex 121 61 Brass amp Sax Brass 121 Oboe GM Woodwind v 121 16 61 Brasesax Brass 121 0 68 ObeGM Woodwind v 121 17 61 Film Brass Brass 121 1 Double Reed Woodwind 121 17 61 ilmBras Brass 121 1 68 DoubleReed Woodwind 121 18 61 Brass Slow Brass 121 English Horn GM Woodwind v 1231 18 61 JBrasSlw Brass 121 0 69 English Horn GM woodwinds v S eten arenas es 5 s mets es RN I NN BOM EN MEN EN EM E X EE EG CAS Pe EOI EA ee e TES EUN EG EH NK Nm EN RUN MEN BN BCON CON 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 58 58 58 58 58 59 59 59 59 61 61 61 61 61 61 1 Factory data 253 Sounds Program Change order xr 9 eones Woodwind v xm 1 7o esdame Woodwind n s Chiff GM Charang GM Synth Synth Synt
21. Ch Acc i Rec Meter no chord Style s Tempo Change it if you like Free Memory 99 Style s Meter You can Resolution High not change it Press the Perf STS parameter to open the Performance Select window and select a different Per formance as seen on page 40 As an alter native you use the PERFORMANCE Grouped tracks During Quick Record you cannot SOUND or STS but access each separate Song track For ease of use tons just two master tracks are provided Kbd Pad Key board Pads and Ch Acc Chord Accompaniment LOWER UPPERS UPFERZ UPPERI 72 Recording a new Song Recording Recording 1 Select the Style Element you wish to use before starting to play Select one of the Intros to start with an introduc tion Select any of the Variations before starting to record ENDING VARIATION 2 3 1 2 3 INTRO FILL 2 3 COUNT IN 1 2 3 BREAK o o o COO QOCO goca ooo 2 Start recording by pressing the START STOP button START STOP 3 Play as if you were performing live with the Styles During recording select any Style Element Intro Variation Fill Ending you like You can also press START STOP to stop the Style and press it again to start the Style up again Please remember that while recording in Backing Sequence Record mode you cannot use the SYNCHRO TAP TEMPO RESET ACC SEQ VOLUME controls
22. From Style Choose this option to select the source Style to copy the track from Press the Select button to open the Style Select window and select the source Style From E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the source Style Element and Chord Variation Varl End2 A single Style Element i e all Chord Variations VI CVLI E2 CV2 A single Chord Variation From Track Use this parameter to select the source track to copy Drum Acc5 Single track of the selected Style Element or Chord Variation To CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select a target Chord Variation inside the current Pad CV1 CV6 Target Chord Variation Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Pad Edit Copy from Pad Here you can copy a Chord Variation from a different Pad Fur thermore you can copy a whole Pad Warning The Copy operation deletes all data at the target location overwrite AEREO Y Copy From Pad current From cy ejan To C Al After setting the various parameters press Execute Note If you copy too many events on the same tick the Too many events message appears and the copy operation 1s aborted Note When you copy over an existing Chord Variation Program Change data is not copied to leave the original Sounds unchanged for that Chord Variation From Pad Choose this option to select the source Pad to copy the Chord
23. Hetronome Mode gt off volume 127 Speakers 7 Speake rs On Off Metronome Mode gt GBLS Use this parameter to activate the metronome for the Style Play and or Song play operating modes Off No metronome is heard Style The metronome is always activated when playing a Style Song The metronome is always activated when playing a Song StylerSong The metronome is always activated when playing a Style or Song Volume gt GBL Use this parameter to set the volume of the metronome Speakers Speakers On Off GBLCt Use this checkbox to turn speakers on or off This option is use ful when the instrument is connected to an external amplifica tion system and you don t need the speakers Audio Setup Master EQ In this page you can access the semi parametric Master EQ This EQ is placed at the end of the audio path just before the audio outputs Master Equalizer Enable Low Gain Ldb Aid Gain Cd6 Freq CHz1 A Hi Gain dE dy d 9 EIN B dE B dE 3T Metro Mule Speakrz EG Enable gt GBLS Use this checkbox to enable or disable the Master EQ Low Gain gt GBL O This parameter lets you adjust the low frequencies master equal ization This is a shelving curve filter Values are shown in deci bels dB 18 18dB Low gain value in decibels Mid Middle Gain gt GBL This parameter lets you adjust the semi parametric middle fre quencies master equalization
24. Right hand Upper and left hand Lower Sounds are sepa rated by the Split Point Performances and STSs are collections of Sounds Just choose one of them to change all the Sounds of the keyboard Available STSs depend on the Style you last selected Since there are two onboard Sequencers you can play two Songs at the same time Mix them using the SEQUENCER BAL ANCE slider on the control panel Touching a Song name in the display is the same as to press one of the SONG SELECT buttons on the control panel Each Sequencer has its own SONG SELECT and transport buttons Easy Mode 9 The Lyrics page in detail The Lyrics page in detail Master Transpose page 148 Introduction Chord if included in the Song Current beat and measure number Use these tabs to see Lyr ics of the Song assigned to Sequencer 1 Sequencer 2 or the Style page 153 Lyrics are shown in this area FH THROW AWAY THE WORK i Use these tabs to see ELL NY FRIENDS THE Markers set for the Song assigned to Sequencer 1 or Sequencer 2 page 153 STS Either touch them to select TO RAISE THE ROOF AND or use the SINGLE TOUCH SET TING buttons under the display page 12 Use this tab to set the ig Flute Ed vibes Ed Nylon Guitar EE Fiano display options page 154 Name of the Song in play Notes Exit from this page by pressing the EXIT button When you switch to a different Sequencer using the
25. Warning If you delete a Song included in the Jukebox list currently in play the sequencer will stop and the No Song message will appear At this point you can select the JukeBox tab to open the Jukebox panel and select a different Song As an alternative you can select the next Song by pressing SHIFT gt gt FAST FORWARD in the SEQUENCER 1 section of the con trol panel then press Bl PLAY STOP in the SEQUENCER 1 section again Song list Selected Song Jukebox file 1 Canyon MID 2 ALI DORO MID 3 Pinball MID 4 AMOREBEL MID Volume Song list Use this list to browse through the Songs in the Jukebox list Use the scrollbar to scroll the list Selected Song Name of the Song currently in play You can select a different Song from the list and press the Select button in the display to select it for playback Select button Press this button to select the Song highlighted in the list and assign it to Sequencer 1 If a Song is already playing it will be stopped and the selected Song will start playing back Jukebox file Name of the selected Jukebox file To edit this file see Jukebox Editor on page 160 Transport controls for the Jukebox When you select a Jukebox file Sequencer 1 transport controls work in a slightly different way than with single Songs lt lt and gt gt Pressed alone these buttons are the Rewind and Fast Forward commands SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button press
26. After selecting the User scale touch a note in the keyboard dia gram and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to adjust the selected note tuning in cents Note These settings can be saved to a Performance or STS How to program a scale in realtime using an SC Scale Preset When the Quarter Tone function is activated you can choose one of the four SC Scale Presets either by using the soft button that appear in the display or one of the corresponding buttons on the control panel only available on some models How to program a scale in realtime using a footswitch or Assignable Switch The Quarter Tone function allows you to program a custom scale in realtime for example those sudden scale change typical of Arabic music Changes are not saved anywhere so the scale is easily wiped out when selecting a different Performance or STS an SC Preset or when pressing the Quarter Tone pedal again Note You can create a custom scale to be assigned to a Perfor mance or STS simply by selecting and editing a User scale and saving any change to a Performance or STS See Scale above You can assign the Quarter Tone function to a footswitch or the Assignable Switch 1 Program a footswitch or the Assignable Switch to be the Quarter Tone switch Simply go to the Global mode and reach the Controllers Pedal Switch Slider page There you will find the Pedal Footswitch parameter to which you can assign the Quar ter Tone
27. FX C Reverb processor for Keyboard tracks FXD Modulating FX processor for Keyboard tracks Depending on the status of the Seq 2 FX Mode parameter Sequencer 2 might use the C D effect pair see page 163 Furthermore in Sequencer mode you can create Songs using all four effects see Effects FX Select on page 189 Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from Keyboard to Song tracks and vice versa SONG PLAY SE01 Mixer Tuning LCY Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 o MEN 7 LOWER UPPERS UPPERS UPPER SONG PLAY SEQ1 Mixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano B Piano 121 883 888 IDE E TS TERS UPPERS a anon eo oo le SONG PLAY SEQ1 Hixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano B Piano 121 883 888 la nannaa 3 Tia Tii Tid IB Note When you stop then start the Song again or select a different Song the default Song track settings are selected again You can however pause the Song change the effects then exit from pause and start the Song again Edit the Song in Sequencer mode to per manently change the effects Send level A D 0 127 PERF STS Level of the track direct signal sent to the effect processor Play Mute icon PERF STS gt GBL 9 Track s play mute status See Keyboard track status on page 150 for more information Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Song Play operating mode 157 Mixer Tuning
28. JdsaS5SuteJdde E 9LICOISS 3 93 CO g Important safety instructions Location Using the unit in the following locations can result in a malfunction e n direct sunlight e Locations of extreme temperature or humidity e Excessively dusty or dirty locations e Locations of excessive vibration e Close to magnetic fields Power supply Please connect the designated AC adapter to an AC outlet of the cor rect voltage Do not connect it to an AC outlet of voltage other than that for which your unit is intended Interference with other electrical devices Radios and televisions placed nearby may experience reception inter ference Operate this unit at a suitable distance from radios and tele visions Handling To avoid breakage do not apply excessive force to the switches or controls Care If the exterior becomes dirty wipe it with a clean dry cloth Do not use liquid cleaners such as benzene or thinner or cleaning compounds or flammable polishes Keep this manual After reading this manual please keep it for later reference Keeping foreign matter out of your equipment Never set any container with liquid in it near this equipment If liquid gets into the equipment it could cause a breakdown fire or electri cal shock Be careful not to let metal objects get into the equipment If some thing does slip into the equipment unplug the AC adapter from the wall outlet Then contact your nearest KORG dealer o
29. Ordinary Guitar and Drum tracks There are different types of tracks see Track Type on page 126 and each of them is treated in a different way by the arranger Acc Accompaniment and Bass tracks When a chord is recognized the programmed chord notes are transposed to a suitable scale according to the Note Transposition Tables NTT The NTT allows you to record just some Chord Variations and have all the notes play in the right place avoiding dissonances and transposing the pattern notes to the notes of the recognized chord e Drum amp and Perc Percussion tracks No transposition is applied The original pattern plays always Gtr Guitar tracks When a chord is recognized the arranger triggers single notes strumming and arpeggios on a virtual guitar keeping care of the way notes are played on the guitar keyboard What to record Recording a Style is a matter of recording tracks inside a series of Chord Variations inside a series of Style Elements inside the Style itself You don t need to record all Chord Variations for all Style Ele ments It is often only needed to record just a Chord Variation for each Style Element Exceptions are the Intro 1 and Ending 1 where we suggest to record both a Major and minor Chord Vari ations Pattern data vs track data While the Style Record mode is where you can create or edit music patterns for the Style track parameters like Volume Pan Octave Transpose
30. Power Synth s a 3 al al af al al al af al a al al a al a N NI N N N N NI N N N N N NI N N NI NI N NI N N NI NIN N N 3 f al al a af a al al al oe oa a af al oo al al a a Oe lt Money Pad Dark Pad Freedom Pad OB Pad Dark Anna Symphonic Ens Polysynth GM Reso Sweep Sky Watcher Synth Sweeper Super Sweep SS S Cross Sweep lt Digital PolySix Noisy Stabb Mega Synth Farluce Big Sweep Stab Korgmatose Choir Pad GM Itopia Pad Fresh Air Strings amp Vocal Synth Synth 2 3 5 7 2 2 3 5 7 2 2 3 5 7 12 13 2 3 5 7 12 13 2 3 Heaven KR ME LN EN NE WR EN EX E X E X EX EN WO EN KM E E KS EN MN WE E I EN NES NN um MEM oe Km NN NN NEUE NUR NON MEM E E E EC ES E EX 2 5 5131313 3 zz g 3 lt 22 D NES E 9 d mmo o O oO lololo U 3 re oO y un eu ee o E 2 2 5 Saa a e D 5 D o oO o 2 2 o a o o nv o 5 o e 8 nl o A A W N lt lt diss HEEL LEE EE LR ade LLL EE IS E E LLL dt Strings amp Vocal 254 Factory data Sounds Program Change order EJETEA E E ee ES ESE O I IZ 5 posera Aen CO CI CA jenes CCA EC Ca s sr ewemd en iY UL CA EITC e E m 7 sr Remsesh Stings Vol wr 3 ws erae X xm s 3r CIN wr 9 EEC ee IE xm 39 sr wem eh wr 9 o Jews een s a2 Jaowed C
31. UJ N UJ N ul Brazilian Guitar N o N N Clean Guitar 2 Funk Stein RX1 Dist Guitar RX2 Nylon Guitar GM N N O N N o N gt 12 Strings Gtr Club Jazz Gtr 1 N vI N N ul N Muted Guitar GM Distortion GtrGM UJ N o Nylon Bossa Nylon Key Off N I N N I N EE N I Club Jazz Gtr 2 Vintage S 1 Clean Mute Gtr NJ N o NJ N o N N 00 Nylon Guitar 2 N ul N I Appendix 242 Factory data Sounds Bank order iE 3 E gt gt apa as zi alalalala a uju alalu lt nv un E E A LEM Ez e a ojojojojo D 0 0 S oj o 2 a et ee eee EE JEGERE alalalala mn ao ola E E D EA E e E E IE oa a E o amp 3 a al se el Ss Q c ct o ENS ES ER ESI EE Ee E s E zs pere o a 2 gt X ee eo wl w c ese N Es GIR GIN S 2d Nylon Guitar 3 Finger Key Off Jazz Guitar GM Single Coil Clean Funk Steel amp Body Hackbrett Jazz Man R amp R Guitar Ukulele Mandolin Mandolin Key Off Mandolin Trem Banjo GM Banjo Key Off Bouzouki Tambra Mid Tone Gtr New Stra Guitar L amp R E Guitar 1 L amp R E Guitar 2 Guitarish Country Nu Stra Chime Mute Monster Disto Mute Mute Vel Gtr Funky Wah RX E Gtr Harmonics Vintage S 2 C YW a lt v O VI VIa m TI a un o v A m un Wn S un C au al al al alulo el sisltialsisi l
32. When importing an SME parameters like CV Length Meter Tempo Changes Program Changes and Expression are recog nized These parameters will be imported as the header of the Style Element containing the Chord Variation provided the Initialize parameter is checked or the Style Element is empty Hint It is a good idea to check the Initialize parameter when importing the first Chord Variation of a Style Element and uncheck 1t when importing the following Chord Variations Sounds assigned to each track can be imported provided the Program Change Bank Select MSB and LSB events are on the first tick of the SMF These data are loaded in the Style Ele ment s header and not as Sounds assigned to the Style Perfor mance Note Sounds in the Style Element header can be overridden by Sounds assigned to the Style Performance by checking the Origi nal Style Sound parameter in the main page of the Style Play mode Style Track view f the above data was not found on the first tick of the imported SMF Sounds must be manually assigned to each track You can do this in the Record 1 or Record 2 or the Sound Expression page of the Style Record mode Key Chord Chord Table Expression and any other Style Vari ation parameter must be manually programmed in the relevant Style Record pages The starting Tempo and each track s Volume must be pro grammed as Style Performance data and then sav
33. You can select an SC Preset also by assigning the relevant func tion to the Assignable Switch or Assignable Footswitch When one of the SC Preset buttons on the control panel is kept pressed for more than one second the current scale program ming is saved to the corresponding preset A confirmation mes sage will appear for some seconds in the display Only available on some models As an alternative while in the Global General Controls Scale page choose the Write SC Preset command from the page menu and select one of the preset locations where to save the current settings Keyboard diagram PERF STS When Quarter Tone is checked or a User scale is selected this diagram allows you to modify each note s pitch Scale lock icon gt GBLS When locked Scale parameters remain unchanged when select ing a different Performance or STS This lock is reset when turning the instrument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 212 For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 203 How to fine tune each note of the User scale When the User scale is selected the keyboard diagram becomes active You can then change each note tuning in cents of a semi tone within a range of 99 cents referred to Equal tuning This way you can create a custom scale you can save to a Perfor mance or STS Fine tuning values
34. l Editthe first note s Velocity value 2 Press the first note and keep it pressed 3 Edit the second note s Velocity value 4 Press the second note and keep it pressed 5 Edit the third note s Velocity value 6 Press the third note then release all notes Entering a second voice You can insert passages where one note is kept pressed while another voice moves freely Ex I Step Time NL Press E m C d E continue holding C Step Time iig gu E G Release G and C Style Record mode 115 Style Record procedure Ex 2 E Step Time Step Time Pi RR m Off E C Release G and C Press G To holding C Ex 3 Step Time Step Time Step Time Press F E C bees G continue holding C mas F continue holding C Step Time Step Time A Step Time J Off es G Press D Release D continue holding C continue holding C continue holding C Step Time Step Time ed E E and C continue holding C Q y c Q re Q Q cc 1 16 Style Record mode Edit menu Edit menu From any page apart for Step Record press the MENU button to open the Style Record edit menu This menu gives access to the various Style Record edit sections When in the menu select an edit section or press EXIT to exit the menu and return to the main page To return to the main page you can also select the Main Page menu item
35. r un ect 2 Double Cone Speakers 10 cm USER INTERFACE Display 320 x 240 Graphical Touch Screen Display Joystick Dial 1 Switch 1 Slider Cursors Real Time Master Volume Acc Seq Real Time Volume Balance Transpose Memory Manual Bass Fade Tap Synchro Ensemble Wn VIIa 5 2 al 2 A sls gt dolo n 3 le 3 D o D CY O 5 O nw Help System Multilanguage Hypertext Contextual A S 2 m A zi S UW MIDI SB Outputs IN OUT 1 Device 1 1 Full Speed 2 Analog Left Right 2 Line Inputs cC 5 o O Un c O El lt Inputs Headphone 1 Jack connection Pedals 1 Damper 1 Assignable Footswitch Pedal DC 12 V external power supply supplied OPTIONS Expression Volume Pedal Korg EXP 2 Korg XVP 10 Korg DS 1H Korg PS 1 Damper Pedal Switch Pedal Technical specifications 283 PHYSICAL DATA Consumption 15 Watt Dimensions W x D x H Weight 42 2 x 15 9 x 7 5 inches 1074 x 404 x 183 mm without music rest 21 8 Ibs 9 9 kg 284 Index A Global channel 231 Arabic Scale 85 90 Groove Quantize 161 Assignable Sliders 10 Audio Inputs 18 23 Audio Outputs 18 22 210 Auto Style Perf Sound Select 206 Side a Write 211 M 2 d keb Backup 21 Jukebox 152 160 Balance Keyboard Style or Seq 10 22 Balance Sequencer 13 22 L Bank Select 233 Local Off 208 233 Lower Lock 204 Lyrics 153 172 Bass amp Lower Backing 100 C Co
36. tion of each bank This way by turning on this parameter you will select your preferred Performance at the touch of a single button Also note that by turning the Factory Style and Pad Protect and Factory Sound Protect parameters off you can do the same with the Styles and Sounds Controllers Pedal Switch Slider This page lets you to calibrate and select a function to the Assignable Pedal Footswitch select the polarity for the Damper Pedal and assign a function to the Assignable Slider GLOBAL Controllers Lw Pedal Footswitch al stule start stop Calibration Pedal Footswitch Damper Damper Polarity Korg As3ignable Slider Slider Lb Off Ped See page 270 for a list of the assignable functions The first func tions are switch type functions while the remaining starting from Master Volume are continuous like functions Pedal Footswitch Pedal Footswitch gt GBL Continuous pedal or footswitch connected to the ASSIGN ABLE PDL SW connector Calibrate gt GBLS Use this button to calibrate and choose the polarity of the pedal footswitch 1 Connect the pedal or footswitch to the ASSIGN PDL SW connector on the back of the instrument 2 Go to this page and press the Calibration button in the display The following dialog box appears Pedal Footswitch Calibration Press the Fedal F switch and set ce y 3 You are asked to set the pedal to the maximum v
37. tons SYNCHRO START STOP buttons PSB These buttons turn the Synchro Start and Synchro Stop func tions on or off This lets you decide if you must press START STOP to start and or stop a Style or just play the keyboard Start On Stop Off In this situation just play a chord in the chord recognition area usually under the split point see SPLIT on page 16 to automatically start the Style If you like turn one of the INTROs on before starting the Style Start On Stop On When both LEDs are lit raising your hands from the keyboard momentarily stops the Style run Front panel 15 ning If you play a chord again the Style starts again Start Off Stop Off All Synchro functions are turned off ES TAP TEMPO RESET This is a double function button acting in a different way depending on the Style status stop play Tap Tempo When the Style is not playing you can beat the tempo on this button At the end the accompaniment starts playing using the tapped in tempo Reset When you press this button while the Style is playing back the Style pattern goes back to the beginning of measure 1 9 TEMPO LOCK This button turns the Tempo Lock and Link Mode functions on or off On When you select a different Style or Performance or select a different Song the tempo does not change You can still manually change it by using the DIAL The Link Mode is also turned on for the Song Play m
38. 15 User 1 eza Style B1 lt empty gt Parameters saved in the Style are marked with the STYLE symbol through the user s manual Name gt STYLE Name of the Style to be saved Press the Ti Text Edit button next to the name to open the Text Edit window Style Bank Target bank of Styles Each bank corresponds to one of the STYLE SELECT buttons Use the TEMPO VALUE dial to select a different bank Style Record mode 129 Write Style dialog box Style Target Style location in the selected bank Use the TEMPO VALUE dial to select a different location Note A User Style is usually prompted when writing a Style How ever you can overwrite a Factory Style when the Factory Style and Pad Protect parameter is left unchecked see page 225 Select button Press this button to open the Style Select window and select a target location STYLE SELECT British Pop 1 Copy Key Chord dialog box Open this window by choosing the Copy Key Chord item from the page menu Here you can copy Key Chord settings of the currently selected track to all other tracks of the same Chord Variation or to the whole Style This function is useful to speed up pattern programming and to avoid having different tracks in different keys within the same Chord Variation From Current Track To Current Chord Variation Tracks O ATI Style Tracks Current Chord Variation Tracks The Key Chord of the current
39. 2 Press the RECORD button and select the Backing Sequence Quick Record option to enter the Backing Sequence Quick Record mode Now you can prepare your recording parameters For more details see Record mode Backing Sequence Quick Record page on page 181 3 The latest selected Style is currently selected If it is not the right one select a different Style to start recording with See Style Select window on page 77 4 The latest selected Performance or STS is currently selected If you prefer select a different Performance or STS See Performance Select window on page 76 and STS Select on page 78 5 Select the status of the Backing Sequence grouped tracks using the Kbd Pad and Ch Acc parameters Kbd Pad stays for Keyboard and Pads Ch Acc stays for Chord and Accompaniment i e the Style tracks To record all you play on the keyboard plus the automatic accompaniment leave their status to Rec see Track status icons on page 178 Warning Tracks set to REC are automatically overwritten when starting recording Set a track to the PLAY or MUTE status when you don t want to delete it For example if you are recording a keyboard part on an existing Style track set the Ch Acc parameter to PLAY and the Kbd Pad track to REC Start recording by pressing the left P W PLAY STOP button or the START STOP button By pressing the left 9 lBl PLAY STOP button or the START STO
40. 233 pone Edit Delle soos ioar popu wa EST DR ERE RE 194 Playing another instrument with the Pa500 234 Done BIIPEC OD osse ud ens rra MER 194 Sone Edi MOV esos atesora taaan DE 195 a na Edi REX CONV stor o Rr OS RAT 9o PSP PIS P paw 195 Append DN Preferences Sequencer Setup iuoaoco orio ders oe PES 195 Factory data lees 236 Page MENU agra eae dee iras erae br dde 196 c P 236 Write Global Sequencer Setup dialog box 197 vade pudre coseno Total 239 Sono eet WOW ansuiraao apio dde Dara Pesos 197 Style and Player controls s sodes oomen d RE aha 239 a o A odd e drRo d adii oie dass 198 Single Touch Settings STS iiia odere Eos 239 Global edit mode ooo nonon Luann 200 sounds Bankcordet Lass sodann guie id mE oT ER one 240 What is it and how the Global is structured 200 Sounds Program Change order sse 248 Main page sss m ene 200 Ibid PE 256 ECIEGICHE ven e a s Er I PROTEIN FRE D 200 Multisamples esse 257 Edit page Ucr oreren bros ao te dd gba voe PE es 200 Drum Samples ooocoocooccorronronrronranrrrnranros 260 General Controls Basic dusedimsscasis iaa leave 201 Performances c isses nenne 265 General Controls Transpose Control sseeeees 202 co PH 265 CGsneral Controle Scal id 202 ie Te ee Tee SANE Eq Eua E 268 General Controls Lock aues aetas duced rd kaw
41. 3 SS m frees mp NI mjww m EB ARA pat ERE WIN N N N UJ NI N N N UJ NI N N N O W CO NIA UJ NI N N N UJ W W NI NI NI NI N N N N N N N O OO CO NI AJ Wy BI WwW NI O N vI UJ N 268 Factory data Effects Effects The following table lists all Pa500 Factory Effects Detailed information on each effect s parameter are contained in the Advanced Edit addendum that you can find in the Accessory CD FX assignable to FX processors A to D ha Stereo Compressor Stereo Limiter Multiband Limiter St MasteringLimtr Stereo Gate St ParametricAEQ St Graphic 7EQ St Exciter Enhncr Stereo Isolator 10 St Wah Auto Wah 11 St Vintage Wah 12 St Random Filter 13 Multi Mode Filter 14 St Sub Oscillator 15 Talking Modulator 16 Stereo Decimator 17 St Analog Record 18 OD Hi Gain Wah 19 St Guitar Cabinet 20 St Bass Cabinet 21 Bass Amp Model 22 Bass Amp 4 Cabinet 23 Tube Pre mp Model 24 St Tube PreAmp 25 MicModel PreAmp 26 Stereo Chorus 27 St HarmonicChorus 28 St Biphase Mod 29 Multitap Cho Delay 30 Ensemble 31 a2 63 Polysix Ensemble Stereo Flanger St Random Flanger St Env Flanger Stereo Phaser St Random Phaser St Env Phaser Stereo Vibrato St Auto Fade Mod 2Voice Resonator Doppler Scratch Grain Shifter Stereo Tremolo St Env Tremo
42. 4 When finished recording your Song press the ll PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER 1 section to exit recording and return to the main page of the Sequencer mode SEQUENCER 1 SONG SELECT lt lt gt OOOO SEQUENCER 5 Ia NEWSONG EN Meter did MM 1 Trk S1TrB1 Grand Piano L Locate meas i L Metro D Note If you do not wish to start the Song with the Style playing you can simply start recording by pressing the Ml PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER 1 section and start the Style only later The Style will start at the next beginning of the measure pw 50 551 ES Tempa Dj 121 883 888 Wu Nd Ng Nu Mu Nu Wu Wu a eS NW f m BH After pressing the PLAY STOP button the main page of the Sequencer mode appears again 5 While in the main page of the Sequencer mode press the M PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER 1 section to listen to the recorded Song The Backing Sequence Song has been converted to an ordinary Song If you like it you can save it to a card and read it in Song Play mode or with any external sequencer 6 To edit the Song press MENU to enter the Edit mode see instructions starting from page 186 Volume Tal Ir IE Tad IE IT Ir Ti Tag Recording a new Song 73 Second take recording Overdubbing Second take recording Overdubbing You may wish to re record and add one of the two grouped tracks or overwrite a bad recording with a new one U
43. Crash 1 201 Crash 2 202 China 203 Splash 8 Edge1 204 Splash 8 Edge2 205 Splash 206 Crash Reverse 207 Crash Dance 99 208 Crash DDD 1 209 Ride Dance 99 210 Ride 20 mp1 211 jRide 20 mp2 212 Ride 20 mf1 213 Ride 20 mf2 214 Ride Brush1 215 Ride Rivet 216 Ride Edge1 217 Ride Edge2 218 Ride Jazz 219 Ride Cup 220 BD Orchestra 221 Orchestra Cymbal 222 Timpani 223 SD Orch Roll 224 SD Orchestra 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 88 Tom 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 Syn Castanet 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 DJ Scratch 1 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 7 7 317 Baya Mute1 318 Baya Mute2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 182 183 187 188 192 193 Syn Rim Click 195 197 EX E p p pu EN ES EN Timbales Lo Rim Treas tonm DJ Scratch 3 DJ Scratch 4 35 ena r s E r DEI IS 7 35 ewe E 225 Finger Snaps 226 Claps1 227 Claps2 228 Claps3 229 Claps4 230 88 BD 292 231 88 SD 2 293 0 1 2 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 0 2 3 5 6 8 9 0 1 2 N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 5 5 5 N m ae Le E Le 9 x p NIN m m o un val alu nl ul unl wn nl ni nl mi nl nl nl wl ol al o o co o oo 213
44. FX settings have to be edited in Style Play mode After creating or editing music patterns in Style Record mode save them by selecting the Write Style command from the page menu of the Style Record mode see Write Style dialog box on page 129 After editing track parameters in Style Play mode save them to the Style Performance by selecting the Write Style Performance command from the page menu of the Style Play mode see Write Style Performance dialog box on page 103 Sounds There are two ways of assigning Sounds to the Style tracks e While in Style Record mode you can assign different Sounds to each Style Element see Sounds area on page 110 Style Record mode 105 Style Import Export While in Style Play mode you can assign a single Sound to the Style Performance together with the other track parameters that remains the same for all Style Elements Which Sounds are used depends on the status of the Original Style Sounds parameter see page 83 Note When assigning a Sound in Style Play mode the Original Style Sounds is automatically turned off Style Import Export As an alternative to creating Styles on the Pa500 you can import a Standard MIDI Files SMF from your computer to a Pa500 s Style See Import Import SMF on page 127 and Export SMF on page 128 Entering the Style Record mode While in the Style Play operating mode press the RECORD but ton The
45. In Style Record mode edits always happen on the selected Style Element Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu see Page menu on page 128 Parameters area Each page contains various parameters Use the tabs to select one of the available pages For detailed information on the vari ous types of parameters see sections starting from page 117 Track status Use these buttons to mute unmute tracks while editing Tabs Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section Event Edit Event Edit The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each single MIDI event of the selected Chord Variation You can for example replace a note with a different one or change its playing strength 1 e velocity value See Event Edit procedure on page 118 for more information on the event editing procedure Page sub header STYLE REC Event Edito Event Edit T Drum E Mari ZCM CM Position Maluel Valuez Length Page header Page menu icon Event list MrBB1 81 888 Ctrl 115 641 601 906 Hote 126 D 060 06 192 H 661 61 606 Hote 53 D ama ma 166 H 661 61 696 Hote H 661 61 192 Hote Track pop up menu Tabs Scrollbar Page header See Page header on page 107 Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu See Page menu on page 128 Page sub header This area shows some performing info on the Song SE Vari C4 C41 Event Edit T Dr
46. Minor 7th D5 4 note alate Augmented Augmented 7th Augmented Major 7th 4 note 4 note 3 note 1 E e Se ATAN LA lO No 3rd No 3rd no 5th 2 note 1 note Nen LILLI e constituent notes of the chord T can be used as tension X O o o lt 278 Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver Connecting the Pa500 to a personal computer Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver The USB port can be used to transfer MIDI data between the Pa500 and a personal computer this is called the MIDI Over USB function This is useful when your computer is not fitted with a MIDI interface USB can be used in parallel with the MIDI ports For example you can connect your Pa500 to a sequencer running on your computer and at the same time control another MIDI instru ment connected to the MIDI ports of the Pa500 Connecting the Pa500 this ways makes it at the same time a MIDI input device a controller and a sound generator Connecting the Pa500 to a personal computer Please install the KORG USB MIDI Driver before connecting the Pa500 to a personal computer Be sure your personal com puter meets the requirement shown on KORG USB MIDI Driver system requirements below KORG USB MIDI Driver requirements system
47. Prefer ences section Var or Fill Selects the corresponding Style Element in the Drum Fill page Style Controls section Fade In Out Selects the Fade In Out parameter in the Basic page Preferences section of the Global mode Accomp Selects the Chord Recognition parameter in the Split panel Main Page Scroll Arrows Start Stop Synchro either Tempo Lock SongBook SC Preset any Split Selects the Key Velocity page Keyboard Ensemble section Ensemble Selects the Ensemble Type parameter in the Ensemble page Keyboard Ensemble section Pad any Selects the Pad page Pad Assignable Switches section Assignable Switch Selects the Switch page Pad Assignable Switch section Shift Upper Octave either Selects the Tuning page Mixer Tuning sec tion Style Opens the Write Current Style Performance window Sound Perfor mance STS Opens the Write STS window Song Play mode Song Play Selects the General Control page Preferences section Play Stop Seq 1 Sync Start of either sequencers or 2 Upper Octave Selects the Tuning page Mixer Tuning sec tion either Fade In Out Selects the Fade In Out parameter in the Basic page Preferences section of the Global mode Split Selects the Key Velocity page Keyboard Ensemble section Pad any Selects the Pad page Pad Assignable Switches section Assignable Switch Selects the Switch page Pad Assignable Switch section Sound P
48. RealSteel Gtr ST RealFolk Gtr ST Real Folk Gtr Real 12 Strings Real El Gtr ST1 Real El Gtr ST2 Real El Guitar N 7 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 7 24 25 2 12 12 13 15 13 15 17 17 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 7 7 27 v y 3 y A a e Lo S Q Ensemble amp Solo Full Strings i3 Strings Oh Ah Voices trings amp Horns Orch amp Oboe 1 EN wr 50 52 52 0 5 N N FIO S O 2 Oo z 2 9g a 4 O D O njo al l Qlol alza D ZI o l s lzi2l2izi a gt 0 e za b a jo lt o9 o 294 o alg a a n 2 o wl Slual Y n O Xx S al 2 DIAS B i f ct c ece g QO eas ef o oi 5 xe mm rag cj 2 2 IN RIES g a e NT baal ee E et 4 4 Violin GM Viola GM 4 4 Cello GM Contrabass GM Trem Strings GM 4 Choir Aahs GM Voice Oohs GM Strings Ens 1 GM posere E asia AA Booty A ES Pizzicato Str GM 8 8 8 EL NEN EN ES EN E EN E EN EIN MER ET EX p EXE EX E E LE E EM EM E EN CAES HAN ET E MEN E NUN NN E NEG NC ES KON ME HAS MEAR ES E EX EN E LX E Nm NN EIE 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 C 2 2 5 5 0 2 2 2 3 5 2 3 0 2 2 5 0 1 0 2 2 5 2 4 4 5 5 4 3 4 2 52 NES 121 1 46 Strings Ens 3 121 21 48 SuingsEn 4 pas 4 j 2 3 5 2 3 7 2 2 3 3
49. Selected highlighted items Any operation carried on on parameters data or list entries is executed on highlighted items First select the parameter or item then execute the operation EiS Non available grayed out parameters When a parameter or command is not currently available it is shown in grey on the display This means it cannot be selected but may become available when a different option is selected or you switch to a different page PI Be RIM s na nr Shortcuts Some commands or pages can be recalled by keeping the SHIFT button pressed and pressing other buttons or elements in the display See the Shortcuts chapter on page 280 for a list of available shortcuts 9pin5 JINO 30 Turning the instrument on and listening to the demos Turning the instrument on Turning the instrument on and listening to the demos First of all turn the instrument on and familiarize yourself with the main screen You can also listen to the demos Display D butt Standby power switch emo buttons
50. Show Track Activity gt GBL Use this parameter to turn on off the Track Activity display When it is turned on you can monitor events coming from the tracks or the MIDI inputs Incoming events are shown by the blinking of each track s label By default this parameter is turned on Display Hold Display Hold On This option turns the Display Hold function on or off By default it is turned on On When you open a temporary windows like the Sound Select window it remains in the display until you press EXIT or an operating mode but ton Off Any temporary window closes after a certain time Auto Select gt GBL gt GBLO When one of these parameters is checked the latest selected Style Performance or Sound selected in a bank is immediately selected when pressing the bank button Auto Style Select Auto Performance Sound Select This way you can assign your preferred Style Performance or Sound to each control panel s button and select it just with a single press However the Style Perf Sound Select window still appears when you press one of the bank buttons so you can select a different item if desired Note Unless you save your settings by means of the Write Global Auto Select Setup page menu command the memorized Style Performance or Sound is reset to the first one in each bank when turning the instrument off and then on again Hint You can save your preferred Performances into the first loca
51. Song Edit Delete This page is where you can delete MIDI events from the Song SEQUENCER Edit LCY Delete Track P Track 15 cnt IMA Start Tick 01 01 0068 End Tick 461 841 192 Bottom Note C 1 Top Note G9 After setting the various parameters press Execute to start the operation Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected Track 1 16 Selected track Master Master track This is where the Tempo Scale and Effect events are recorded Event Type of MIDI event to delete All All events Measures will not be removed from the Song and will remain empty Note All notes in the selected range Dup Note All duplicate notes When two notes with the same pitch are encountered on the same tick the one with the lowest velocity is deleted After Touch After Touch events Pitch Bend Pitch Bend events Prog Change Program Change events excluding the bundled Control Change 00 Bank Select MSB and 32 Bank Select LSB Ctl Change All Control Change events for example Bank Select Modulation Damper Soft Pedal 600 92 CC T27 Single Control Change events Double Control Change numbers like 00 32 are MSB LSB bun dles Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to edit If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000
52. Track status Track s octave transpose Sound name PERF STS Name of the Sound assigned to the corresponding Keyboard track f the track is already selected black background press the Sound name to open the Sound Select window f the track is not selected white background first select it then press the Sound name to open the Sound Select window For more information about the Sound Select window see Sound Select window on page 76 Keyboard track octave transpose PERF STS Non editable Octave transpose of the corresponding track To individually edit the octave transpose for each track go to the Mixer Tuning Tuning edit page see page 89 You can also transpose all Upper tracks by using the UPPER OCTAVE buttons on the control panel Bass Lower Backing icon gt GBL Y When the Bass amp Lower Backing function is EACEING active the Backing icon appears in the Lower track Sound area see Bass amp Lower Backing on page 100 Keyboard track name Non editable Name of the corresponding track meme row Dee PERF STS Sound bank s icon This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to Keyboard track status PERF STS Play mute status of the current track Select the track then press this area to change the track status No icon Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Panels The lower half of the mai
53. When in an edit page press the EXIT button to return to the main page of the Style Record mode STYLE RECORD Menu bo Style Element Track Controls Style Track Controls Style Element Chord Table Note While the Style 1s in play you cannot access the Edit section pages from the main page see page 107 Stop the playback before pressing MENU Note When switching from the Edit section pages Quantize Transpose Velocity Delete to the other pages or vice versa the Style 1f in play is automatically stopped Edit page structure Most edit pages share some basic elements Selected Style Operating mode Edit section Element Page menu icon yo ee STYLE REC SE Track Controls E Yar i Selected track info Parameters area DRUH PERE ACCS ACCS ACCd ACCS Sound i Espr PEN Tabs Other pages have a slightly different structure Operating mode Edit section Page menu icon yum EGO xc Ww STYLE REC Edit Duantize Track DEN E gt ari cv p cv Resolution Start Tick G881 81 888 EndTick 005 601 000 Parameters Bottom Mote C 1 Top Note G9 area Track status BASS velocity cut Delete Mai side ll Es Tabs Operating mode This indicates that the instrument is in Style Record mode Edit section This identifies the current edit section corresponding to one of the items of the edit menu see Edit menu on page 116 Selected Style Element
54. Write Global Midi Setup command from the page menu If you plan to use a different MIDI channel for the Style Play and Song Play modes repeat the above to create a second MIDI Setup Assigning a MIDI Setup to the Style Play and Song Play modes Since SongBook entries dynamically recall the Style Play or the Song Play modes it is advisable to assign them the same MIDI Setup or two different MIDI Setups with the Control channel assigned to the same MIDI channel This way the same MIDI channel will be used to select a SongBook entry in either the Style Play or Song Play mode When one of the operating modes is recalled the MIDI Setup memorized in the Style Play Setup or in the Song Play Setup will be automatically selected and MIDI channels will be automati cally configured To assign a MIDI Setup to each of the two operating modes In Style Play mode go to the Style Play gt Preferences gt Style Setup page and select a MIDI Setup Select the Write Global Style Setup command from the page menu Reference 168 SongBook Book Edit 1 n Song Play mode go to the Song Play gt Preferences gt Gen eral Control page and select the same MIDI Setup assigned to the Style Play mode Select the Write Global Song Play Setup command from the page menu Selecting SongBook entries via MIDI When you are ready to remotely select SongBook entries switch to the Style Play or Song Play mode At this point P
55. Yi rumbos Yi ercontesionc Fu fe ekono iz Fooseps iz Phone Ring Tz pram Disoa 12 Pere CongarTamb raf W Btera eoe a pane rampa PereShaker H4 wears weise er ro ica re sat EE pir pes pr sani pir rr ret E p8 p sane o fie Thunder 18 brum Progress 18 Pere Tambourine ref an mmm 8 pron fos Pere Tambourine pana mw 3 forum re 25 ere Tambecongat m m sas a rar reat zt rer Tambecongaz m m e eee m a promena 2 Jreceurostonso m m a 8 18 8 eceteems pH pere psp Pr EEC pp E INN EC INN E INN E INS AAA H SEQ Groove ka SEQ Bass u SEQ Piano KA SEQ Guitar Li SEQ Orchestral SEQ Soo GrvDrum1 1 BassPickEasy Bass Pick Bass Pick Easy 1 Piano Piano Accomp1 1 Piano Accomp1 1 Gtr Steel Strum1 1 Timpani Roll 1 1 Solo Marimba Pane Bass Pick Med H Piano Accomp 2 27 Gtr Steel Strum2 Timpani Roll 2 ENEL Kalimba 1 Bass Pick Busy Piano Accomp 3 Gtr Steel Strum3 Orch Tutti 1 Solo Kalimba 2 4 GrvJazzy sf 4 Bass Finger Easy ES Piano Accomp 4 ES Gtr Steel Strum4 ES Orch Tutti 2 ES Solo Steel Drums Bass Finger Med Piano Accomp 5 Gtr Steel Strum5 Orch Tutti 3 Solo Vibes EX Grv HipHop 1 EN Bass Finger Walk ER Piano Accomp 6 ES Gtr Steel Strum6 EJ Orch Tutti 4 E Solo Gtr Dist Grv HipHop 2 Piano Accomp 7 GtSteelSt
56. and record your realtime performance Step Backing Sequence Step record Edit chords and controls for the Style Very useful if you are not a keyboard player Record mode page Multitrack Sequencer While in Sequencer mode press the RECORD button and select the Multitrack Sequencer option The Multitrack Sequencer page appears Page sub header F Tempo J 128 L Locate meas 1 Meter 4 4 Selected Resolution High Metra Ly Off Tempo Lr Record area Page header Page menu icon Recording parame ters area 121 883 088 Sounds area Tracks volume status area See Multitrack recording procedure on page 178 for informa tion on the record procedure Page header See Page header on page 174 Page menu icon See Page menu icon on page 175 Page sub header This area shows some performing info on the Song Free H 220 MEH i i ELE Song HEW SONG Song name Free memory Beat counter Measure number Song name Name of the Song in record Free memory Percentage of remaining memory available for recording Beat counter This indicator shows the current beat inside the current mea sure Measure number Current measure you are recording Recording parameters area Rec mode Recording mode Set this parameter before starting record to select a recording mode Sequencer operating mode 177 Record mode Mu
57. chord you are playing Then depending on the selected Style Element it determines which Chord Variation CV should be played for the scanned chord Which Chord Variation corre sponds to each scanned chord is a setting of the Style the Chord Variation Table Each Style Element contains a Chord Variation Table whose prototype 1s the following Chord Variations CVs Intro 1 3 Fill 1 3 Ending 1 3 CV1 CV6 CV1 CV2 After deciding what CV to play the arranger triggers the right sequence for each track Since each sequence is written in a par ticular key for example CMajor GMajor or Emin the arranger transposes it according to the scanned chord Notes in the sequence are carefully transposed to make them work fine with all recognized chords Going deeper into the Style structure we can see that each Chord Variation is made up of Track Sequences and the Pa500 supports 8 different tracks DRUM and PERC are used for drum and percussion sequences BASS for bass and ACCI 5 are for accompaniment sequences string guitar piano or other accom paniment instruments Just to summarize when you play a chord on the chord recogni tion area the arranger determines which Style Element is used then determines which Chord Variation should be used for the played chord then Style sequences for every track of that Chord Variation are transposed from the original chord to the recog nized chord and so on every time you play a chord
58. containing global parameters not linked to any single operating mode Style Play Setup containing global parameters for the Style Play mode not linked to the single Performance STS or Style Song Play Setup containing global parameters for the Song Play mode not linked to the single Song Sequencer Setup containing global parameters for the Sequencer mode not linked to the single Song Media Preferences containing preferences for the Media mode MIDI Setup containing the available MIDI Setups i e set tings for MIDI communication Main page There is no main page in the Global edit mode When pressing EXIT you exit the Global mode and the underlying operating mode in the background is recalled Edit menu From any page of the Global mode press the MENU button to open the Global edit menu This menu gives access to the vari ous Global edit sections When in the menu select an edit section or press EXIT to exit the Global mode When in a page press EXIT to go back to current operating mode in the background Style Play Song Play Sequencer Sound GLOBAL Menu Eb General i Touch Panel A Calibration Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages that may be selected by press ing the corresponding tab on the lower part of the display Note The Global mode is not available while in Record mode Style Record Pad Record Song Rec
59. icon shows the file type ALTOS Standard MIDI File often abbreviated as SMF file extension MID or KAR The SMF MID is the industry standard song format used by Pa500 as its basic Song format when recording a new Song A MIDI Karaoke File KAR is an extension of the SMF format Only assignable to Sequencer 1 A Jukebox file file extension JBX can be assigned to Sequencer 1 but its name is not shown in this area The JBX icon appears together with the name of the cur rently selected Song in the Jukebox list Note To create or edit a Jukebox file go to the Juke box Edit page see page 160 Song name Displays the name of the Song assigned to the corresponding sequencer f the sequencer 1s already selected black background press the Song name to open the Song Select window f the sequencer is not selected white background first select it then press the Song name to open the Song Select window When the Song Select window appears you can select a single Song or a Jukebox file see Song Select window on page 78 If you select another Song while a Song is in play within the same Sequencer the previous Song stops and the new Song will be selected ready to play To select a Song an alternative is to press the SONG SELECT button on the control panel corresponding to the desired sequencer Press SONG SELECT a second time to select a Song by dialing in its ID number see Selecting
60. marked with the GBL Y symbol through the user s manual Song Play operating mode Write Global Song Play Setup dialog box 165 Q y c Q re Q Q cc 166 SongBook Book List Header The SongBook is an onboard database that allows you to orga nize various musical resources Style Standard MIDI Files KAR files for easy retrieving The SongBook mode overlaps the Style Play and Song Play oper ating modes When you select an entry from the database the Style Play or Song Play mode is automatically selected depend ing on the type of file associated with the entry In addition to helping you organize your shows the SongBook allows you to associate four Pads and up to four STSs to each Standard MIDI File played back in Song Play mode This way it is easy to recall a complete setup for Keyboard tracks and effects for realtime playing over a midifile For more information on using the SongBook see the Quick Guide starting from page 60 Note SongBook entries do not include actual data but only a pointer to a Style in memory or a Standard MIDI File When you copy a SongBook file referenced files are not copied with it Warning If you load a SongBook list from a card SBD file the existing one in memory 1s deleted Save your old SongBook list before loading a new one Book The Book page contains the full database of song entries i e an SBD file While in this page you can s
61. o UJ Brass Hit Brass of Power Brass Section 2 Sax amp Brass zi n A pal n o b gus auo e gt gt gt alal gt gt o w EE E 2 D viliojo oio D 77 AT ATA nl wn n ul A nti wn 3 N wj j N n G o Q NJ UJ 244 Factory data Sounds Bank order s KENN NK per o MEN a REN E A EL CEN Ee pu S KENN ae AE E o EREE pus 57 pue 9 DENIA ECZEME A Aa MESE MON EE EN NN EN EON EC Ea Low EG NN EA MEN NN MEM EN HUN 6 Euro Hit 5 Tight Brass 4 Dyna Brass 1 Trombones Brass amp Sax Brass Pad 6 6 5 Power Brass Brass Expr Dyna Brass 2 Film Brass Brass Slow N Electrik Brass N Fanfare KZN KZN Netherland Hit 6th Hit Movie Brass 6 6 6 6 Jump Brass N Brass Fall Double Brass 5 5 5 3 2 5 3 3 5 2 s 2 2 3 2 5 5 5 3 12 3 2 21 15 22 17 3 20 23 3 2 2 5 26 24 7 2 31 5 63 35 C gt lt P P zh E o lt z lt z Z 53 9 nlc 3 9 C CD als o 3 o c gt 3 oiu a A a A gt a 5 cilc y I E 9 lolo N wi 0 251 95 mel Nn O nln e lue t A Wn e gt w o 0 D w et j aj oo w lt sla ct cia 1 ol o O E sil al wn S Tle 9 ek I Qo ao e a 5 E E E le a 213212 o c nilo ajojo 5 I a ls Sl o5 hd e 15 Ul ala D ct Uu al P o UJ n N dh Bank Sax un nl nial wn n gt 00522
62. or go from the USB port of the computer to the USB port of the Pa500 MIDI Connecting the Pa500 to an external sequencer 233 The Local Off When the Pa500 is connected to an external sequencer we rec ommend you to set the Pa500 in Local Off mode see Local Control On on page 208 to avoid that the notes are simulta neously played by the keyboard and by the MIDI events sent by the external sequencer When the Pa500 is in Local Off the Pa500 keyboard transmits data to the external sequencer but not to the internal sound gen eration The sequencer will receive the notes played on the Pa500 keyboard and send them to the selected track of the song The track will transmit the data to the internal sound generation of the Pa500 Note In order to send data to the Pa500 sound generation the MIDI Thru function must be activated 1n the external sequencer normally active the name may be different according to the type of sequencer For more information refer to the instructions man ual of the sequencer The Sounds The song that is played back by the computer sequencer can select Pa500 Sounds through the MIDI messages Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB bank selection two messages and Pro gram Change Sound selection For a list of Sounds and MIDI values see Sounds Program Change order on page 248 A suggestion for those who program songs on computer Even though it is not essential you usually set the bass
63. re Q im Q cc 118 Style Record mode Event Edit Event Edit Go Meas While the sequencer is not running press this button to open the Go to Measure dialog box When in this dialog box select a target measure and press OK The first event available in the target measure will be selected Insert Press the Insert button in the display to insert a new event at the current shown Position The default values are Type Note Pitch C4 Velocity 100 Length 192 Delete Press the Delete button in the display to delete the event selected in the display Event Edit procedure Here is the general procedure to follow for the event editing 1 Select the Style to edit and press the RECORD button Select the Current Style option to enter recording The main page of the Style Record mode will appear 2 Select the Element Style Element and Chord Var Chord Variation parameters Note For more information on the Style Elements and Chord Variations and the Style structure in general see The Style structure on page 104 3 Press MENU and select the Event Edit section The Event Edit page appears see Event Edit Event Edit on page 117 for more information 4 Press START STOP to listen to the selected Chord Varia tion Press START STOP to stop it Chord Scanning does not work so you will listen the pattern at the original Key Chord 5 Press the Filter tab to select the
64. see Pad Select window on page 77 Note Each Style or SongBook entry can change the Pad assign ment Pads lock icon gt GBL When locked assignments to the pads remain unchanged when selecting a different Style or SongBook entry This lock is reset when turning the instrument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 212 For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 203 Q Jg Q re Q i Q cc 86 Style Play operating mode Split panel Split panel Press the Split tab to select this panel This is where you can set the split point and Chord Recognition mode S pom WWE ay pas Inversion Chard Recogn Fingered 3 A Split Point PERF STS ini Use this parameter to select a different split point A full range piano keyboard is shown in the display divided at the selected split point Upper tracks play on the right of this point while the Lower track plays on the left Keyboard diagram Touch anywhere on the keyboard diagram A message will appear asking you to press the new split point on the keyboard of your Pa500 or to press the EXIT button to close the message with no changes Chord Recognition Mode PERF STS ii This parameter allows you to decide how chords are recognized by the auto accompaniment engine Please note that when the SPLIT LED is turned off the F
65. see Style Select window on page 77 To select an STS use the four SINGLE TOUCH SETTING but tons under the display Backing Sequence grouped tracks area Grouped tracks status indicators These giant indicators show the status of the Backing Sequence grouped tracks They reflect the status of the Kbd Pad and Ch Acc parameters see Chord Acc Kbd Pad above Selected track info area This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track See Selected track info area on page 175 for more information Track volume status area This area is where you can set the volume of each single Key board track and mute unmute tracks Virtual sliders track volume Graphical display of each track s volume See Virtual slider track volume on page 176 for more information Individual track status icons While you can change the status of all Keyboard tracks at once by using the Kbd Pad Backing Sequence track you can also change the status of each single track Press this icon to change the status of the corresponding individual track a Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Track names Under the sliders a label for each track is shown UPPERI 3 Upper tracks LOWER Lower track Backing Sequence Quick Record recording procedure Here is the general procedure to follow for the Backing Sequence Quick Recording 1 Press SEQUENCER to enter the Song mode
66. see Write Style Performance dialog box on page 103 RECORD This button sets the instrument to the Record mode which one depends on the current operating mode TRACK SELECT Depending on the operating mode this button switches between the various track views STYLE PLAY MODE Toggles between Keyboard and Style tracks SONG PLAY MODE Toggles between Keyboard tracks Song tracks 1 8 and Song tracks 9 16 SEQUENCER MODE Toggles between Song tracks 1 8 and Song tracks 9 16 SINGLE TOUCH SETTING buttons These buttons allow to select up to four Single Touch Settings Each of the Styles and SongBook entries includes a maximum of four Single Touch Settings STS to automatically configure Keyboard tracks and effects at the touch of a finger When the SINGLE TOUCH LED is lit an STS is automatically selected when selecting a Style If you keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the buttons of this section the Write STS window appears in the display with the current STS already selected and you can save the current keyboard track settings in a STS see Write Sin gle Touch Setting dialog box on page 102 D PAD 1 4 STOP PERF STS STSS Each Pad corresponds to a dedicated Pad track Use these but tons to trigger up to four sounds or sequences at the same time Press a single PAD button to trigger a single sound or sequence Pres more PAD buttons to trigger several sounds or seq
67. the PAD buttons only stops that sound or pattern Adjusting balance between the Style and the keyboard Balancing between the Keyboard and Style tracks may be useful to gently fade them and adjust their respective volume e While the Style is playing use the BALANCE slider next to the MASTER VOLUME slider to balance between the Keyboard and Style volume BALANCE Eb a a a M S 3 ACC SEQ The Pads Cp Hint You can see which sounds or patterns are associated to the four Pads for the current Style by pressing the Pad tab Hint You can open the Pad Select window to assign a different sound or pattern to the Pads by pressing SHIFT one of the PADs 50 Selecting and playing Styles Adjusting volume of each single track Adjusting volume of each single track You can adjust the volume of each of the Style and Keyboard tracks for example to soften the bass a little or to make the keyboard solo louder 1 Touch a track and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change its volume The average volume of grouped Style tracks Drum Perc Accomp and Bass will not change when choosing a different Style STYLE PLAY eno chord Easy Beat 1 Grand Piano y M i B 8 16 Beat E t Dark Pad l gt iy song b Strings Ens Z pul t Analog Strings 2 BACKING UGI um c c D m m Ww fem Deu ew amp M Pert Stereo Grand In Normal view all Style tracks are seen as three groupe
68. x Picked tase fies wr 0 3 Pikes tase ee 28 28 w 3 16 5 fenere aer 3r s uen swa eer ensure for MECO fr MEME for 29 Guitar Pinch 5 E 0 28 28 28 29 29 2 29 Soft Overdrive Guitar 2 25 2 5 5 5 5 5 25 2 5 5 95 23 5 9 5 5 35 5 9 35 5 5 35 35 5 5 5 35 5 5 35 35 NI NI N N N NI N N N N N N N N NI NI N N NI N N N N NI NI N N N N NI N NI N N NI N N NI N NI NI NI N N N N N NI NINI NI NINI NI NIN Factory data 2571 Sounds Program Change order wr s 3 meomesm Bes wr 5 3 mme ee E xm 3 3 eese fess Lx w 3x jememe mh wr 5 x j w me em wr e x eoe ites wr m x press es xn 3s 3 famines Bes wn 9 5 fese CIS EC Lx 1 9 wake em IC wr Wes em IC wr 3 5 wakRde Es E wr 4 eee ites xr s 5 wwe m a s eve em Ca 7 mee es wr s jemems ee wr s 5 jmhmsm ee x 5 5 ponernos Bass wr n 9 Memes m wr u eme es wr u 9 jemmer ee wr w EEC es E wr 5 famines ee xm 4 jvemtee srnosevoe x eos sings sims on Y xm 3 4 stero st
69. 01 0068 End Tick 005 01 000 Bottom Note C 1 Top Note G9 After setting the various parameters press Execute Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected Drum Acc5 Selected track E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Vari ation for editing Resolution This parameter sets the quantization after recording For exam ple when you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 division mp p D 0 32 4 4 Grid resolution in musical values A b f char acter added after the value means swing quanti zation A 3 means triplet Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to quantize If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to quantize If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track Q Jg c o L Q Q cc 120 Style Record mode Style Edit Transpose Note These parameters are available only when a Drum or Percus sion track is selected Execute Press this button to execute the op
70. 6 Per ie 6 MO E p E e J J V V v V Factory data 249 Sounds Program Change order CCOO CC32 121 3 Harmonica Expr 1 121 Harmonica Expr 2 Fisa Tango 7 Accordion Accordion oon E E Accordion Accordion Accordion E A Fa Accordion mm NN NE NER IE E MEE Accordion Accordion Accordion Accordion Accordion Accordion Accordion Guitar o NM Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar o MA Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar Guitar md NIN N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NIN N N EE D a S Slr Sl rl S S fe D N 5 A A A A A A A A R ale ame Joe a EE 1 Se a NO ese cal C4 a C o lalgalolalolala o z P P 9oo loloil o o gt D A IO gs 31013 5 5 n go o Alo gt j O ey z wW o z2ig uwi9 o e Ol o CD n C 00 oa lt i Uu B 5j ul un 00 u 16 O C o lt 250 Factory d
71. Controls Sound Expression 124 Style Element Track Controls Keyboard Range 125 Style Element Track Controls Noise Guitar 125 Style Element Chord Table Chord Table 126 Style Track Controls Type Trigger Tension 126 Import Import SMF oa cudod ondaa dan Y ovt enu rdc ace 127 EXO GME aioe ddp dra II deat d de od ae 128 Ace ment pianos rosana al 128 Write Style dialog DOX 24 cer RR RR oros 129 Copy Kev Chord dialog DOX seecucpyrssraances sobria 129 Copy Sounds dialog DOX uer ehxres sanas ER tet 130 Copy Expression dialog DOX ciere pus ar recorre 130 Copy Key Range dialog DOX lt s cseaucssenssqesonbencads 130 Copy Chord Table dialog box iiie ecd rrr ten 130 Overdub Step Recording window Lus 131 Pad Record mode 132 The Pad siU e eco cir S ee ee RE PEE EROR Ere pens 152 Entering the Pad Record mode orcos bine en eases 152 Exit by saving or deleting changes iecit sewn ee eases 153 Listening to the Pad while in Record Edit mode 133 Main page Record Jc ess cicada cada 648 Rte qoo ates ae 133 Main page Guitar Mode i sr dapi rtp e eed 136 Pad Record procedure auesusaue dard edid RR a do kiasi 137 POIDS tra 138 Edit page s pet runir TC 138 Event Edit EveDt BOE esos 138 Event EO PEE oss sede tpe ria pede tU a ea d 139 Pad Edit Quanti asa ebrii o Oa dai 139 Pad Edit DE3HSDOSS ooa rather auta qa creia adr iid 139 Pad Edit AA
72. Cut Measure Delete All from Selected Delete All Styles Perfs from Selected Delete All Style Elements from Selected Delete All Chords from Selected Delete All Tempos from Selected Insert Measure Use this command to insert an empty measure starting from the current measure All Chord Acc events contained in the current measure will be moved to the following measure The event at the Mxxx xx 000 position 1 e exactly at the beginning of the measure like a Time Signature or Style change will not be moved Cut Measure Use this command to delete the current measure All Chord Acc event contained in the following measures will be moved one measure back Delete All from Selected Use this command to delete events of all types starting from the current position Note All events on the very first tick M001 01 000 like Perf Style Tempo Chord Style Element selection cannot be deleted Delete All Styles Perfs from Selected Delete All Styles Elements from Selected Delete All Chords from Selected Delete All Tempos from Selected Select one of these commands to delete all events of the corre sponding type starting from the current position to the end of the Song To delete all events of the same type from the whole Song go back to the M001 01 000 position and select one of these commands Note All events on the very first tick M001 01 000 like Perf Style Tempo Chord Style Element selection cannot be delete
73. E Q BALANCE While in Style Play and Song Play mode this slider balances the volume of the Keyboard tracks against the Style Accompani ment Pad and Song tracks This is a relative control whose effective maximum value is determined by the MASTER VOL UME slider position When moved a magnified version of the virtual slider appears in the display for more accurate positioning Note This does not work in Sequencer mode ASSIGNABLE SLIDER gt GBLS This is a freely assignable slider see Controllers Pedal Switch Slider on page 206 for information on how to assign it a func tion By default it controls Upper VDF Cutoff filter brilliance for the Upper tracks You can use this slider to change the volume of several tracks at once While in Style Play or Sequencer mode select one of the Upper tracks or one of the separate Style or Song tracks in the display then keep the SHIFT button pressed and move this slider to proportionally change the volume of all similar tracks Note This does not work in Song Play mode on the Song tracks but still work on the keyboard tracks Front panel 11 Introduction TEMPO VALUE GENERAL LCD CONTRAST e ce MODE STYLE PLAY SONG PLAY SEQUENCER SOUND GLOBAL MEDIA T o o o o 7 o o e DEMO TECHNOLOGY E TOUCH ed Ic PIANO E PIANO L3 ORGAN GUITAR STRINGS amp VOC TRUMPET BRASS SAX m El LJ m m DK PERFORMANCE SOUND SELEC
74. ELE Styule Easy Beat 1 Element n Rec Length 4 Tempo J 94 Chord Yar CY CY Length 4 Meter 4 4 Resolution e High Metro gt off Sounds area Cue area Sounds area This area lets you see Sounds and octave transposition for the eight Style tracks Octave transpose icon Sound bank s icon Octave transpose icon Non editable This indicator shows the track s octave transposi tion Tracks will be recorded with the selected octave transposi tion To change this value use the UPPER OCTAVE buttons or go to the Mixer Tuning Tuning edit page in the Style Play mode see page 89 Save this value to the Style Performance Sound bank s icon gt STYLE This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to Touch an icon a first time to select the corresponding track detailed information are shown on the Selected Track Info area see the Record 1 page above Touch it a second time to open the Sound Select window Note These Sounds can be replaced by Sounds selected by a Perfor mance provided the Original Style Sounds parameter is left unchecked in Style Play mode see page 83 Cue area Cue mode for Style element STYLE This parameter lets you decide how the current Style Element will enter after it has been selected This setting is only available for the Fill 1 2 3 Style Elements Immediate first measure The Style Element enters immediately and begins from the fir
75. EQ Gain Mixer Tuning EQ Gain In this page you can set the three band equalization EQ for each individual track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to the Song tracks and vice versa SONG PLAY SE01 Mixer Tuning LCY Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 LOWER UPPERS UPPERS lIPPERI MO em SONG PLAY SE01 Hixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 ae e e e e Tal Taz Tas Tas THe Tar Tas SONG PLAY SE01 Hixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano B Piano L 121 885 888 Ea Ea III OI E rus I Tis Til Ti I Ta TAS EG Control Note The EQ is different for Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 Hint Track EQ can be memorized in the general preferences for the Song Play mode they are named Song Play Global Setup This will help adapting the Pa500 s sound to personal taste for any MIDIfile you will ever play Need a lighter Bass track Save the right equalization and the Bass will stay light with all the subse quent Songs Hi High Gain PERF STS GBL 9 This parameter lets you adjust the high frequencies equalization on each individual track This is a shelving curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Mid Middle Gain MPERF STS gt GBLS 9 This parameter lets you adjust the middle frequencies equaliza tion on each individual track This is a bell curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Q Jg c Q re Q Q cc
76. Easy Mode Easy Mode allows you to play Styles and Songs with a simple user interface free from the many advanced parameters that you will want to learn at a later date Easy Mode is turned on by default when you first buy the instrument If it isn t for some reason or want to return there after you have turned if off please follow the steps below Turning the Easy Mode on Touch the little rectangle on the top right corner of the display to open the page menu STYLE PLAY UE eq Easy Beat 1 Grand Piano M o E 8 16 Beat TED E Dark Pad Meter 4 4 L 5 m as 1 IB els _ p Strings Ens 2 GM E 1 J M il oTe Ej fer oere oron ren en EACKIHE ug w t Perf Ste Gra no chord B 127 127 127 l gt al ACCOMP BASS t LOWER UPPERS UPPER Molume The page menu Easy Mode Touch the Easy Mode menu item to make the checkmark Easy Mode appear Eso Mode At this point the Easy Mode has been activated and the ele ments in the display appear less cluttered t Grand Piano EX MT y cT 5 m la t Strings Ens 2 G Ri t Analog Strings ERCEIHO Split STS 1 STS 3 Oetaye Piano 515 2 Electric Guitar STS d Organ Distortion Gtr E l Perf Stereo Grand c K Ek gor amas a i a C4 Turning the Easy Mode off The instrument will stay in this mode even after having been turned off Repeat the above operation when you want t
77. Guitar page has been added to the Style Record gt Track Controls section STYLE REC SE Track Controls E Yar 1 Lw Trk cc3 PAcousticPiano bI EPiano 121 888 888 DRUM FERE BASS RX Noise gt STYLE Use these controls to adjust the volume of RX Noises in the cor responding tracks This control applies to all types of tracks provided the Sound includes RX Noises Humanize GTR gt STYLE Use these controls to apply a random value to the position velocity and length of notes of Guitar tracks see Track Type on page 126 This control has no effect on other types of track Q Jg c Q L Q Q cc 126 Style Record mode Style Element Chord Table Chord Table Style Element Chord Table Chord Table This is the page where you can assign a Chord Variation to each of the most important recognized chord When a chord is recog nized the assigned Chord Variation will be automatically selected by the arranger to play the accompaniment STYLE REC SE Chord Table E Yarl LCY Chord Table Major ni minar ejer dim ejer 5 p cvz Maj Jon s crz Maj b5 p cvz sus4 P evz susz k cv mins b evi minz e evi min7bS cvi minaj gt cv2 T Ly cvz b5 y cvz dim e evi dimMaj t cv aug OGE aug k cv augMaj v e c 2 Nos cv2 Maj sd b cv2 Tsuga b cv2 Noas y cvz When in this page press the corresponding button on the con tr
78. MIOS with rests press the Next M button in the display While in the main page of the Sequencer mode you may 4 To change the step value use the Step Time parameters press the P M PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER Insert a note rest or chord at the current position To insert a single note just play it on the keyboard The inserted note length will match the step length You may 1 section to listen to the Song or select the Save Song com mand from the page menu to save the Song to a card see Save Song window on page 198 change the velocity and relative duration of the note by editing the Velocity and Duration parameters See Veloc ity and Duration on page 179 Chords and second voices With Pa500 you are not obliged to insert single notes in a track There are several ways to insert chords and double voices For more information see Chords and second voices in Step Record mode on page 115 of the Style Record mode chapter To insert a rest just press the Rest button in the display Its length will match the step value To tie the note to be inserted to the previous one press the Tie button in the display A note will be inserted tied to the Record mode Backing Sequence Quick Record page Backing Sequence Quick Record mode allows you to quickly record your live performance with the Styles To make things easier just two grouped tracks are provided Kbd Pad Keyboard a
79. Most of what applies to Style recording also applies to Pad recording There are two different categories of Pads Hit Pads While they are mostly used as non transpos Pad ing events they can also be transposing notes or chords CV1 Basically they are single note Pad Track or single chord Sequences see below CV2 e Sequence Pads ie com CV3 plex single track patterns that can be transposed by CVA playing different chords on the keyboard exactly as a CV5 Style track They are roughly equivalent to single element CV6 single track multi chord variation Styles see illustration Each Pad is made up of up to six smaller units called Chord Variations CV Each Chord Variation is made of a single track the Pad track Exactly as with the Styles when playing a chord in the chord rec ognition area the corresponding Chord Variation is recalled Recognized chords are associated to a Chord Variation by means of the Chord Variation Table Each Pad contains a Chord Varia tion Table As with the Styles the Note Transposition Tables NTT applies to the Pads The same differences between the different types of tracks applies see Track Type on page 143 What to record Recording a Pad is a matter of recording a single track inside a series of Chord Variations inside the Pad itself You don t need to record all Chord Variations It is often only needed to record just a Chord Var
80. O Note You can also open the Sound Select window by pressing one Set of banks 1 8 corresponds to The triangle means the top row of Factory Sounds on The currently the control panel selected Sound ou can touch this y Target track for f Aim to open a 9 16 to the lower row User are also appears on a of the buttons in the Galccbwidaw Sound s name the User Sounds the page header sound PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT section pro vided the LED on the sol ND SELECT Grand Piano Trk Upper 1 SOUND SELECT button is Bank 148 Bank 9 16 J _se_ on This will let you jump i TETEE E crand Piano gm St directly to the desired Strings Sound bank amp Vocal Grand Piano Sound bank icon PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT EPIANO ACCORDION ORGAN GUITAR The selected Sound is high lighted Press a Sound s name to select it Press one of the side tabs to select a different Sound bank Press one of the lower tabs to A Previous and Next Page pair of select a different Sound page button may appear in this area when more than five pages are available 4 Select a Sound from the Sound Select window STYLE PLAY nn chard A ER A at Easy Beat 1 l Classic Piano ed T no ug J i IM 1 MUTE bA The Sound Select window closes P P P nalog Strings 2 Usi and the main screen appears SOUND SELECT Classic Piano Trk Upper 1 E Grand Piano E Grand Piano GM E Piano 121 803 088 121 000 002
81. Parallel No Transpose The chord is not modified and is moved to the new key unchanged The pattern plays exactly the recorded notes and is moved to the new key as is This is the standard setting of Intro 1 and Ending in Korg s original Styles where a chord pro gression is usually recorded and should remain unchanged in any key Fixed Chord This table moves as few notes as possible making legato lines and chord changes more natural It is ideally suited to chord tracks strings piano etc Contrary to the Parallel mode the pro grammed chord is not transposed according to the Wrap Around parameter but always stays around its original position looking for common notes between the chords Fixed No Transpose The programmed notes can only be transposed by the Master Transpose They are never trans posed when chords are changed Delete Note button Use this command to delete a single note or a single percussive instrument from a track For example to delete a snare keep the D2 note corresponding to the snare pressed 1 Press the Delete Note button and keep it pressed 2 Press START STOP to start the Pad 3 When you reach the passage containing the note to be deleted play the note on the keyboard Keep it pressed up to the last note to be deleted 4 When finished release the Delete button and the note to be deleted and press START STOP again to stop the Pad Note If the note is at the beginning of t
82. Performances and STSs are linked together 81 Main pase Normal VIEW us au vedi sche sius wand cedeedtec 81 SIVE Tricks WCW ioe cc erre edv EP 83 Vobis pa o ooo d avoir iaa ia 84 SIS Nantes Panel 2uusuod erinra penti Dco RC aod act hane d 85 sub cl Dale cepas arborea dao pis pi art 85 Pid Panel AA 85 SEP a e nico re T 86 ln E E iaa E ETT 86 Edit page mute a earder ENRERE E A A N ENG 86 2 Table of Contents Mixer Tuning Von Praia RER EP OS 87 Mixer Tuning EX Send 22 crausanacseaeeee saw eeacesess 88 Mixer Tuning FO Gain soc ew ieRRP FS C to Ye ERO EP ES 88 Mixer Tuning EO Control escriure 89 Mixer Tuning TUNDE 25 eie hciebcint hii Quand dino 9 98 4763 dr 89 Mixer Tuning SuD Scal ereer aep DRE SEO TERR esa 90 PRSC TX Seleti Pr 91 O A eee naa ee e da 92 Track Controls Mode ca dera iaa bl ive i Pd 92 Track Controls Drum Volume 2522 ce esc Ee aberrare 95 Track Controls Easy Edit sac cus tua errar 94 Keyboard Ensemble Keyboard Control 95 Keyboard Ensemble Key Velocity Range 95 Keyboard Ensemble Ensemble 25er dde ekio zb pass 96 Style Controls Drum Fill e ead sut ER Dr e ansete 97 Style Controls Keyboard Range On Off Wrap Around 97 Pad WIDE Pad scuctawceqtsqureutaqo pidas bed aU MM 98 Pad Switch Assignable Switch o ooooooommommo o 98 Preferences Style Piclerences e ooo ee ra Ri EC EE IERI 99 Preterences Style Play Setup lt osirapedarpa
83. Q im Q cc 144 Pad Record mode Import Import SMF Import Import SMF The Import SMF function allows you to import MIDI data from a Standard MIDI File SMF created on your preferred external sequencer and transform them in a Chord Variation PAD REC Import OF Import SMF From Song sna song L Initialize e o Expo When programming a Chord Variation on the external sequencer please assign the Pad track to the MIDI channel 10 Note Only SMF in format 0 can be loaded From Song This is the name of the Standard MIDI File to be loaded Press the Select button to open the file selector and select an SMF file Select Press this button to open the file selector and load the SMF Initialize Check this parameter if you want all Pad settings i e Key Chord Chord Table Sound are reset when loading the SMF Hint It is a good idea to check this parameter when importing the first Chord Variation of the Pad and uncheck 1t when importing the following Chord Variations To CV Use this parameter to select a target Chord Variation Execute After setting all parameters in this page press this button to import the Standard MIDI File into the target Chord Variation Export SMF The Export SMF function allows you to export a Chord Varia tion as a Standard MIDI File SMF and edit it on your pre ferred external sequencer PAD REC Export SMF Lw Export SHF To Song v1
84. REC Event Edit e Filter L Note Fx Noise L Pitch Bend L Control _ Tempo Meter Filter Turn On the filter for all event types you do not wish to see in the Event Edit page Note Some of the events are ghosted and non editable since the corresponding events are not editable in a Pad This is very similar to the Style Record s Event Edit Filter page See Event Edit Filter on page 119 for more information on the filter page Pad Edit Quantize The quantize function may be used to correct any timing mis take after recording or to give the pattern a groovy feeling PAD REC Pad Edit Lw Quantize Cv p evt Resolution Start Tick 01 01 0068 End Tick 43 41 4808 Bottom Mote C 1 Top Note G9 After setting the various parameters press Execute CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing Resolution This parameter sets the quantization after recording Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to quantize Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to quantize Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Pad Record mode Event Edit Filter 139 Pad Edit Transpose In this page you can transpose the selected track s Note After transposing please don t forget to readjust th
85. SEQUENCER BALANCE slider the Lyrics shown in the display may change see Lyrics Markers Balance Link on page 163 10 Front panel Front panel m STANDBY ON MASTER BALANCE eit 1 ME E TouchView kg o A dbi BASS SEQ STYLE SELECT dis TO us O ER 8 16 BEAT POP BALLAD O m m 5 JAZ RECORD TRACK SELECT 1 LATIN m E m mi USER __ c ORE c Eon iar TOUCH STR ys BALANCE D STOP D ONG SELECT lt lt gt Og i INTRO ENDING inum FILL START STOP 2 3 COUNTIN L E e 2 S BREAK E o o o o atit pops zm miii This joystick triggers different functions depending on the direction it is moved towards JOYSTICK X Move the joystick towards the left to lower the pitch or towards the right to raise it This is also called Pitch Bend Y Move the joystick forward to trigger Modulation Y Move the joystick backward to trigger the func tion assigned in Sound mode MASTER VOLUME This slider controls the overall volume of the instrument both of the internal speakers the LIMONO and RIGHT audio out puts and the HEADPHONES output This slider does not control the signal entering the AUDIO INPUTS 1 and 2 Warning At the maximum level with rich sounding Songs Styles or Sounds the internal speakers of Pa500 might distort during sig nal peaks Should this happen lower the Master Volume a little KORG g m Agog ogo
86. Sequencer mode the Pa500 is slaved to an exter nal device connected to its MIDI IN port The Start Stop and Play Stop commands as well as the metronome tempo cannot be selected from the control panel of the Pa500 Use the external device to set the tempo and start or stop the sequencer or arranger Ext USB As the above but referred to the USB port See Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver on page 278 for information on how to configure your computer for MIDI Over USB communica tion Local Control On The Local parameter turns the keyboard on or off Note The Local parameter is automatically reactivated each time you turn the instrument on On When you play the keyboard MIDI data is sent to the internal sound generator If tracks are assigned to a MIDI OUT channel data is also sent to the MIDI OUT or USB port Off The keyboard is connected to the MIDI OUT but cannot play the internal sound generator This is very useful when working with an external sequencer to send notes and various MIDI mes sages from the integrated keyboard and control lers to the external sequencer and then let the sequencer send them back to the sound genera tor without overlapping See the MIDI chapter MIDI MIDI In Control This page lets you program general parameters for the MIDI IN like the Chord Recognition channel Hidi In Controls 2 Midi In Octave Transpose e Midi In Mute Unmute Chord 1 Midi Channel Upper
87. Song Play Setup by choosing the Write Global Song Play Setup command from the page menu see page 164 FX A D MPERF STS GBL Effects assigned to the corresponding effect processors Usually A and C are reverbs while B and D are modulating effects cho rus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD FX Amount PERF STS GBL 9 Volume of the effect that is added to the dry uneffected signal B to A Dto C PERF STS GBL Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect or of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect Mod Track Modulating Track PERF GBL Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modulate an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller or a Song track Effects in Song Play mode Pa500 is equipped with four effect processors or DSPs Digital Signal Processors to process MIDI tracks In Song Play mode you can have two or four effects at the same time depending on the midifile you are reading Effects A and B are usually reserved to both sequencers and Pads while effects C and D are usually reserved to Keyboard tracks Depending on the status of the Seq 2 FX Mode parameter each effect pair could be reserved to a different Sequencer see page 163 You can also create Songs that make use of all four effects in Sequencer mode A Song creat
88. Variation from Press the Select button to open the Pad Select window and select the source Pad From CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the source Chord Variation All All Chord Variations i e the whole Pad You can t change the target that is automatically set to All CV1 CV6 Single Chord Variation To CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select a target Chord Variation inside the current Pad CV1 CV6 Target Chord Variation Automatically set to All if the From CV parameter is also set to All Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Pad Track Controls Sound Expression In this page you can assign a Sound to the Pad track adjust its Volume CC 07 and Expression CC 11 values and set vari ous other parameters like the Keyboard Range Track Type Trigger Mode Tension and Wrap Around PAD REC Track Controls Pad Track t Standard Kit G U E Drum amp Parc 128 888 388 Pad Type Keyboard Range TrackType Lp one Shot Expression Trigger Mode Tension SG Ly Jorr 168 Ez Noise Humanize Sound Bank PAD Sound assigned to the Pad track Pad Type PAD Use this parameter to decide if the Pad will play once or if it will loop Note While in Pad Record mode the pattern is always played back in loop even if this parameter is set to One Shot One Shot When you press one of the PAD buttons the cor responding Pad is only played once Th
89. When an arrow appears next to a parameter name press it to open a pop up menu Select any of the available options or any where else on the screen to make the menu disappear TR di AAA PLAY Pad Assign Switch Assignable Function l Dff FX A Mute Ritardando Fx B Mute pem pij YS Lip Fx D Mute Eneo mme ECT EEC Checkboxes This kind of parameters are on off switches Press them to change their status Quarter Ta Numeric fields When a numeric value can be edited press it a second time to open the Numeric Keypad SOUND Basic L ond Offset B GrandPiano_L High ROM Pitch Delay Yelocity Swi Octave a Transpose E Velocity M Sample Sw Low Hi As an alternative touch a numeric field and keep it held Then move your fingers up or right to increase the value or move it down or left to decrease it This also includes the Tempo numeric field in the main page of the Style Play Song Play and Sequencer modes Alphabetic fields When a textual option is underlined press it a second time to open a list of options Editable names When the Ti Text Edit button appears next to a name press it to open the Text Edit window and edit the name iie Ici rei cC Meter Info EJ e IJ IYI ojo o aaa HIBIBIBIBIEITIEBIBIE a sw Luc Tempo From EM 7 27 Interface basics The TouchView graphical user interface Lists and scrollbars Files on storage media as well
90. Y x Goblins GM Echo Drops GM Gtr FretNoise GM Breath Noise GM Seashore GM Bird Tweet GM 121 Ac Bass String Helicopter GM 126 Gun Shot GM 127 Echo Bell Echo Pan 102 102 Nn Nn z gt D us 3 o y gt a a 3 3 gt lt S O D v D T 3 m G D zZ Q O g Z met d A ot d ot NI NI NI N NM N olo ul A oOo wl Nh l wl Nn 247 Factory data Sounds Bank order Me eee Guitar Cut Noise a p Y 32 Thunder 122 Wind 122 Stream 4 122 ae Perf Door Creak Scratch ANNE Wind Chime Car Engine E NEN Car Pass 125 Car Crash MENA 125 Nm aw MON m EM p za EG 123 123 124 124 124 124 124 125 Horse Gallop Bird Tweet 2 Telephone 2 Car Stop Siren 125 Train 125 Jet Plane 125 Screaming 126 Punch 126 Heart Beat 126 Starship Burst Noise Laughing Footsteps Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Ice Rain GM 105 55 126 Jaw Harp Hit in India un ct D 2 E 3 _ N N N J w N 121 64 0 127 Uo y 3 Y 5 b x 248 Factory data Sounds Program Change order Sounds Program Change order The following table lists all Pa500 Factory Sounds in order of Bank Select Program Change number Legend The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely select the Sounds CC00 Control Change 0 or Bank Select MSB CC32 Control Change 32 or Bank Select LSB PC Program Change Bank Sound Performanc
91. a Song by its ID num ber on page 79 SEQUENCER 1 Oo gt On L Meter This parameter only appears when a Standard MIDI File or Karaoke file has been selected Current Song Time Signature Measure number This parameter only appears when a Standard MIDI File or Karaoke file has been selected Current measure number Tempo This parameter only appears when a Standard MIDI File or Karaoke file has been selected Metronome tempo Select this parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the tempo As an alternative you don t need to select this parameter just keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the tempo of the selected sequencer Hint While in the main page you can have the Tempo parameter of Sequencer 2 on focus while Sequencer 1 is selected In this situ ation you can use the DIAL to change Tempo for Sequencer 2 and SHIFT DIAL to change Tempo for Sequencer 1 Style area Currently selected Style You can select a Style while playing Songs to have it ready when switching to Style Play mode Also this lets you change the Pad and STS settings since Pads and STSs are recalled by a Style 149 Song Play operating mode Main page Press the Style name to open the Style Select window As an alternative use the STYLE SELECT section on the control panel sae Easy Beat 1 Selected Style Performance STS area This is where the Performance or STS name is show
92. after the selected folder For example a folder named Dummy will generate a Dummy txt file If a file with the same name already exists in the target it will be overwritten without waiting for any confirmation A file con taining the list of all valid files contained into the root of the card will generate a Root txt file The list will include the progressive number assigned to each Song file names the total number of files in the list For the correct display and printing of the list on a personal com puter use a fixed size 1 e non proportional character in your text editor Show Song Number Check this option to make the Song s progressive ID number appear in the list next to each Song Show Song Extension Check this option to make the file extension mid kar jbx appear in the list at the end of each Song s name Q Jg c Q re Q im Q cc 80 Selecting elements Song Select window Create New Folder This command lets you create a new generic folder in the root of any device or inside any other generic folder You can t create a SET folder with this command since this type of folder is reserved to the Save operations and can be created with the New SET button in any Save page Create New Folder T NEWNAME By pressing the Ti Text Edit button you can open the Text Edit window Enter the name then press OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window Re
93. as other kinds of data are shown as lists Use the scrollbar to scroll the list content Mame cue C show MyShow SET 15 46 07 15 42 15 46 47 15 43 15 06 07 18 30 Scrollbar KORG USER gt CARD Open Clase E i Keep the SHIFT button pressed while touching one of the arrows to scroll to the next or previous alpha numeric section Sliders To change a slider s position select it then use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change its position As an alternative touch a slider with your fingers and keep it held Then move it up or down to change its position volume Knobs To change a knob s position select it then use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change its position As an alternative touch a knob with your finger and keep it held Then move your fingers up or right to rotate it clockwise or move it down or left to rotate the knob counter clockwise Icons Various icons help identifying the type of a file a Song a folder S i v O Le ES i 28 Interface basics Operative modes Operative modes Pa500 pages are divided into various operating modes Each mode is accessed by pressing the corresponding button in the MODE section on the control panel Three special modes Global Media and SongBook overlap the current operating mode that remains active in the background The SongBook mode can recall the Style Play or Song Play modes
94. associated with the entry Artist gt SB Name of the artist of the song associated with the entry Key Info SB Original key of the entry The first field is the key name the sec ond one is the mode major or minor Tempo SB Basic tempo of the Style or starting tempo of the Standard MIDI File associated with the entry This may change if a Tempo Change event is included with the associated resource Note Even if you can edit this value the starting value of a Stan dard MIDI Files is always considered and overrides this value Meter Info gt SB Basic meter of the Style or starting meter of the Standard MIDI File associated with the entry This may change if a Meter Change event is included with the associated resource M Transp Master Transpose gt SB Master Transpose When the entry is selected the Master Trans pose for the whole instrument is automatically changed unless the Master Transpose is locked Note The Master Transpose value saved with the SongBook entry overrides any Master Transpose setting contained in the referenced Song Resource Area Write Current Resource When checked a reference to the selected resource is saved with the entry when pressing Write Saved resources are the latest selected Style this also saves the associated Pads and STSs e the SMF or KAR file assigned to Sequencer 1 and shown on the right of this parameter Pads and STSs associated to the latest selec
95. can enable disable the Groove Quantize also by selecting the Seq 1 Groove Quantize Enable command from the page menu Note Start Enables disables quantization of the Note On event i e begin ning of the note Note Duration Enables disables quantization of the Note Off event i e the length of the note Resolution Coarse quantize grid resolution This parameter is the main quantization value to be varied with the Acc Swing and Win dow values 0 32 1 4 Grid resolution in musical values a 3 after the value means triplet For example when you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 division miii Accuracy Accuracy percentage of quantize For example if Acc 50 and the note is 20 tics away from the coarse grid it is moved to the grid of only 10 tics 0 No accuracy The quantize is not executed 100 Maximum accuracy The note is moved exactly at the grid position Swing Asymmetry of quantization Grid axis are moved to the nearest grid axis 0 Even numbered axis are totally moved over the previous odd numbered axis 50 Axis are perfectly equidistant Q Jg c Q L Q Q cc 162 Song Play operating mode Preferences Track Setting 100 Even numbered axis are totally moved over the following odd numbered axis Swng 50 Swng 25 Swng 75 Window Area of quantize
96. cc eee eee 17 Welcome oir nr RR RR EE 19 AL 5 2 sae nae gag wae terream Oa dang dag os 19 Easy MOCe A eaet us 19 rani M 20 Whats tthe DON asa cuneis qae ue hp Ra pEPIE PP ES 20 ADODCIDIS MIAN sas one cue tos corres tte dan 20 Making a backup of the original data rs 21 Loading th Operating Systemi se soso rosana arms 21 Loading the Musical Resources ooooooommmmmo o 21 Start UD issus eR eT Rune ERR GRECE RR a ee Rue 22 Connecting the AC power adapter 22 ecccasawseee aan 22 Turning the instrument on and off vca0eayeaawres hes 22 Controlling the VOM s vane sca ee eue cea Ep ee Eod 22 The Sequencers BALANCE Slider roster EE RR ES rds 22 leia rol o Um dae eas e MS 22 Audo QulpulS os sotaomepE rocosa does 22 Audo NPU cas eset titta cronos adore pus 23 MIDI GOBPECLIONS cavar a 23 Dapper Ped oucegostesaeum euadere abad aspere uis 23 1B r0 M Qmm 23 The musicstand ca eccacaae xe ES incur d Te ree 23 Glossary of Terms sees 24 vom M 24 c A o cs aaeKescase ae oeen am 24 PAG 9 24 Xon caEic M 24 PERIONIDOBCE soto E oras 25 SEQUE vacance dpud E Aaa voa 25 The LOGOdecoder rreriererriirkespi Te arp REC 25 Interface basics oooooooooommmmmommmmmm o 26 The TouchView graphical user interface 26 Operativa Modos gt rachas d aeos e ondaa PN 28 Selected highlighted Item
97. check the connecions to your amp ormier 2 ls the MASTER VOLUME sider ofthe Pas set to a postion other than 0 2 Lowest note are not played When the SPLIT LED is lit up the keyboard will be divided into the Lower part low notes 33 below the split point and the Upper part high notes above the split point Is the Lower track muted Unmute it Wrong sounds Do the USER banks contain modified data Load the appropriate data for the Song or the Style 215 you wish to playback Has one of the USER Drum Kits been modified Load the appropriate Drum Kits 215 Have the Styles or Performances been modified Load the appropriate data Styles or Perfor 215 mances Sound does not stop Make sure that the damper switch polarity parameter is set correctly N eo 7 The selected Style or Song cannot Make sure that the Clock parameter is set to Internal If you are using the MIDI Clock of 208 start another device you must set the MIDI Clock parameter to MIDI or USB depending on the port the Pa500 is hooked to the other device through and make sure that the external device trans mits MIDI Clock data Does not respond to MIDI mes Make sure that all MIDI or USB cables are connected correctly 230 sees Make sure that the external device is transmitting through MIDI channels enabled to receive in 209 the Pa500 Make sure that the MIDI IN Filters of the Pa500 do not prevent the reception of messages Percussive instruments are not M
98. compres sion must be turned on or off during the backup Mew Marne Compression Press the T Text Edit button to open the Text Edit win dow Enter the name and confirm by pressing OK We suggest you check Compression to save space on the backup device However with compression turned on the operation will last longer Press OK to start the backup When finished save the card in a safe place Full Resources Restore This command restores the backup of the internal Factory and User data created with the Full Resources Backup command Warning Don t play the keyboard while restoring data and stay in the Media mode Wait until the Wait message disappears 1 Insert the card containing the backup to be restored into the card drive Select the Full Resources Restore command then press Execute The source device appears Browse through the files to find the backup file When the backup file BKP file is in the display select it and press the Restore command When done we suggest to turn the instrument off then on again OS Version Number This line shows the installed Operating System version A newer version may be available on www korgpa com Media edit mode 2925 Preferences Preferences This page includes various protect options Global Hedia Preferences L Global Protect Factory Style and Pad Protect 42 Factory Sound Protect L Hide Unknown Fil
99. current MIDI Setup is also shown in the Global mode 4 Select the Master Keyboard MIDI Setup Note Settings may change when new Global data is loaded from a card To protect settings from loading use the Global Protect function see Global Protect on page 225 5 To save the assigned MIDI Setup for the selected operative mode into the Global select the Write Global Style Setup the Write Global Song Play Setup the Write Global Seq Setup or the Write Global Global Setup command from the page menu o If needed press one of the buttons in the MODE section to go to the desired operative mode Connecting the Pa500 to a MIDI accordion There are various types of MIDI accordions each one requiring different MIDI settings Pa500 is provided with a series of Accordion MIDI Setups each one suitable for a different MIDI accordion see page 207 Connection and settings To connect the accordion to the Pa500 follow this procedure Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the accordion to the MIDI IN connector of the Pa500 Jed Select the MIDI Setup parameter You can do this by going to the MIDI MIDI Setup General Controls page of the Global mode or in the dedicated page of the Style Play Song Play or Sequencer mode see Midi Setup on page 100 and Midi Setup on page 162 Note A different MIDI Setup may be selected for the Style Play Song Play and Sequencer modes The
100. each of the Keyboard tracks with a single button press allowing for wide variation in sounds during a perfor mance Four STS Single Touch Settings can be saved with each Style or SongBook entry Ensemble By turning the Ensemble feature on a single note played on one of the Keyboard tracks will be embellished by additional notes to create a complete chord voicing The Ensemble knows which notes to add by looking at the chord that the Style is playing In addition the Ensemble parameters allow you to select the type of voicing that will be added from a simple one note harmony to a full Brass section even a marimba style trill Performance The Performance is the most encompassing setting on the Pa500 a single setting that can remember a Style with all the appro priate sounds the Keyboard tracks with all the appropriate sounds and all their Single Touch Settings Tempo transposi tion etc A Performance can be stored in one of the Perfor mance Banks or it can be saved in a database format using the SongBook function Sequencer The Sequencer acts as a recorder so you can capture and play back your performances The Pa500 sequencer can function in different modes In the Backing Sequence mode each Style ele ment and each Real Time Keyboard and Pads element can be recorded on a separate track in a single pass This can be a big help in getting a song recorded quickly The sequencer can also beh
101. event at the current position Hint To delete all events starting from the current position select the Delete All from Selected command from the page menu see below Soft transport buttons Event Previous or Next Event Use these buttons to move to the previous or next recorded event Step Previous or Next Step Use these buttons to go to the previous or next step 1 8 or 192 ticks If an event 1s located before the previous or next step the locator stops on that event For example if you are positioned on M001 01 000 and no event exists before M001 01 192 the button moves to the M001 01 192 location If an event exists on M001 01 010 the gt button stops to the M001 01 010 location These commands are effective even if the Measure parameter is not selected Heasure Previous or Next Measure Use these buttons to move to the previous or following measure These commands are effective even if the Measure parameter is not selected Done button Done Press this button to exit the Step Backing Sequence mode AII changes will be saved to memory Hint Save the Song to a card by selection the Save Song com mand from the page menu to avoid losing it when turning the instrument off Step Backing Sequence page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command w Insert Measure
102. following page will appear in the display STYLESPAD RECORD Current Style British Pop 1 Record Edit Current Style I Record New Style O Record Edit Pad E Record Mew Pad e Select Record Edit Current Style to edit the current Style If it is a Factory Style you may not be able to save it at the original location depending on the status of the Factory Style and Pad Protect parameter see page 225 you will select a User Style instead When editing an existing Style the original Style Perfor mance is recalled but the following parameters are reset to their default values Drum Mapping Off Kick amp Snare Designation Off This means that you can hear some dif ferences between the Style in play and the same Style being edited for example resetting the Drum Mapping may lead to some instruments being replaced Select Record New Style to start from a new empty Style A default Style Performance will be recalled When finished recording you will save the new Style onto a User Style location Styles can be saved onto Factory Style locations only when the Factory Style and Pad Protect parameter is set to Off see page 225 After editing the Style please save it see Exit by saving or delet ing changes below and exit the Style Record mode Then while in Style Play mode edit the Style Performance to adjust track settings Tempo Volume Pan FX Send see page 86 and fol lowing in the Style
103. function While still in Global mode select the Write Global Global Setup command from the page menu to save these settings to the Global see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 212 2 Lower some note pitches Keep the Quarter Tone pedal pressed The keyboard will not play at this time Press the notes you want to lower a quarter tone Release the pedal 3 Play with your new scale Notes you pressed on step 2 are now lowered of a quarter tone 4 Resetthe original scale Press and release the Quarter Tone pedal again without playing any note All pitches will be reset and the scale selected by the Performance STS will be recalled Style Play operating mode 9 Effects FX Select Effects FX Select This page allows you to select the A B Style and Pads and C D Keyboard effects STYLE PLAY Effects w AE FX Group Style Tracks Ly 71 Reverb SmoothHall Fs Amount 15 Send B FX B Lr 26 Stereo Chorus Fe Amount 58 C D FX Group Real Time Tracks Send C F E 72 Reverb SmoothHall Fa Amount zB P FX A D PERF PERF STS Effects assigned to the corresponding effect processors Usually A and C are reverbs while B and D are modulating effects cho rus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD Effects from A to D can be saved to a Performance Effect A B Style and Pad tracks c
104. if you want to copy two or three of the four effects into different Performances Styles or STSs 2 Choose the Copy FX command from the page menu 3 Select the target Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the single effect you want to paste FX A FX B FX C or FX D 4 Choose the Paste FX command from the page menu To copy all four effects 1 Select the source Performance Style or STS then go to the Effects gt FX Select page to copy all four effects 2 Choose the Copy FX command from the page menu 3 Select the target Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the Effects gt FX Select page 4 Choose the Paste FX command from the page menu Easy Mode Easy Mode allows you to use the Style Play and Song Play modes with an easier to use user interface It is recommended to begin ners and to professionals alike that do not want to deal with the extra parameters of the Advanced mode At any time you can manually turn the Easy Mode on off with the Easy Mode command in the page menu of the Style Play and Song Play modes See The Style Play page in detail on page 7 for more informa tion o Jg c Q re Q Q cc 102 Style Play operating mode Write Performance dialog box Write Performance dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Performance item from the page menu Here you can save all track settings the selected Style number and various Styl
105. immedi ately selected when pressing one of the PERFORMANCE SELECT buttons The latest selected Performance for that bank will be selected Bank sets Selected set of banks top or bottom row of Performances Side tabs banks Use these tabs to select a bank of Performance Each tab corre sponds to one of the PERFORMANCE SELECT buttons on the control panel Lower tabs pages Use these tabs to select one of the available pages in the selected bank If you press again the same PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT button on the control panel the next page in the same bank is selected This way you do not need to press one of the corre sponding tabs in the display in order to select a different page Performances Press one of these buttons in the display to select a Performance Unless the Display Hold option is turned on see Display Hold On on page 206 the window automatically closes short after you select a Performance Style Select window Press the Style area whereas it appears in the display or one of the STYLE buttons on the control panel to open the Style Select window Use the STYLE buttons to go directly to the selected bank Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the previous page without selecting any Style Bank sets Side tabs banks AAA STYLE SELECT Guitar Ballad 1 oe JE vs osm 9 16 aM e yr Beat _ c EN POURBOY mecuenposw Guitar Ballad 1 Ballad 1
106. intervention bordering the grid axis 0 The quantize window corresponds to the axis No quantization happens 100 The quantize window extends to the nearest win dow all events are quantized Win 0 Win 50 Win 100 Preferences Track Setting In this page you can set various general parameters referred to Song tracks SONG PLAY SE01 Preferences LCY Track Setting Global Song Play Setup Melody Ly Track 4 Drum e Track 18 Bass Track 2 IDEMA General A Control Note These settings are stored in the Song Play Setup area of the Global file together with all the other parameters marked with the GBL abbreviation in the manual After changing these settings select the Write Global Song Play Setup command from the page menu to save them to the Global Melody gt GBLS 9 This parameter selects the Song s Melody track This track can be muted using the Melody Mute function assignable to the Assignable Switch or Footswitch Drum gt GBLS 9 This parameter selects the Song s Drum track This track is left set to play together with the Bass track when selecting the Drum amp Bass function assignable to the Assignable Switch or Footswitch Bass gt GBLS 9 This parameter selects the Song s Bass track This track is left set to play together with the Drum track when selecting the Drum amp Bass function assignable to the Assignable Switch or Footswitch
107. into a Performance see Write Performance dialog box on page 102 2 SEQUENCER 2 TRANSPORT CONTROLS Transport controls for Sequencer 2 See instructions for Sequencer 1 above 9 STYLE CHANGE This button turns the Style Change function on or off On When you select a Performance the Style might change according to which Style number is memorized onto the Performance Off When you select a Performance the Style and Style track settings remain unchanged Only Key board track settings are changed PERFORMANCE SELECT Press this button to use the PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT section to select a Performance 9 SOUND SELECT Press this button to use the PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT section to select a Sound and assign it to the selected track UPPER OCTAVE PERF STS STS These buttons transpose the selected track in steps of a whole octave 12 semitones max 2 octaves The octave transposition value is always shown in octaves next to the Sound s name 1 Grand Piano P aa etd Press both buttons together to reset the Octave Transpose to zero Note The Octave Transpose has no effect on tracks set to Drum mode and even if set in a different status on the Drum and Per cussion tracks Lowers the selected track an octave Raises the selected track an octave SHIFT You can jump to the Style Play gt Tuning page by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing one of the UPPER OCTAVE but
108. is not automati cally changed when selecting a different Perfor mance or Style See Master transpose on page 81 Style Performance Master Transpose Lock When closed this lock prevents a Style change to modify the Master Transpose When open changing a Style may also change the Master Transpose See Master transpose on page 81 Hint In order to avoid having the Master Trans pose setting change when selecting a new Perfor mance or STS use the general Master Transpose Lock the first parameter in this page Note When the Master Transpose Lock is closed this parameter has no effect However the Master Transpose Lock also locks the Style Performance Transpose Sub Scale Quarter Tone When locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the Sub Scale or Quarter Tone value See Sub Scale panel on page 85 Q Jg c Q L Q a Q cc 204 Global edit mode General Controls Lock STS SubScale Quarter Tone Auto Octave When the lock is closed scale settings will not change when choosing a different STS or Song Book entry It does not change even if a Style is selected and the SINGLE TOUCH BUTTON is turned on See Sub Scale panel on page 85 This lock lets you decide if the instrument will automatically transpose the Upper tracks when switching between the Full and the Split keyboard modes by using the SPLIT button If On when switching to the Full or S
109. may be hot immediately following use Power off the Pa500 and wait for the card to cool before remov ing it SD MMC cards are precision parts Do not bend them drop them or subject them to physical shock Avoid using or storing SD MMC cards in locations of extremely high or low temperature such as in direct sunlight a closed automobile or near a heater or in locations of high humidity or excessive dust Avoid using or storing SD MMC cards in locations where they may be subject to strong static electricity or electrical noise Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to adhere to the contacts of an SD MMC card If the contacts should be come soiled gently wipe them off using a dry cloth When you are not using an SD MMC card keep it in the pro tective case that was included with the card to prevent it from being damaged by static electricity Do not leave an SD MMC card where it is accessible by infants or children who might place it in their mouth and swallow it Carefully read and observe the owner s manual included with your SD MMC card Write protecting an SD card SD cards have a write protect switch that prevents the data from being overwritten accidentally and lost If you set the card s switch to the protected setting 1t will be impossible to write or erase data on the card or to format it If you need to save edited data on the card move the switch back to its original unpro tected setting Write pr
110. may help you to orga nize your entries For example you can use the different 100s to create a different way of categorizing your entries by genre or age Each number can correspond only to a single entry You cannot assign the same number to two or more different entries There fore if you try to save a modified entry without first selecting a different Song Selection Number and select the New Song option in the Write Song dialog box the following error message will appear This entry s Song Selection Number has already been assigned Please assign a different number Should this happen you will automatically be kept in the Book Edit 2 page While there assign a different number while turn ing the Dial you are only allowed to select numbers that are still free and try to save the entry again Custom List Use this page to select and use one of the available Custom Lists contained in the LISTDB SBL file saved in the same folder as the SBD SongBook file Custom Lists are lists made of entries extracted from the main SongBook list as seen in the Book page They allow the use of smaller customized SongBook lists suitable for a single gig or your own music tastes List Header ETET LB no chord A Tare Hame i i GP A gigolo Custom list ETS Long train going Pop ETS Mr Duke Pop Scrollbar GT I wank your hand Pop ETS Vry superstitious Pop TY Senza donne Pop Commands Hint You can jump to thi
111. may press START STOP to lis ten how the pattern sounds after your changes Press START STOP again to stop the pattern running Press the Insert button in the display to insert an event at the Position shown in the display a Note event with default values will be inserted Press the Delete button in the dis play to delete the selected event When editing is complete you may select a different track to edit go to step 7 When finished editing the selected Chord Variation press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Style Record mode then go to step 2 to select and edit a different Chord Variation When finished editing the whole Style select the Write Style command from the page menu to open the Write Style dialog box see Write Style dialog box on page 129 or select the Exit from Record command to cancel all changes Press the T Text Edit button to enter the Text Edit dialog box Enter a name and confirm by selecting OK Select a target memory location where to save the Style The name of the Style already existing at the selected loca tion is shown after the Style Bank Location number Warning If you select an existing Style and confirm writing the older Style is deleted and replaced by the new one Save the Styles you don t want to lose to a card before overwriting them Press OK to save the Style to the internal memory or Can cel to delete any changes made in Style Record mode When th
112. nm Od ovj gy g olga c j Sala w amp to ET UU QU w w a DO 5 e ouo e ET v 4 ll nl Cp c 2 CD o Cy N Uu N n n n nloj gt ma gt ciao Vv wo n e e Lo o aloj ulalo v o Dlalo Olin ct n ol la Lo n C NJ Co Ola wI N n Bla wn s ollu n nj lt alulala o D N un Un A a c a t ciu D joj N UJ alaj va wl ajali Njn U A A nl ou la 32 scis ao w Al D O ulg e B n ol lt Z lt w e IPEA o a N N CCOO CC32 T EN wr a a MO ws wp ws ws EE 3 a o w Attack Bass Rubber Bass Dr Octave Monofilter Bass Reso Bass Autofilter Bass Drive Bass Nasty Bass 30303 Bass Euro Bass Jungle Rez 30303 Square Bass Square Phat Bass Syn Bass Res Clav Bass EN EN EN O ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON O ON ON lt EA EE o EUN BON RN 9 EE o ES ES Hammer N N Digi Bass 1 Blind as a Bat Poinker Bass Digi Bass 3 Jungle Bass Hybrid Bass Digi Bass 2 N Acous Bass RX Finger Bass RX Picked Bass RX N PC 38 39 39 38 39 39 39 39 38 39 38 39 39 38 38 39 38 38 38 39 38 38 39 38 38 38 38 32 33 36 34 36 36 FunkSlap Bass RX iv y 3 A t 3 Qo d A Pop Std Kit RX Jazz Kit RX1 Jazz Kit RX2 Jazz Kit RX3 Brush Kit RX1 Brush Kit RX2 Brush Kit RX3 Brush Kit 1 Brush Kit 2 Hip Hop Kit RX House Kit RX1 House Kit RX2 ww P
113. o ECN X Cuban cha cha IC T Rum o T piso cha cha 4 Modern Gospe IN a jm wu iE CET 15 vocalswing 16 aras Samba 15 Groove Funk 39 per 1 ism 19 Dwosam Lat Motown Shuffle2 Shuffle 2 hee ey Party 2 pap 8 IE 8 i 3 3 NN EE UJ w W NI NI N N N N N N N N Y ul wl wm UJ Wt W NI NI NI N NI NI N N NI N NJ ul RE N O WO CO NI om wy BY W N O N vI UJ N N O OO N AJ al a WwW NI O N vI UJ N up eu pep AAA EE pep pu ER NENNEN E p 238 Factory data Styles EME CC32 Bank Traditional CC32 Bank Movie amp Show CC2 Bank Unplugged w w W N NI N N NI N N N NIN Y ul wl wm UJ w W NI NI NI N NI NI N N NI N Y ul wl nm N O WO CO NI om oy BY W N O N vI UJ N N O OO gt NI AJ Wy a WwW NI O N vI UJ N N nr N E NJ Italian Waltz Musette Waltz French Waltz Irish Waltz Laendler Waltz 5 7 Italian Polka 1 2 Italian Polka 2 3 Italian Polka 3 Italian Mazurka 1 ml nl ual nln lt ololo lo a a Vie a a c TO O O O TO 0 o o 2 O o a S S A S oO Oo O oO a 3 5 2 23 2 A olj vj vj oQ s 5 5 5 3 3 53 3 3153 D Siucioj duiduuo AIAJ ALA oio 9io mi mo o o o o S s5pISsI 3 5 S gt gt 5 Sl lola d U lt Ss u PEE R o oeoisis ojo isisiso D oio N ct tl 2 N N oio NININ N n NI wl ha oer h 5 Italia
114. palas Orleans 2 EUN gt y Ans Lower tabs pages Styles Note Depending on the status of the Auto Style Select parameter see page 206 a Style may be immediately selected when pressing one of the STYLE SELECT buttons The latest selected Style for that bank will be selected Bank sets Selected set of banks top or bottom row Side tabs banks Use these tabs to select a bank of Styles Each tab corresponds to one of the STYLE buttons on the control panel Lower tabs pages Use these tabs to select one of the available pages in the selected bank If you press again the same STYLE SELECT button on the con trol panel the next page in the same bank is selected This way you do not need to press one of the corresponding tabs in the display in order to select a different page Selecting elements 17 Style Select window Styles Press one of these buttons in the display to select a Style Unless the Display Hold option is turned on see Display Hold On on page 206 the window automatically closes short after you select a Style After selecting a Style from this window and another Style is playing the name of the new Style name begins to flash mean ing it is ready to start playing at the beginning of the next mea sure Pad Select window Press the Pad area whereas it appears in the display to open the Pad Select window Press EXIT to exit from this page and go ba
115. pr Curve Lp curve e Time OE ms TEM Tran p Keyboard Settings Velocity Curve gt GBL This parameter sets the sensitivity of the keyboard to your touch By default it is set to Medium 2 Fix No dynamic control available Dynamic values are fixed as in a classic organ Softl Hard3 Curves from the lightest one to the hardest one Global Tuning Reverb Master Tuning gt GBL O This is the master tuning of the instrument in cents of a semi tone Use it to adapt your keyboard tuning to an acoustic instrument for example an acoustic piano 50 Lowest pitch 0 Standard pitch A4 440Hz 50 Highest pitch Global edit mode General Controls Basic 201 Reverb Offset GBLS This is the master offset for all reverbs Use it to adjust reverb tails to the room where you are playing Use negative values when you are in a very reverberant room positive values if the room is too dry By using this global control you are not obliged to change the reverb time in each single Performance STS Style Performance or Song 50 Less reverb 0 Standard reverb 50 More reverb Fade In Out Time These parameters allows you to set the speed for the Fade In Out function Fade In Time gt GBL Time for a full fade in from zero to maximum volume after you press the FADE IN OUT button 5 20 Fade time in seconds Fade Out Time gt GBL Time for a full fade out from maximum volume
116. s Wewi A wes wwe w s n emn wm o Ww Wem ws s 34 mimm A Du o as ewoms Lue IN A O v wer O Due o O wo fi poe Ca o oaea wo wx EA Due o 3 arse ecw A wo s wx wo zwei Caf o 35 we AU ws Bimwwm we o s ewkm we s s pow ime we s xem O Ew o p pemm E Piao s s fawkes A we o pesemas we s 99 wow A cmo ecsz c wame ew Emo simi o wmm E wo 9 mmma wo wmm Lus s ea tempe MEA o s CES IS EE o o ereen O ws o S5 MmmiiumWt of o Ss Aun ws o 5255 remapio CdS of o s pex EC Lus o 5768 remaptos io o 68 Perusionke of o 9 me w WuwRe Le Bekk entem reno m bmeKk 7588 remapto iY e posen CdS Cw posa 5 remapi9 of o 86 E E of o o eewroxta Sid o o emeas ws o Heremsts Lus s Tr wink Lus o Wersempwy of o memi of o mrjewemi E of o mre E af o mijwew Lus s rapto of o mme E ws o B mztempud LE LC LLL Co e EA EEE 120 Ea 120 0 120 EN 120 o 120 o 120 o 120 0 120 0 120 E Multisamples The following table lists all Pa500 Factory Multisamples OrigTune Original Tune 1 e samples use the natural tuning of the original instr
117. see Song Edit Cut Insert Mea sures on page 194 Delete Press the Delete button in the display to delete the event selected in the display Note The End of Track event cannot be deleted Event Edit procedure Here is the general event editing procedure 1 While in the Event Edit page press P I PLAY STOP in the SEQUENCER 1 section to listen to the Song Press it again to stop the Song 2 Select the Filter page and turn Off the filter for the event types you wish to see in the display see Event Edit Filter on page 192 for more information Return to the Event Edit page 4 Use the Track pop up menu to select the track to edit The list of events contained in the selected track will appear in the display For more information on the event types and their values see above 5 Select the Position parameter Use the TEMPO VALUE dial or press the parameter again to open the numeric key pad to change the event s position 6 Select the Type parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the event type Select the Value 1 and 2 parameters and use the TEMPO VALUE dial or press the parameter again to open the numeric keypad to modify the selected value Q Jg c o L Q im Q cc 192 Sequencer operating mode Event Edit Filter P In the case of a Note event select the Length parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial or press the parameter again to open the numeric keyp
118. setting of 0 96 the veloc ity will not change With a setting of 100 96 the MY uM y velocity will be changed the most c 2 Curve E Only available in Advanced mode Use this parameter to select M one of the six curves and to specify how the velocity will change over time Start Value 0 End Value 100 Curve 1 Curve 2 Curve 3 127 127 127 Velocity Velocity Velocity 1 1 1 Start End Start End Start Value Value Value Value Value Curve 5 127 127 127 Velocity Velocity Velocity RANDOM Start 1 Start End Start Value Value Value Value Start End Vel Value Only available in Advanced mode Velocity change at the start ing and ending ticks of the selected range 0 22100 Velocity change in percentage 194 Sequencer operating mode Song Edit Cut Insert Measures Song Edit Cut Insert Measures In this page you can cut or insert measures from the Song SEQUENCER Edit LCY Cut Measure Start 1 Length 1 Insert Measure Length Meter 44 After selecting the Start and Length parameters press Execute to start the operation After the Cut the following measures are moved back to fill the cut measures After the Insert the following measures are pushed forward to accommodate the inserted measures Start First measure where to begin cutting inserting Length Number of measures to be cut inserted Meter Meter of the measures to be inserted
119. sor Geena ERROR EUN C etti 155 Switching between sequencers during editing 155 Mixer Lumine Volum e Pan joue ex kr o e 155 Mixed Tunne PX Seda tad ue Eo ear nho a doe t aci 156 Mizer Tuning BO Galli accosted ace dtebewateus Pea este 157 Mixer Tuning EQ Control 2 62 49d Pa redet de ac as 158 Mixen Tuning TUNNE e ses torpon ced 158 iiec c 158 A DU 2 4m ea oreet hop Ge dh dates day em Be Sue 159 Track Controls Mode axxo ee Pb base es ad pas 159 Track Controls Drum Volume secos ER RVrPTeS 160 Track Controls Easy Edit sortir arras 160 Keyboard Ensemble Keyboard Control 160 Keyboard Ensemble Key Velocity Range 160 Keyboard Ensemble Ensemble uerb REPRE RU Res 160 rfiv PC des 160 Pad Switch Assignable Switch ooooommmommo o 160 J kebox Edit r ausa ua trien bee eda ba 160 Table of Contents 3 Groove QUIBIUZB s ocbasci ee aa aaa 161 MIDE MIDI In Control 24 vir Esa ERR b 9 Ch s 208 Preferences Track Seting ac iow iiw iind rear cargos 162 MIDI MIDI In Channels otros pe 209 Preferences General Controls coord es 162 MIDE MIDI Out Channels seria poleas 209 PASS MSM qiero erecta repo nouns ERE EE 164 WIND duc aser esc poro ooo nes 210 Write Global Song Play Setup dialog box 165 Audio Setup Metro Speakers a cese bere mv tr s 210 SongBook ssss sen 166 Audio Setup Master EQ oir sao 210 Bed TE 16
120. split point for the Keyboard tracks See Split panel on page 86 for details Edit menu From any page press the MENU button to open the Song Play edit menu This menu gives access to the various Song Play edit sections for the currently selected sequencer see Songs area on page 150 When in the menu select an edit section or press EXIT or SONG PLAY to exit the menu When in an edit page press the EXIT or SONG PLAY button to go back to the main page of the Song Play operating mode SONG PLAY Menu bo Effects Track Controls Tuning Keyboard Pad Juke Box Ensemble Assign Switch Editor Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages that may be selected by press ing the corresponding tab on the lower part of the display Note Some of the edit parameters are only meant for realtime To see which parameters are saved in the Performance STS or Global Song Play Setup and which are not see the Parameters chapter on page 344 As a general rule Keyboard track parameters can be saved in a Per formance or SongBook STS while Song track parameters could be saved in the Global Song Play Setup Edit page structure All edit pages share some basic elements Selected Operating mode sequencer Edit section Page menu icon az ee Eee SONG PLAY SE01 Hixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano B Piano 121 883 8 Selected track info upper Yolume Link Para
121. tabs to select a different Style page CD Note You can leave 2 Select a Style from the Style Select window the Style Select window open in the display even after selecting a Style by setting the Display Hold option to On see Dis play Hold On on page 206 In this case press the EXIT button to exit from a window STYLE PLAY MT 8 no chord B l Dark Pad ug p qu gt Strings Ens 2 GM na songs usi STYLE SELECT Easy Beat 1 Bank 9 16 Ek 3 E c c 4 4 m m ES A AOS z L Y The Style Select window closes PACKING Ut v and the main screen appears i again with the selected Style ready to go a A Malume 3 Be sure the ACCOMP LED is turned on ACCOMP O For chord scanning to work the LED must be turned on If it is turned off only the Drum track can be heard 46 Selecting and playing Styles Tempo I Press the SYNCHRO START button to turn its LED on SYNCHRO START STOP gic When the Syncho Start function is turned on the Style Ul Play the keyboard starts playing as soon as you play a note or chord in the chord recognition area Play chords with your left hand and the melody with your right hand The arranger will follow your playing o Press START STOP to stop the Style START STOP O Tempo While a Tempo setting is saved with each Style or Performance you can change it to be whatever you like You ca
122. the zero since a higher level layer may be selected by low velocity val ues Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected The velocity for all notes of the whole selected Chord Variation will be changed Drum Acc5 Selected track E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Vari ation for editing Value Velocity change value 127 Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to be modified If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to be modified If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instru ment in a Drum or Percussion track Advanced When this checkbox is checked the Intensity Curve Start Velocity Value and End Velocity Value parameters can be edited Intensity Only available in Advanced mode Use this parameter to specify the degree to which the velocity data will be adjusted toward the curve you specify in Curve 0 100 Intensity value With a setting of 0 96 the veloc ity will not change With a setting of 100 the velocity will be changed the most Curve Only available in Advanced mode Use thi
123. the STYLE CHANGE but ton will stay off Velocity Control Value gt GBLSY Use this parameter to set a velocity value over which to automat ically trigger the Style Start Stop or select a Style Element see Velocity Control above Upper Volume Link gt GBLS This parameter allows you to define if changing the volume for one of the Upper tracks proportionally changes also the other Upper tracks On When changing volume to one of the Upper tracks volume for the other Upper tracks changes in proportion Off When changing volume to one of the Upper tracks only that track s volume is changed Other Upper tracks are left unchanged Bass amp Lower Backing gt GBLStv With this function you can play a simple accompaniment with your left hand For this to work the Split keyboard mode must be selected and the Style must not be running By default this function is turned on On If the Style is not playing and you play chords with your left hand the Sound assigned to the Lower track plays chord notes even if the Lower track is muted and a Bass sound plays the chord root When you start the Style the normal behav ior is restored When the Bass amp Lower Backing EACEKIHG function is active the Backing icon appears in the Lower track Sound s area Off If the Style is not playing and the Lower track is muted no sound can be heard when you play with your left hand If the Lower track is set to play you
124. the number For example to enter position 002 02 193 dial 2 2 193 to enter position 002 04 000 dial 2 4 to enter position 002 01 000 simply dial 2 Type Value 1 Value 2 Type and values of the event shown in the display Depending on the selected event the value may change This parameter also shows the greyed out so non editable CC 11 Expression event at the beginning of the pattern and the End Of Loop marking when the end of a track is reached Ctrl Control Change number Control Change value Bend To change the event type select the Type parameter then use the TEMPO VALUE dial to select a different event type A set of default values will be automatically assigned to the event To select and edit the event s value select the corresponding parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial Length Length of the selected Note event The value format is the same as the Position value This is only available for Note events Note If you change a length of 000 00 000 to a different value you can t go back to the original value This rather uncommon zero length value may be found in some drum or percussion tracks Scrollbar Use the scrollbar to browse the event through the list As an alternative use Shift Dial Other elements Track pop up menu Use this pop up menu to select the track to edit inside the cur rent Chord Variation Drum Acc5 Style track Q Jg c Q
125. the volume of the connected device if the sound heard on the Pa500 s outputs is too low you should increase the output level of the connected device if it sounds fine it s ok if it distorts you should lower the level a little until the sounds is fine again MIDI connections You can play the internal sounds of your Pa500 with an external controller i e a master keyboard a MIDI guitar a wind control ler a MIDI accordion or a digital piano You can also control other MIDI devices with the Pa500 or con nect it to a computer for use with an external sequencer As an alternative to the MIDI connectors you can use the USB port for direct connection to a personal computer See the MIDI chapter on page 230 for more information on MIDI connections Start up Audio Inputs 23 Damper Pedal Connect a Damper Sustain pedal to the DAMPER connector on the back panel Use a Korg PS1 or DS1H footswitch pedal or a compatible one To switch the Damper polarity see Damper Polarity on page 207 Demo Listen to the built in Demo Songs to appreciate the power of the Pa500 There are several Demo Songs to choose from Press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY buttons together Their LEDs start blinking me At this point if you don t press any other button all the Demo Songs will be played back Select one of the available options to listen to a specified Demo Song Stop the Demo by pres
126. to Drum or Percussion mode while in Style Record see Track Type on page 126 cannot be edited here This option appears in grey Other Style tracks cannot be set to Drum mode here Poly Tracks of this kind are polyphonic i e they can play more than one note at the same time Mono Tracks of this kind are monophonic i e each new note stops the previous note Mono Right A Mono track but with priority assigned to the rightmost highest note Mono Left A Mono track but with priority assigned to the leftmost lowest note Play Mute icon PERF PERF STS Track s play mute status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Style Play operating mode 93 Track Controls Drum Volume Track Controls Drum Volume In this page you can adjust the volume for each family of Drum and Percussion instrument for the selected track A list of fami lies is shown below These parameters can be accessed only on tracks set in Drum mode see above Use them on tracks with a Drum Kit assigned or you will not be able to hear any change Note All values are referred to the value of the original Sounds STYLE PLAY Track Controls Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano B Piano 121 883 888 Drum Family i ume fink Du i Ha Reset Track Reset All Tracks a cu E UPPER 1 m ur Volume STYLE PLAY Track Controls LCY Trk Drum Pazz Kit RX2 B Drum amp Perc 128 888 834 Pr
127. to the chords and the bass played with the left hand In this way chords and bass will par ticipate to the creation of chords for the chord recognition of the automatic accompaniment The Control channel You can set a MIDI IN channel as the Control channel see page 209 to select Styles and Performance from an external device See the Appendix for a list of messages corresponding to P2500 internal data MIDI Setup You can play Pa500 with an external controller and use it simply as a powerful sound generator To help you configure the MIDI channels we have provided a set of MIDI Setups see Midi Setup on page 100 for the Style Play mode Midi Setup on page 162 for the Song Play mode and MIDI Setup on page 207 for the Global mode We recommend you to consider each MIDI Setup as a starting point you can freely tweak Once you have selected the most appropriate MIDI Setup for the connection to be made you can modify the parameters as necessary and save them in a MIDI Setup see Write Global Midi Setup dialog box on page 212 Reference 232 MIDI Connecting Pa500 to a Master keyboard Connecting Pa500 to a Master keyboard You can control the Pa500 with a master keyboard or any other MIDI keyboard You only need to connect the MIDI OUT con nector of the master keyboard to the MIDI IN connector of the Pa500 The master keyboard will become the integrated key board of the Pa500 if it t
128. to the maximum level Move it to the center to set both Sequencer at the same level Note When turning the instrument on move this slider to the cen ter to avoid starting a Song at the minimum level Headphones Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES output on the back of the instrument You can use headphones with an imped ance of 16 200 2 50 2 suggested Use a headphone splitter to connect more than one pair of headphones Audio Outputs Audio outputs allows you to connect the Pa500 to an external amplification system Stereo Connect two mono cables to the main L MONO RIGHT OUTPUTS Connect the other end of the cables to a ste reo channel of your mixer two mono channels two powered monitors or the CD LINE IN or TAPE AUX input of your audio system Don t use the PHONO inputs of your audio sys tem Mono Connect a mono cable to the LIMONO OUTPUT alone Connect the other end of the cable to a mono channel of your mixer a powered monitor or a single channel of your CD LINE IN or TAPE AUX input of a hi fi system you will hear that channel only unless you can set the amplifier to Mono mode Audio Inputs Connect any other musical instrument to the INPUT connectors on the back of the instrument To connect a microphone use an external preamp or mixer Use the connected device s volume control to adjust the input level Be careful not to make it distort or clip Here is how to set
129. to zero after you press the FADE IN OUT button 5 20 Fade time in seconds Accelerando Ritardando These parameters lets you adjust the speed of the Accelerando and Ritardando functions Step Speed of the Tempo change from 1 to 6 With higher values the step change is greater and the speed will change faster With lower values the step change is smaller and the speed will change more slowly Curve Accelerando ritardando curves from 1 to 3 Experiment the various options to see the one that best fit your taste Glide Glide is a function you can assign to a footswitch When the pedal is pressed affected notes on Upper tracks are bent down according to settings for the Pitch Bend on the same tracks When the pedal is released notes return to the normal pitch at the speed defined by the Time parameter To change Pitch Bend values for each Upper track see the PB Sensitivity parameter in the Style Play mode see page 89 Time Time needed to notes affected by the Glide to return to the nor mal pitch Q Jg c Q re Q im Q cc 202 Global edit mode General Controls Transpose Control General Controls Transpose Control This page is where you can select to which tracks the Master Transpose is applied to and adjust some related parameter GLOBAL General Controls CY Transpose Control Transpose Applies to Style and Ebd Tracks gt In Sunc 12 Transpose Applies
130. track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Style Play operating mode Keyboard Ensemble Keyboard Control 95 Keyboard Ensemble Key Velocity Range This page lets you program a key and dynamic velocity range for each of the Keyboard tracks Key range is useful to create a set of Keyboard tracks playing in different zones of the keyboard For example you may have french horns and woodwinds playing in the center range of the keyboard while only woodwinds play on the higher range Velocity range is useful to create a sound made of up to three dynamic layers assigning each of the Upper tracks to a different dynamic range As an example you may assign the El Piano 1 Program to the Upper 1 and the El Piano 2 Program to the Upper 2 track Then set Upper 1 to Bottom 0 Top 80 and Upper 2 to Bot tom 81 Top 127 The El Piano 1 will play when playing softer the El Piano 2 when playing louder STYLE PLAY Keyboard Ensemble _ c Trk Drum Jazz Kit RXZ B Drum amp Perc 126 066 034 Upper Tracks Key amp Velocity Range B B Mi OWER lPPER3 UPPERS UPPER LOWER UPP Top Bottom Key Key Range PERF STS This parameter pair sets the Top and Bottom key range for the track C 1 G9 Selected key Top Bottom Vel Velocity Range PERF STS This parameter pair sets the Top and Bottom dynamic range for the track 0 Lowest velocity value 127 Highest velocity value Play Mute icon
131. track will be cop ied to all tracks of the current Chord Variation All Style Tracks The Key Chord of the current track will be cop ied to all tracks of the Style 1 e all Chord Varia tions o Jg c Q he Q Q cc 130 Style Record mode Copy Sounds dialog box Copy Sounds dialog box Open this window by choosing the Copy Sounds item from the page menu Here you can copy all Sounds assigned to the cur rent Style Element tracks to a different Style Element Copy Sounds From Style Element Var 1 To Style Element E From Style Element Non editable Currently selected Style Element To Style Element Target Style Element All Settings will be copied to all Style Element of the Style in edit Varl CountIn Single Style Element where to copy settings to Copy Expression dialog box Open this window by choosing the Copy Expression item from the page menu Here you can copy all Expression values assigned to the current Style Element tracks to a different Style Element Copy Expression From Style Element Var 1 To Style Element E From Style Element Non editable Currently selected Style Element To Style Element Target Style Element All Settings will be copied to all Style Element of the Style in edit Varl CountIn Single Style Element where to copy settings to Copy Key Range dialog box Open this window by choosing the Copy Keyboard Ran
132. umn on the SongBook list appearing in the Book and Custom List page Ascending Descending Select this command to toggle between the ascending and descending view order of the SongBook list The sorting order is selected with one of the following commands Sort by Type Name Genre Artist Key Tempo Meter Select one of these command to select the sorting order The selected option is shown in white above the entry list Enable List Edit Select this command and make the checkmark appear to make the List Edit page available Export as text file Select this command to open the Export dialog box and save the SongBook or Custom List as a text file The selected filtering will be applied to the exported list assuming the Filter button is checked The dialog box is a little different depending on the page where you selected this command Selected from the Book page Export as text file Exporting current SongBook view Bca File name MEWNAME Selected from the Custom List page Export as text file Exporting current List LIEN File name NEWMAME Press the Ti Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window and assign a name to the text file to be saved to a card Press OK to confirm o Jg c Q he Q Q cc 174 Sequencer operating mode Transport controls Sequencer operating mode The Sequencer operating mode is the full featured onboard sequencer where you can cre
133. way Do not dispose of ma this product along with your household trash By dispos ing of this product correctly you can avoid environmen tal harm or health risk The correct method of disposal will depend on your locality so please contact the appropriate local authorities for details IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS This product has been manufactured according to strict specifica tions and voltage requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be used If you have purchased this product via the internet through mail order and or via a telephone sale you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in which you reside WARNING Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be disqualified from the manufacturer s or distribu tor s warranty Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the user s authority to operate this equipment Data handling Data in memory may sometimes be lost due to incorrect user action Be sure to save important data to a card KORG will not be responsible for damages caused by data loss Data reset When the instrument is turned off some parameters are reset Example screens Some pages of the manuals sh
134. 1 Default MIDI Setup 1s automatically selected when entering the Sound Edit mode MIDI settings are therefore modified when switching to a different operating mode The current MIDI Setup 1s also shown in the Global mode u Select one of the available Accordion MIDI Setups Note Settings may change when new Global data is loaded from a card To protect settings from loading use the Global Protect function see Global Protect on page 225 qa To save the assigned MIDI Setup for the selected operative mode into the Global select the Write Global Style Setup the Write Global Song Play Setup the Write Global Seq Setup or the Write Global Global Setup command from the page menu dn If needed press one of the buttons in the MODE section to go to the desired operative mode Connecting the Pa500 to an external sequencer You can program a new song on an external sequencer using Pa500 as a multi timbral expander Connections and settings In order to connect the Pa500 to a computer you need to have a computer with the MIDI interface 1 In case you will connect the computer and the Pa500 via the USB port install the Korg USB MIDI Driver as explained in Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver on page 278 m Connect the Pa500 and the computer either via the USB port or via the MIDI ports and a MIDI interface as shown in the following diagram MIDI OUT MID IN
135. 123 2 212 38 2 S u w lt lt ily u un Sets io a EAE e eee LS 2 S SS 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 zl a n C zi zi rzimrinizzm m eres E me m U U OS o 2 3 a I r 3 3 3 cvc mimimimim ziuv w olxtlzt NLU ul ulo o o ow w o O o o o EE LaS r Z oclmivoivoizmiZgSig OJO mn o X X X KI Ki o 7 O o TI I Oo Ol Ol ol ol ol ol ol e 2 2 Uu m QS rir r s 5 s z z 8ejg e Ee siRR R e g 8g g Jalas SIS Salal alal Fe AIS SIS 4 a 8 Soag z2 ISL Es ue yey oO o 2 2 o 2 zi oO o o o c ar 2 o alola sslolpzlo E Ele aus JE gt JHEEBEHE ib 383 l8 n 2 0 wl o Et N gt 3 2 O Dd se a D D po po NI N 262 Factory data Drum Samples ENT NENNEN 35 CIS MET 39 memos 7 35 sed NE eo free se 7 38 Finger cymbal 3m Mee 7 3 Maced i 3 Hewae iC 35 samba msi 35 GmesGes 5 3s wa CIN 3m pem CIN 3m ers fe Em um 8 mme UCI su umso CIN 35 ome Nie e 3m pudum ICI 5 jwwmse 8 x6 pem NC 3 mee INC xm meses CIN xm wwe 8 Ja sm me 8 382 7 Ui MM M A xs wdes EC 3mm ECN 387 35m Hense 8 3s finch 3 ed s jmmuk CN sw porre e 35 porse 8 xw ore 8 xs ose EC xw errs 397 arch 35 mm ECN 35 Hes ECN 49 jGmser ECN ww ense ECN 4w meneen 403 em 8 4 Ewin 8 5 mede 8 o Wm 8 ww mem CIN 45 bie 8 49 duhid CI ato Weme
136. 140 Pad Edit CU bp paja sonda ae 140 Pad Edit Deleie 2v ede eseceserduut rad as qup utu 141 Pad Pale Delete All corro sete te pos EETA E EE ES 141 Pad Edit Copy hom SIE 2 eaa uer ERA EPAIU SERE 141 Pad Edit Copy om Pad as sas aute meo RI Tinne iones 142 Pad Track Controls Sound Expression LL 142 Pad bord TIDE aner Anr EEEREN EEATT ETORRERA ET 143 lampart Mport o MF s vawosaa sede ts Urdu chr dq PIE ENS 144 EXON OME iras ro ARO 144 Pase mel cuate E peo poa oe 144 Wite Pad diilo DOS sure es cose csoto nr noraaiacas 145 Song Play operating mode 146 Transport COMO S tooo acres te asiar II EAS RISE 146 MI Clock escocesas EMOPEOSSCRIESSE es 146 Tempo Lockand Link Mode comcoacinsrisada dis one 146 Master Volume Balance Sequencer Balance 146 Track q AAA IM PEU EARBRAPPIUIM ES 146 Standard MIDI Files and Sounds xe RE REERS TET YS 146 NRPN Sound patarietefs seovrrde ries rs 147 Keyboard Pad and Sequencer tracks 2o sevi Ev Rer ENS 147 Eno PIE 148 Song Tracks 1 8 and 9 16 pages csse RET REREQUEe RES 150 Valume Panic 23 IT 151 Jukebox panel oo oos or RE CR ONPUR URS SNL doren ES PS 152 Lyrics amp Markers paniel orirernicsi ibarra tos 54 153 Sls Name panel 222 54oneded ied tas oes PEU p deren dog edd 154 Sub Seale pastel ous odesdbase nomen due pios imei 154 Cnm METRCCRNITTRIPFEPET rr 154 OPE Pawel corola Dude I ER OT URN ES Mt 154 A e MI ONERE ERO CUN eas 155 Edit pate Str Ute uoces
137. 2 2 2 7 5 2 3 3 Factory data 243 Sounds Bank order LANE ESA Bmhzme S EI ETS EIN EI um ur m m m m m KM ES FS EON m m MEUM m m O9 y 3 A g 3 o b eh a NI N N a N Wah Trumpet Mute Trumpet GM Mono Trumpet Flugel Horn Pro Dual Trumpets Hard Trombone Trumpet GM N Flugel Horn Trumpet 2 NI N N N 2 2 Pitch Trombone BeBop Cornet N Dark Trumpet N Trumpet 3 N Mute Trumpet 2 Bright Trombone Tuba GM Tuba Gold Oberkr Tuba Dynabone Ob Tuba amp E Bass 1 Ob Tuba amp E Bass 2 NI N N a 12 5 2 3 13 7 3 7 2 5 2 2 2 3 5 56 56 56 56 57 57 59 59 56 56 56 56 57 57 57 57 56 56 56 56 57 57 57 57 57 56 56 56 59 57 57 58 58 58 58 58 58 zy 3 3 3 g S zi 217 zy 3 ay at St 2 7 o 9 9 9 nc 9v o ojo c oo es s 5 S 3 3 3 3 5 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 o02 3 o o c cG 35 o om mcr o o oc olo o o o joj joj o um o ojo oO o o o o m o 2 23 2 2 i3 c 2 2 is 2 5 2 23 Ead D D ojoj 516 D 0 0 y ojoj d Ija w N a lt o o y e m O lt mMigjpo ol3 irs lt aj n mia o o N b N _ Bank Brass Big Band Brass N Glen amp Friends Mute Ensemble 1 N Ui Wo ul o w Horns amp Ensemble NJ Fat Brass Trumpet Ens Glen amp Boys Mute Ensemble 2 French Horn GM
138. 2 PLAY STOP button however markers can be added even while the sequencer is not running 3 When you reach the position you want to save as a marker press the Add button in the display f you press Add within the first beats of the measure the beginning of the current measure is saved as a marker f you press Add within the last beat of the measure the beginning of the following measure is saved as a marker 4 Do the same for any following marker Stop the Song by pressing the SEQ 1 SEQ 2 PLAY STOP button How to jump to a saved marker 1 Start the Song again 2 When you want to jump to a saved marker touch it in the display The Song will jump to the saved position at the beginning of the next measure How to edit a marker 1 Touch the marker to be edited in the display 2 Press the Edit button in the display to set the marker to edit The Edit Marker window will appear Edit Marker Sequencer 1 Position GERRARI Mame Marker Q Jg c Q re Q Q cc 154 Song Play operating mode STS Name panel 3 While in Edit Marker window you can edit the name and position of the marker being edited 4 Save the markers as described below How to delete a marker 1 Touch the marker to be deleted in the display 2 Press the Delete button in the display to delete the selected marker 3 Save the markers as described below How to save the markers Press the Save Mk button
139. 3 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 Bariton Sax T1 Tenor Sax Vibrato Tenor Sax Straight Tenor Sax M1 Tenor Sax Expressive Alto Sax Vibrato Alto Sax p Alto Sax mf Alto Sax Growl Alto Sax 01W Soprano Sax Vibrato Soprano Sax Straight French Musette Musettel MusettelLP Musette 2 Accordion 16 Accordion 16 OrigTune Accordion 8 Accordion 8 OrigTune Accordion 4 Accordion 4 OrigTune Accordionl Accordion2 Fisa Bassoon Fisa Clarinet Bandoneon Accordion Bass Accordion Noise KeyOn Accordion Noise KeyOff Accordion Change Voice Harmonica Harmonica Wah Highland Bag Pipes Highland Drones Uilleann Pipes Dag Pipes French Horn T1 French Horn Ensemble Flugel Horn Vibrato Flugel Horn M1 Tuba Factory data Multisamples 126 Trombone Vibrato 127 Trombonel mf 128 Trombonel ff 129 Trombone2 Soft 130 Trombone2 Bright 131 Trombone SlurUp 132 Trombone Fall 133 Trumpet Medium 134 Trumpet Overblown 135 Trumpet Expr 136 Trumpet Muted 137 Trumpet Wah wah 138 Trumpet Doit 139 Trumpet Fall 140 Brass Ensemblel 141 Brass Ensemble2 142 Brass Ensemble2LP 143 Voice Choir 144 Voice Pop Ooh 145 Voice Pop Ah 146 Doo Voice 147 Doo VoiceLP 148 Strings Ensemble 149 Pizzicato Ensemble 150 Violin 151 Viola 152 Cello amp Contrabass 153 Violin amp Cello 154 Pizzicato 257 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 Steel Guitarl Pick p Steel Guitar Pick m
140. 32 Bank 8 16 Beat CC32 Bank Pop CC32 Bank Ballad Eg EN HEN EX EE MEN EZ EE EE KE EX EX EZ MEE p EN NEUE EX p w W NI NI N NI NI N N N NIN O 9 CO NI AIA BY W N O 2 UJ U1 NJ 5 2 3 NN 5 E Ce EN 17 0 GuitarPop Guitar Guitar Pop 3 jeymei 3 easy rop2 E 3 Pop Groove 3 fmm BowisiBp 8 pon 3 BowPopSE Pop 12 8 T pop Shue r O4 ponn 3 m 38 fp y LL Er MEM a 38 La CS 35 KCN MON 20 Ea 23 0 Modern Ballad Moonlight Ballad 5 organ Bald Blue Ballad 3 fieke Groove Ballad 13 Analog Ballad 2 18 mide 3 waze z 23 JorientalBallad 8 8 Factory data 237 Styles NAAA zm cea ve cna 0 Easy Listening 0 ClubHouse Club House House 0 dead Rock 4 Big Band 40 s 4 Funky Disco 4 Open Rock NE Organ Foxtrot 6 Sister amp Girl 6 Funky Rock Organ Waltz Philly Disco Rock Oldie EIN Quick Step NIN 70 s Disco 1 NEU Surf Rock 35 Argentina tango e pean 35 beyo z ep n 8 8 3 3 3 0 FUNKREB R amp B BUND EE Band raro i fein eto Bd 1 pasemos 3 serenades 4 deser a E 4 freos 3 je 5 mem 5 stow Swing Brash 5 Neres 3 Rhythm plas s Orchestral Swing 5 feoai 5 CON 5 Pingo 3 mm 3 Eu
141. 34 235 236 297 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 292 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 Dist Guitarl Mute Dist Guitar2 Harmo Dist Guitar2 Mutel Dist Guitar2 Mute2 Power Chord Acoustic Bass1 Acoustic Bass2 mf Acoustic Bass2 f E Bass1 Finger E Bass2 P B 1 E Bass2 P B 2 E Bass2 LH Stop E Bass2 RH Stop E Bass2 Harmo E Bass3 p E Bass3 mf E Bass3 f Slap E Bass4 Pick E Bass4 Harmo E Bass4 Slap E Bass4 SlapHar E Bass4 LH Mute E Bass4 RH Mute E Bass Gliss E Bass Noisel E Bass Noise2 Finger Bass 1 Finger Bass 1LP Finger Dass 2 Finger Bass 2LP Finger Dass 3 E Bass Pick E Bass PickLP E Bass Thumb Bass E Bass SlapBassThumb E Bass bLP SlapBass Pull SlapBassThum Fretless Bass Bass Harmonics Bass HarmonicsLP Sitarl Santur SanturLP Tambura TamburaLP Bouzouki BouzoukiLP Ukulele 265 266 207 268 269 270 241 272 2729 274 24 29 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 205 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 M E Oud M E Klarnet M E Kanoun M E Kanoun Tremolo M E Nay Mandolin MandolinLP Banjo BanjoLP Shamisen Koto Harp Mouth Harpl Mouth Harp2 Mouth Harp3 Mouth Harp4 Mouth Harp5 Syn Bass Resol Syn Bass FM1 Syn Bass FM1LP Syn Bass FM2 Syn Bass FM2LP Syn Bass TB RB Saw Bass RB Square Bass Chrom Res Detuned S
142. 4 Single Touch 12 13 Single Touch Setting STS 12 Selecting 12 78 Writing 102 Song Markers 153 Play from disk 78 197 Recording 176 185 Selecting 78 197 Standard MIDI File 231 Song Play mode 146 SongBook 166 173 Sound Editing 94 160 190 Selecting 15 76 Selecting Auto 206 Split 16 Split Point 86 231 Standard MIDI File 146 174 231 STS See Single Touch Setting Style Ending 13 Fill 13 Intro 13 Recording 104 131 Selecting 12 77 Selecting Auto 206 Style Performance 81 Variation 13 Style Performance Selecting see Style Writing 103 Style Play mode 81 103 Style Record mode 104 131 Synchro Start Stop 15 T Tap Tempo 15 Tempo Value section 13 Touch Panel Calibration 211 Track Select 12 Tracks Drum Percussion 93 97 Keyboard tracks 15 81 147 Octave Transpose 15 Sounds 15 Volume 87 155 186 Transpose 15 16 89 Auto Octave 204 Midi In 208 U Upper Volume Link 87 100 USB 226 V Variation 13 Velocity Curve 201 Volume Balance 146 Balance Keyboard Style or Seq 10 22 Balance Sequencer 22 Individual tracks Sequencer 186 Song Play 155 Style Play 87 Master 10 22 146 Address KORG ITALY SpA Via Cagiata 85 60027 Osimo An Italy Web www korgpa com www korg co jp www korg com www korg co uk www korgcanada com www laboitenoiredumusicien com www korg de www ekomusicgroup com www korg es KORG Italy 2007 All rights reserved
143. 6 Touch Panel Calibracion 211 BOOK Git AAPP 7NU 0 E P soe orem ee aaeuuens 168 Fae aa o ci d jore dici go rr eee ae ew bed pra edito 170 Write Global Global Setup dialog box die Custom Liar circa des ies ban posea ee ais 171 Write Global Midi Setup dialog box ae rca 171 Write SC Preset dialog box sees ala B OES soa e EE Du E Ei 172 Delete Help Language dialog box esses un Ii 9 172 Media edit mode 213 PASE Wel oso T TIT OT TT I 173 Storage devices and internal memory 219 Sequencer operating mode 174 Selecting and deselecting files orr esc t Res 213 cvs Me roca ROA 174 File pes A E A O A 2 The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format 174 Media Srt a er eo ee erry ee sis 214 Sequencer Play Main page iic 174 E rU P T PP 214 Entering Record Mode copos paros 176 Page ERE A E Beare BG aaa inis Record mode Multitrack Sequencer page 177 Navigation ton eor tort craneal Od red ded 215 Record mode Step Record page sseseeeeseeeues 179 Ead S2 ssp raa eU PSP PII EOS EN 215 Record mode Backing Sequence Quick Record page 181 ale do daa 218 Record mode Step Backing Sequence page vaca ratas 183 Copy eee ee es Se eee dt e de ao a A a 222 A eee ice gee ecg ke ch hsb teh 186 loco qe 223 Edit page revo SPP 186 FO migi E nsu disini gam m Mixer Tuning
144. 7 ni Volume Gene 3 Pun i 2 Once a song is assigned to Sequencer 1 press the Sequencer 2 area once to select it and a second time to open the Song Select window Select a Song to be assigned to Sequencer 2 and press Select to confirm Type ame ac gu Canyon B eter ded 1 LS CLUB 15 06 97 15 42 Canon 63 65 46 11 21 at f Stereo Grand NightDay l i ETT m no nz E Pinball 3K H3 B8 B5 11 21 H3 88 B6 11 21 pads NENNEN caro oj ENTE C 3 Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press any of the two gt E PLAY STOP buttons to start both Sequencers at the same time SEQUENCER 1 SONG SELECT lt lt gt gt O00da mi SHIFT 4 During playback move the SEQUENCER BALANCE slider to mix between the two Songs BALANCE 5 During playback you may control each Sequencer separately by using the dedicated Sequencer controls 6 Press the relevant li PLAY STOP button to stop the corresponding Sequencer D Hint You don t need to start both sequencers at the same time You can start the first Song then start the second one when the first one is near to the end This way you can use the BALANCE slider to gently crossfade between the end of one Song and the beginning of the follow ing one 60 The SongBook Mixing two Songs The SongBook One of the most powerful features of the Pa500 is the onboard music database that allows you to organize your Styles and
145. 883 888 AP THz THs T d TH5 THE Tar Tas SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Trk S1TrBi P Grand Piano B Piana 121 883 888 i 3 ce ax e e cz i E IRE d o TiS Tin Tii Tid Hi High Gain PERF PERF STS This parameter lets you adjust the high frequencies equalization on each individual track This is a shelving curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Mid Middle Gain PERF PERF9 STS This parameter lets you adjust the middle frequencies equaliza tion on each individual track This is a bell curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Low Gain PPERF PERF STS This parameter lets you adjust the low frequencies equalization on each individual track This is a shelving curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Play Mute icon SONG Track s play mute status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Mixer Tuning EQ Control This page lets you reset or bypass track equalization pro grammed in the previous page Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 and 9 16 and vice versa SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Trk 51Tr01 k Grand Piano B Piana 121 883 886 OI xxx c oo oo a TOS us Tas THE Tar SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Trk 51Tr01 k Grand Piano B Piana Oj nuailo mao 121 883 888 cx cx e c oo ooo L T15 T1H Tii Tiz Tid Track Reset buttons Use these buttons to reset 1 e flatten equalizatio
146. 9 2 o O s I D a lagimriers D S o N 8 N gt j o eae EUN PE A 5 n 2 c ofo gt 2 0 E 5 lt Cx EE m gt 32e rorse D D a 2 E C S gt CD A 5 ct gt Ss Sir s 3 2 a o E 5 2 2 2 3 2 ae ojvo ia lt gt 9 E m N aja m c O j ee n un lt gt D 9 N CD D lt o Ul Alto Sax RX o ul Soprano Pro o N Md o Ul N ul a UI o N o Ul Alto Sax GM M J Uil Tenor Sax GM N gI wni nyt gt NI WMI Ww w N o 5 ZI2 iS lt 2 alo S 2 9 9 21210 gt SIN Sia gt N 3 gt ojs 3 5 d a88 8 8228 8 8 zZ 8 2 8 8 8 8 9 ofl o Eg PIS ojaa a Sle SS a a 4 d iIS IgiIo Pixlelaiivvis5i izzs i in an S s x ojo Oo o o o x lualunlnlolo 2 x DO yw o m oi ct ols SSi sS nlo o 2 x ct mi o g g mio 9 z z gt NI x un x x 9 9ij x x uwiz x vjolo O po CD 2 2 po ie gt 5 NIO oj d nla x ojo X S ojl N N Z w n 0 N gt N CCOO CC32 PC Breathy Alto Sax 3 65 E E aja Laks Laks LAs Laks ee e AEA MECA EE E MEA La La HighlandBagPipes Flute 2 38r e Piccolo GM 121 0 EME EZ Lane EN p EN KG NN NES ME NN NN EE NN EN E ES Folk Sax 65 Baritone Growl 67 65 65 v n n Se 2 218 8 2 any a E e al es 5 u tb sj ol wn alo 2 o o p9 o o Oix 3 m Y 9 IS LL x O Q lt Reed of Power W y 3 A S O Q 5 Q Flute Switch F
147. A PERFORM folder formances inside a SET folder SongBook The SongBook database A SONGBOOK folder inside a SET folder Global The Global All parame A GLOBAL folder ters marked with GBL inside a SET folder through the various chapters are saved in the Global Saving the full memory content You can save the full memory content with a single operation 1 Inserta card into the card drive 2 The full content All of the internal memory is already shown Select it and press Save to confirm the selection The list of files in the card is shown KORG USER p carD Sees Pi Clase 3 Atthis point you can Press the New SET button and create a new SET folder see Creating a new SET folder on page 221 or Select an existing SET folder 4 Press Save to confirm A dialog box appears asking you to select the type of data to save user Style User Sound amp DK User Pad songbook Global Performance In the above dialog box check all data type you wish to save to a card 5 Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort Warning After confirming all data of the selected type in the target folder is deleted Media edit mode Save 219 Saving all data of a specified type In addition to the above you can save all data of a specified type by selecting the corresponding folder 1 Inserta card into the card drive 2 The full content All of the i
148. ASS ALCI ACCS ACL Volume Here you can change the volume of each individual Style track This mix is saved into each Style Performance and Performance and can change when choosing a different Style Grouped Style tracks gt GBL These special sliders control several Style tracks at the same time Virtual slider track volume MPERF PERF sTs Virtual sliders are a graphical display of each track s volume Touch the track s area to select a track and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the value or touch and drag it in the dis play Hint You can change the volume of all Keyboard or Style tracks at once by using the Assignable Slider Select a track of the same type of the tracks whose volume you want to change e g the Upper 1 track to modify all Keyboard tracks Then keep the SHIFT button pressed and move the Assignable Slider See ASSIGNABLE SLIDER on page 10 Track status icons gt PERF PERF STS Play mute status of the current track Select the track then press the track area again to change its status a Track names Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Under the sliders a label for each track is shown Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between the various track views DR PERC Grouped Drum and Percussion tracks Grouped Accompaniment tracks Bass Style track LOWER UPPER1 Upper tracks Volume for these tracks is a global o
149. Backing Sequence Quick Record mode Recording a new Song There are several ways to create a Song on the Pa500 The easiest and fastest is to use the Styles to record what you are playing in realtime on the keyboard while the arranger gives you the accompani ment tracks Style Select section Sequencer 1 controls The SEQUENCER button Style Elements Style Controls Entering Backing Sequence Quick Record mode 1 Press the SEQUENCER button to switch to the Sequencer mode MODE STYLE PLAY SONG PLAY SEQUENCER SOUND SEQUENCER Er pais 20 o o e oO oo AS Ia NEWSONG i Meter did H 1 DEMO L Locate meas L Metro Tempo Fe After pressing the SEQUENCER button the main page of the Sequencer mode appears 2 Press the RECORD button to open the Song Record Mode Select dialog box RECORD Current Song HEWSONG Multitrack Sequencer C Backing Sequence t Quick Record C3 Step Backing Sequence Press the RECORD button to open the Song Record Mode Select dialog box Recording a new
150. Bx wr o o9 persen Bx aa Reedee oodwnd 3 Per 1 e eese Bx EC Wr seashore Js EN EF synth m E FX EA E ao a a a a EEA a7 a INN IZ INCIERTA ICON 7 E ETC CT wr 9 IC CTN wr 1 5 ETE x wr 5 jwse a TN s 5 wwe EP 39 usd Eae morns mh 39 perea mh 7 3 EN 9 roo o ro ro a EA 121 E a EA i EN EM 92 93 93 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 97 97 97 97 97 97 97 97 01 SFX gt Lures SS wr wee mh E 9 39 seems mx E wn 9 je store CCT E wr 0 pde mer een 5 Doo rar tos seme outer Lx 3 9 ansias Ra 35 umen sme xn indian res ea GE 9 UM Telephone dsm _ Ig EE NUM 3 a ES 121 LN IRM CN x me wr 5 3 meo eer wr s M emm eem o wor oe sese jer SFX SFX SFX SFX SFX SFX FX FX Factory data 255 Sounds Program Change order LL IL LLL 256 Factory data Drum Kits Drum Kits The following table lists all Pa500 Factory Drum Kits in order of Bank Select Program Change number Legend The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely select the Drum Kits CC00 Control Change 0 or Bank Select MSB CC32 Control Change 32 or Bank Select LSB PC Program Change CICALA co IO AU afo o poseen we s 5 jwemwdkrmd O wo e remeod SS AE Du o 7 www af o s wes wm o
151. CV1 To Song This non editable parameters shows the name of the Standard MIDI File to be generated The automatically assigned name will be the same of the exported Chord Variation From CV Use this pop up menu to select one of the available Chord Varia tions from the current Pad Execute After selecting a Chord Variation press this button to export it as a Standard MIDI File A standard file selector will appear Select the target device and directory then press Save Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the page menu Press a com mand to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command Write Pad Delete Pad Track Overdub Step Recording Exit from Record Write Pad When done recording or editing a Pad and you want to save the changes select this command to open the Write Pad dialog box and save the Pad to the internal memory See Write Pad dialog box on page 145 for more information Undo Only available in the Main page of the Pad Record mode and in some Pad Edit pages While in Record mode cancels the latest recorded data and restores the previous situation Selected a sec ond time it restores recorded data again Redo function Delete Pad Track Only available in the Main page of the Pad Record mode Select this command to delete the Pad track Overdub Step Recording Only available in the Main page of the Pad Record m
152. Copy the old i Series data into a card and insert the card into the card drive of the Pa500 2 Press MEDIA to go to the Media mode Select the Load page if needed 3 While in the Load page select the device containing the i Series data from the Device pop up menu 4 If you are reading an 130 file select the SET folder and press the Open button in the display 5 Select the STY folder 6 At this point you can load the whole STY folder or open it and select a single Style To load the whole folder press the Load button in the dis play If it contains more than 16 Styles they will be loaded into the USER banks sequentially otherwise you will be prompted to select one of the two USER Style banks in memory Once the target bank is selected press Load to load the bank The Are you sure message will appear Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort To load a single Style press Open in the display to open the STY folder Since a conversion will be started at this point please wait some seconds for the operation to be completed Select the Style to load then press Load You will be prompted to select a target location in memory Once the target location is selected press Load to load the Style The Are you sure message will appear Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort Note Loading a whole SET folder from an 130 file may take very long You are advised to load a single bank or a
153. Crash Crash Reverse Orchestra Crash Ride Jazz 393 394 395 396 397 398 299 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 Ride Edgel Ride Edge2 HiHat Closed 88 HiHat Open 88 Cowbell 88 Tom 88 Conga 88 Crash Tom Tom Brush Tom Process Electric Tom Flexatone Tambourine Agogo Bell Factory data 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 42 Multisamples Marc Tree Marc TreeLP Cowbell Click Temple Blocks Orchestra BD Castanet Taiko Djembe Open Djembe Mute Chinese Gong Snare Ghost RainStick Empty 259 260 Factory data Drum Samples Drum Samples The following table lists all Pa500 Fac tory Drum Samples Sample amy o CTN E E E 7 T gt 2 T z T z7 T n 0 gt x gt x T 7 r E 5 E a 0 5 3 5 5 KO remy H o1 59 DN 9 pot o1 e L1 e L1 s o1 9 s o1 6 Lm pue L1 s S s Lg xe Long qm ACI m ot a E T 3 3 Inu o1 7 a o1 ra p pue pot s L1 s 1 e o 9 o1 w 1 89 L1 s L1 sw o1 89 o1 9 o1 9 9 NENNEN L1 pt e t s o1 9 t pw L1 s to 2 po ee 2 I e 2 pe 2 m 2 s 2 os 2 aw 2 pe 2 m 2 m NN EIN ES Ingo Family 5 y 5 5 z z z s n 7 n n n E 7 n 5 Z s s s s z z zs s 113
154. DI OUT The connected device must receive on the MIDI channel associated with this track on the Pa500 see MIDI MIDI Out Chan nels on page 209 A track set to this status does not play the internal sounds therefore saving polyphony Instead of the assigned Sound name the E aaa bbb ccc gt indicator is shown on a track s area in the Main page 121 883 HBHH Iu Control Change Program Change area This indicator begins with a remark saying the track is in External E mode and continues with a strings of transmitted Control Change and Program Change data This will let you know what the track is transmitting to the MIDI OUT In the following example CC 0 is the Control Change 0 Bank Select MSB CC 32 is the Con trol Change 32 Bank Select LSB PC is the Pro gram Change 121 803 898 N CC 0 value CC 32 value PC value When touching the Sound area the numeric key pad appears instead of the Sound Select window You can enter the Control Change Program Change bundle shown above separating the three parts with a dot Both The track plays both the internal sounds and an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT Type PPERF PERF sTS Drum Percussion track Set a track to Drum mode if you wish to separately adjust the volume and set a different output for each percussive family of the assigned Drum Kit Sound See Track Controls Drum Volume on page 93 Drum Note Tracks set
155. E ur CI E ETA 3 IC E CTC Ec CI mmu ET NX 3 Sweeping EP 12 5 2 2 3 2 7 3 5 2 3 2 moa A Bank Accordion emner o 3 4 e TICO fee e wmm E S ET BweMum O AAA ME PC 12 5 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 12 12 12 12 15 15 12 Cassotto Or Tune Cassotto NorTune 121 14 ww s ws French Musette Lar 18 ww 1 af e E Fisa 16 8 EEN a Fisa 16 4 21 Musette Clar 21 Musette 1 121 21 Musette 2 324 21 ws m woe pa 121 23 a 1 121 24 21 ws 2 Voices Musette PC 21 21 21 21 21 23 23 21 21 21 3 Voices Musette Detune Accordion Fisa Master W UI I Fisa Tango e m gt lt cc o A O oio ET y X lt o r S A gt gt 8 x lt 09 o5 ped O D ec A G 3 ols a alo o 5 N SPIE 4 4 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt AJAJ 7 A A amp t x nini inil n nalal a ee ee ey e ola a ie a Nala al S o 9 9 S9 arabe O leo 2 4 Sos a 8 5 5 RIS S S lt 3 3 Ww N C vir Ol alaj z o Ee 9e me S10 zu E P alo ud 4 4 NIO gt lt gt A A oO gt gt L gt AISI ATA A a a a a 2 ESAS ala z y lo lEg g 2 zZm uov wuv o 9 v ol 00 go ive Qo ua un 23 23 23 2 23 to n 3 23 9 Q y 3 A Pal e e am D e BA E D o o olg N D 5 co D Olo a o 5 N D ala D o E Az e n C LA ols O O Q 3 S nm t e gt AIN U tb c c c un
156. E Sends the Song Position back to measure 1 1 e the beginning of the Song In Sequencer mode if you set a Locate Measure other than 1 the Song Position goes back to that measure see Locate measure on page 175 gt M PLAY STOP Starts or stops the Song from the current Song Position SHIFT In Song Play mode pressed while keep ing SHIFT pressed starts both sequencers at the same time Y SEQUENCER BALANCE slider In Song Play mode this slider balances the volume of the two on board sequencers When fully on the left only Sequencer 1 can be heard When fully on the right only Sequencer 2 can be heard When in the middle both sequencers play at full volume This slider does not work in Style Play or Sequencer mode Front panel 13 B INTRO 1 3 COUNT IN buttons PERF PERF SB These buttons turn the corresponding Intro on After pressing one of these buttons start the Style and it will begin with the selected intro The INTRO LED automatically goes off at the end of the intro Press them twice LED blinking to let them play in loop and select any other Style element Fill Intro Variation to exit the loop Note Intro 1 plays a short sequence with different chords while Intro 2 plays on the latest recognized chord Intro 3 is usually a one bar Count In ENDING 1 3 buttons MPERF PERF SB While the Style is running these three buttons trigger an End ing and stop the Style Pr
157. E ES ER LCD ES Bia BRIH Press the T symbol to open the Text Edit dialog box Use the and gt Press Clear to delete the buttons to move the whole string Delete to cursor delete just a single charac ter Press Symbol to enter special charac ters Use alphabetical characters to enter text Use the SHIFT but ton to switch between capitals and small charac ters When done press OK to confirm the new name or Cancel to abandon all changes Selecting and saving Performances 43 Saving your settings to a Performance 4 Select a Bank and Performance location in memory where you would like to save the Performance Write Performance Stereo Grand To TEMPO VALUE To select the target Bank and Performance location select the Bank and Performance Perf Bank MESE parameters and use the ok TEMPO VALUE dial Wi Stereo Grand A Ld Performance A e Y Cancel Set of banks 1 8 corresponds to the top row of Performances on the control panel Ol 9 16 to the lower row PERFORMANCE ai Stereo Grand The selected Perfor Write Performance highlighted Press a LR a ZA to select it E Piano amp StringsL Atinosph 1ang rings ow mos3pne re B Stereo Grand To Performance B1 Stereo Grand Note A Performance r Piano amp ipa j Electric Grand P Em can be saved to an ae Empty location An fctave Pi Piano
158. EG Decay Time 127 Drum Coarse Tune 0 127 Drum Fine Tune 0 127 Drum Volume 0 127 Drum Panpot 127 Drum Rev Send FX 1 0 a 64 No change to the original parameter s value b dd Drum Instrument No 0 127 CO C8 127 Drum Mod Send FX 2 427 Note These controls are reset when stopping the Song or selecting a new Song Song Play operating mode 147 NRPN Sound parameters Keyboard Pad and Sequencer tracks The Pa500 is equipped with a double sequencer Each Song can play a maximum of 16 tracks for a total of 32 sequencer tracks In addition you can play the keyboard with four additional Key board tracks Upper 1 3 and Lower You can edit the Volume and Play Mute status for these tracks on the main page of the Song Play mode see illustration below While in Song Play mode you can still select Performances or STSs from the latest selected Style To select a different set of STSs you must first select a different Style SONG PLAY gu Canyon E Press here to ee ee 120 select a Style A titen song park pad Pad T7128 porre oY geter oc E Meter d d H gt Strings Ens 2 GH ef War EuuBest SSS b Easy Beat 1 1159 mute 5 no chord B t Grand Piano Press here to select a Per formance Keyboard track s vol LOWER UPPERS UPPERS UPPER ume and Play Mute status In addition to Keyboard tracks selecting a different Style or SongBook entry may ch
159. EMBLE button to open the Ensemble page This is a fast shortcut to recall this page The longer would have been entering the Edit mode by pressing the MENU button then going to the Ensemble page ENSEMBLE SHIFT O STYLE PLAY Keyboard Ensemble Trk Drum Jazz Kit RXZ B Drum amp Perc Ensemble n Black Mate velocity 2 Ensemble Trk Assign MIO OWER UPPERS UPPERS UPPER LOWER UPP Kb Key Control J Velocitu While the Ensemble parameter is selected use the TEMPO VALUE dial to select one of the available harmo nization types TEMPO VALUE 5 When the right harmonization type has been selected press the EXIT but ton to go back to the main page STYLE PLAY MT A no chord B at Easy Beat 1 Grand Piano I o STYLE PLAY Keyboard Ensemble LCY Trk Drum Jazz Kit RXZ B Drum amp Perc 128 066 034 EXIT Ensemble Twe gt Mate velocity 2 OR FERC ACCOMP BASS Kb Key Control l Velocitu Ensemble Trk Assign MI OWER lPPER3 UPPERS UPPER LOWER LPP While in an edit page press EXIT to go back to the main page of the current operating mode t Dark Pad i Ls s Dub EP Dun dina mike Wer MIT 38 c 4 m m A AS ar i M 1 am paje EAC KING UBI t Perf Stereo Gra P l 3 Eg ACCOMP BASS L ER UPPER UPPERi ole x 6 Press the ENSEMBLE button again to turn its LED off The automatic har monization will be turned off ENSEMBLE O So
160. EMORY SB This button turns the Lower and Chord Memory functions on or off Go to the Preferences Style Preferences edit page Style Play mode see page 99 to decide if this button should be a Chord Memory only or a Lower Chord Memory button When it works as a Lower Chord Memory Note This function can be automatically activated by playing the keyboard harder See Velocity Control on page 99 On The sound on the left of the split point and the chord for the automatic accompaniment are kept in memory even when you raise your hand from the keyboard Off The sound and chords are released as soon as you raise your hand from the keyboard 12 Front panel SHIFT You can jump to the Style Play gt Style Preferences page by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing the MEMORY button MANUAL BASS PERF gt STS STS This button turns the Manual Bass function on or off Note When you press the MANUAL BASS button the Bass track volume is automatically set to its maximum value The volume is automatically set back to the original value when the MANUAL BASS button is deactivated On The automatic accompaniment stops playing apart for the Drum and Percussion tracks and you can manually play the Bass track on the Lower part of the keyboard You can start the automatic accompaniment again by pressing the ACCOMP button Off The bass track is automatically played by the Style O TOUCHVIEW GRAPHICAL DISPLAY
161. ENCER BALANCE slider is completely moved to the left toward Sequencer 1 BALANCE 2 Press the gt E PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER 1 section to start playback awm ze is e SONG PLAY no chord A E Canyon Grand Pi u 3 O rand Piano P qM EERE nj g 1128 El p Strings es redd M Pert Stereo Grand t Analog Strings 2 e us v After pressing the D Bl PLAY STOP button the n button s LED turns on and the measure counter begins to show the current measure number LOWER UPPERS UPPERZ UER Juke i Lyrics PS TT i me i E Mark 3 Use the SEQUENCER 1 control section to control the Song s playback Press the PLAY STOP button to stop the Song Press the HOME button to at the current position Press it again to move the Song to measure 1 resume playback SEQUENSER 1 SONG SELECT lt lt gt gt Ya Press the REWIND button once to go tothe Press the FAST FORWARD button once to go beginning of the current measure Keep it to the beginning of the next measure Keep it pressed to go back several measures pressed to go forward several measures 4 When you want to stop the song and go back to the first measure press the HOME button Cp Note In any case the SEQUENCER 1 SONG SELECT lt lt gt gt When the Song is sequencer will automati 5 gt On stopped the LED on the cally stop when the end C Bon PLAY STOP button goes o
162. Edit window Current Style Non editable Settings are saved in one of the four STSs belong ing to the current Style This parameter displays the name of the parent Style STS Target STS location The name of the STS currently saved at the target location is shown Use the TEMPO VALUE dial to select a different location Write Style Performance dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Style Performance item from the page menu Here you can save Style track settings to the Style Performance of the current Style Write Style Performance To Style Bank 41 5816 Beat Current Style B5 Easy Beat 1 Parameters saved in the Style Performance are marked with the PERF symbol through the user s manual SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the STYLE buttons to open this window Style Bank Non editable Bank of Styles the current Style belongs to Each bank corresponds to one of the STYLE buttons Current Style Non editable Name of the current Style Write Global Style Play Setup dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Global Style play Setup item from the page menu Here you can save various Style Pref erence settings see Preferences Style Play Setup on page 100 that are saved to the Global file Write Global Style Play Setup Write Global Style Play Setup to memory Parameters saved in the Style Play Setup area of the Global are mark
163. F STS ini Set this parameter to trigger one of the following functions sim ply by playing louder with your left hand When playing with a velocity value higher than the value set by the Velocity Control Value parameter see page 100 the selected function will be activated Velocity Control Note This function only works when the SPLIT LED is turned on It does not work when it 1s turned off Off The function is turned off Break Fill In 1 Fill In 2 When playing with a velocity higher than the trigger value on the Lower track the selected ele ment is automatically triggered Start Stop You can start or stop the Style by playing harder on the keyboard Memory When playing with a velocity higher than the trigger value the Memory function will be acti vated or deactivated Scale Mode PERF STS il This parameter defines which tracks are affected by the selected alternative scale see Scale on page 90 Keyboard tracks The scale will only affect Keyboard tracks Upper tracks The scale will only affect Upper 1 3 Keyboard tracks All Tracks The scale will affect all tracks Keyboard Style Pads PERF STS itl This parameter sets the way the MEMORY button works Memory Mode Chord When its LED is on the MEMORY button keeps the recognized chord in memory When its LED is off the chord is reset when raising the hand from the keyboard Chord Lower When its LED is on the MEMORY button keeps th
164. FX You can copy a single or all four effects between Styles Perfor mances STSs and Songs To do this choose the Copy FX and Paste FX commands from the page menu of the Style Play Song Play or Sequencer modes To copy a single effect 1 Select the source Song Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the single effect you want to copy FX A FX B FX C or EX D or go to the Effects gt FX Select page to copy all four effects This may be useful if you want to copy two or three of the four effects into different Performances Styles or STSs 2 Choose the Copy FX command from the page menu 3 Select the target Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the single effect you want to paste FX A FX B FX C or FX D 4 Choose the Paste FX command from the page menu To copy all four effects 1 Select the source Performance Style or STS then go to the Effects gt FX Select page to copy all four effects 2 Choose the Copy FX command from the page menu 3 Select the target Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the Effects gt FX Select page 4 Choose the Paste FX command from the page menu Exit from Record Only available in Record mode Select this command to exit the Record mode and go back to the Main page of the Sequencer Play mode see Sequencer Play Main page on page 174 197 Sequencer operating mode Write Global Sequencer Setu
165. Filter page and uncheck the filters for the event types you wish to see in the display see Event Edit Filter on page 119 for more information 6 Press the Event Edit tab to go back to the Event Edit page 7 Usethe Track pop up menu to select the track to edit see Track pop up menu on page 117 8 Thelist of events contained in the selected track inside the Chord Variation selected on step 2 will appear in the dis play Some events on the beginning of the Chord Varia tions as well as the EndOfTrk event marking its ending point cannot be edited therefore appearing in grey 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 Scroll though the various events by using the scrollbar Select an event to be edited by touching it in the display This is usually a note that you can edit H 861 681 6688 Note F 2 5l H 666 aa aas For more information on the event types and their val ues see Event Edit Event Edit on page 117 Edit the event Select the M parameter Use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the event s position Select the Type parameter You may use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the event type as well as its Value 1 and Value 2 f a Note event is selected select the Length parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the event s length You may use the Go Meas command to go to a different measure see Go Meas on page 118 As described in step 4 you
166. Global Performance SongBook Sounds Style GLOBAL PAD PERFORM SOUND STYLE Select the folder containing the type of data you are looking for and press Open to open the selected folder A list of User banks appears Type Een E USERB2 STY 250E 15 46 47 18 42 266k 15 06 67 18 43 KORG USERT MuShow SET STV LE F cano Select the bank you are looking for and press Load to con firm the selection A dialog box appears asking you to select one of the available User banks in memory USERHB1 STY ser o In the page above the previously selected Style bank will be loaded into the bank 1 USERI button in memory The existing Styles in memory will be deleted and overwritten Select the target bank and press OK to load the source bank Warning After confirming all User data contained in the bank in memory is deleted Loading a single item You can load a single User item with a single operation 1 Insert a card into the card drive Its content will appear in the display 2 If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder select this latter and press the Open button to open it Press the Close button to go back to the parent folder 3 Select the SET folder containing the data you wish to load and press Open to open the SET folder A list of User data appears Global Performance SongBook Sounds Style GLOBAL PAD 15 66 47 18 33 PERFORM 15 66 47 18 33 SO
167. IN mh Ew IRC ICI CCT E MENE CN IZ INEA eme CCT MEN CI wr 3 D Renown remote Ge V v pmo pem fere xr 1 ws Kms Emme xm 9 ws pos Pipes GM Woodwind v rar 1 ws Were Woodwind xm 2 108 uitean Bagtines Woodwind xm 3 Ws Hsandieghpe Woodwind i wr 9 we rte cw snose voa v xm 9 Wi EII YWeodvind v wr 0 gem 7 Wexem pump pese Wee V V v y p p p p NE pu EM p ue p p un p p p p E MEN NS Donum um e A PA A A NE NEG A AA A NE NE NES NN NN E NEN NEN NEN EN gt p Ee EM a 121 ws a lt 35 Mesue mh 35 partene mh Eu EN ps CN KENN ney p NN E 5 m 2 Tz ea Gamelan ER Per 3 m2 jewteemar Eae wn 9 ws Wwe formara Y xm o f na Bedbumw feran Y Paar 1 14 Wemses fero xm o Ws fwoodbioccem Drama Pere Y Par 1 Ws eaes oromere Y xm o e wkebumew primar Y Lum 1 ne eoncer assorum forum are 5 xm 9 7 Meederoncw oromere Y Lm 1 M7 Meoderom2 formere Y a 7 reverse tom formere xm 9 108 Synth Ovum antrum a Perc v Lm 3 We revesesnare marec xm 9 M5 Reese Gmbatcm Drum a er Y o ar 1 ps eeenses frum ares mr 79 peeso pomar RC ef EE EIA z Ew 1 fear carnoso x EN O IO IE 9 fea eric Yuta a e ion ver modulation fan ro e preath nose
168. LAY sno chord gt G mode you can pre select M songs the Songs to be assigned Ted om to both sequencers This way you will be ready to H Meter ded M start them as soon as you switch to Song Play button the main page of the T PEE E Easy Bea gt Grand Piano Song Play mode appears T Anm F CEP Is 94 LOWER UPPERS UPPER UPPERI ESEZ EA EA Arz Ni c 4 m K L E E TS Mc B m i Bco Lyrics Volume fae i z Mark BACKING P dee i28 LOWER UPPERS UPPER2 UPPER1 Name socie Jp res Jl sos DR PERC ACCOMP E BASS Volume The Songs area of the Style Play main page 2 Press the Sequencer 1 area to open the Song Select window Hint As an alterna SEQUENCER 5 Selecti Toe IET EN 52 ate tive you can open the DEN canyon id Song Select window by pressing the SONG pe guste 12 96 12 SELECT button in the My Friend 01 08 06 19 15 SEQUENCER 1 section on the control panel no chard B t Grand Piano t Dark Pad um ILU ug My Show 15 66 47 15 37 c c m 3 E WT fem Pew eu E M Perf Stereo Grand gt Analog add SEQUENCER 1 OO Pinball B5 H3 B7 11 82 gt On 1 SEQUE lt lt gt gt LOL SONG SELECT N lt lt A KORG USER QUI Volume Gea SONG SELECT m 54 Song Play Selecting a Song to play 3 Scroll through the list and select the Song to play The selected Song is highlighted Press a Song s na
169. Latch Damper Holds the recognized chord until the pedal is released and sustains the tracks where the Damper has been turned on Assignable parameters 271 List of Assignable Pedal and Assignable Slider functions List of Assignable Pedal and Assignable When the pedal is pressed affected notes on Upper tracks are bent down Slider functions according to settings for the Pitch Bend on the same tracks When the pedal is released notes return to the normal i a O dede The following functions can be assigned to a continuous pedal Time parameter see Glide on or to the Assignable Slider page 201 Standard FX controllers Rotary SpkrFastslow Keyboard expression Text Page Up These options let you move to the previ Joystick X Joystick right ous or next page when reading a text Text Page D ds oan file loaded with a Song see Text files Joystick X Joystick left loaded with Standard MIDI Files on Joystick Y Joystick forward a a re as text files associated to a SongBook d soin Joystick PACTA entry on page 172 Upper VDF Cutoff Filter cutoff for Sounds assigned to the SongBook Next Moves to the next SongBook entry in the Upper tracks selected Custom List Upper VDF Resonance Filter resonance for Sounds assigned to ela FX CC12 Ctl Standard FX controllers Same functions of the control panel but FX CC13 Ctl tons with the same name Pad Volume With this function assigned y
170. MSB CC32 Control Change 32 or Bank Select LSB PC Program Change Bank Sound Performance Select button Bank Piano pau perse pem er qe EXE neg n ss Piano amp Strings 121 7 0 E Grand Piano GM 21 0 2 Honky Tonk GM ar p oo qb 3 Harpsi KeyOff RX 121 3 6 BEIM CREE N SU AcousticPiano GM 1 0 0 po qos ES MENE pat O Ee AN ON NM A E e EUREN px o A pergo p pur ESER EEES E NN NCNE MEE EA ETE SR MEA EN O CA BECA Es que EE AN Jazz Piano Rock Piano Piano amp Pad M1 Piano Honky Wide Harpsi 16 RX Clav Wah RX Ac Piano Wide Ac Piano Dark E Grand Wide Piano Pad 1 2000 s Piano 90 s Piano Harpsi Octave E E NUN LEON E NUN LEON E EA EN EN EA CON RE EC ERI E ECO ON A ELM NN EN NE dE EN ON Lo pe prs Pulse Clav Bright PianoWide Piano Pad 2 Chorus Piano Piano amp Vibes Piano Layers Harpsichord GM Harpsi Wide Harpsi Korg Clav Snap Sticky Clav Bank E Piano Club E Piano Vintage EP Studio EP Dyno Tine EP Classic Tines Classic Wurly Vibraphone GM Marimba GM Thin E Piano Pro Dyno EP Pro Stage EP E Piano 1 GM Stereo Dig EP M ees EE RE owy AA A ane eo NE MONEO 334 as ae a Te 9 mu eme A E egend AA emp EN CIN PhantomTine S pawn S ES ON CIN mss CTI E CIN wee CT E ETE NN CI CTO E ET CAC Es NETA wowe o fef Marimbawide AA sao AA pw NN EN ICE 3 EJ Bde Nc CIN Dum NN CIN Steelroms a Wamseb AA d E NET EIC
171. Mi 66i B4 ph Hote M ama da 193 Lr Track 18 bo Catch Position Position of the event expressed in the form aaa bb ccc aaa is the measure bb is the beat ccc is the tick each quarter beat 384 ticks You can edit this parameter to move the event to a different posi tion You can edit a position in either of the following ways a select the parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the value or b select the parameter then touch it again the numeric key pad will appear Enter the new position by dialing in the three parts of the number separated by a dot Zeroes at the beginning can be omitted as well as the least important parts of the number For example to enter position 002 02 193 dial 2 2 193 to enter position 002 04 000 dial 2 4 to enter position 002 01 000 simply dial 2 Type Type of the event shown in the display To edit it select the param eter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change its value Value 1 and 2 Values of the event shown in the display Depending on the selected event the value may change This parameter also shows the non editable End Of Track marking when the end of the track is reached Here are the events contained in ordinary tracks 1 16 Aftt Mono Channel Aftertouch value E PAft Note to which the Aftertouch is Poly Aftertouch value applied we Ds nose Pros Bed Am And here are the even
172. N Square AA enome SSS women EC AIN CIA 5 7 12 13 2 5 12 13 2 5 2 5 7 2 3 5 7 5 7 2 2 2 3 5 7 12 Factory data 245 Sounds Bank order Mm i e Lead Saw 2 2 E 5 5 Lead Saw Pulse Lead Double Saw Seq Analog Power Saw Octo Lead Seq Lead Phat Saw Lead Glide Lead Fire Wave Rezbo 82 83 Calliope GM Chiff GM Charang GM Wire Lead KCN NNI EA ECA KCN KCN ICH KCN KCN EC CUN EN EOS KCN KM KCN KCN EZ ECKEN MEE NE EN KCN MEM NE EME ECNNE EME KCN E EIA NE EM KCN EE KCN E Sync Kron 3 Metallic Rez N N Brian Sync N Arp Twins LoFi Ethnic Fifths Lead GM Bass amp Lead GM Soft Wrl NI N N os 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 87 88 88 a N N Electro Lead Rich Lead NI N N 2 2 Express Lead N HipHop Lead Square Bass Big amp Raw Cat Lead OB Lead A Leadload New Age Pad GM NI N N N N Arp Angeles N Power Synth Polysynth GM a N N Reso Sweep NI N Digital PolySix Noisy Stabb Mega Synth Bowed Glass GM Metallic Pad GM 92 93 93 95 Cosmic Dark Element Caribbean Crystal GM Brightness GM Motion Raver Band Passed N Pan Reso N 38 55 55 o o N N Wild Arp Flip Blip Moon Cycles 102 n n n T a z y l
173. Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top note of the key board range to quantize If you select the same note as the Bot tom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum track Note These parameters are available only when a Drum track is selected Song Edit Transpose Here you can transpose the Song a track or a part of a track SEQUENCER Edit LCY Transpose Track Lb Track 18 Value MM Start Tick 881 881 888 End Tick 461 841 192 Bottom Note C 1 Top Note G9 B t After setting the various parameters press Execute to start the operation Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected apart for Drum tracks Track 1 16 Selected track Value Transpose value 127 semitones Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to transpose If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to transpose If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single note or a single percus sive instrument in a Drum track Song Edit Velocity Here you can change the Velocity value for the notes An Advanced mode is available allowing you to select a velocity curv
174. OMP BASS LOWER UPPER UPPER UPPER STS area Volume Sub Scale Panels To switch between Normal view Keyboard tracks grouped Style tracks and Style view individual Style tracks use the TRACK SELECT button See Style Tracks view page and Volume panel starting from page 83 Page header This line shows the current operating mode transposition and recognized chord STYLE PLAT no chord Bi Operating mode Master Transpose Recognized name in semitones chord Operating mode name Name of the current operating mode PERF gt PERFSY fgg Master transpose value in semitones This value can be changed using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel Master transpose Note Transpose may be automatically changed when selecting a different Performance or Style It may also be changed when load ing a Standard MIDI File generated with an instrument of the Korg Pa series To avoid transposing the Master Transpose is locked by default If you want to lock or unlock it change the Master Transpose Lock parameter s status see General Controls Lock on page 203 then write the Global to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 212 Q Jg c Q re Q Q cc 82 Style Play operating mode Main page Normal view Recognized chord Displays the recognized chord when you play a chord on the keyboard If no chord abbreviation is shown it means the ACCOMP LED i
175. Octave Transp a Chord 2 Midi Channel Off Lower Octave Transp A Midi In Velaciti Value Marmal EEN Midi In Midi Gut c Midi In Controls Midi In Octave Transpose gt GBLV ic Use this parameter to determine if the Octave Transpose is applied also to notes received on the MIDI IN or USB port On Notes received on the MIDI IN or USB port are transposed according to the Octave Transpose setting for each track Off Data received on the MIDI IN or USB port are not transposed Midi In Mute Unmute gt GBL ic Use this parameter to determine if a muted track can still play data received via MIDI On No data received via MIDI on a muted track can be played by Pa500 Off Data received via MIDI on a muted track can still play on the Pa500 Chord 1 Midi Channel gt GBLMd Chord 2 Midi Channel gt GBLMd Notes entering these channels are sent to the Chord Recognition engine There are two separate Chord channels This is very useful when you must send chords to Pa500 on two different channels like with some MIDI accordions Upper Octave Transp Transpose GBLMs Octave transposition of data received on the MIDI IN for the Upper tracks For example if you select the 1 value a received C4 will play a C5 on the Pa500 This parameter may be useful to many MIDI accordion players whose MIDI interface may transmit on an unexpected octave Lower Octave Transp Transpose p GBLM Octave transposition of data re
176. P button you can record a keyboard intro with no Style playing After a count in see Metro Metro nome on page 182 you can start recording Play a solo intro then start the auto accompaniment by pressing the START STOP button By pressing the START STOP button you can start the Style right at the beginning of the Song Since you can use any Style control you could start with the usual combinations INTRO ENDING FILL see Selecting and playing a Style on page 45 for more infor mation Note While in Backing Sequence mode you can t record the SYNCHRO TAP TEMPO RESET MANUAL BASS ACCOMPANIMENT VOLUME controls Play your music While recording you can even change the Style or stop it by pressing START STOP or one of the ENDINGs While recording you can even start the style again by pressing START STOP When finished recording your performance press the gt ll PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER 1 section You will go back to the Sequencer Play Main page see Sequencer Play Main page on page 174 At this point you may press the P ll PLAY STOP but ton in the SEQUENCER 1 section to listen to the new Song You may also edit the Song by pressing the MENU button see Edit menu on page 186 Save the song to a card see Save Song window on page 198 Warning The recorded Song is in RAM Random Access Memory and will be deleted when turning the instrument off switching to the Style
177. PERF STS Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Q Jg c Q re Q Q cc Q6 Style Play operating mode Keyboard Ensemble Ensemble Keyboard Ensemble Ensemble This page lets you program the Ensemble function This func tion harmonizes the right hand melody played in realtime using the recognized chords of the left hand Note The Ensemble function only works 1n Style Play mode with the Split keyboard mode ETA re ee C Trk Brum Jazz Kit Rk B Drum amp Pere 128 888 534 Ensemble Type Ly Black Mate velocity 2 Ensemble Trk Assign OWER UPPERS UPPERS UPPER OR PERC ACCOMP BASS LOWER UPF kbd Bi ey Control J Velocitu Ensemble PERF STS Harmonization type Duet Adds a single note to the melody Close Adds a closed position chord to the melody Open 1 Adds an open position chord to the melody Open 2 As the above but with a different algorithm Block Block harmonization very typical of jazz music Power Ensemble Adds a fifth and an octave to the melody as heard in hard rock Fourths LO Adds a series of fourths under the melody Fourths UP As the above but with notes added over the mel ody Fifths This adds a series of Fifths under the original note Octave Adds one or more octaves to the melody Dual This option adds to the melody line a second note at a fixed interval set with the No
178. Pad i Clare Flange land Fa Empty locations A x3 currently contains no data Press one of the side tabs to Press one of the lower tabs to select a different Performance select a different Performance bank page 5 When you have changed the name to the Performance and selected the target location press OK to save the Performance to memory or cancel to stop the operation Write Performance A Warning Saving a Performance to an T Stereo Grand already used location To overwrites any existing data at that location The old data are lost Make a backup of all Performance B1 Stereo Grand JG your important data KA 44 Selecting and playing Styles Saving your settings to a Performance Selecting and playing Styles Pa500 is an arranger i e a musical instrument providing automatic accompaniments or arrange ments Each arrangement style is called as a consequence Style A Style is made of several Style Elements Intro Variation Fill Ending corresponding to the various sections of a song By selecting Style Elements you can make your playing more varied and musical When selecting a Style a Style Performance with settings for the Style tracks is also selected If the SINGLE TOUCH LED is turned on the first of the four Single Touch Settings STS associated with the Style is selected too and Keyboard tracks pads effects and some other useful parameters are automatically configu
179. Play operating mode chapter and save it by selecting the Write Current Style Performance from the page menu see Write Style Performance dialog box on page 103 Reference 106 Style Record mode Exit by saving or deleting changes Note After a record or edit operation the memory is automati cally reorganized Therefore when you press START STOP there is a delay before you can actually listen to the Style This delay is higher with a Style containing more MIDI events Note While in Record mode the footswitch is disabled On the contrary volume expression type pedals can be used Exit by saving or deleting changes When finished editing you can save your Style in memory or abort any change To save changes select the Write Style command from the page menu see Write Style dialog box on page 129 To abort all changes select the Exit from Record command from the page menu or press the RECORD button to exit from record and return to the main page of the Style Record mode Hint Save often while recording to avoid accidentally losing your changes to the Style Listening to the Style while in Edit mode While you are in Style Record mode you can listen to the selected Chord Variation or to the whole Style depending on the page you are in To select a Chord Variation go to the Main page of the Record Edit mode see Element Style Element and Chord Var Cho
180. Play or Song Play mode or entering Record again If you wish to preserve it save the Song to a card Sequencer operating mode 183 Record mode Step Backing Sequence page Record mode Step Backing Sequence page The Step Backing Sequence mode allows you to enter single chords to create or edit the Style Chord Acc part of a Song This mode lets you enter chords even if you are not a keyboard player or fix any error made playing chords or selecting Style controls during a Backing Sequence Quick Record recording In this mode you can only edit Songs created using the Backing Sequence Quick Record recording mode When saving a Song created using the Backing Sequence Quick Record recording mode all Chord Acc data is preserved and can be loaded later to be edited again by using the Step Backing Sequence mode While in Sequencer mode press the RECORD button and select the Step Backing Sequence option The Step Backing Sequence window appears B 5EQ Step Record Page menu Event Recorded Heasure ron Style b Easy Beat 1 Performance p Stereo Grand Et Parameters t Tempo 128 Ube ERE pei k Style Element Off Length B Event t Step Heasure Soft transport buttons See Step Backing Sequence procedure on page 185 for infor mation on the record procedure Page menu icon Press the page menu icon to open the menu See Step Backing Sequence page menu on page 185 for more i
181. Press this button to open the context sensitive Help 9 SHIFT With this button held down pressing certain other buttons gives access to a second function PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT section PERF gt STS PERF STS SB Use these buttons to open the Sound Select or Performance Select window and select a Sound or a Performance See Sound Select window on page 76 or Performance Select window on page 76 For a list of available Sounds see Sounds Program Change order on page 248 The leftmost button selects the upper or lower row of Sound or Performance banks Press it repeatedly to select one of the rows Upper LED On Upper row of Sounds or Performances selected Lower LED On Lower row of Sounds or Performances selected A note about Sound banks and names Sounds in banks from PIANO to SEX are standard Sounds the user can t directly modity Sounds in the bank USER are locations where you can load new Sounds from a card or save new or edited Sounds The USER DK bank is where you can load new Drum Kits or save new or edited Drum Kits Each Sound bank contains various pages each with up to eight Sounds Repeatedly press a bank button to cycle between the available pages If you keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the buttons of this section even if you are in Sound Select mode the Write Performance window appears in the display and you can save the current track settings
182. RF Y Non editable Octave transpose of the corresponding track To change the octave transpose use the UPPER OCTAVE buttons or go to the Mixer Tuning Tuning edit page see page 89 Sound bank s icon PERF STS This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to Touch an icon a first time to select the corresponding track detailed information are shown on the Selected Track Info area see above Touch it a second time to open the Sound Select win dow Volume panel Press the Volume tab to select this panel This is where you can set the volume of each track and mute unmute tracks Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between the Normal view Keyboard and grouped Style tracks and the Style Tracks view separate Style tracks The Normal view shows grouped Style tracks Keyboard tracks Track status icon Virtual slider LOWER UPPERS UPPERS UPPER Volume Grouped Style Tracks Changing the volume of the grouped Style tracks Dr Perc Accomp Bass is a global offset When you choose a different Style this offset does not change and the average volume of the Style tracks remains the same Changes are not memorized to a Performance or Style Perfor mance They can be memorized to the Global Style Play Setup i e the preferences of the Style Play mode see Write Global Style Setup on page 101 The Style Tracks view shows the separate Style tracks Y 144 RUH FERC B
183. RUM PERC BRSS RCC1 RCC2 RCC3 ACCA ACCS ame R_ UPPERS UPPER2 UPPER1 DR FERCTACCOMP ERSS teck Allaccompani If PERCIACCOMP BASS chola Volume 2 To set tracks back to the Play status press the Mute icon on the ACCOMP track BASS gt Set the ACCOMP track to Play All accompaniment tracks will return to their original vol umes OR PERC ACCOMP Volume DR FERC ACCOMP BASS Hint When moving 3 To mute unmute each single Style track press TRACK SELECT to switch to the slider of a muted e track the track is auto the Style Tracks view mesa de do ole again 4 Press the TRACK SELECT button again to go back to the Normal view Adding harmony notes to your right hand melody with the ENSEMBLE function Chords played with your left hand may be applied to the right hand melody 1 Press the SPLIT button to split the keyboard The Ensemble function only works in Split mode SPLIT o 52 Selecting and playing Styles Adding harmony notes to your right hand melody with the ENSEMBLE function 2 Press the ENSEMBLE button to turn its LED on ENSEMBLE O 3 Play chords with the left hand and single notes in the right hand according to the chords composed with your left hand Notice how the right hand is automatically harmonized 4 To select a different harmonization style keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the ENS
184. Range Write Style Select this command to open the Write Style dialog box and save the Style to the internal memory See Write Style dialog box on page 129 for more information Undo Only available in Record mode While in Record mode cancels the latest recorded data and restores the previous situation Selected a second time it restores recorded data again Redo function Copy Key Ch Copy Key Chord button Select this command to open the Copy Key Chord dialog box and copy Key Chord settings of the currently selected track to all other tracks of the same Chord Variation or to the whole Style See Copy Key Chord dialog box on page 129 for more infor mation Copy Sound Only available in some edit pages While the Style Element Track Control edit section is selected use this command to open the Copy Sound dialog box and copy all Sounds assigned to the current Style Element tracks to a different Style Element See Copy Sounds dialog box on page 130 for more informa tion Copy Expression Only available in some edit pages While the Style Element Track Control edit section is selected use this command to open the Copy Expression dialog box and copy all Expression values assigned to the current Style Element tracks to a different Style Element See Copy Expression dialog box on page 130 for more infor mation Copy Keyboard Range Only available in some edit pages While the Style Ele
185. SD Reverse SD Hip1 115 SD Hip2 SD Hip3 117 SD Hip4 SD Hip5 SD Hip6 SD Ringy SD Tiny SD Vintage SD Vintage2 SD Vintage3 SD Vintage4 SD Vintage5 SD Vintage6 SD AmbiHop NJ 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 SD Brasser SD Chili SD Whopper Rim Shot p Rim Shot f SideStick Dry SideStick Amb DrumStick Hit Tom2 Hi p Tom2 Hi f Tom2 Mid p Tom2 Mid f Tom2 Low p 142 143 Tom2 Low f Tom2 Floor p Tom2 Floor f 145 Tom3 Hi Tom3 Floor 147 Tom4 Hi Tom4 Low Tom4 Floor 150 Tom5 Hi 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 Tom5 Low Tom Processed Tom Jazz Hi Tom Jazz Floor Tom Brush4 HH1 Closed pp HH1 Closed p HH1 Closed mf HH1 Closed f HH1 Foot mp HH1 Foot mf 162 163 HH1 Open mp HH1 Open mf HH2 Closed pp HH2 Closed p HH2 Closed mp 167 HH2 Closed mf HH2 Closed f HH2 Closed ff 170 HH2 Foot p 165 Factory data 261 Drum Samples Semple family 35 cms EI 3m fonoa mis 6 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 HH2 Foot f HH2 Open p HH2 Open f HH3 Closed1 HH3 Closed2 HH3 Foot HH3 Open1 HH3 Open2 HH3 Sizzle HH4 Closed1 HH4 Closed2 HH4 Foot HH4 FootOpen HH4 Open 185 HH Old Close1 HH Old Open1 HH Old TiteClose HH Old Close2 HH Old Open2 HH House Open1 HH House Open2 HH Hip HH Alpo Close Crash 15 Edge1 Crash 15 Edge2 Crash 17 Edge1 Crash 17 Edge2 Crash 19 Open1 Crash 19 Open2 200
186. SHIFT You can jump to the Style Play gt Ensemble page by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing the ENSEMBLE button B SPLIT PERF gt STS STSS In Style Play Song Play and Sequencer Backing Sequence mode use this button to define how the four Keyboard tracks are posi tioned on the keyboard and how chords are recognized by the arranger Note Even if chords are recognized the ACCOMP LED must be turned on for the accompaniment to play On The Lower track plays below the split point while the Upper 1 Upper 2 and Upper 3 tracks play above it This is called the Split keyboard mode Chords are detected below the split point The number of notes you should play to form a chord is defined by the Chord Recognition Mode parameter see page 99 Off The Upper 1 Upper 2 and or Upper 3 tracks play over the whole keyboard range The Lower track does not play This is called the Full keyboard mode Chords are detected over the full keyboard range You must always play three or more notes to let the arranger recognize a chord see Chord Rec ognition Mode on page 99 SHIFT You can jump to the Style Play gt Key Velocity page by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing the SPLIT button TRANSPOSE MPERF gt PERF Y gt SB These buttons transpose the whole instrument in semitone steps Master Transpose The transposition value is usually shown on the page header in the display STYLE PLAY 5 zna chord B Press both bu
187. SOUND SELECT button on the control panel the next page in the same bank is selected This way you do not need to press one of the corre sponding tabs in the display in order to select a different page Previous Next tabs Scroll the lower tabs to the left or the right when additional tabs are available but cannot be seen in the display Press one of these buttons in the display to select a Sound Unless the Display Hold option is turned on see Display Hold On on page 206 the window automatically closes short after you select a Sound Program Change Program Change number Shown only when the Show Program Change number parameter is turned on in Global mode See page 205 Performance Select window Press the Performance area whereas it appears in the display or one of the PERFORMANCE SELECT buttons on the control panel provided the PERFORMANCE SELECT LED is lit to open the Performance Select window Use the PERFORMANCE SELECT buttons to go directly to the selected bank Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the previous page without selecting any Performance Bank sets Side tabs banks DEE en _ AN PERFORMANCE SELECT Stereo Grand Fiano rane Stereo Grand dion P tr Organ E Piano amp Strings A P1 P2 A DD Lower tabs pages Perfor mances Note Depending on the status of the Auto Performance Sound Select parameter see page 206 a Performance may be
188. STER VOLUME control on the Pa500 or set the Keyboard tracks to the External status see Track Controls Mode on page 190 The Sequencer Any Sequencer s track can drive a channel on an external instru ment To set each tracks MIDI output channel see MIDI MIDI Out Channels on page 209 To hear only the expander s sounds you can lower the MASTER VOLUME control on the Pa500 or set the Song tracks to the External status see Track Controls Mode on page 190 Select the Sequencer 1 or Sequencer 2 MIDI Setup depend ing on the Sequencer you are using on the Pa500 to set the channels as follows Song 1 16 1 16 The Arranger One of the most interesting aspect of MIDI is that you can use your Pa500 to play an external instrument with its onboard arranger Yes its hard to beat the audio quality of Pa500 but you could wish to use that old faithful synth you are still accustomed TO To assign some of Pa500 Style tracks to an external instrument set them to the External status see Irack Controls Mode on page 190 Select the Default MIDI Setup to set the channels as follows this is the default status of Pa500 236 Styles Factory data Factory data Styl es Note You can remotely select Styles on the Pa500 by sending it Bank Select MSB CC 0 Bank Select LSB CC 32 and Program Change messages on the Control channel see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 209 HS CC
189. STY 250K 12 B6 07 11 14 BANKB2 STY 260K 12 06 07 11 14 BANKB3 STY 362K 12 06 07 11 14 BANKB4 STY 302k 12 06 07 11 14 E BANKBS STY 383K 12 06 07 11 14 4 Select the bank to be saved and press Save To to confirm the selection The list of files in the card is shown 3 KORG USER 5 At this point you can e Press the New SET button and create a new SET folder see Creating a new SET folder on page 221 or Select an existing SET folder and press Save to confirm A dialog box appears asking you to select one of the avail able User locations inside the folder Save BANKS 1 STY To KORG USER My Show SET In the above dialog box the previously selected bank of Styles will be saved to the bank User 01 corresponding to the USERI button inside the selected folder Two User banks are available Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort Warning After confirming the same bank in the target folder is deleted Saving a single item You can save a single User item with a single operation Insert a card into the card drive The full content All of the internal memory is already shown Select it and press Open to open it A list of User data types appear each type is a separate folder GLOBAL 15 06 07 16 53 PAD PERFORM SONGBOOK SOUND KORG USERT STRRETUP RLL 23 43 07 18 44 23 43 07 18 44 23 43 07 18 44 23 43 07 18 44 Select the folder containin
190. STYLE REC Edit LCY From Style Eifel Te From Erev b var t To Erev e War From Track n Drum Ta Track n Drum After setting the various parameters press Execute Note If you copy too many events on the same tick the Too many events message appears and the copy operation 1s aborted Note When you copy over an existing Chord Variation Program Change data is not copied to leave the original Sounds unchanged for that Chord Variation From Style Choose this option to select the source Style to copy the track Chord Variation or Style Element from Press the Select button to open the Style Select window and select the source Style Style Record mode 123 Style Edit Copy from Style From To E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the source and target Style Ele ments or Chord Variations Note You can t copy from a Variation to a different Style Element or vice versa because of their different structure All All Style Elements i e the whole Style You can t change the target that is automatically set to All Varl End2 Single Style Element V1 CV1 E2 CV2 Single Chord Variation From To Track Use this parameter to select the source and target track to copy You can double a track to strengthen a pattern All All tracks of the selected Style Style Element or Chord Variation Drum Acc5 Single track of the selected Style Style Element or Chord Varia
191. Select a different track and go on recording the whole Song 10 When finished recording the new Song either press the RECORD button or select the Exit from Record com mand from the page menu see page 197 Warning Save the Song to a card to avoid it is lost when turning the instrument off Note When exiting the Record mode the Octave Transpose is automatically reset to 0 11 If you wish edit the new Song by pressing the MENU but ton and selecting the various edit pages Record mode Step Record page The Step Record allows you to create a new Song by entering sin gle notes or chords to each track This is very useful when tran scribing an existing score or needing a higher grade of detail and is particularly suitable to create drum and percussion tracks To access this page select the Overdub Step Recording or Overwrite Step Recording command from the page menu In Overdub Step Recording mode you will add to existing events while in Overwrite Step Recording mode you will overwrite all existing events Page sub header Page header Note parameters SONG RECORD Overdub Step gt e step Time Meter 4 4 Free Memory 88 Duration 85 amp Velocity Step time a Position Hote RAnoise Mel Dura X 34 Cos CR 4 Buttons Event list See Step Record procedure below for information on the record procedure Page header This line shows the current operating m
192. Song 7 Preparing to record 3 Select the Backing Sequence Quick Record option and press OK to enter the Backing Sequence Record mode B SEU RECORD lt no chord A Current Song HEW SONG Style Easy Beat 1 Kbd Pad Rec Tempo J Ch amp ce Rec Meter Metro orr Trk Upper 1 F Grand Piano B Piano Free Memory 99 C3 Multitrack Sequencer Resolution High Perf Stereo Granc 121 003 006 Bacj4ng Sequence Quick Record Kbd Pad Track C Ste Sequence Cancel After choosing the Backing Sequence Quick Record option the Backing Sequence Record page appears Preparing to record When you enter Backing Sequence Record the most recently used Style is already selected and all tracks are ready to record You could simply start recording as if you were playing in realtime with the Styles However there are some settings that you may wish to edit e If you like adjust any editable parameter in the display Track s status Rec means they are ready Measure counter Neg to record Play means they are recorded ative numbers 2 1 Press the Style param eter or one the STYLE and you can hear them Mute means they cannot be heard are the precount after which you can start recording buttons to open the Style Select window and select a different Style as seen on page 45 Sg Lc b SEU RECORD HT 8 gt Style Easy Beat 1 kbd Pad Rec Tempo J
193. Song Delete Current Track C SHOW 15 06 07 15 43 Save Song solo Track MIDp Altamare 52K 01 08 06 19 33 MD Amore bello 6BK 38 07 96 17 4 Canyon S6K 86 03 07 11 07 KORG USER Overdub Step Overwrite Step Recording Exit from Record After you select the Save song command the Save Song page appears 4 Select a folder where you want to save your Song SEQUENCER 1 Save Song Type a S22 Date 15 06 07 15 42 Use the scroll bar to see all Songs in the list Keep SHIFT pressed and touch the Up Down arrow to scroll to the next previous alphabetic sec tion As an alternative you can use the DIAL If a Song is selected high lighted it will be overwritten If no Song is selected a new Song file will be created on the target device To deselect a selected Song press anywhere else in the Song list Device menu KORG USER Ly CARD Press the Save button to save the Song to the current folder Use the Open and Close buttons EXIT In case you prefer to exit to browse through the folders this page without saving the Song press the EXIT button 5 Press the Save button in the display to open the Save Song dialog box Song Mame Press the Text Edit icon to edit the Song s name T Canyon KORG USER 6 Press OK in the display to save the Song to a card or Cancel to stop the Save operation 2349 9198 76 Selecting elements Sound Select window Selecting elements So
194. Song Play Setup by choosing the Write Global Song Play Setup command from the page menu to leave the track status unchanged when selecting a different Standard MIDI File This way you can leave for example the bass track in mute and let your bassist play it live for the whole show However the above is not true when reading a Standard MIDI File created with a Pa Series instrument These files do include special commands to force the Play Mute status of each track Reference 152 Song Play operating mode Jukebox panel Track names Under the sliders a label for each track is shown Use the TRK SEL button to switch between the various track views UPPERI 3 Upper tracks LOWER TOL PIG Lower track Song tracks Volume for these tracks is not memorized Jukebox panel When a Jukebox JBX file is assigned to Sequencer 1 you can use the list shown in this panel to browse the Jukebox list and press the Select button in the display to select a Song to play This way you can select any Song in the list as your starting Song and manually change the order of the Songs to play Note A Jukebox file can be assigned to Sequencer 1 only Note This panel is only available after loading a Jukebox file Hint To create or edit a Jukebox file go to the Jukebox Edit page see page 160 A quick way to create a Jukebox list is to press the Play All button in the Song Select window see page 79
195. Songs in SMF and KAR format for easy retrieving Each entry of this data base may include the artist title genre number key tempo and meter of a specified song When selecting one of the entries the associated Style or Standard MIDI File as well as the Style Play or Song Play mode is automatically recalled In addition to helping you organizing your shows the SongBook allows you to associate up to four Pads and up to four STSs to each Standard MIDI File This way it is easy to recall a complete setup for Keyboard tracks and effects for realtime playing over a Standard MIDI File Also you can link a text file to a Standard MIDI File or to a Style to read the Lyrics in the display even if there are no Lyrics events in the midifile or if you prefer to play the song live with the help of the Styles You can add your own entries to the SongBook as well as edit the existing ones Korg has already sup plied some hundred entries as standard Furthermore the SongBook allows you to create various cus tom lists that may suit your different shows Pa 500
196. Strinas iw Classic Piano Honky Tonk GM Tempe 7 121 883 888 121 888 858 E Brass A M a ar ight Piano GH Harpsi KeyOff Rx 121 888 881 121 883 885 010 u Piano amp Strings Clav GM again with the selected Sound 121 887 888 121 400 407 assigned to the Upper 1 track ACCOMP BASS UPPER UPPER LOWER UPPERS Volume 5 Play the Sound on the keyboard Cb Note You can leave the Sound Select win dow open in the display even after selecting a Sound by setting the Display Hold option to On see Display Hold On on page 206 Playing Sounds 35 Playing two or three Sounds at the same time Playing two or three Sounds at the same time You can layer all three Upper tracks and play them on the keyboard COEF 1 1 Ti 1 Press the mure icon in the Upper 2 status box to set the Upper 2 track to Please note how the HEFTE icon appears in the Upper 2 and Upper 3 status boxes These tracks will not be heard play u t Grand Piano P After pressing in M o 1 this area the AUTE icon disap gt gt gt U pears The Upper 2 Dark Pad pes track will be set to R i play and will be heard gt Strings Ens 2 5H T1 2 Play the keyboard Note how the Dark Pad sound assigned to the Upper 2 track has been layered with the Grand Piano assigned to the Upper 1 track 3 Press the mure icon in the Upper 3 status box to set the Upper 3 track to play t Grand Pi
197. T HELP SHIFT SEQUENCER 2 STYLE o lr uu amA EDOS de Le g ace mm START STOP EU Y EN le a NM i a 55g yt Pa 500 UPPER dies LS LOCK FADE e ISONGBOOK joda e In Style Play and Song Play mode First select one of the Upper tracks Then keep SHIFT pressed and move the slider to proportionally change the volume of all Upper tracks at the same time In Style Play mode First press TRACK SELECT and select one of the separate Style tracks Then keep SHIFT pressed and move the slider to proportionally change the volume of all Style tracks at the same time In Sequencer mode Keep SHIFT pressed and move the slider to proportionally change the volume of all Song tracks at the same time ASSIGNABLE SWITCH This is a freely assignable switch see Pad Switch Assignable Switch on page 98 for information on how to assign functions to them By default it controls Ritardando ACCOMP Accompaniment In Style Play and Sequencer Backing Sequence mode use this button to turn the Accompaniment tracks ACC1 ACC5 on or off On After pressing START STOP the full accompani ment plays according to the detected chords Off No chords detected After pressing START STOP only the Drum and Percussion accompaniment tracks can play SHIFT You can jump to the Style Play gt Split pane gt Chord Recognition parameter by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing the ACCOMP button M
198. T While in the Song Select window press the SONG SELECT but ton to open the keypad and enter the number corresponding to the Song to be selected While in any page of the Song Play mode press the SONG SELECT button twice to open the keypad Note If no Song corresponds to the dialed number the Song not available message will appear 79 Selecting elements Song Select window Warning While the directory may contain more than 9999 files you can t select Songs outside the 0001 9999 range when using the numeric keypad Song Select page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command Export Song List Show Song Number Show Song Extention Create Mew Folder Rename Export Song List Select this command to save the current list as a text file to the card This way you will be able to print a list of Songs to see which number matches each Song 1 While in the Song Select window select the folder whose Song list you wish to save as a text file 2 Select the Export Song List command from the page menu 3 Insert a card into the card drive A dialog box will appear Write Song List 4 Press OK to confirm Note The text file will contain a list of mid kar and jbx files only Folders and different kinds of files will not be included When saved the text file will be named
199. This is a bell curve filter centered around the frequency set with the Freq knob Values are shown in decibels dB 18 18dB Middle gain value in decibels Mid Middle Freq gt GBLO This parameter lets you adjust the center frequency for the semi parametric middle band Values are shown in Hertz Hz 100Hz 10kHz Center frequency in Hertz Hi High Gain gt GBL9 This parameter lets you adjust the high frequencies master equalization This is a shelving curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB 18 18dB High gain value in decibels Touch Panel Calibration From time to time for example after loading a new operating system calibrating your Color TouchView display may be necessary to make pointing more precise If so use this page Touch Panel Calibration Touch just inside the arrow Press EXIT Button to CANCEL 1 When in this page first touch exactly inside the set of arrows in the upper left corner of the display 2 The arrows will subsequently move to the other corners of the display Touch exactly inside them 3 Finally press Save to confirm the new calibration Touch Panel Calibration Now press Save tn Exit Press EXIT Button to CANCEL In case you want to exit and cancel the calibration press EXIT before completing the procedure Hint To quickly reach this page from any other page press GLO BAL to enter the Global mode then press it again and k
200. UND 15 66 47 10 39 STYLE 15 66 47 18 43 4 Select the folder containing the type of data you are looking for and press Open to open the selected folder A list of User banks appears Type EE BR usereisty LISERG2 STY 2oBk 15 46 47 10 42 2BBK 15 B6 B7 18 43 KORG USERT MuShow SET STVLE D caro 5 Select the bank you are looking for and press Open to open it A list of User items appears 41 61 Standard 8 Beat 18k 41 82 Standard 16 Beat 16K 41 83 Kool Beat 22K 41 64 Guitar Beat 11K 41 45 Easy Beat 1 Media edit mode Load 217 6 Select the item you are looking for and press Load to con firm the load A dialog box appears asking you to select one of the available User locations in memory Standard amp Beat U 81 81 empty In the dialog box above the previously selected Style will be loaded into location 01 of the bank U01 USERI button in memory The existing Style at the same memory location will be deleted and overwritten Empty locations are named empty 7 Select the target location and press OK to load the source file Warning After confirming the item you are overwriting in memory will be deleted Loading Pa800 data You can load Pa800 data exactly as if they were Pa500 data Only keep in mind Pa500 cannot load User PCM Sample data does not include a Voice Processor section and includes some differ ent Factory Sounds Drum Kit and PCM data At the same ti
201. Undef ctl MIDI Data MIDI Controllers 273 Pa500 Function A C reverb send level B D modul send level See table below See table below See MIDI Implementation Chart See MIDI Implementation Chart Reset All Controllers Data Dec NRPN Lsb NRPN Msb RPN Lsb Undefined ctl AllSOff Res Ctl LocalCt NoteOff OmniOff Omni On Poly On The following NRPN messages are recognized by the Pa500 CC499 CC498 CC 06 MSB LSB Data Entry 127 Vibrato Rate 0 Vibrato Depth 0 127 9 Vibrato Decay 1270 0 Filter Cutoff 0 127 9 0 3 Resonance 3 127 EG Attack Time 0 127 9 EG Decay Time 39 ga eli EG Release Time 279 Drum Filter Cutoff Drum Filter Resonance 1 0 127 9 0 127 9 E 0 127 9 0 127 9 0 427 0 127 0 127 UT a 64 No change to the original parameter s value b dd Drum Instrument No 0 127 CO C8 Drum EG Attack Time 2 Drum EG Decay Time 27 Drum Coarse Tune Drum Fine Tune Drum Volume Drum Panpot Drum Rev Send FX 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 29 0 Drum Mod Send FX 2 Note These controls are reset when stopping the Song or choosing a new Song 274 MIDI Data Program Change messages used as remote commands Program Change messages used as remote commands The following is a table including all Program Change messages used as remote Style and Sequencer controls These
202. Use this display to interact with the instrument To set the dis play contrast keep the MENU button pressed and turn the DIAL counter clockwise to decrease brightness or clockwise to increase it 9 STYLE SELECT section gt PERF Use these buttons to open the Style Select window and select a Style See Style Select window on page 77 The rightmost button lets you select the upper or lower row of Style banks Press it repeatedly to select one of the rows Upper LED On Upper row Styles selected These are eight factory pro grammed banks Lower LED On Lower row Styles selected These are six factory programmed banks plus two user programmed banks A word about Style banks and names Styles in banks from 8BEAT 16 BEAT to JAZZ and from LATIN to WORLD 2 are standard Styles the user can t normally overwrite with a Load operation unless you remove the protection see Factory Style and Pad Protect on page 225 Styles in the banks USER1 and USER2 are location where you can load new Styles from a card or save newly created or edited Styles Each button Style bank contains four pages each with up to eight Styles Repeatedly press a bank button to cycle between the available pages If you keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the buttons of this section the Write Style Performance win dow appears in the display and you can save the current Style Performance
203. Volume Pan cese 186 lb Ae rP OTT 224 Mixer Tuning FX Send ccs 187 PE o A A 225 Mixer Tuning EQ Gain scene 188 VSB Em 226 Mixer Tuning EQ Control sess 188 nsus mui MIU 22 Mixer Lun TUning uos sedeo d art Race UR 189 SD and MMC cards sse nnne 228 Mixer T nine sub Scale porteria areas 189 MIDI PUN E T TA ELASTE RE E EE 230 A A PL emer aoaes 189 UCIECHUUID A 230 Eee HX ol A nb eee snye ae dE 190 What is MIDI Over USB uas Bos o He Eee 230 Track Controls Mode se rascatos ii db ob Paria trai o ms 190 AA tenes to0ee ses teases 231 Track Controls Dram Volumnie 1o doux vhi seins 190 The General MIDE standard esosasridiasinios ion do eres 291 Track Controls Easy Edite uu eva oS owe y OPE dE ES 190 The Clobalc hannel oe encve a mtr n AE EQUOTC UE TEES 221 Event Edit Event Bdlocooseds mad 39adobuove PREPARES 190 The Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels icio aot eras 231 Event EON CDI AA ENET EEEN R 192 The Control chale uus duhser oi RIT noe iodo eras 231 A XOqUORSSDpUIPUPUNEUATUS 192 NIPDISODUD 221933 9299 s rana a Do do os 29 Sono Edits T1anspose ooxcdisr92EXOq209RUC UE POPUN CUORE dS 193 Connecting Pa500 to a Master keyboard 232 pone Edit VelOEID serer rerus pra pra toa eii RENS 193 Connecting the Pa500 to a MIDI accordion rn 232 Song Edit Cut Insert MOdSule5 ou oou os sacr erem he ww es 194 Connecting the Pa500 to an external sequencer
204. X A page with the Reverb Smooth Hall effect assigned E High Damp 2 Pre Delay Thru CX Reverb Time sec Pre Delay msec EG Trim Pre LEG Fo Pre LEG Gain dB Fre HEG Fo Pre HEG Gain dE Fs Amount 16 Sra Lr Ott FR Select Selected effect gt SONG Select one of the available effects from this pop up menu This is equivalent to the FX A D parameters found in the Effects FX Select page see above Parameters gt SONG Parameters may differ depending on the selected effect See the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD for a list of available parameters for each effect type Track Controls Mode Parameter gt SONG See Track Controls Mode on page 92 Track Controls Drum Volume Parameter gt SONG See Track Controls Drum Volume on page 190 Track Controls Easy Edit Parameter See Track Controls Easy Edit on page 94 Event Edit Event Edit The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each single MIDI event of the selected track You can for example replace a note with a different one or change its playing strength See also Event Edit procedure on page 191 for more information on the event editing procedure SEQUENCER Se Y Event Edit T Track 18 Position Valued Yale Length Mi 861 61 668 Hote H ama mda 192 Hiaol 2 8088 Hote Hs aaa 86 192 M 801 82 008 Hote M 808 00 192 Scroll bar
205. a function to the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH button STYLE PLAY PadAssign Switch Lw Assignable Switch Switch Switch PERF gt STS ini ASSIGNABLE SWITCH button Use this pop up menu to assign a function to the switch See List of Assignable Switch func tions on page 272 Assignable Switch lock icon gt GBL This lock avoids selecting a different Performance or STS changes also the functions assigned to the switch This lock is reset when turning the instrument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 212 For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 203 Preferences Style Preferences In this page you can set various general parameters for the Style play mode Settings can be saved to a Performance or STS STYLE PLAY Preferences LCY Style Preferences Chord Recognition Fingered 3 velocity Control off Scale Mode gt keyboard Tracks Lp chara Memory Mode in Style Preferences Chord Recognition Mode PERF STS ii This parameter defines how chords are recognized by the auto accompaniment engine Please note that when the SPLIT LED is turned off the Fingered 3 mode is always selected and you must always play at least three notes to let a chord be recognized Note This parameter is the same you can find in the main page see Split panel on page 86 Play one or mo
206. a500 must receive on the special Control channel the NRPN Control Change messages 99 MSB with value 2 and 98 LSB with value 64 in fast succession as an initializa tion string This string must be sent only once unless another NRPN control is sent on the same MIDI channel before selecting a different SongBook entry After the initialization string has been sent you must send the selection string made of two Control Change messages CC 06 Data Entry MSB for the thousands and hundreds and CC 38 Data Entry LSB for the tens and units The range of the Data Entry controls in this case is 0 99 instead of the typical 0 127 The following examples show some typical situations Send the following string to select SongBook entry 77 NAPA MSE 2 HAPN LSB Ed Initialization string CC 99 98 Thousands and hundreds 00xx D ataEnt MSE O DataEntLsB 7 Tens and units xx77 e Send the following string to select SongBook entry 100 Data 1 Data 2 NAPA MSB 2 Initialization string CC 99 98 NAPA LSB b4 Thousands and hundreds 01 xx DataEnt MSE 1 DataEntLsB Tens and units xx00 e Send the following string to select SongBook entry 2563 NRPNMSB 2 NRPNLSB 64 Initialization string CC 99 98 Thousands and hundreds 85xx Tens and units xx63 Book Edit 1 u The Book Edit 1 page is where you to add or modify SongBook entries Hint Us
207. ack with the same name on either or both onboard sequencers at the same time Chord Use this channel to send notes recognized by the Chord Recognition engine to the MIDI OUT This is useful for example to control an external Harmonizer from the Pa500 using the Lower track to play chords even if the track is muted Q Jg c Q re Q Q cc 21 d Global edit mode MIDI Filters MIDI Filters Use this page to set up to 8 filters for the MIDI data received or sent by the Pa500 Midi In Filters ns 777 2 b orr 3 Dr orr 4 b off Midi Out Filters 1 Lp or 2 b off 3 Lb off 4 y off 5 Lb off 6 Dr off 7 Lp off 8 Lb off Setup Midi In Midi In Midi Out Mesum Ben Control J Channel Channel DAS 5 Lb off 5 b off 7 Lb off 8 Lb off Midi In Filters gt GB Selected MIDI IN filters Off No filter Pitch Bend Pitch Bend MonoTouch Mono or Channel After Touch PolyTouch Poly After Touch PrgChange Program Change SysExcl System Exclusive All CC All Control Change messages 0 127 Control Change message 0 127 See MIDI Data on page 273 for a list of available Control Change messages Notes Note events Midi Out Filters gt GBLMd Selected MIDI OUT filters See above for information on each filter type Audio Setup Metro Speakers This page lets you define various parameters for the Metronome and turn the Speakers on off
208. acks 1 8 and Song Tracks 9 16 views The Song Tracks 1 8 view shows individual Song tracks 1 8 Tad UE THE Tar TAS Virtual slider Track status icon Virtual slider track volume Virtual sliders are a graphical display of each tracks volume Touch the track s area to select a track and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the value or touch and drag it in the dis play SONG GBL Play mute status of the current track Select the track then press this area to change the track status The status of Song tracks is saved when saving the Song Track status icon a Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Track names Under the sliders a label for each track is shown Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between tracks 1 8 and 9 16 TOT T16 Song tracks Entering Record mode To enter Record mode press the RECORD button while you are in Sequencer mode The following dialog box will appear Current Song HEWSONG Multitrack Sequencer C Backing Sequence Quick Record C3 Step Backing Sequence Select one of the three available recording options and press OK or Cancel if you don t want to enter Record mode Multitrack Sequencer Full featured sequencer Select this option for classic multitrack recording See Record mode Multitrack Sequencer page on page 177 Backing Sequence Quick Record Easy way of recording Just play with Styles
209. ad to change the event s length While the sequencer is not running you may press the Go Catch button in the display to go to a different measure see Go Catch above e While the sequencer is running you may use the Go Catch button in the display to see the currently playing event in the display see Go Catch above Use SEQUENCER 1 transport controls to listen to the Song 99 Press the insert button in the display to insert an event at the Position shown in the display a Note event with default values will be inserted Press the Delete button in the dis play to delete the selected event so When the editing is complete you may select a different track go to step 4 10 When finished editing the whole Song select the Save Song command from the page menu to save the Song to a card See Save Song window on page 198 for more information on saving a Song Event Edit Filter This page is where you can select the event types to be shown in the Event Edit page SEQUENCER Event Edit LCY Filter L Note RX Noise L Program L After Touch L Poly After Touch L_ riteh Bend L Pa Controls L Control Jrempo rteter Filter Turn On the filter for all event types you do not wish to see in the Event Edit page Note RX Noise Notes and RX Noises Program Program Change events Control Control Change events Tempo Meter Tempo and Meter changes Master Track only Aft
210. ad the original Fac tory data again downloadable from www korgpa com Performance recalls FX CD gt GBLS 9 This parameter selects the effects mode for the Performance Off When selecting a Performance no effect is selected On The Performance selects the C D effect pair Note When both this parameter and the Seq 2 FX Mode parameter are set to select the C D effect pair Sequencer 2 shares its effects with Keyboard tracks Therefore these effects can be changed either selecting a Song for Sequencer 2 or selecting a Per formance gt GBL This parameter allows you to use the SEQUENCER BALANCE slider to select the Sequencer whose lyrics or markers will be shown in the built in display Off When moving the SEQUENCER BALANCE cross fader only the volume balance between Songs will be selected The shown lyrics or mark ers will remain unchanged On When moving the SEQUENCER BALANCE slider fully to the left or the right the correspond ing Song will fade in and its lyrics and markers will be selected and shown in the display Lyrics Markers Balance Link Lyrics Markers Markers Seq 2 Link Mode gt GBL s The two onboard Sequencers can work each one with a different Tempo Off or use both the same Tempo various Link modes You can turn the Link Mode on by pressing the TEMPO LOCK button and turning its LED on by default Beat mode is selected the first time This also turns the Tempo Lock
211. age menu STYLE RECORD Overdub Step Track DRUM SE Ward CU1 Pos 64d 461 464 Step Time d ositia Dur Cd 2 062 01 000 2 003 601 000 681 01 060 je 883 83 000 Track Selected track Name of the selected track in record DRUM ACC5 Style track SE Selected Style Element See Element Style Element on page 107 CV Selected Chord Variation See Chord Var Chord Variation on page 107 Pos Position This is the position of the event note rest or chord to be inserted Event list Previously inserted events You may delete this event and set it in edit again by pressing the Back button Step Time values Length of the event to be inserted od Standard Note value Standard value of the selected note Dot Augments the selected note by one half of its value Triplet 3 Triplet value of the selected note Meter Meter of the current measure This parameter cannot be edited You can set the Meter in the main page of the Style Record mode before actually starting recording see step 6 on page 113 for more information Style Record mode 131 Overdub Step Recording window Free Memory Remaining memory for recording Duration Relative duration of the inserted note The percentage is always referred to the step value 25 Staccatissimo 50 Staccato 85 Ordinary articulation 100 Legato Velocity Set this parameter before enterin
212. ake sure that the Drum track is set to Drum Mode and the external device has not transposi played correctly tion applied Some clicks can be heard when This is part of the sound and not a problem playing a percussive instrument 210 92 190 A background noise can be heard The selected Performance Style or STS recalled the effect 17 St Analog Record simulating after selecting a Performance the noise of a old vinyl recording Style or STS Cannot format a device Is the card correctly inserted Is the write protect switch of the card in the protect position Cannot save data to a card Is the device formatted 224 Is the device inserted correctly BEEN Is the write protect switch of the card in the protect position EE Does the card contain data compatible with the Pa500 282 Technical specifications Technical specifications A KORG Pa500 A S 5 J S Keyboard 61 keys with Velocity Un e S O gt gt 80 Voices 80 Oscillators EQ for each track Filters with Resonance Multitimbral Parts Internal 40 channels Midi 16 channels 880 incl Stereo Piano and GM2 sounds 56 Drum Kits 128 Sounds 64 Drum Kits On board full editing for Sounds and DrumKits 4 Stereo Master Final Master EQ 4 Upper 1 2 3 Lower 4 Pads User Sounds Effects v zx n T o o o e o 3 2 S 23 O 2 O fb A a oa C 3 3 m SS D Sio E Y z e et c T o E A o O m v un 256 User Progra
213. al to modity it As an alternative you can play a chord and it will be automatically recognized The lack of a chord means that the accompaniment will not play at the current position apart for the Drum and Percussion tracks To select the option select the Name part of the Chord parameter then use the TEMPO VALUE dial to select the very last value C B Off Note If you replace a chord with a different one please remember that the Lower track 1f recorded will not be automatically changed and may cause a dissonance against the accompaniment Style Element This is the Style Element 1 e a Variation Fill Intro or Ending The length of the selected Style Element is always shown by the Length parameter see below Off means that the accompaniment will not play at the selected position only Keyboard and Pad tracks will play Hint Insert a Style Element Off event exactly where the automatic accompaniment must stop at the end of the Song Length This parameter will let you know where to place the following Style Element Change For example if you inserted an Intro event lasting for 4 measures you can insert 4 empty measure after this event and a Variation event at the end of the Intro beginning at the 4th empty measure Del Delete button When a side arrow is shown next to a parameter there is an event at the current position You can press the Del button next to it to delete the
214. alue Press the footswitch or press the pedal to the maximum position usually front pressed 4 Press the Push button in the display to confirm the maxi mum value The following dialog box appears Pedal Footswitch Calibration Raise the Pedal F switch and set 5 You are now asked to set the pedal to the minimum value Release the footswitch or press the pedal to the minimum position usually back pressed 6 Press the Push button in the display to confirm the mini mum value 7 Check if the pedal or footswitch is working properly assign it a function then save by choosing the Write Global Glo bal Setup command from the page menu Damper Damper Polarity gt GBLO Polarity of the Damper pedal Assignable Slider Assignable Slider gt GBL Functions assigned to the Assignable Slider on the control panel See List of Assignable Pedal and Assignable Slider functions on page 271 for a list of the assignable functions The first functions are switch type functions while the remaining starting from Master Volume are continuous like functions Only continuous functions can be assigned to the sliders Global edit mode MIDI MIDI Setup General Controls 207 MIDI MIDI Setup General Controls This page allows you to select a MIDI Setup convert ordinary notes to RX Noises and set global parameters for the MIDI communication Current Midi Setup 61 Default Hote to RZnois
215. ame Warning The older list will be deleted e Select New List to save a new Custom List in memory This list will be available in the Custom List page Lyrics STS The Lyrics STS page is where you can see Lyrics and select STSs MT 8 NEENH M GA fa HAVE SOME FUN FH THROW AWAY THE WORK ELL MY FRIENDS THE TIME HAS COME TO RAISE THE ROOF AND EJ Electric Guitar Ey Distortion Gtr Ef Cctave Piano E Organ When a TXT file is associated to the current song a vertical scrollbar appears allowing you to scroll to the previous or former text page during the performance Note You cannot scroll a single line of text at a time you always scroll by a whole page of text either 1f you press on the scrollbar or one of the small scrolling arrows Press here to scroll to the next page Lyrics as text files associated to a Song Book entry Lyrics can be associated to each SongBook entry either Style or Song based as a TXT file See Linked TXT on page 170 for more information on this issue As as consequence there are five ways of seeing Lyrics on the Pa500 n Song Play mode you can see lyrics contained in a Stan dard MIDI File as Lyrics events To see this kind of lyrics you must press the Lyrics tab in the Song Play mode In Song Play mode you can see lyrics contained in a TXT file with the same name of the Song file contained in the same folder as the Song To see t
216. an Cab Pan Cab Pan DL HH Pan Coe A Send G6 A Send 8B A Send B A Send 8B B Send 8 B send 8 B Send 8 q B Send B8 Note You can also assign different Hits or Sequences from the Pad panel of the main page Note Each Style or SongBook entry can change the Pad assign ment Pad assignment PERF gt PERFSY gt SB ini Name of the Hit or Sequence assigned to each Pad Press the box to make the Pad Select window appear see Pad Select window on page 77 Volume PERF gt PERFSY SB ii Volume for each of the four Pad tracks Pan PERF gt PERFSY gt SB ini Pan for each of the four Pad tracks 64 1 Left stereo channel 0 Center dd 2 Right stereo channel A Send PERF gt PERFSY gt SB ini Send level to the A Internal FX processor usually reverb for each of the four Pad tracks B Send PPERF gt PERFSY gt SB ini Send level to the B Internal FX processor usually modulating effect for each of the four Pad tracks Pad lock icon gt GBLS This lock avoids selecting a different Style or SongBook entry changes also the Hit or Sequence Pads assigned to the Pads This lock is reset when turning the instrument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 212 For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 203 Pad Switch Assignable Switch This page lets you select
217. an be saved to a Style Performance Effects C D Keyboard tracks can be saved to an STS FX Amount MPERF PERF sTs Volume of the effect that is added to the dry uneffected signal B to A D to C PERF PERF Y STS Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect or of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect Mod Track Modulating Track PERF PERF STS Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modulate an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by an inter nal physical controller Q Jg c o L Q Q cc 22 Style Play operating mode Effects FX A D Effects FX A D These pages contain the editing parameters for the four effect processors Here is an example of the FX A page with the Reverb Smooth Hall effect assigned Selected effect High Damp C7 Pre Delay Thru CX Reverb Time sec Pre Delay msec FX param eters EG Trim Pre LEG Fo Low Pre LEG Gain dB 6 4 Pre HEG Fo Pre HEG Gain dB Fs Amount 15 rg Ott Selected effect PERF PERF STS STSS Select one of the available effects from this pop up menu This is equivalent to the EX A D parameters found in the Effects FX Select page see above Note Effects can be different for each of the four editing pages FX parameters PERF PERF STS STSS Parameters may be different depending on the selected effect See the Advan
218. ance Select window Set of banks 1 8 corresponds to the top row of Performances on the control panel 9 16 to the lower row reor RMANCE SELECT Stereo Grand gt Stereo Grand The selected Performance is highlighted Press a Perfor mance name to select it Press one of the side tabs to select a different Performance bank Press one of the lower tabs to select a different Performance page p Note You can open the Performance Select window also by pressing one of the buttons in the PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT section pro vided the LED on the PERFORMANCE SELECT button is on This will let you jump directly to the desired Performance bank Selecting and saving Performances 41 Saving your settings to a Performance 2 Select one of the Performances in the Performance Select window PERFORMANCE SELECT Piano amp StringsLow Bank 178 Bank 9 16 r gi MT A ano chord B at Easy Beat 1 Grand Piano Y fyi DR dci i ME 23 16 Beat i Cassott SEES Meter 4 4 L 5 presi USI nca 1 E The Performance Select win s adus EH pu sieves Str ie dow closes and the main screen M noon no song 1 appears again provided the Dis Boer Pianos tringsLos natos Strings 2 I play Hold option is set to Off 1 ZEE EX c 4j m c K Ek gor amas Per of StringsLow Ut see page 206 Sounds effects F P er Pian F i 1 127 and other settings change F according to the
219. and Karaoke files If a Jukebox file is already selected into a Sequencer you will enter this page with that file ready to be edited Otherwise you will enter this page with an empty list To create a new Jukebox file press Del All to remove all Songs from the current list Add new Songs then press Save and enter a different name before confirming A new Jukebox file will be saved to a card Move Up Down Use these button to move the selected item up or down in the list Add Adds a Song at the end of the current list You can add up to 127 Songs in a list Note A Jukebox list can include only Songs contained in the same folder Hint Instead of a single Song you can select a Jukebox file and add its whole content to the current Jukebox list Insert Inserts a Song at the current position 1 e between the selected item and the preceding one All subsequent Songs are moved to the next higher numbered slot You can add up to 127 Songs ina list Note A Jukebox list can include only Songs contained in the same folder Hint Instead of a single Song you can select a Jukebox file and insert its whole content to the current Jukebox list Delete This command lets you delete the selected Song from the list Del All Select this command to delete the whole Jukebox list Save Press this button to save the Jukebox file to a card The Save Juke box File dialog box appears allowing you to edit the name an
220. and is automatically set to On or Off when you select a different Performance or Style depending on the saved status On Style tracks always use the original Sounds recorded in each Style Element If you assign a different Sound to a Style track this parameter is automatically set to Off Off You can assign different Sounds to each Style track and save them in a Performance or Style Performance The selected Sounds are the same for all Style Elements there are no different Sounds for each Style element Selected Track Info area This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track It appears both in the main page and in several edit pages B Piano 121 818 888 Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano Track name Sound bank Sound name Program Change Track name Name of the selected track o Jg c o re Q Q cc 84 Style Play operating mode Volume panel Sound name PERF PERF Sound assigned to the selected track Press anywhere in this area to open the Sound Select window and select a different Sound Sound bank Bank of the selected Sound PERF gt PERFSY Program Change PERF gt PERF Program Change number sequence Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Program Change Sounds area This area lets you see Sounds and octave transposition for the elght Style tracks Style track s octave transpose icon Sound bank s icon Style track s octave transpose icon PERF gt PE
221. ange sounds assigned to the PADs When you enter Song Play mode from the Style Play mode Key board and Pad tracks are the same as in Style Play mode Q y c Q re Q Q cc I Song Play operating mode Main page Main page Press SONG PLAY to access this page from another operating mode Note When switching from Style Play to Song Play the Song Setup is automatically selected and various track parameters and settings may change To return to this page from one of the Song Play edit pages press the EXIT or SONG PLAY button To switch between Keyboard tracks Normal view and Song tracks Song Tracks views use the TRACK SELECT button Pressed a first time you will see tracks 1 8 a second press will show tracks 9 16 pressed again you will go back to Keyboard tracks See Song Tracks 1 8 and 9 16 pages and Volume panel starting from page 150 Songs area sonc PLAY MT B gu no song t Grand Piano ALO Dark Pad E LINES m board Vt Strings Ens 2 GM P Easy Beat 1 p Strings Ens 2 Gm tracks E bPerf Stereo Grand gt Analog Strings c area LOWER PEE Co d Lurics STS Volume i foe d amp Mark Mame Panels Page header Page menu icon eno chord A LI E RN ee Page header This line shows the current operating mode transposition and recognized chord SONG PLAY HT 8 na chord gt HB Operating mode Master Transpose Recognized name in semitone
222. ano t Grand Piano O M Ol As above after press ing in this area the t Dark Pad t Dark Pad rene M 1 M 1 track will be set to p Strings Ens 2 GH 2 p Strings Ens Z GH Sty c gt Strings Ens 2 GH ina 57 heard 4 Play the keyboard Note how the StringEns2 sound assigned to the Upper 3 track has been added to the Dark Pad assigned to the Upper 2 track and the Grand Piano assigned to the Upper 1 track ic p a m 1 36 Playing Sounds Playing two or three Sounds at the same time 5 Press the bank icon in the Upper 3 status box to mute the Upper 3 track again t Grand Piano R O perra LL Al 1 p Strings Ens 2 Gu R i 6 Play the keyboard Wm Press the bank icon in the Upper 2 status box to mute the Upper 2 track t Grand Piano t Dark Pad us gt Strings Ens 2 5H 3A E ae m a s GB Note how the StringEns2 sound assigned to the Upper 3 track has been muted again Only tracks Upper 1 and Upper 2 can be heard at this time again l U t Grand Piano ad b Dark Pad c 8 Play the keyboard Note how the Dark Pad sound assigned to the Upper 2 track has been muted again Only track Upper 1 can be heard at this time Playing Sounds 37 Playing different Sounds with your left and right hand Playing different Sounds with your left and right hand Yo
223. apo I X Position of the capo over the fingerboard 1 e I corresponds to the first fret II to the second one and so on Diagram The diagram shows how a chord would be composed on the fin gerboard Here is the meaning of the various symbols Black dot Fingered string 1 e played note White dot Fifth playing on the D 2 key X Non played or muted note Thin bar Barr a finger crossing all the strings like a mobile capo Fat bar Capo Style Record mode 113 Style Record procedure Style Record procedure There are two different methods for recording a Style Realtime and Step Realtime Recording allows you to record Style patterns in realtime Step Recording allows you to create a new Style by entering single notes or chords in each track This is very useful when transcribing an existing score or needing a higher grade of detail and is particularly suitable to create drum and percussion tracks In addition you can program a Style on a personal computer and then import it via the Import funcrtion see Import Import SMF on page 127 Preparing to record If you like to edit an existing Style select that Style Press the RECORD button to enter the Style Record mode You are prompted to select either the Current Style or a New Style Select record edit Current Style if you want to edit the current Style or make a new Style starting from an existi
224. ard At its basic level a Style will consist of up to eight parts or Tracks Drums The Drum track will provide a repeating rhythmic phrase played by the standard instruments of a Drum Kit Percussion An additional rhythmic phrase played by various percussion instruments conga shaker cowbell etc is provided by the Per cussion track The Drum and Percussion tracks will play the same phrase repeatedly regardless of the notes and chords being played on the keyboard although it is possible to assign a different Drum Kit to either part or to edit the Kit itself Bass amp Accompaniment The Bass track and the up to five additional Style tracks will each play musical phrases that are musically related to and in sync with the Drum and Percussion tracks However the notes being played by these tracks will change to follow the chord pro gression that you play on the keyboard Again any Sound you choose may be assigned to any track in a Style Variation For each Style there are four Variations In general each Varia tion is a slightly different version of the others As you progress from Variation one to Variation four the arrangements will become more complex and more parts Tracks may be added This allows your performance to have a more dynamic arrange ment without losing the original feel of the Style Fill in During a performance a drummer may often perform a fill such as when transition
225. ata Sounds Program Change order EJES NEN MEDIE SEEN A Ca s 5 peers ms Ama O ao 5 ATTE CCC E wr u CEIC ee wm 9 3 fernamen Gr 7 vmes em wr 1 3r feuer reeda fouer ar prosesu EM Du Lu Lx 9 x acoustic Bas an wr peesme 0 Pre s x CT CN rs Jessmer o ws 27 27 27 27 27 EE S OM x EIN CN E 7 EN ES A PME MEE HMM NE DS p E NE KE NEHME GU ENME 2 Eos 2 Ee 27 i 7 7 wr e 3 Fngertose ICON 7 5 mess Rs m x senes ee ES un Ig nk nk nk nk A nm 4 eg eg HEE ES A a m rg rg a Se ee m et G9 p 5 ener NN mL p 9 jwemdss es ee 3 EE oes Reale Guitar outer 3 5 5 WmeRem pes wr w x LN CI FE wr 5 3 ees ee FE 3 J i Y zs fran uiter curr O at 2 4 pess s mU p essem Joos L EC GC esme Joos WC 5 3 ESTE CI pes e 3 jme Jes ae 3 pem o eo 3 edes es A L CO ees Joos er eS wsmses es EC LL 5 wem os EL wes ees EC 3 p 5 peemwe fees ea Soares basa ee wr s 3 Weeerhsers ee wr 1 3s eme 000m x 3s eer ee wn 3 35 LEI um C ee e EII ee ee 3 Bess o ee wr s 5 neti Guar outer tet S 3 EII em E xm 7 3 seowWa outer HEU E pembRs em E wr s 9 jwmeomer outer YS tet EI E metas ides 35 piso mute sar i 8 wr 9
226. ate a Song from scratch or edit it You can also use this mode to edit the initial parameters of a Standard MIDI File either made with an external sequencer or with Pa500 s own sequencer You can save the new or edited Song as a Standard MIDI File SMF i e a file with the MID extension and play it back either in Song Play or Sequencer mode or on any external sequencer Transport controls To play back a Song use SEQUENCER 1 transport controls 1 e the one on the left side of the SEQUENCER area While in Sequencer mode you can only use Sequencer 1 controls Sequencer 2 controls are deactivated See SEQUENCER 1 TRANSPORT CONTROLS on page 13 for more information The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format The native Song format for Pa500 is the Standard MIDI File When saving a Song as a SMF an empty measure is automati cally inserted to the beginning of the Song This measure con tains various Song initialization parameters When an SMF is loaded the empty measure is automatically removed Sequencer Play Main page Press SEQUENCER to access this page from another operating mode In this page you can load a Song and play it back using the transport controls for SEQUENCER 1 see Transport con trols above Note When switching from Style Play to Sequencer mode the Sequencer Setup is automatically selected and various track parameters may change To return to this page from one of the S
227. ave as a traditional 16 track linear sequencer where each track is recorded individually one at a time Glossary of Terms 25 Performance The LOGO decoder On the front panel of your Pa500 you have probably noticed three logos and may have even wondered what they stand for Well here is a quick explanation of each one RX Technology is the cutting edge engine that drives every aspect of the Pa500 from the synthesis to the display and how it all works together TECH N O L O G Y General MIDI GM is a standard that ensures the compatibility of sounds and messages between GM compatible instruments available from different manufacturers For example sequenced songs created on any GM equipped product and saved in the GM format will playback correctly on the Pa500 Q ENERA mr pe o v gt O Le ES E 26 Interface basics The TouchView graphical user interface Interface basics The TouchView interface graphical user Pa500 features an easy to use graphical user interface based on Korg s patented TouchView interface Here are the basic ele ments of the user s interface Pages Parameters are grouped into separate pages to be selected by touching the corresponding tabs on the lower part of the display Volume Menus and sections Pages are grouped in sections to be selected by touching the cor responding buttons in the Edit menu that opens up wh
228. bal Special channel to simulate the Pa500 s integrated controls keyboard pedals joystick with an external keyboard or controller MIDI messages coming on this channel are seen as if they were generated by Pa500 s integrated controllers Control On this special channel the Pa500 receives MIDI messages to remotely select Styles Performances STS Style Elements and SongBook entries See tables on page 236 and following for more infor mation on the received data Global edit mode MIDI MIDI In Channels 209 MIDI MIDI Out Channels In this page you can assign Pa500 tracks to any of the MIDI OUT channels Midi Out Channels cor Da chaz p Upper 2 chaa j Upper 3 cha gt Lower chas gt Bass chia gt rum Chit Ly Percussion ch12 e Ace 1 Ch13 Ace 2 ch14 e Ace 3 ch15 e Ace 4 Chi e Ace 5 Setup Midi Ir Midi In I Gen Etl Channel chas Lb off chas gt off cha gt off chas off Channels gt GBLMid You can assign to each channel one of the following tracks Off No track assigned Lower Lower track Upper 1 3 One of the Upper tracks Pad 1 4 One of the Pad tracks Drum Drum track Percussion Percussion track Bass Bass track ACC One of the Auto accompaniment tracks Seg I Tr 01 16 One of Sequencer 1 tracks Seq 2 Tr 01 16 One of Sequencer 2 tracks Seq 1 2 Tr 01 16 Use these channels to send data generated by a tr
229. bar precount before starting recording Tempo Select this parameter to use the TEMPO VALUE dial to set the tempo Note This value will not be recorded and will only be used for test ing the pattern at various speeds while editing or recording Hint You can always change the Tempo when other parameters are selected by keeping the SHIFT button pressed and rotating the DIAL Meter gt PAD This is the meter time signature of the sequence You can edit this parameter only when the sequence is empty i e before you begin recording anything Pad Track info area This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track 128 000 000 Pad Track t Standard Kit GM EBDrum amp Perc Sound bank Sound name Program Change Sound name gt PAD Sound assigned to the Pad track The triangle means you can press the name to open the Sound Select window and select a different Sound Sound bank PAD Bank the selected Sound belongs to Program Change PAD Program Change number sequence Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Program Change Tracks volume status area Octave Transpose This non editable indicator shows the current octave transposition To change this value use the OCTAVE TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel While this value is not memorized with the Pad the transposi tion is used during recording For example if you play a C4 and a 1 octave transposition is selected a C5 is recorded Virtual
230. be heard Play status The track can be heard Track names Under the buttons a label for each track is shown Style Edit Delete All This function lets you quickly delete a selected Style Element or Chord Variation or the whole Style EXT Ly Drum EXCY e var ASS CE MM H After setting the various parameters press Execute Track All All tracks of the selected Style Style Element or Chord Variation Drum Acc5 Single track of the selected Style Style Element or Chord Variation E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Vari ation for editing All All Style Elements i e the whole Style When E Track All and CV AIl the whole Style is deleted and all parameters are set to the default status Varl CountIn Single Style Element V1 CV1 CI CV2 Single Chord Variation Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Track status icon Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Track names Under the buttons a label for each track is shown Style Edit Copy from Style Here you can copy a track Chord Variation or Style Element inside the same Style or from a different one Furthermore you can copy a whole Style Warning The Copy operation deletes all data at the target location overwrite
231. beginning of the measure 1 e to a position other than Mxxx 01 000 will be effective at the following measure For example if a Style Change event has been inserted at M004 03 000 the selected Style will be effectively selected at M005 01 000 This works exactly as in Style Play mode Note When inserting a Style Change you may also insert a Tempo Change at the same position A Style Change will not automati cally insert the Style s Tempo Performance This is the latest selected Performance Select a Performance to recall the Style it links to To insert a Performance change at the current position touch the Performance name to open the Per formance Select window or follow the standard selecting proce dure using the PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT section Note The STYLE CHANGE LED 1s automatically turned on when entering the Chord Acc Step Mode This means that selecting a Per formance automatically selects the Style memorized in the Perfor mance The SINGLE TOUCH and STS buttons are automatically dis abled meaning that you can t change Keyboard tracks while in Chord Acc Step Mode Tempo This is the Tempo Change parameter To insert a Tempo Change event at the current position select this parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change its value Chord The chord parameter is divided in four separate parts C Maj i3 11 El Pr t 1 Name Type Tension Extension Select one of the parts then use the TEMPO VALUE di
232. ber of times the copy must be executed Copies will be con secutive Song Edit Move Here you can shift a track forward or backward by just a few ticks or whole measures SEQUENCER Edit OF Track 16 Start Tick 81 81 6848 To Tick Al 1 192 End Tick Al 41 192 After setting the various parameters press Execute to complete the operation Track Use these parameters to select the track you want to move Track 1 16 Selected track Start End Tick These parameters set the starting and ending point of the range to move To Tick This parameter allows you to set the target starting point of the moved track Sequencer operating mode 195 Song Edit Move Song Edit RX Convert You can use the RX Convert page to convert notes of the midifile into RX Noises and vice versa This will help programming Songs on an external sequencer SEQUENCER Edit LCY RX Convert Track n 18 RX Moises Velocity B uH Ir TH Tad TAS THE Tar After having chosen a track to convert press Execute to complete the operation Add RA Noises to Guitar Tracks Convert Ra Noises to MIDI Notes Convert MIDI Mates to Rx Moises Track Use these parameters to select the track containing the notes or RX Noises you want to convert RX Note Velocity Use this parameter to adjust the volume level of the RX Noises in the selected track s Add RX Noises to Guitar track Use this parameter to aut
233. brand Piano B t Dark Pad t Strings Ens 2 GM j i Z E coe eene MUTE t Analog Strings 2 ue i Close this lock to avoid transposition when choosing a different Performance or Style page 203 Electric Guitar Touch here to change the Split Point page 38 Single Touch Settings STS Touch one of them to choose it or use the dedicated buttons on the control panel Sounds on the keyboard will change page 78 Notes There are three Sounds for the right hand Upper 1 Upper 2 Upper 3 and only one Sound for the left hand Lower Their names are abbreviated as UP1 UP2 UP3 LOW and are shown in the right side of the display Right hand Upper and left hand Lower Sounds are sepa rated by the Split Point Performances and STSs are collections of Sounds Just choose one of them to change all the Sounds of the keyboard and when the STYLE CHANGE LED is lit on the control panel of the Style Choose a Style to change the musical style of the accompani ment patterns Touching the Style name in the display is the same as to press one of the buttons of the STYLE section on the control panel Introduction 8 Easy Mode The Song Play page in detail The Song Play page in detail Song assigned to Sequencer 1 Touch it to open the Song Select window and choose a different Song page 78 SONG PLAY Tempo Use the DIAL to change it Song assigned to Sequ
234. browsed through long directories and dug into different fold ers Select Selects the highlighted item in the display If a Song is already playing it stops and the new Song is ready to play You are returned to the main page Play All When this button is pressed all midifiles contained in the cur rent directory are added to a new Jukebox list that is automati cally assigned to Sequencer 1 The order in which they are played depends on the current sorting method i e how the files are shown in the display You can use this Jukebox list as any other list of this type i e start the playback with SEQ1 PLAY STOP jump to the next Song in the list with SHIFT gt gt edit it in the Jukebox page Note A Jukebox list can include up to 127 Songs If your folder con tains more items only the first 127 will be considered Hint If you don t want to lose the list when turning the instrument off go to the Jukebox page and save it to a card as a JBX file Selecting a Song by its ID number Each Song in a folder on a card up to 9 999 has a progressive ID number assigned When the Show Song Number option is selected in the Song Select page menu see below you can see this number before the Song s name in the Song Select window You can use this number to select the Song by composing the corresponding number speeding up the Song retrieval when you are using a card filled with midifiles AABT XC REHSTOHIMI
235. cal Resource ls mo md MD o Midi file Standard MIDI File SMF Plain text file Pa500 can also read but not write the following type of data Q y c Q re Q Q cc 214 Media edit mode Media structure Media structure Each card and the internal memory can contain files and fold ers Data in the Pa500 is slightly more rigidly structured than in a computer due to the pre configured type of data inside the instrument s memory The diagram below shows the global structure of a Pa500 device Note Style banks from 1 to 17 Factory Styles can be seen in Media mode only when the Factory Style and Pad Protect parameter is set to Off see page 225 and only when loading or saving a single Style bank or when erasing something MYDIR SET GLOBAL El SETUP GBL PERFORM BANKO1 PRF 1 1 Grand Piano E 1 8 Full Strings SOUND USER PCG 1 Piano 1 E 128 SynBrass22 E U3 32 User 32 PAD USERDK PCG BANKO1 PAD BANK02 PRF E 1 Standard Kit 1 Cowbell 1 z ME 64 Orchestral Kit E 32 Drumkit F F 2 8 Jazz Strings BANK PAD E 1 Agogo 11 BANK PRF STYLE E gog Z 32 Windchimes 3 BANK20 PRF BANKO1 STY E 20 1 Rock Brass id BEANT BANK20 PAD ED c E 1 Military 1 20 8 Ro
236. cales on page 272 for a list of available scales Note You cannot select a User scale in Global mode Key gt GBL This parameter is needed by some scales to set the preferred key see Scales on page 272 User Quarter Tone SubScale SC Preset buttons Press these buttons to recall the corresponding presets Each pre set contains a custom detuning of each note of the scale shown in the upper scale diagram It also memorizes the selected degree s of the scale shown in the lower scale diagram When no preset is selected the default scale is automatically recalled This scale assigns a 50 cent value to all notes and turns all scale degrees off You can select an SC Preset also by assigning the relevant func tion to the Assignable Switch or Assignable Footswitch When one of the SC Preset buttons on the control panel is kept pressed for more than one second the current scale program ming is saved to the corresponding preset A confirmation mes sage will appear for some seconds in the display Only available on some models As an alternative while in this page choose the Write SC Pre set command from the page menu and select one of the preset locations where to save the current settings Upper scale diagram Use this diagram to set the detuning of each note of the scale 99 0 99 Note detuning in cents Zero is no detuning 50 is a full quarter tone up or down 99 is nearly one whole semitone up o
237. can hear the sound assigned to the Lower track Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command wj Write Performance write Single Touch Setting write Current Style Perf Write Glabal Style Setup solo Track ida AE To Easy Mode Write Performance Select this command to open the Write Performance dialog box and save most of the current control panel settings to a Perfor mance See Write Performance dialog box on page 102 for more infor mation Write Single Touch Setting Select this command to open the Write Single Touch Setting STS dialog box and save Keyboard track settings to one of the Single Touch Settings STS of the current Style See Write Single Touch Setting dialog box on page 102 for more information Write Current Style Performance Select this command to open the Write Current Style Perfor mance dialog box and save Style track settings to the Style Per formance of the current Style See Write Single Touch Setting dialog box on page 102 for more information Write Global Style Setup Select this command to open the Write Global Style Setup dia log box and save global settings that are unique to the Style Play mode These settings are programmed on the Preferences Style Play Setup page see page 100 See Write Global Style Play Setup dia
238. ced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD for a list of available parameters for each effect type FX Amount MPERF PERF STS Volume of the effect that is added to the dry uneffected signal Src Source PERF PERF STS STSS Modulation source To select the track generating this message see the Mod Track Modulating Track parameters found in the Effects FX Select page see above For alist of modulation source see the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD Track Controls Mode This page lets you connect each track to the internal sound gen erator and to external MIDI devices This is very useful to let a Style track drive an external expander or play a digital piano with one of Pa500 s Keyboard tracks In addition here you can set the polyphony mode for each track STYLE PLAY Track Controls Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piano Int Ezt Both Both Type NEN aie ACCOMP BASS LOWER PPERZ OWER UPPERS ll 121 883 888 STYLE PLAY Track Controls Lw Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano B Piano 121 883 888 Int Ezt Both Both Both Both Both Both Type Foly Poly Poly 3 cm un un e e TIT BASS d ACC1 ACC ACCS ACE ACCS Int Ext Internal External gt PERF gt PERF Y sTs Internal The track plays the sounds generated by the internal sound engine It does not play an exter nal instrument connected to the MIDI OUT External The track plays an external instrument connected to the MI
239. ceived on the MIDI IN or USB port for the Lower track For example if you select the 1 value a received C4 will play a C5 on the Pa500 This parameter may be useful to many MIDI accordion players whose MIDI interface may transmit on an unexpected octave Midi In Velocity Value gt GBLMid Use this parameter to set a fixed velocity dynamics value for all received MIDI notes This is useful when playing the Pa500 with an organ or a MIDI Accordion Normal 40 127 Normal velocity values are received All received velocity values are converted to the selected value MIDI MIDI In Channels In this page you can assign Pa500 tracks to any of the MIDI IN channels Midi In Channels co Y ERR chaz Upper 2 cha p Upper 3 cha gt Lower chas gt Bass chia gt Drum Chil Lp Percussion ch12 p Ace 1 chia e Ace 2 Chid e Ace 3 cha gt off ch15 e Ace 4 chas off ch16 e cc 5 Setup idi In ICAO Midi Cut Gen tl HEUIR Channel chas Lb off chas p off Channels gt GBLMd You can assign to each channel one of the following tracks Off No track assigned Lower Lower track Upper 1 3 One of the Upper tracks Pad 1 4 One of the Pad tracks Drum Drum track Percussion Percussion track Bass Bass track ACC T 9 One of the Auto accompaniment tracks Seq 1 Tr 01 16 One of Sequencer 1 tracks Seq 2 Tr 01 16 One of Sequencer 2 tracks Glo
240. cessory CD containing the USB driver and additional manuals About this manual This manual is divided in four sections An Introduction containing an overview of the instru ment and of basic operations A Quick Guide containing a series of practical guides A Reference Guide with each page and parameter described in detail An Appendix with a list of data and useful information for the advanced user Additional information can be found inside the Accessory CD Within the manual you will find the following abbreviations gt PERF The parameter can be saved to a Performance by selecting the Write Performance command from the page menu The parameter can be saved to the current Style Performance by selecting the Write Style Perfor mance command from the page menu gt PERF gt STS The parameter can be saved to one of the Single Touch Settings of the current Style or to a Single Touch Setting of a SongBook entry To save it to a Style select the Write STS command from the page menu of the Style Play mode To save it to a SongBook entry either of Style or Song type check the Write STS option in the Book Edit 1 page of the SongBook mode gt GBL The parameter can be saved to the Global by selecting one of the available Write Global com mands from the page menu Several Global areas are available and a smaller symbol after the GBL abbreviation will appear for each relevant param eter More information i
241. ch or the Assignable Pedal See Bass Inversion on page 86 ASSIGNABLE SWITCH on page 11 and PEDAL connectors on page 17 When locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the Manual Bass status See MANUAL BASS on page 12 When locked the selected Fill Mode will not change when selecting a different Performance or Style See Fill Mode 1 3 on page 97 Manual Bass Fill Mode Style Element When locked selecting a different Style does not cause selecting a different Style Element Style Tracks Play Mute Lock When closed this lock prevents a Style or Perfor mance change to modify the Play Mute status of the Style tracks This way you can for example turn the bass track off during a whole show to allow your bassist to play it live Also you could mute all Acc tracks to only play with the Drum and Bass tracks See Track status icons on page 85 Style Tracks Volume When this lock is closed the volume of the Style tracks remains unchanged when a different Style or Performance is selected Global edit mode General Controls Interface 205 This is useful if you create your own Styles and like to dynamically adjust the volume by using the sliders as a mixer It is not recommended with Factory Styles each one already mixed at its best right at the factory General Controls Interface This page contains parameters related to the way messages are s
242. ck Stri E 1 32 8 16 Beat 32 BANK STY E 32 Circus 2 SONGBOOK BANK17 STY 17 1 Contemp 1 SONGDB SBD a F 17 32 Contemp 32 F LISTDB SBL zd USERO1 STY E U1 1 User 1 U1 32 User 32 USERO2 STY U3 1 User 1 Main page There is no main page in the Media edit mode When pressing EXIT you exit the Media mode and the underlying operating mode in the background is recalled Page structure All edit pages share some basic elements Edit mode Page menu icon List of files 15 66 47 18 33 Scrollbar Path Commands UI LLP EL Tabs AA Device pop up menu Edit mode This indicates that the instrument is in Media mode Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu see Page menu on page 227 Path Full path of the directory currently shown in the display List of files This area shows the files and folder contained in the selected device You can touch one of the heading labels above the list to change the order in which files are shown For example by touching the Name label the list is alphabetically re ordered according to the file names The selected label turns white showing the cur rently selected ordering Tape 3 Mame 2 EE 15 H5 H7 15 42 15 H5 H 15 43 If you touch the white label again the alphabetic order changes from ascending to descending or vice versa The small arrow next to the label name shows the selected order The correspondin
243. ck to the previous page without selecting any Pad Bank sets Side tabs banks E ceu cc ES SELECT AE MN EJ a Fad ie 25 ES E E 1 Lower tabs pages Pads Bank sets Selected set of banks corresponding to different types of Pads Hit are single note pre programmed factory Pads Sequence are sequence based pre programmed factory Pads Local may con tain Pads customized for the local market User can be either sin gle note or sequence based Pads and can be user recorded or modified Side tabs banks Use these tabs to select a bank of Pads Lower tabs pages Use these tabs to select one of the available pages in the selected bank Pad Press one of these buttons in the display to select a Pad Unless the Display Hold option is turned on see Display Hold On on page 206 the window automatically closes short after you select a Pad o Jg c Q re Q Q cc 78 Selecting elements STS Select STS Select Use the four SINGLE TOUCH SETTING button on the control panel to select one of the four STS associated with the current Style or the selected SongBook entry Press the STS name tab in the main page of the Style Play or Song Play mode or the Lyrics STS tab in the SongBook mode to see the name of the available STSs InStyle Play and Song Play mode Dctawe Piano Electric Guitar S75 Organ Distortion Gtr STS Sub Hane Scale In SongBook
244. ck will remain silent until a new note will be encountered in the pattern Rt Retrigger The sound will be stopped and new notes matching the recognized chord will be played back Rp Repitch New notes matching the recognized chord will be played back by repitching notes already playing There will be no break in the sound This is very useful on Guitar and Bass tracks Track Type PAD Use this parameter to set the type of the Pad track Drum Drum track This type of track is not transposed by the arranger and is used for Drum Kits or for tracks that you don t want to be transposed when playing a different chord Bass Bass track This type of track always plays the root when changing chord Acc Accompaniment track This type of track can be used freely for melodic or harmonic accompani ment patterns Gtr Guitar track This type of track uses Guitar Mode to create guitar strumming see Main page Guitar Mode on page 136 When this type is selected the Tension parameter can no longer be edited Pad Record mode Pad Chord Table 143 Tension gt PAD Tension adds notes a 9th 11th and or 13th that have actually been played even if they haven t been written in the Pad pattern This parameter specifies whether or not the Tension included in the recognized chord will be added to an Acc type track On The Tension will be added Off No Tension will be added RX Noise PAD Use this control to adj
245. cka SONG 6o3 cance daros 55 Changing tracks VOLUI einer iii eee 56 Turning Song tracks on off socios aaa 58 Solone ataco 52544035546 e UR een EE 58 Mins TWO SONGS rr E acd P brandon daa 59 The SongBook useseee s 60 Selecting the desired entry from the Main List 61 Displaying Antist Ot GENTE 252159 oae dacbe det orden pini 62 o yam seeded Eee ddnde dod occ died Va d sero d 62 Searching CNIS estro cw bh od precioso 63 Adding SOMOS obs dion ad ad outed REED oo encase d 65 Creatine a Custom list seras FCRI UTA T RARE Ad 67 Selecting and using a Custom List 1 222 os ere eres 69 Selecting a SongBook SIS curras ras ale cvs 69 Recording a new Song 70 Entering Backing Sequence Quick Record mode 70 Prepare LO TOCOPEL eo dmse vitat dtes vene ed ass edd bait bua 71 RECOMMAG oa cob acces d ane dt mdrbgeed Amd ed Gars end bodes 72 Second take recording Overdubbing 73 Saving a Song toa card sotana TI eee 73 Reference Selecting elements sleessse 76 Sound Select WINdOW s ou icut io Serbis FER PRU AEGNE ia 76 Performance Select WindOw o iaa aces x iU mr E Set pU ES 76 Style Select WINdOW PNE PPP 77 Pad Select aud cone d niiina pira gtecedidig o amt Edad hs 1d SRT Lex AP RM o ue T T ETET 78 SONG Select WIBOOW secca och wadsemauntine aras 78 Style Play operating mode 81 E oie EE vex o n et PP Or Ipae ip E ec ba Ua 81 How Styles
246. ctions of the Bass Inversion function see Bass Inversion on page 86 Manual Bass Same function of the control panel but tons with the same name Style Up Selects the next Style Style Down Selects the previous Style Single Touch STS1 STS2 STS3 STS4 STS Up Selects the next STS STS Down Selects the previous STS Perform Up Selects the next Performance Same functions of the control panel but tons with the same name Perform Down Selects the previous Performance Style number Selects the next Sound Selects the previous Sound Same functions of the control panel but tons with the same name Turns Punch Recording on off Song Melody Mute Mute of Song track 4 usually the Mel ody track Song Drum amp Bass Mode Mute of all tracks apart for track 2 usu ally Bass and 10 usually Drum Solo Selected Track Damper Pedal Soft Pedal Sostenuto Pedal Bass amp Lower Backing When the Style is not playing and you are in Split mode you can play the Lower track with your left hand while the Bass still plays the chord root See Bass amp Lower Backing on page 100 Ensemble On Off Turns Quarter Tone on off Global Scale When the switch or footswitch is pressed the Global gt General Controls gt Scale is recalled in the display SubScale Preset 1 Same functions of the SC Preset buttons SC1 4 SCA in the control panel Chord Latch Holds the recognized chord until the pedal is released Chord
247. ctory Style and Pad Protect parameter is set to Off When you have finished recording or editing the Hit or Sequence Pad please save it see Exit by saving or deleting changes below and exit the Pad Record mode Then go to the Pad page of the Style Play or Song Play mode assign the new Hit or Sequence to a Pad button and adjust the various Pad settings Volume Pan and A B FX Send see Pad Switch Pad on page 98 Finally save the Pad settings by select ing the Write Current Style Performance command from the page menu Note While in Record mode the footswitch is disabled On the contrary volume expression type pedals can be used Exit by saving or deleting changes When finished editing you can save your Pad in memory or cancel any change To save changes select the Write Pad command from the page menu see Write Pad dialog box on page 145 To cancel all changes select the Exit from Record command from the page menu or press the RECORD button to exit from record and return to the main page of the Style Record mode Hint Save often while recording to avoid accidentally losing your changes to the Pad Listening to the Pad while in Record Edit mode While you are in Pad Record or Pad Edit mode you can listen to the selected Chord Variation To select a Chord Variation go to the Main page of the Record Edit mode When you are in the Main Event Edit Quantize T
248. ctual Tempo Auto Auto reading The Sequencer plays back all recorded Tempo events No Tempo change events are recorded Record All Tempo changes made during recording will be recorded to the Master Track Note The tempo is always recorded in overwrite mode old data is replaced by the new data Selected track info area This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track See Selected track info area on page 175 for more information Sounds area This area lets you see Sounds and octave transposition for the eight tracks currently displayed See Sounds area on page 175 for more information Track volume status area This area is where you can set the volume of each Song track and change track status See Track volume status area on page 176 Track status icons Play mute record status of the current track Select the track then press this area to change its status a Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard R Record status After pressing P M PLAY STOP to start recording the track will receive notes from the keyboard and the MIDI IN or USB con nector Multitrack recording procedure Here is the general procedure to follow for the Multitrack Recording 1 Press SEQUENCER to enter Sequence mode 2 Press the RECORD button and select the Multitrack Sequencer option to enter the Multitrack Record mode Now you can prepare you
249. cut Length Number of measures to be cut o Jg c Q he Q Q cc Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Track status icon Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Track names Under the buttons a label for each track is shown 122 Style Record mode Style Edit Delete Style Edit Delete This page is where you can delete MIDI events out of the Style This function does not remove measures from the pattern To remove whole measure use the Cut function see Style Edit Cut on page 121 STYLE REC Edit LCY Delete Track P brum E b vari cv e evi cont C Start Tick 01 01 0068 End Tick 005 01 000 Bottom Mote C 1 Top Note G9 After setting the various parameters press Execute E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Vari ation for editing Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected After deletion the selected Chord Variation will remain empty Drum Acc5 Selected track Event Type of MIDI event to delete All All events The measures are not removed from the Chord Variation Note All notes in the selected range Dup Note All duplicate notes When two notes with the same pitch are encountered on the same tick the one with the
250. d Sequencer operating mode 185 Record mode Step Backing Sequence page Step Backing Sequence procedure Here is the general Step Backing Sequencer recording procedure Hint Before entering Step Backing Sequence mode to edit an exist ing Song select the Save Song command from the page menu and save the Song to a card This way you will have a copy of the Song in case you don t like the results of your editing 1 While in Sequencer mode press the RECORD button and choose the Step Backing Sequence recording option 2 Select the Measure parameter and go to the desired posi tion in the Song by using the TEMPO VALUE dial Alter natively you can move the locator using the soft transport buttons in the display See Soft transport but tons on page 184 3 Select the parameter type Style Performance Tempo to insert edit or delete at the current position If an arrow K appears next to a parameter the shown event has been inserted at the current position 4 Use the TEMPO VALUE dial to modify the selected event Delete it by pressing the Del button next to the event When editing a parameter without the arrow r next to it a new event is inserted at the current position 5 Exit the Step Backing Sequence recording mode by press ing the Done button in the display 6 Press Bl PLAY STOP in the SEQUENCER 1 section to listen to the consequence of your editing If they are fine save
251. d tracks PERC Al Los Style tracks Keyboard tracks 2 To separately adjust each Style track press the TRACK SELECT button to change track s view TRACK SELECT STYLE PLAY eno chord gt A In Style view all sepa rate Style tracks are shown and can be controlled by touch O E ing them and then using the Dial Style tracks 3 To return to Normal view press the TRACK SELECT button again D Note Grouped Style tracks are Dr Perc Drum and Per cussion Accomp Accompaniment 1 5 Bass Bass D Hint As an alterna tive to using the TEMPO VALUE dial hold the track s slider in the dis play then move your fin ger up down Selecting and playing Styles 5 1 Turning Style tracks on off Turning Style tracks on off You may easily turn on or off any Style track while you are playing For example try muting all accompaniment tracks while drum and bass continue to play a i R C Note While in the 1 While the Style is playing touch anywhere in the ACCOMP track s chan Normal vew aine in nel strip to select the track volume value highlighted then touch it again Play mode you can see to set the track to Mute Style tracks grouped in just three complex tracks To see each Style track as individual tracks just press the TRACK SELECT button gt Mute the ACCOMP ment tracks will go silent apart from Drum Percussion and Bass Y t D
252. d save your file to a card Write JukeBox File My Show Press the T Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window and edit the name If you are editing an existing list and do not change its name the old file is overwritten If you change it a new file will be created in the card If you are saving a new list the NEWNAME JBX name is auto matically assigned and you can edit it Note You can save your JBX file only in the same folder as the Song files included in the list Groove Quantize You can apply a realtime groove quantization to Sequencer 1 Groove quantization is a way of changing the music groove dur ing the playback moving notes to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid Please feel free to experiment this function is a great source of musical inspiration To enable groove quantize you can either use the command in this page or check the Groove Quantize Enable command in the page menu SONG PLAY SE01 Groove Quantize LCY Seq 1 Groove Quantize Settings L Enable Mate start Accuracy 35 100 Swing Se L Mate duration Resolution O window 3 166 Note Groove Quantize parameters are not saved as they are only intended for realtime use Song Play operating mode 161 Groove Quantize Enable Enables disables quantization It is automatically set to Off each time the instrument is turned on or when selecting a different Song Hint You
253. d Var Chord Variation This parameter lets you select one of the six available Chord Variations CV1 CV6 for editing or recording Note When this parameter and the assigned value is in small let ters cv1 cv6 the Chord Variation is empty when it is in capitals CV1 CV6 it is already recorded Resolution Use this parameter to set the quantization during record ing Pad Sync PAD This parameter allows you to set a synchronization mode for the Pad s pattern Off No synchronization The sequence will start as soon as you press the PAD button Continued The pattern will start immediately in sync with the arrangers or active sequencers tempo Depending on the current position of the beat counter it might not start from its very begin ning instead it will continue from the current position For example if the arranger s or sequencer s beat counter shows the third beat and is playing tick 91 the Pad will start from its third beat at tick 9T The beat counter IE 5 16 Beat ie Meter 4 4 L5 24 This works exactly as if it was a Fill o Jg c Q L Q Q cc 134 Pad Record mode Main page Record 1 Beat The sequence will start at the next beat in sync with the arranger s or sequencer s tempo It will start from its very beginning 1 e tick 1 or mea sure 1 Rec Length Recording Length PAD This parameter sets the recording length in measures of the seque
254. d chords into musical patterns The Note Transposition Table NTT determines how the arranger will transpose pattern notes when a chord is recognized that does not exactly match the original chord of a Chord Variation For example if you only recorded a Chord Variation for the CMaj chord when a CMaj7 is recog nized on the keyboard the arranger must transpose some notes to create the missing 7th Note These parameters cannot be selected with Drum Percussion or Guitar tracks and are therefore greyed out Note NTT parameters are separately programmed for each track of the Style Element There are two general types of NTTs When Parallel types are selected notes are transposed inside the area set by the Wrap Around parameter These tables are ide ally suited to melody parts Cmaj as written as played back When Fixed types are selected the arranger moves as few notes as possible making legato lines and chord changes more natural They are ideally suited to chord tracks strings piano etc Cmaj Fmaj Dmin Gmaj as written as played back Note To conform to Korg specifications 1t is advisable to set the NTT to No Transpose on the Intro 1 and Ending 1 Style Record mode 109 Main page Record 1 Parallel Root The root note in CMaj C is transposed to the missing notes Parallel Fifth The 5th note in CMaj G is transposed to the missing notes As recorded with NTT Root or 5th When you p
255. d from the page menu 3 Select the target Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the single effect you want to paste FX A FX B FX C or FX D 4 Choose the Paste FX command from the page menu To copy all four effects 1 Select the source Performance Style or STS then go to the Effects gt FX Select page to copy all four effects ud Choose the Copy FX command from the page menu is Select the target Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the Effects gt FX Select page 4 Choose the Paste FX command from the page menu Easy Mode Easy Mode allows you to use the Style Play and Song Play modes with an easier to use user interface It is recommended to begin ners and to professionals alike that do not want to deal with the extra parameters of the Advanced mode At any time you can manually turn the Easy Mode on off with the Easy Mode command in the page menu of the Style Play and Song Play modes See The Song Play page in detail on page 8 for more informa tion Write Global Song Play Setup dialog box Open this dialog box by selecting the Write Global Song Play Setup item from the page menu Here you can save various Song Preference settings see Preferences Track Setting on page 162 that are saved to the Global file Write Global Song Play Setup Write Global Song Play Setup to memory Parameters saved in the Song Play Setup area of the Global are
256. d procedure Realtime Record procedure 1 Select the track to record Its status icon will turn to R Record For more details see Tracks volume status area on page 110 Note When entering the Record mode a track is already in Record status When you press START STOP after entering the Record mode you can immediately start recording If you like you can try your part before recording e Mute the track by repeatedly pressing its icon status until the Mute status icon appears e Press START STOP to let any recorded track play back and practice on the keyboard When you have finished practicing press START STOP to stop the arranger and unmute the track by repeatedly pressing its icon status until the R Record status icon appears again While the shown status icon is Record press START STOP to begin recording Depending on the Metro metro nome option you selected a 1 or 2 bars precount may play before the recording actually begins When it begins play freely The pattern will last for some measures accord ing to the Rec Length value then restart Since the recording will happen in overdub you can add notes on any following passage This is very useful to record different percussive instruments at any cycle on a Drum or Percussion track Note While recording tracks Keyboard Range see page 125 is ignored and the track can play over the whole keyboard range The Local parameter
257. diaria 203 MIDI Setup 6 cece cece eee eee rn 269 General Controls Infetfaee cues caen add acts 205 Assignable parameters 270 Controllers Pedal Switch Slider s cusa aka dae tr rn 206 List of Footswitch functions e c0ccc0c cece eee 270 MIDI MIDI Setup General Controls 207 List of Assignable Pedal and Assignable Slider functions 271 4 Table of Contents List of Assignable Switch functions 2 oes ers 24 2 vc a et re ee ee ee er ee ee 272 MIDI Data 5602000 qee meee 273 MIDI Controller qum dco 93 7d 6309 94 9599 9 rato 3rd ets 273 Program Change messages used as remote commands 274 Control Change and Program Change message used as Teniote Conid S e odes dubia eoe pac DAD a 274 MIDI Implementation Chart 4523 49 39 1 cia ibas 275 Recognized chords L 276 Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver 278 Connecting the Pa500 to a personal computer 278 KORG USB MIDI Driver system requirements 278 Please note Defor Use esconder ep queas 278 Windows Installing the KORG USB MIDI Driver 278 Mac OS X Installing KORG USB MIDI Driver 279 SNOMIGUNS PETIT 280 Troubleshooting L 281 Technical specifications 282 lile gag a 284 uononpoaju 6 Easy Mode Easy Mode If you have never used an arranger before we suggest you to use your Pa500 in
258. ding Intro to play INTRO 2 3 COUNT IN jala The Style starts with the selected Intro When the Intro is completed the basic pattern selected Variation starts to play Play the keyboard 4 While playing press one of the FILL buttons to select a Fill FILL 2 3 BREAK jala 5 Before the Fill ends press one of the VARIATION buttons to select a dif ferent variation of the basic pattern VARIATION oc When the Fill ends the selected Vari ation will start playing p Note You do not need to select a Fill before selecting a differ ent Variation but select ing a Fill makes the transition smoother and more musical CD Note You do not need to select a Varia tion during a Fill since a Variation may already be automatically recalled at the end of the Fill See Fill Mode 1 3 on page 97 48 Selecting and playing Styles Single Touch Settings STS 6 When you like to stop playing press one of the ENDING buttons to stop the Style with an Ending pod Single Touch Settings STS When the Ending is fin ished the Style auto matically stops Each Style or SongBook entry may come with up to four Keyboard track settings called STS short for Single Touch Settings STS 1 is automatically selected when choosing a Style provided the SINGLE TOUCH LED is turned on STS 1 is also recalled when a SongBook entry is selec
259. dit menu you can jump to one of the edit sections by touching the corresponding button in the display Otherwise press EXIT to return to the main page of the current operating mode or the current page of the underlying operating mode See the relevant chapter devoted to each operating mode or edit environment to see their maps in detail EXIT Press EXIT MENU together to reset the Tempo to the value memorized in the selected Style 9 MODE section Each of these buttons recalls one of the instrument s operating modes When selected each mode excludes the others STYLE PLAY Style Play mode where you can play Styles auto matic accompaniments and play up to four Key board tracks and four Pad tracks In the main page Keyboard tracks are shown in the right half of the display You can reach the main page by pressing EXIT from any of the Style Play edit pages If you are in a different operating mode press STYLE PLAY to recall the Style Play mode If Keyboard tracks are not shown in the display press the TRACK SELECT button to see them This operating mode is automatically selected when turning the instrument on SONG PLAY Song Play mode where you can play back Songs in Standard MIDI File SMF or KAR format Since the Pa500 is equipped with two sequencers you can even play two Songs at the same time and mix them with the SEQUENCER BALANCE slider In addition to the Song tracks you can play up to four Ke
260. e wr 5 5 mme mme JO aer stores pes wr s 5 ovat trumpets mme et ee er posteas es Pre 7 5 roon me 95 5 wem js Paar s 3 Warm Faget ramet O E 8t eer ees wn s 3 Bebop cornet ame et 5 ramas es Paar m 5 Wmeamer eme et a8 5 remesa em Lx uw 3 EEC umet 1 30 8t Brassotpower em Lx 5 3 fruen met ar att BrassSecions oes wr w 3 mme amp Jo sanas ta es wr s ar wmbeecw mme 5 et jme fos wr 1 5 Wmbee Trumpet wr 3 5 j edwemene me a 4 wmm Jem ra 5r emen ume e jwmhmess oes or Pier Trombone umet Pat 9 IEEE mes EC 5 Wemeneteri umet ae amin erase Em 5 Wembeneteri umet a a a EA ae mme e wr s 9 jmhwass fares Lx 9 s pewmoswew CS E rr 1 8 ses soprano o wr soprano rro m wr 4 9 mensem m wr 9 S mes x EC Par 0 S jWMemem ie wr 5 pmmeme ise wr 3 5 premi a o so m wr 5 5 peek ex wr s 5 faweet tose fie wr 7 somos e EE E a A 42 EA 1 lt a a a per s 8 pese ime EE a 3 om EN a 59 usu umet 3 9 me rumperz C mme EN E E E NEN NN NN EN NE NE NE HEN NEN EN EM wr s S jMesmhp CO 2 m French section
261. e There are four Internal FX processors in Style Play mode two for Keyboard tracks two for Style and Pad tracks You can assign them any kind of available effects but we found it conve nient to arrange them in the following way for most of the Styles STS and Performances included with the Pa500 FX A Reverb processor for the Style tracks FX B Modulating FX processor for the Style tracks FX C Reverb processor for the Realtime Keyboard tracks FX D Modulating FX processor for the Realtime Key board tracks Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from Keyboard to Style tracks and vice versa STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning LCY Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 ACCL ACC ACCS ACCA eo FX E Send level A D 0 127 PERF PERF STS Level of the track direct signal sent to the effect processor Play Mute icon PERF PERF STS Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Mixer Tuning EQ Gain In this page you can set the three band equalization EQ for each individual track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to the Style tracks and vice versa STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning Lw Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano B Piano 121 883 888 STYLE PLAY Hixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 eum em
262. e Key Chord parameter in the main page of the Pad Record mode see page 134 PAD REC Pad Edit LCY cw p evt Value B Start Tick 01 01 0068 End Tick 43 41 4808 Bottom Mote C 1 Top Note 653 After setting the various parameters press Execute CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing Value Transpose value 127 semitones Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to be transposed Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to be transposed Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Q y c Q re Q Q cc 140 Pad Record mode Pad Edit Velocity Pad Edit Velocity In this page you can change the velocity dynamics value of notes in the selected track PAD REC Pad Edit w velocity Value By l Start Tick 001 01 008 EndTick 003 061 000 Bottom Mote C 1 L Advanced Top Note G3 After setting the various parameters press Execute CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing Value Velocity change value 127 Intensity Only available in Advanced mode Use this parameter to specify the degree to which the velocity data will be adjusted toward the curve you specify in Curve Curve Only available in Advanced mode Use this parame
263. e L Enable General Controls L Clock Send Clock Source Ly Internal Local Control On ST ridi In Midi In Mid Gut c send Current MIDI Setup MIDI Setup gt GBLS gt GBLS 9 gt GBLSe4 MIDI channels can be automatically configured by selecting a MIDI Setup Each of them lets you assign the best values to vari ous MIDI parameters to allow an easier connection with a par ticular MIDI controller See MIDI on page 230 for more information on using MIDI Setups A different MIDI Setup may be automatically selected when entering the Style Play Song Play or Sequencer modes To select a MIDI Setup for these modes see Midi Setup on page 100 for the Style Play mode Midi Setup on page 162 for the Song Play mode and Midi Setup on page 196 for the Sequencer mode For detailed information on MIDI Setup settings see MIDI Setup on page 269 Note After selecting a MIDI Setup you can apply any changes to each channel s settings To store the changes in memory select the Write Global Midi Setup command in the page menu to save it to memory see Write Global Midi Setup dialog box on page 212 Hint To restore the original MIDI Setups load the original Fac tory data again downloadable from www korgpa com Note to RX Noise RX Noises are special sounds that make Sounds be more realis tic They are usually located above C7 depending on the Sound Enable When this para
264. e Are you sure message appears press OK to confirm or Cancel to go back to the Write Style dialog box Event Edit Filter This page is where you can select the event types to be shown in the Event Edit page STYLE REC Event Edit w Filter L Note Fx Noise Control L_ riteh Bend tempos meter Filter Turn On the filter for all event types you do not wish to see in the Event Edit page Note Some of the events are ghosted and non editable since the corresponding events are not editable in a Style Note RX Noise Notes and RX Noises Control Control Change events Only the following Con trol Change numbers are allowed with Styles CC Control Change Number Control function Modulation 1 Modulation 2 Expression CC 12 CC 13 Damper Filter Resonance Low Pass Filter Cutoff CC 80 CC 81 CC 82 Expression events cannot be inserted at the starting Position 001 01 000 An Expression value is already among the default header parameters of the Style Element Tempo Meter Tempo and Meter changes Master Track only Pitch Bend Pitch Bend events Style Record mode 119 Event Edit Filter Style Edit Quantize The quantize function may be used to correct any timing mis take after recording or to give the pattern a groovy feeling STYLE REC Edit m Quantize E vari cy e evi Track Djorn Resolution Start Tick 01
265. e created a backup copy of your custom data see Full Resources Backup on page 224 To restore data see Full Resources Restore on page 225 Warning Do not install Musical Resources other than the official ones supplied by Korg for the Pa500 Trying to install Musical Resources created for different models may cause data loss Loading Musical Resources created with previous Pa Series Pa80 PalX Pa800 and i Series instruments is allowed with some limi tations See the Media edit mode chapter for more information Welcome Making a backup of the original data 21 Introduction 22 Start up Connecting the AC power adapter Start up Connecting the AC power adapter Connect the supplied AC power adapter to the dedicated socket on the rear of the instrument Then plug it into a wall socket gt gt ii by Warning Use only the supplied adapter or an adapter suggested by Korg Other adapters may look similar but they may damage your instrument Turning the instrument on and off Press the STANDBY ON switch on the rear panel to turn the instrument on The display will light up showing the boot procedure Press again the STANDBY ON switch on the rear panel to turn the instrument off Warning When turning the instrument off all data con tained in RAM Song recorded or edited in Sequencer mode will be lost On the contrary data contained in the SSD mem ory Factory data User Sound
266. e it will be loaded with the MID file and can be seen in the Lyrics page As an example if the file MYSONG TXT exists in the same directory as the MYSONG MID file it is loaded together with the matching MID file However unlike ordinary Lyrics the text will not scroll automat ically while the Song is playing back You must scroll it with the DIAL As an alternative you can use an assignable switch or footswitch with the Text Page Up or Text Page Down functions assigned to scroll respectively to the previous or next text page Note When a TXT file is loaded with the Song it overrides any included Lyrics data Playing the keyboard while reading chords When playing the keyboard while a Song is running if you want to play the keyboard in C while seeing the original chords in the display set to Off the Transpose applies to Style and Kbd tracks parameter and check the Transpose applies to Sequencer 1 2 parameter see page 202 STS Name panel Select this panel to see the name of the four available STSs See STS Name panel on page 85 for details Sub Scale panel Select this panel to select a secondary scale for the Keyboard tracks See Mixer Tuning Sub Scale on page 90 for details Pad panel Select this panel to see which Hit or Sequence Pads are assigned to the four Pads See Pad panel on page 85 for details Split panel Select this panel to adjust the
267. e 8 available MIDI Setup locations where to save cur rent MIDI settings Write SC Preset dialog box Open this dialog box by selecting the Write SC Preset item from the page menu Here you can save the current Quarter Tone SubScale settings to one of the four SC Scale Presets Write Quarter Tone Preset SC Preset 1 To gt SC Preset 1 Name Name of the SC Presets are fixed and cannot be changed SC Preset One of the four available SC Preset locations where to save cur rent scale settings Delete Help Language dialog box Open this dialog box by selecting the Delete Help Language item from the page menu Here you can remove the Help languages you do not need to use saving space in the internal SSD memory for other types of data notably OS Upgrades or loading of Styles and Sounds Delete Help Language Select the help language to delete Choose a language to delete Note that nor the English or the language currently in use can be selected Deutsch Espa ol Francais Italiana Mederlands Russian After having chosen a language press OK to confirm deletion or Cancel to cancel the operation Repeat the above procedure for all the other languages you want to delete Note There is no need to reboot after deleting the Help lan guage s Media edit mode Storage devices and internal memory 213 The Media edit mode is the place where you can manage files This edit envi
268. e Select button CIC e om x 9 9 Wesen feo Y um 1 9 ac piano wide 1215 2 o0 Ac Piano Dark 121 NEON Grand Piano ur 4 9 Umm piano Y Paar 5 9 perno piano Pier o Pienoavibes piano Pier 7 9 ano a stos feo un s foero Pme wi o 1 wumPamGM EA wr 1 3 aan Pianowide piano Y ia 1 Trino pad Rn un 3 T ienorea2 piano um 4 fenera piano wn e 2 ecrendriano gm piano wi 1 2 EGedW e Re V wr Wee no uw 3 fp amo me un 4 2 fosan eo um s 2 feros Pme m e 2 Penotayes Pme wi o 3 EEC Rae V Pier 1 3 jeww me y wr 9 4 eraoro Emme EC wn 1 4 pewnei EP Y ETA EA O DO e COE BINNEN C AEN C EA wr 4 a wet eree wr 3 4 probare ferina f 121 Pro Stage EP Studio EP R amp B E Piano um 3 4 thine reno 121 Dyno Tine EP Club E Piano Classic Wurly Soft Wurly Ca CEIC fere a s vea 121 16 4 Tremolo Wurly un 9 5 EI EP wn 1 5 ESC EP wn 2 5 dem fere EA wi 3 5 eeen EP wn 4 5 ererese EP EA wn s 5 smPianox Emme wi s 5 sereoo EP wn 7 5 Gwbetr Emo wn s 5 Wdm fePiano un 3 frases Eme un w 5 hantomtine EF CIC em eer wr uw 5 jwexen Emme wu s femna Eme Pra 9 e heman piano par 1 6 freson Pan
269. e Song Jazz 5 To see the whole SongBook database again press the Filtered check box again to make the check mark disappear The SongBook Adding entries Adding entries You can add your own entries to the SongBook database 1 Goto the Style Play or Song Play mode depending on the type of entry you want to add to the SongBook database NJ Select the Style Standard MIDI File to be added to the SongBook Assign the selected Song to Sequencer 1 Only Songs assigned to Sequencer 1 will be saved in the SongBook entry Songs assigned to Sequencer 2 will not be saved UJ Edit Keyboard and Style tracks as you prefer by selecting different Sounds and Effects or editing any other parameter Please note that changes to a Standard MIDI File s tracks will not be saved as SongBook data Data included in the Standard MIDI File will always be considered I When your entry is ready press the SONGBOOK button then the Book Edit 1 tab to see the Book Edit 1 page Name of the Style SMF or KAR file memorized with the entry provided Write Current Resource is selected when saving it Entry s parameters Entry s name M a I M Q When checked current settings for Style an TTT TES INE 7 7 tracks or the path for the SMF or KAR file are saved with the entry If unchecked Hame 1BBBgiorni di noi Resource GT Standard 16 Beat original Style track
270. e for the selected range This is useful to create fade ins or fade outs SEQUENCER Edit w Yelocity Track Lb Track 15 Intensity 186 x Start vel value y se Start Tick 01 01 0068 End Tick 61 841 192 Curve Curve 1 End Yel Value 100 5 Bottom Note C 1 Top Mate G3 Advanced uH Ir TH Tad TAS THE Sequencer operating mode 193 Song Edit Transpose After setting the various parameters press Execute to start the operation Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected Track 1 16 Selected track Value Velocity change value Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to edit If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to edit If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum track Advanced When this checkbox is checked the Intensity Curve Start Velocity Value and End Velocity Value parameters can be edited Intensity Only available in Advanced mode Use this parameter to specify the degree to which the velocity data will be adjusted toward the curve you specify in Curve 0 100 Intensity value With a
271. e global settings that are unique to the Song Play mode See Write Global Song Play Setup dialog box on page 165 for more information Save Song Marker Seq 1 2 Select this command to save the markers created in the corre sponding sequencer see Markers side tabs on page 153 Export Jukebox List Select this command to save the current Jukebox list as a text file to a card Here is how it works 1 While a Jukebox file is assigned to the sequencer select the Export Jukebox List command from the page menu 2 A dialog box will appear Write JukeBox List 3 Press OK to confirm Note When saved the text file will be named after the selected Jukebox file For example a Jukebox file named Dummy jbx will generate a Dummy txt file A new unnamed Jukebox file will generate a New name txt file If a file with the same name already exists on the target device it will be overwritten without waiting for any confirmation The list will include the progressive number assigned to each Song the file names the total number of files in the list For the correct display and printing of the list on a personal com puter use a fixed size 1 e non proportional character in your text editor Seq 1 Groove Quantize Enable Enables disables the groove quantize see Groove Quantize on page 161 It is automatically unchecked each time the instru ment is turned on or when selecting a different Song Note G
272. e of the faster sampled arpeggios on the higher keys The root note is always available on the C key while the fifth note is always assigned to the D key with them you can always play the lowest notes of an arpeggio This octave also includes an all mute key F mH All Mute Recognized Chord Fifth Power Chord Recognized Full Down Up Chord Root Ng VI String E I String e Down Up 4 Strings V String A II String B IV String D III String G Recording RX Noises Further on the upper three octaves of the 61 key keyboard are used to trigger RX Noises A ll oo RX Noises Selecting a Capo Together with strumming types single strings and RX Noises you can choose a capo capotasto Note that this might prevent some single strings to sound depending on the composed chord You can always see with strings are playing and which are not as described in the Diagram section below Choosing a Key Chord The pattern is recorded in the key indicated by the Key Chord pair of parameters However this parameter is only considered during playback of the Intro 1 and Ending 1 Style Elements With Intro 1 and Ending 1 both Chord Variation 1 and 2 you can also enter a chord progression This is done with the lowest MIDI octave C 1 B 1 Chord types are inserted by using velocity as shown in the following table 3 Worms 4 Molor 7h ated sth 5 suspendedath 6 Susp
273. e recognized chord in memory and keeps the Lower track held until the next note or chord is played When its LED is off the chord is reset when raising the hand from the keyboard and the Lower track is not sustained Fixed Arr Lower When its LED is on the MEMORY button keeps the Lower track held until the next note or chord is played When off the Lower track is not sus tained when raising the hand from the keyboard The chord is always kept in memory Reference 100 Style Play operating mode Preferences Style Play Setup Lock icon gt GBL O All parameters in this page may be protected from selecting a different Performance or STS This lock is reset when turning the instrument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 212 For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 203 Preferences Style Play Setup In this page you can set various general parameters for the Style Play mode STYLE PLAY Preferences LCY Global Style Play Setup Ly 81 Defaut Midi Setup Performance Sound Default Lr Performance stus Change On Ey Default Velocity Control value Bass amp Lower Backing LJ upper Yolume Link Note These settings are stored in the Style Play Setup area of the Global file together with all the other parameters marked with the gt GBLSY abbreviation through the manual After cha
274. e selected with Drum Percussion or Guitar tracks and are therefore greyed out Note NTT parameters are separately programmed for each track of the Style Element There are two general types of NTTs When Parallel types are selected notes are transposed inside the area set by the Wrap Around parameter These tables are ide ally suited to melody parts Cmaj as played back as written When Fixed types are selected the arranger moves as few notes as possible making legato lines and chord changes more natural They are ideally suited to chord tracks strings piano etc Dmin Cmaj Fmaj Gmaj Wi as written as played back Note To conform to Korg specifications it is advisable to set the NTT to No Transpose on the Intro 1 and Ending 1 Pad Record mode Main page Record 1 135 Parallel Root The root note in CMaj C is transposed to the missing notes Parallel Fifth The 5th note in CMaj G is transposed to the missing notes As recorded with NTT Root or 5th When you play a CM7 When you play a CM7 Key Chord 2 CMaj with NTT Root with NTT 5th IMM LAI MMT Parallel i Series All original patterns must be programmed on the Maj7 or min7 chords When loading old Korg i Series Styles this option is automatically selected As recorded with NTT i Series When you play a CMaj When you play a C7 Key Chord CM7 with NTT 1 Series with NTT i Series MEM IE Leld
275. e settings to a Performance Write Performance Name Stereo Grand Parameters saved in the Performance are marked with the PERF symbol through the user s manual SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the SOUND PERFORMANCE buttons to open this window Name Name of the Performance to be saved Press the T Text Edit button next to the name to open the Text Edit window Perf Bank Target bank of Performances Each bank corresponds to one of the PERFORMANCE SOUND buttons Use the TEMPO VALUE dial to select a different bank Performance Target Performance location in the selected bank Use the TEMPO VALUE dial to select a different location Select button Press this button to open the Performance Select window and select a target location Write Single Touch Setting dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Single Touch Setting item from the page menu Here you can save Keyboard track settings to one of the four single Touch Settings STS belonging to the current Style Write Single Touch Setting 5T5 Stereo Grand To Current Style Easy Beat 1 gt B1 Octave Piano Parameters saved in the STS are marked with the STS symbol through the user s manual SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the SIN GLE TOUCH SETTING buttons to open this window Name Name of the STS to be saved Press the Ti Text Edit button next to the name to open the Text
276. e the Filter in the Book page to quickly find an entry to be edited The Book Edit 1 page with a Style based entry SONGBOOK IM no chord B Resource GT Standard 16 Beak Genre T Ballad Tempo 6 Artist Key into gt I Lr ic L Jerite Current Resource GT Easy Beat 1 Hame 1BBBgiorni di nai Meter Info 4 4 Transp A fata UY gts Ye RPM r t o3 pra jook rss s BEEP pA The Book Edit 1 page with a Song based entry SONGBOOK Hame 1BBBgiorni di nai no chord B Resource ETH Standard 16 Beak Genre T Ballad Tempo 6 Artist Key into gt Ly Transp B L Jerite Current Resource Canyon i um DE tarea fly any L Jerrite STS FE stores Grand Meter Info 4 4 RI es x X out tithe BRED tjs V ox EE dela Custom Lyrics List STS ELS Header Name SB Name of the selected song entry The name is assigned after you press the Write button to save the entry to the SongBook list Resource SB Style or Standard MIDI File associated with the saved entry Warning If you replace this resource with a different one carrying the same media path and name in case of a Standard MIDI File or memory location number in case of a Style the SongBook entry will no longer point to the right data Be careful not to delete or move a Style or a file associated with a SongBook entry from the original location Database Area Genre gt SB Music genre
277. eRng 8 ait pioro 8 Taiz erketSpecrum ECN Pai Aver 34 Nee 8 ars foem S T5 tubule aie mma 7 Gtr Cut Noise1 Gtr Cut Noise2 Power Chord M E Douf Tek1 M E Douf Tek2 7 7 M E Rik1 M E Rik2 7 7 7 7 470 M E Bandir Closed 471 M E Bongo Roll M E Darbuka1 Tek1 M E Darbuka1 Tek2 M E Darbuka1 Open 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 442 443 445 447 448 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 462 463 465 467 68 M E Timbales 7 4 5 Me Darbukes 5 sm ME Darbukes NI 472 473 474 475 476 EM m EM M E Darbuka7 M E Davul M E Hollo1 M E Hollo2 M E Ramazan Davul1 M E Ramazan Davul2 M E Ramazan Davul3 M E Tef1 M E Tef2 M E Tef3 Empty Factory data 263 Performances Performances All Performances are user editable Use the following table as a model for your own Perfomance lists Note You can remotely select Performances on the Pa500 by sending it Bank Select MSB CC 0 Bank Select LSB CC 32 and Program Change messages on the Control channel see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 209 Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 Bank 4 HR E er EL EA ct BELL HR E ct BELL TI TI REL xm mI HILL pep m A rs 5 re 6 Bank 7 Bank 8 5 poo p A A E NEN AA ae ao EG MEME NN o EN EE a a i AA EU PMENEEN Md NE EMEN Ap pp qp EE
278. ect dry signal 1s sent to the output mixed with the FXs Out L R Off When unchecked the direct dry signal is removed from the audio output and only sent to the FXs The effected signal will still be panned in stereo FXs only according to the Pan value Out UR Pan gt PERF STS Track position in the stereo field 64 1 Left stereo channel 0 Center 1 63 Right stereo channel Volume gt PERF STS Tracks volume 0 127 MIDI value of the track s volume Play Mute icon PERF STS GBL 9 Track s play mute status See Keyboard track status on page 150 for more information Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Mixer Tuning FX Send This page lets you set the level of the track s direct uneffected signal going to the Internal FX processors Note Song parameters cannot be saved when saving to a Perfor mance or STS The effect processors included in Pa500 are connected in paral lel so you can decide which percentage of the direct signal can be effected In case you want to send all of a track s signal to the effect as when using insert effects like Rotary Distortion EQ just set the Dry parameter to Off see Dry above There are four Internal FX processors in Song Play mode Usu ally they are arranged as follows FX A Reverb processor for Sequencer 1 and 2 FX B Modulating FX processor for Sequencer 1 and 2
279. ect one of the edit pages of the current edit section Mixer Tuning Volume Pan This page lets you set the volume and pan for each Song track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 and 9 16 SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Trk 51Tr01 k Grand Piano B Piana 121 883 888 SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Trk 51Tr01 k Grand Piano I T10 Dry gt SONG Use this checkbox to turn the dry direct signal on or off On When checked the direct dry signal is sent to the output mixed with the FXs Out UR Off When unchecked the direct dry signal is removed from the audio output and only sent to the FXs The effected signal will still be panned in stereo FXs only according to the Pan value Out UR Pan gt SONG Track position in the stereo field L 64 L 1 C 00 Center Left stereo channel R 1 R 63 Right stereo channel Volume gt SONG Track s volume 0 127 MIDI value of the track s volume Play Mute icon SONG Tracks play mute status a Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Mixer Tuning FX Send This page lets you set the level of the track s direct uneffected signal going to the Internal FX processors The effect processors included in Pa500 are connected in parallel so you can decide which percentage of the direct signal can be effected In case you want to send all of a tracks signal to the effect as when using in
280. ed and press these buttons to scroll to the previous or next Song in the Jukebox list lq HOME Returns to measure 1 of the current Song ll PLAY STOP Starts or stops the current Song When you stop the Song it is stopped at the current position Press HOME to go back to measure 1 of the cur rent Song If the Jukebox panel is open you can select the Song from which to start See Jukebox panel above Lyrics amp Markers panel Lyrics side tabs These panels show the lyrics and chord abbreviations included in a Song or loaded as a TXT file with the Song You can see the following types of Lyrics Lyrics included in Standard MIDI Files e Lyrics included in Karaoke files Lyrics loaded as a TXT file with a Standard MIDI File or Karaoke file see Text files loaded with Standard MIDI Files below Lyrics will be shown only if they are compatible with a standard format that Pa500 can understand Master Transpose Current measure Current beat Song chords GH GH Selected HAVE SOME FUN sequencer FH THROW AWAY THE WORK ELL MY FRIENDS THE options STS While the Song is playing the text flows in the display Chord abbreviations 1f any will appear above the lyrics in time with the music depending on the Show Chords parameter status under the Options side tab Lyrics at the current position are highlighted Song chords Chords contained in the midifile 1f a
281. ed in the Style Performance e Meter Change is not allowed therefore not recognized The Chord Variation length is the same as the imported SMF You can change length by changing the value of the CV Length parameter on the main page of the Style Record mode Hint If a note extends beyond the last measure of the Chord Varia tion an additional measure is appended for example if a note extends after the end of the fourth measure in a 4 measure pattern a 5 measure Chord Variation will be generated If so change the CV Length value to reset the Chord Variation length The exceeding note will be cut to fit the new pattern length Style Record mode 127 Import Import SMF When programming a Chord Variation on an external sequencer please assign each Style track to the correct MIDI channel according to the following table Pa500 Track MIDI Channel s Accompaniment 1 5 Note Only SMF in format 0 can be loaded From Song This is the name of the Standard MIDI File to be loaded Press the Select button to open the file selector and select an SMF file Select Press this button to open the file selector and load the SMF Initialize Check this parameter if you want all settings of the target Style Element ie Key Chord Chord Table Sounds are reset when loading the SMF Hint It is a good idea to check the Initialize parameter when importing the first Chord Variation of a Style Element a
282. ed on the Pa500 in Sequencer mode can use up to 4 effects usually 2 reverbs 2 modulating effects each track may use the A B or C D pair A Standard MIDI File or Karaoke file will only use 2 effects usually 1 reverb 1 modulating effect This lets you use the remaining 2 effects for the Realtime tracks e When using both sequencers at the same time and the Seq 2 FX Mode is set to AB mode see page 163 they only use the A B pair while the C D pair is reserved to the Keyboard tracks e When using both sequencers at the same time and the Seq 2 FX Mode is set to CD mode see page 163 Sequencer 1 uses the A B pair while Sequencer 2 uses the C D pair sharing it with Keyboard tracks Song Play operating mode 159 Effects FX A D Effects FX A D These pages contain the editing parameters for the four effect processors Here is an example of the FX A page with the Reverb Smooth Hall effect assigned Selected effect SONG PLAY SEUT Effects 71 Reverb SmoornHall High Damp C21 Pre Delay Thru CX Reverb Time sec FX param eters Pre Delay msec EG Trim Pre LEG Fo Low Pre LEG Gain dB 4 4 Fre HEG Fo Pre HEG Gain dE 20 Sro Ort Fs Amount Selected effect PERF STS gt GBL Select one of the available effects from this pop up menu This is the same as the FX A D parameters found in the Effects FX Select page see above FX paramet
283. ed with the GBL Y symbol through the user s manual Style Play operating mode Write Style Performance dialog box 103 Q y c Q re Q Q cc 104 Style Record mode The Style structure Style Record mode By entering the Style Record mode you can create your own Styles or edit an existing Style The Style structure The term Style relates with music sequences automatically played by the arranger of the Pa500 A Style consists of a pre defined number of Style Elements E Pa500 features thirteen different Style Elements Variation 1 4 Intro 1 3 Fill 1 3 End ing 1 3 When playing these Style Elements can be selected directly from the control panel using the corresponding but tons To explain the Style structure we can use a tree structure as shown in the following diagram m Pop Ballad C Variation 1 Variation 2 Variation 3 amp Bass Variation 4 ja Intro1 acg t on Acc5 CV2 2 iis Intro 2 i S Intro 3 C In Fill 1 evs Fill 2 e Fill 3 Break Ending 1 Ending 2 Ending 3 Each Style Element is made up of smaller units called Chord Variations CV but not all of them have the same number of CVs Variations 1 4 have up to 6 CVs each while the other Style Elements have only up to 2 CVs When you play on the chord recognition area Lower or Full depending on the status of the SPLIT button on the control panel the arranger scans the keyboard and determines which
284. eep it pressed until this page appears Global edit mode Touch Panel Calibration 211 Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command w write Global Glabal Setup write Global Midi Setup Write Global uta Select Setup Write SE Preset Delete Help Language Write Global Global Setup Select this command to open the Write Global Global Setup dia log box and save global settings that are not tied to a single operative mode These settings are programmed in the Global edit mode See Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 212 for information on the dialog box Write Global Midi Setup Select this command to open the Write Global Midi Setup dia log box and save the current MIDI settings to a MIDI Setup See Write Global Midi Setup dialog box on page 212 for more information Write Global Auto Select Setup Choose this command to save the preferred Styles Sounds and Performances assigned to the control panel STYLE and PER FORMANCE SOUND buttons via the Auto Select functions see page 206 This way the next time you will turn the Pa500 on the preferred Styles Sounds and Performances will be still assigned to the rele vant buttons Write SC Preset Select this command to open the Write SC Preset dialog box and save the current scale settings in one of the fo
285. eisislelelel s S iz 3 2 3 AE 483 AI e 229 2 2235 x S gt 2 Q 5 2 5 lt O14 olo D La X o lolo 2 5 EF or ae A ojj jx Q 2 Bo Ol m Al A A A gt I O 9 2 olg w gt olol Ole O a ee t e 5 5 O O 2 Ed Bea alar mA E 3 S a B a C o a R NJ o l laoa2 929 c c3 5 D a a a 3 2 O 4 413 A Pa c 9 A E E S F ollel 5 slo a alojojol2 ck m Olal3 Gc Y 0 x QD A wl ale 3 og S 3 S s g amp S o Q Q EI cz Q S Gy 9m 2 E amp ldi iz 2 zi o Q QOQ er c 9 e E g lt 2 ojo zluw Q N o wloloe S TIFI 9 E amp v D G 6 Q a Al IZ I ujoj gt u N lt Z gt m S S SSS 2 X N E Det Clean Gtr 320 3 3 2 Sitar GM az 3 1 Sitar 2 aay Lana EME EEE PEA NEON IEA NECIO E puero jaar e er es eet Let E ELSE ELHE X ES XI He NERO et E NE N CAREY ES NES MEM NM MEN MM E E NN EN EG EN Le KG EUN EN IN EN EG E ERES Indian Stars O Ul 107 107 107 Kanoun Kanoun Tremolo Kanoun Mix Shamisen GM Koto GM 107 107 Indian Frets 7 7 9 8 0 0 Muted Guitar 2 Dist Steel Gtr Dist Clean Gtr Nylon Gtr RX1 Nylon Gtr RX2 3 3 N wm EN EN EN ESTE E AEF EAEE EARE KCN EUN N 12 Strings RX 8 Funk Stein RX2 N 4 4 8 8 8 8 8 8 105 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Banjo RX RealNylon Gtr ST Real Nylon Gtr
286. elect an entry and press the Select button in the display to load it Then press the PLAY or START button to start the Song or Style If the Enable List Edit command is selected in the page menu see above the Add to list button becomes available to let you add entries to the selected Custom List List Header ETAIT T 4 no chord amp Main list ET A day in Paradise Ballad Scrollbar ETH A Felicidad Latin ETS A gigolo Pop ETH A hard day night Pop Commands Filtered Add to list set TT Custom List Lyrics Inf bp List Edit STS Hte Each entry of this database may include the song s author name genre original key tempo and meter When selecting one of the entries the associated Style or Standard MIDI File is automati cally recalled Also STSs and Pads may be recalled if present The List Header may change depending on the type of data associated with the selected entry e When a Style is associated to the entry the currently selected entry s name is shown on the left N and the associated Style is shown on the right Style h Stule Funku Ballad e When a Standard MIDI File is associated to the entry the list header is split into two parts with the left half referring to Sequencer 1 and the right one referring to Sequencer 2 Information for the selected entry s name N and asso ciated Standard MIDI File S1 or S2 is given for each sequenc
287. em emen e e PERE m ACCZ r ACEA ACCS Hi High Gain PERF PERF STS This parameter lets you adjust the high frequencies equalization on each individual track This is a shelving curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Mid Middle Gain PERF PERF STS This parameter lets you adjust the middle frequencies equaliza tion on each individual track This is a bell curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Low Gain PERF PERF STS This parameter lets you adjust the low frequencies equalization on each individual track This is a shelving curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Play Mute icon PERF PERF STS Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard lute Mute status The track cannot be heard Mixer Tuning EQ Control This page lets you reset or bypass track equalization pro grammed in the previous page Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to the Style tracks and vice versa STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 PGrand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano B Piano emo e FERC 2 ACC2 ACCS ACCA Track Reset buttons Use these buttons to reset ie flatten equalization for the corresponding track Reset All Tracks button Press this button to reset ie flatten equalization for all tracks Bypass PERF gt PERF STS Check any of these checkboxe
288. en you press the MENU button CTYIF DI AW Pion Selectable items A triangle next to the name of a Sound Style STS Pad or Song means that you can select it and replace it with a different ele ment Touch the item s name and make the corresponding Select window appear B rand Piano m T Overlapping windows When you press a Sound Style STS Pad or Song name a select ing window overlaps the current page After you select an item in the window or press the EXIT button the window closes and the underlying page is shown again SOUND SELECT Grand Piano Trk Upper 1 Guitar eem es Oca ae A Pi EE azsic Piano Hrsg Trbn a Bad ada Piano GM Harpsi uud RX HAGA uud BB 3 BBE aS 1 888 88 Piano amp lu aS GH lu Bar aga Dialog boxes Similar to selecting windows dialog boxes overlap the underlay ing page Press one of the button on the display to give Pa500 an answer and the dialog box will close Exit from Style Record mode Are you sure Page menus Press the icon on the upper right corner of each page and a menu with suitable commands for the current page will appear Touch one of the available commands to select it Or press any where else on the screen to make it disappear with no command selected w Write Performance Write Single Touch Setting Write Current Style Perf Write Glabal Style Setup Solo Track Easy Mode Pop up menus
289. encer 2 Touch it to open the Song Select window and choose a different Song page 78 Performance or STS Touch it to open the Performance Select win dow and choose a different Per formance Sounds on the keyboard will change page 76 Touch it to adjust the tracks pan and volume page 56 Touch it to choose and adjust the effects page 158 Sounds assigned to the right hand UP1 to UP3 and to the left hand LOW Touch the Sound s name to open the Sound Select window and choose a different Sound page 76 Sound icon and status If the MITE icon appears the Sound is in mute and cannot be heard If the icon does not appear the Sound is in play and can be heard page 35 Grand Piano M OI gt Dark Pad WI 1 t Strings Ens 2 GM M 1 Ki a t A HIIT E E Ti T Close this lock to avoid transposition when choosing a different Performance or Style page 203 Touch here to change the Split Point page 38 Touch here to see the Song s Lyrics page 9 Single Touch Settings STS Touch one of them to choose it or use the dedicated buttons on the control panel Sounds on the keyboard will change page 78 Notes As in Style mode there are three Sounds for the right hand Upper 1 Upper 2 Upper 3 and only one Sound for the left hand Lower Their names are abbreviated as UP1 UP2 UP3 LOW and are shown in the right side of the display
290. ended nd 7 major 7h suspendeaath 8 mr 3 Were oo Minor th Playing back the pattern When in Stye Play mode the recorded Guitar pattern is trans posed according to the chord recognized on the keyboard The way it is transposed depends on the programmed pattern with the chosen positions strumming modis etc Guitar mode parameters Here is a detailed description of the parameters of the Guitar Mode page Key Chord STYLE This parameter pair allows you to define the track s original key and chord type This parameter works in a different way than the other tracks While with other tracks this is always the reference key used for NTT transposition with Guitar tracks there is a dif ference whether you are recording a Chord Variation contained in an Intro 1 or Ending 1 Style Element or any other Chord Variation e With Intro 1 and Ending 1 this chord will be used as the reference key for the chord progression With all other Chord Variations this chord will be used only for listening during recording During playback in Style Play mode the chord will follow chord recognition Capo 0 I X STYLE A capo from the Italian capotasto head of fingerboard is a movable bar attached to the fingerboard of the guitar to uni formly raise the pitch of all the strings Its use makes the strings shorter therefore changing the timbre and position of the chords but not its shape 0 Open string no c
291. entry on page 172 Entry s progressive number Entry s parameters Synchro Stop Ly Unchanged Song Selection Number 285 Press New Song to New Song Del Song create a new entry oos d Editi f EL List STS 65 66 The SongBook Adding entries 6 Press the New Song button in the display to add a new item to the Song Book list 7 Press the T Text Edit button next to the field s you want to edit Set all other parameters You can write the genre artist name and name of the associated STS Select a Tempo matching the song s tempo and select the Meter and Key of the song You can also specify a Master Trans pose value to be automatically selected when selecting the entry 8 After having filled up all the desired fields be as comprehensive as you can press the Write button in the display to open the Write dialog box SONGBOOK T no chord gt A Hame l Baiorni di noi Resource GT Standard 16 Beat Genre T Ballad Tempo 8B Artist Meter Info 4 4 Renamer Overwrite 1 888giorni di noi Key into gt EN Ly M Transp B 7 New Song L_ write Current Resource Canyon i EHE A e _ write STS 4 FE sters E New Song Name T 188 agiorn di noi XXX UE x ki t5 oru sich Bll LT UR DV A Pru t Book tha Y ges 4 i 9 Press the Ti Text Edit button to assign a name to the new entry then press OK to save the entry to the SongBook database Entry s name By default it
292. equencer edit pages press the EXIT or SEQUENCER button To switch between Song tracks 1 8 and 9 16 use the TRACK SELECT button Song area emmm Page header Page menu icon 5 3 HEWSONG i Meter did H 1 L Lacate meas 1 pe pus Selected track info area Sounds area Track volume status area Page header This line shows the current operating mode transposition and recognized chord SEQUENCER HT 8 Operating mode Master Transpose name in semitones Operating mode name Name of the current operating mode Master Transpose Master transpose value in semitones This value can be changed using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel Note Transpose may be automatically changed when loading a Standard MIDI File generated with an instrument of the Korg Pa series The Master Transpose Lock parameter in the Global see General Controls Lock on page 203 has no effect on the Sequencer Page menu icon Press the page menu icon to open the menu See Page menu on page 196 for more information Lf Jj Song area This is where the Song name is shown together with its tempo and meter parameters and the current measure Beat counter Song name Measure number Tempo 5 3 NEWSONG IM Heter 44 I 21 L Locate meas 1 L Metro Tempo Imam Song name Displays the name of the selected Song NEWSONG means that a new blank Song is selected and you can record it T
293. er SECRMVOM Sz PIHBRLL Note If you select a different Style or Standard MIDI File the entrys name field N returns blank meaning the entry has been modified Main list Full list of the SongBook database Use the scrollbar to browse through the list or use the Dial You can touch one of the heading labels above the list to change the order in which entries are shown For example by touching the Name label the list is alphabetically re ordered according to the file names The selected label turns white showing the currently selected ordering Ae olLanyon H 7 Ballad Th 6 1 days Pop ek The corresponding items in the page menu are automatically updated to reflect these changes see Sort by Type Name Genre Artist Key Tempo Meter on page 173 Agiorni di moi By pressing the label again the order of the files switches between ascending and descending Scrollbar Use the scrollbar or the TEMPO VALUE dial to scroll the entries Commands Filtered When this box is checked only entries matching the selected fil ter criteria are shown in the Main list The box is automatically checked when you exit from the Filter dialog box by pressing OK see below Filter Press this button to open the Filter dialog box and select one or more filter criteria to show a restricted set of entries in the main list Mame Genre Artist Meter Info
294. er Pa500 proprietary data must be saved in special folders with the SET extension These special folders can be saved inside ordi nary folders When saving you can save onto existing SET folders or you can create a new folder of this type Here is how to do it 1 When the directory of the card is shown in the display the New SET button appears among the buttons below the file list 2 Press the New SET button A dialog box appears asking you to enter a name for the new SET folder Create New Folder T NEWNAME 3 Press the Ti Text Edit button to open the Text Edit win dow Enter the name then press OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window 4 Press OK to create the new folder and exit the dialog box Q y c Q re Q Q cc 222 Media edit mode Copy Copy In this page you can copy files and folders Folders can be generic or SET folders In addition you can copy the content of the generic folder you are in You can only copy data inside the same card To preserve data structure integrity during Copy operations you can t open SET folders and copy only one of the files it con tains You can only open and go inside generic folders 15 B5 H 15 42 15 66 47 15 43 My Show SET 15 66 47 18 33 57 l3 B6 H 15 37 My Show JEY Altamare MID 62K 61 45 96 19 35 KORG USER r caRD Sees Pi iese Copying a folder s content If nothi
295. er Touch Mono Channel Aftertouch events Poly After Touch Poly Aftertouch events Pitch Bend Pitch Bend events Pa Controls Controls exclusive of the Pa500 like the FX and Scale settings These controls are recorded to the Master Irack and saved as System Exclusive data Song Edit Quantize The quantize function corrects any rhythm error after recording SEQUENCER Edit Lw Quantize Track Lp Track 14 Resolution ole Start Tick 8881 81 88 End Tick 61 481 192 Bottom Note C 1 Top Note 653 NER IB T11 T12 Tid Tih After setting the various parameters press Execute to start the operation Track Use this parameter to select a track All Quantize will apply to all tracks Track 1 16 Quantize will apply only to the selected track Resolution This parameter sets the quantization value For example when you select J 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 divi sion miii A 1 32 J 1 4 Grid resolution in musical values A b f char acter added after the value means swing quanti zation A 3 means triplet Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to be quantized If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top
296. eration set in this page Track status icon Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Track names Under the buttons a label for each track is shown Style Edit Transpose In this page you can transpose the selected track s Note After transposing please don t forget to readjust the Key Chord parameter in the main page of the Style Record mode see page 108 STYLE REC Edit m Transpose E vari c e evi Track oran Value B Start Tick 01 01 0068 End Tick 005 01 000 Bottom Note C 1 Top Note G9 After setting the various parameters press Execute E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Vari ation for editing Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected apart for tracks set in Drum mode like the Drum and Percussion tracks The whole selected Chord Variation will be trans posed Drum Acc5 Single selected track Value Transpose value 127 semitones Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to be transposed If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard ra
297. erfor Opens the Write Performance window mance gt lt Sequencer Selects the Sequencer Setup page Prefer ences section Selects the Tuning page Mixer Tuning sec tion Other available shortcuts are the following not requiring the SHIFT button to be pressed Style Play mode Exit Menu Original Tempo together Opens the Write Performance window Upper Octave either Global mode Global keep it pressed Touch Panel Calibration Troubleshooting 281 Troubleshooting Power does not turn on Make sure that 1 the power cable is plugged into the outlet 2 the cable is plugged into the connector on the back of the instrument 3 and is not damaged 4 there are no problems with the mains Is the power switch turned ON If the power still does not turn on contact your dealer or the nearest KORG Service Center NJ NJ Is a jack connected to the PHONES connector This would disable the internal speakers Check the connections to your amp or mixer Make sure that all the components of the amplifying system are turned on Is the MASTER VOLUME slider of the Pa500 set to a position other than 0 Is the Local parameter set to Off Turn it On 208 210 Is the Attack parameter value too high Set it to a lower value to let the sound start faster Is 87 94 the Volume parameter too low Set it to a higher value Is the Speaker parameter set to Off Turn it On
298. ers PERF STS gt GBL Parameters may differ depending on the selected effect See the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD for a list of available parameters for each effect type FX Amount gt PERF STS gt GBL Volume of the effect that is added to the dry uneffected signal Src Source PERF STS GBL S Modulation source To select the track generating this message see the Mod Track Modulating Track parameters found in the Effects FX Select page see above For a list of modulation sources see the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD Track Controls Mode These parameters let you set the Internal External and the Poly Mono status of Song tracks See Track Controls Mode on page 92 Parameters PERF STS GBL Note These parameters can be saved to the Global Song Play Setup by selecting the Write Global Song Play Setup command from the page menu Reference 160 Song Play operating mode Track Controls Drum Volume Track Controls Drum Volume These parameters let you adjust the volume for each percussive instrument family See Track Controls Drum Volume on page 160 Parameters gt PERF STS Note Song track values edited in this page are not saved and are only intended for realtime use Track Controls Easy Edit These parameters let you fine tune edit parameters for Sounds assigned to the tracks See Track Controls Easy Edi
299. ersely selection of Quarter Tone set tings or activation of the Sub Scale on each track of the Song can be sent by the Pa500 to an external MIDI recorder as System Exclu sive data Note A Quarter Tone Sub Scale can be selected by using the SC Preset buttons only available in some models See below how to use these buttons during recording Parameters SONG See Mixer Tuning Sub Scale on page 90 Track Assign SONG Check the parameter corresponding to each track where the Sub Scale must be used Play Mute icon SONG Track s play mute status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Recording Quarter Tone settings or SC Pre sets into a Song Access the Sequencer mode and go to the Mixer Tuning gt Sub Scale page Check each track you want to apply the sub scale by using the Track Assign checkboxes Press RECORD and enter 16 track recording mode No Quarter Tone selection is done nor SC Preset is selected and any change to the default sub scale settings is deleted 189 Sequencer operating mode Mixer Tuning Tuning Start recording Immediately after having started the sequencer choose one of the SC Presets or press one of the SC Preset but tons on the control panel only available on some models The selection is recorded to the Song If you are recording a Backing Sequence using Quarter Tone or SC Presets is the same as in Style Play mode No need
300. ersion 186 b664 dun 7 20671 Full Resources Backup This command allows you to make a backup of the Factory and User Musical Resources excluding the Operating System on a card A BKP file will be created Note Should you not do a backup and your internal data becomes damaged you can download the original data from www korgpa com Note You will not be able to load data from this file using the nor mal Media gt Load operations This file is used for archiving pur pose only To save data that must remain accessible for example to load User data after updating the Musical Resources use the Media gt Save operations instead 1 Inserta card into the card drive Be sure there is enough free space in your card or the Backup procedure will not be completed The space required on the card depends on the amount of data to be backed up 2 Select the Full Resources Backup command then press the Execute button in the display The card appears KORG USER DP CARD pea 1 Clase Utility 3 Ifyou wish to save data inside another folder select this lat ter and press the Open button to open it Press the Close button to go back to the parent folder 4 Select the folder where to save data and press Backup to save it If nothing is selected data will be saved to the cur rent directory 5 6 After pressing Backup a dialog box will appear asking you to select a name for the backup file and whether
301. es Global Protect gt GBL ed When loading a SET file see Loading all the User data on page 215 this parameter if On prevents Global parameters from being reprogrammed when loading all data All Global parameters are therefore left unchanged When loading a single GLB file this parameter is ignored and the Global is overwritten by the loaded data Note This parameter is saved to memory but not to a target device Factory Style and Pad Protect When On this parameter protects the Factory Styles from the 8 16 BEAT to the WORLD 2 bank and Factory Pads named Hit and Sequence in the Pad Select window from being overwritten when loading data from a device Further more you can t access these banks when saving data When Off you can load or save User Styles or Pads even into the Factory Style banks from 8 16 BEAT to WORLD 2 and Factory Pad banks named Hit and Sequence in the Pad Select window This way you customize personalize your Fac tory Style and Pad banks Please note that the Save All procedure always saves only the USER Style banks Reference Note This parameter is automatically set to On when turning the instrument off Note Should your accidentally delete some Factory Data reload the Backup data or download the data from www korgpa com Factory Sound Protect When On this parameter prevents writing edited Sounds from the Edit Sound mode When Off
302. es User Sounds User Styles the SongBook the Global from a card to the internal memory SSD MyShow SET KORG USER r caRD Sees Pi Ciese FE Note While in this page only data allowed for loading are shown All other files are hidden Loading all the User data You can load all the User data with a single operation 1 Insert a card into the card drive Its content will appear in the display 2 If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder select this latter and press the Open button to open it Press the Close button to go back to the parent folder 3 Select the SET folder containing the data you wish to load and press Load to confirm the selection Note Most data loaded from a card is merged with data already existing in memory For example if there is data in all two USER Style banks in memory USERO1 USERO2 and there is only the USEROI Style bank in the card the USEROI bank is overwritten while the USERO2 bank is left unchanged As a result you will have a STYLE folder in memory contain ing the USEROI bank you just loaded and the old USERO2 bank Loading all data of a specified type You can load all User data of a specified type with a single opera tion Insert a card into the card drive Its content will appear in the display 2 If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder select the latter and press the Open button to open it Press the Close but
303. ess one of them and the Style will stop running with an Ending If pressed while the Style is stopped they act as three additional Intros Press them twice LED blinking to let them play in loop and select any other Style element Fill Intro Variation to exit the loop Note Ending 1 plays a short sequence with different chords while Ending 2 plays on the latest recognized chord Ending 3 starts immediately and is just two measures long 9 VARIATION 1 4 buttons PERF PERF SB Each of these buttons selects one of the four variations of the current Style Each variation can vary in patterns and sounds SHIFT You can jump to the Style Play gt Drum Fill page by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing one of the VARIATION buttons FILL 1 3 BREAK buttons These buttons trigger a fill in Press them twice LED blinking to let them play in loop and select any other Style element Fill Intro Variation to exit the loop PERF PERF gt SB Note Fill 3 is usually a Break Note This function can be automatically activated by playing the keyboard harder See Velocity Control on page 99 SHIFT You can jump to the Style Play gt Drum Fill page by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing one of the FILL buttons 2 START STOP Starts or stops the Style running Note This function can be automatically activated by playing the keyboard harder See Velocity Control on page 99 You can reset all froze
304. ew York 11747 USA Tel 1 516 333 9100 Fax 1 516 333 9108 Jam Industries 620 McCaffrey St Laurent QC Canada H4T 1N1 Tel 514 738 3000 Fax 514 737 5069 UK KORG UK Ltd 9 Newmarket Court Kingston Milton Keynes Buckinghamshire MK10 0AU Tel 01908 857100 UK Technical Support Tel 01908 857122 Fax 01908 857199 Canada E mail info korg co uk Many Korg distributors also have their own web page on the internet where you can find infos and software Useful web pages in English are the following www korg com www korg co uk www korgcanada com A place to find operating system updates and various system files for example a full backup of the factory data additional musical resources user s manuals and various information is at the following link Korg Italy www korgpa com Other useful information can be found worldwide by accessing to other Korg web sites like the following www korg co jp www laboitenoiredumusicien com Korg USA Korg UK Korg Canada Korg Inc Japan Gaffarel Musique France Korg amp More Germany and www korg de Austria ESound Italy www ekomusicgroup com www korg es Letusa Spain What s in the box After you buy your Pa500 please check all the following items are included in the package If some of them are missing imme diately contact your Korg dealer Pa500 Music stand AC power adapter Power cable Owner s manual Ac
305. f Steel Guitar1 Pick f Steel Guitar Mute Steel Guitar1 Slide A Guitar Finger A Guitar Pick A Guitar Harmo Folk Guitar Folk 12 Strings Nylon Guitar mp Nylon Guitar mf Nylon Guitar ff 258 Factory data 168 169 170 171 ry 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 I91 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 215 214 215 216 Multisamples Nylon GuitarAtk A Gtr HiStrings Ac Guitar 12 Strings Ac Guitar Harmonics2 Ac Guitar Noise Clean Gtr1 Stra Clean Gtr1 Mute Clean Gtr2 Stra Clean Gtr2 Mute Clean Gtr3 Tele Clean Guitar Str p Clean Guitar Str f Clean Guitar Mute Clean Guitar Dead Clean Guitar Slap Clean Guitar Slide E Gtr Sberg pl E Gtr Sberg fl E Gtr Sberg p2 E Gtr Sberg f2 El Guitar Le Neck El Guitar Le Bridge El Guitar Le Mute p El Guitar Le Mute mf El Guitar Le Ghost1 El Guitar Le Ghost2 E Gtr Vintage p E Gtr Vintage mf E Gtr Solid p E Gtr Solid mf E Gtr Solid f El Guitar Harmonics El Guitar Gliss Down El Guitar Gliss Up El Guitar Noise El Guitar Short Noise El Guitar Fret Noise Funky Gtr 1 Stra Funky Gtr 2 Stra Jazz Guitarl Jazz Guitar2 Jazz Guitar3 p Jazz Guitar3 mf Jazz Guitar3 f Pedal Steel Guitar Resonator Guitar Overdrive Gtr Dist Guitar Dist Guitar Harmo 217 218 219 220 221 222 229 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 239 2
306. f the Indonesian Gamelan The octave is divided in 5 notes C D E G A The remaining notes are tuned as in the Equal tuning Scale of the Indonesian Gamelan The octave is divided in 7 notes all white keys when Key is C The black keys are tuned as in the Equal tun ing Simulates the stretched tuning of an acoustic piano Basically an equal tuning the lowest notes are slightly lower while the highest notes are slightly higher than the standard User scale i e scale programmed by the user for the Style Play Backing Sequence and Song Play modes The user scale can be saved to a Perfor mance Style Performance STS or Song You can t select a User scale in Global mode MIDI Data MIDI Controllers The following is a table including all Control Change messages and their effect on various Pa500 functions Bank Select Program selection Mod1 Y Mod Y Undef ctl Foot ctl Joystick forward Joystick backward Port time s mme s Bae s wea es w ta SSS Ww ez ie sider is ema PSS 39x qu t PS Control Change 32 63 are the LSB Least Significant Bytet of Con trol Change 0 31 i e the MSB Most Significant Byte and are changed according to their MSB counterparts 64 Damper Damper pedal 65 Portamento 66 Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal MC AAA CA Hold Co fsm Attack Attack time 89 _ 85 90
307. f the Song is reached dark 56 Song Play Changing tracks volume Changing tracks volume During playback you may wish to change each track s volume to create a mix on the fly 1 In Normal view you can adjust each Keyboard track s volume Touch a track and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change its volume SONG PLAY p ap Canyon EN MID EM J 1 E tiben song no chord B t Grand Piano me di nur H Meter ded M 14 12H Bb cay sort YP Strings Ene 2 eri 5 Ens Zz GM ni Busse Beat 1 a LE T a T i1 Keyboard tracks UPPERS UPPER1 TRACK SELECT gt In Track 1 8 view the first 8 tracks of the selected Song are shown TRACK SELECT In Track 9 16 view the second group of 8 tracks of the selected Song are shown SONG PLAY gsm Canyon eno chord E ciu p Pinball E mmm nr MICE LARRY Meter dd M 12 712B 100 Ex Canyon Q 1 Meter drd H 100 IE H CD Hint As an alterna tive to using the TEMPO VALUE dial hold the track slider in the dis play then move your fin ger up down CD Note Changes to Song tracks will not be saved and will be reset each time you press the I Home button They may also be reset while pressing the Rewind button To save changes you must edit the Song in Sequencer mode Song Play 57 Changing tracks volume 4 Press TRACK SELECT again to return to the Normal view Keyb
308. ffects and transpositions plus many more parameters useful for playing in a musical situation You can save all control panel settings in a Performance memory location While many Performances are already supplied with the instrument you can customize each of them to your own taste and then save them in their customized form Similar to Performances you can also save your settings to a Single Touch Setting STS which will store all the settings for the Keyboard tracks Four STSs are supplied with each Style and SongBook entry and can be selected with the four dedicated buttons under the display As far as Style tracks are concerned you can save settings in a third object called the Style Perfor mance Please note that settings saved in Performance 1 are automatically selected when the instrument is turned on This means you can save your preferred startup settings to Performance 1 Single Touch Settings STS section Performance Sound Select section Selecting a Performance 1 Press the Performance area in the display to open the Perform
309. ffects with Keyboard tracks so these effects can be changed either selecting a Song for Sequencer 2 or selecting a Performance unless the Performance recalls FX CD parameter is left unchecked see above Fast Play gt GBL When checked this function allows to skip the empty setup beats at the beginning of a song and immediately start from the first note However any setup data are read and considered Note When Pa500 is driving an external musical instrument the fast transfer of MIDI data to the MIDI OUT or USB port may cause a delay to the Song s start Therefore we suggest to turn this function off when Pa500 is hooked to other instruments Reference 164 Song Play operating mode Page menu Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command BE El Write Performance write Global Song Play Setup save Song Marker Seq 1 Save Song Marker Seq 2 Export Jukebox List Seqg 1 Groove Quantize Enable solo Track Copy Fa Paste FA Easy Mode Write Performance Select this command to open the Write Performance dialog box and save most of the current control panel settings to a Perfor mance See Write Performance dialog box on page 102 for more infor mation Write Global Song Play Setup Select this command to open the Write Global Song Play Setup dialog box and sav
310. ffset and is not memorized ACCOMP BASS STS Name panel Press the STS Name tab to select this panel Single Touch Set tings STS are memory locations for quickly choosing Keyboard Sounds contained in each Style or SongBook entry While in this panel you can see the name of the four STSs belonging to the latest selected Style or SongBook entry Touch one of the names to select the corresponding STS Electric Guitar ctawe Piano Distortion Gtr Organ STS REDIS Note You cannot edit STS names with this panel To edit a name select the STS to be renamed then select the Write Single Touch Setting command from the page menu see Write Single Touch Setting dialog box on page 102 Style Play operating mode 85 STS Name panel Sub Scale panel Press the Sub Scale tab to select this je This panel replicates the Eta Sub Scale edit page see page 90 ll ua lea Sis Sd Tone Pad panel Press the Pad tab to select this panel This is where you can assign a different Hit or Sequence Pad to each of the four pads and see at a glance how pads are programmed For more options go to the Pad Switch Pad page see page 98 gt Windchimes 1 Pad 1 Pad 3 China Pad Z Rain Stick Pad 4d i i Tamb Ace 1 Volume Pad assignment gt PERF gt PERFS gt SB ii Name of the Hit or Sequence assigned to each Pad Press the box to make the Pad Select window appear
311. following command from the task bar to open the installation instructions Start gt all programs gt KORG gt KORG USB MIDI Driver Tools gt Installation manual gt Select the following command from the task bar to open the installation program Start gt all programs gt KORG gt KORG USB MIDI Driver Tools gt Install KORG USB MIDI Device Please follow the installation instructions appearing on screen to install the KORG USB MIDI Driver Driver s ports After installation the following ports will be shown in you MIDI application e g sequencer among the other MIDI devices Pa500 KEYBOARD This allows for reception of MIDI messages from the Pa500 keyboard and controller s data to the MIDI application running on the computer Pa500 SOUND This allows for transmission of MIDI messages from the MIDI application running on the computer to the internal tone generator of the Pa500 Mac OS X Installing KORG USB MIDI Driver Insert the included CD into your CD ROM drive Please double click on the KORG USB MIDI Driver pkg in the KORG USB MIDI Driver folder inside the CD ROM to run the installer Install it according to the instructions appearing on screen x Driver s ports After installation the following ports will be shown in you MIDI application e g sequencer among the other MIDI devices Pa500 KEYBOARD This allows for reception of MIDI messages from the Pa500 ke
312. function on Hint You can always start both sequencers simultaneously by keeping the SHIFT button held down while pressing one of the gt E PLAY STOP controls Off The sequencers Tempo are not linked Each sequencer uses its own Tempo Measure The two sequencers Tempo are linked together The Tempo data written into the Songs are Song Play operating mode 163 Preferences General Controls ignored Adjust the Tempo using the TEMPO VALUE dial Start one of the sequencers by pressing its own P N PLAY STOP control Then start the other sequencer by pressing the other P M PLAY STOP control the second sequencer starts at the next measure Beat The two sequencer s Tempo are linked together The Tempo data written into the Songs are ignored Adjust the Tempo using the TEMPO VALUE dial Start one of the sequencers by pressing its own P N PLAY STOP control Then start the other sequencer by pressing the other P M PLAY STOP control the second sequencer starts at the next beat quarter or octave depend ing on the Song s Time Signature Seq 2 FX Mode gt GBLS 9 This parameter selects the effects mode for Sequencer 2 When a 4 effects Song is loaded all four effects are used independently from this setting AB The A and B effect pair is used Sequencer 2 shares its effects with Sequencer 1 CD The C and D effect pair is used Note When this parameter 1s set to CD Sequencer 2 shares its e
313. g a note or chord This will be the playing strength ie velocity value of the event to be inserted Kbd Keyboard You can select this parameter by turn ing all counter clockwise the dial When this option is selected the playing strength of the played note is recognized and recorded 15 127 Velocity value The event will be inserted with this velocity value and the actual playing strength of the note played on the keyboard will be ignored Rest Press this button to insert a rest Tie Press this button to tie the note to be inserted to the previous note Back Goes to the previous step erasing the inserted event Next M Next Measure Goes to the next measure and fills the remaining space with rests Done Exits the Step Record mode If you have inserted some notes a dialog box appears asking you to either cancel discard or save the changes Exit From Step Record Step sequence has been changed Do you want to save it Hs If you press Cancel exit is canceled and you can continue edit ing If you choose No changes are not saved and the Step Record window is closed If you choose Yes changes are saved and the Step Record window is closed Q Jg c Q L Q Q cc 132 Pad Record mode The Pad structure Pad Record mode By entering the Pad Record mode you can create your own Pads or edit an existing Pad The Pad structure A Pad is basically a single track Style
314. g items in the page menu are automatically updated to reflect these changes see Ordered by Name and Ordered by Type on page 227 Scrollbar Use the scrollbar to scroll the list Touching the arrows will scroll one step at a time while touching the bar will scroll one page at a time Pressing the arrows while SHIFT is kept pressed jumps to the previous or next alphabetical section or file folder type depending on the selected display order Device pop up menu Use this menu to select one of the available storage devices Usu ally only the card is available apart for the Erase page Commands Commands may be different depending on the shown page They are detailed in each relevant section Tabs Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section Navigation tools When in a Media page you can use any of the following com mands to browse through the files and folders Scrollbar See Scrollbar above TEMPO VALUE dial Use these controls scroll the list up or down Device pop up menu See Device pop up menu above Load Save Copy Erase button Executes the media operation Open button Opens the selected folder or directory whose name begins with the a icon Close button Closes the current folder or directory returning to the parent upper level Media edit mode Navigation tools 215 Load In this page you can load User data files Performanc
315. g parameters cannot be saved when saving to a Perfor mance or STS Note A muted track may be reset when selecting a different Song Q Jg c Q re Q Q cc 156 Song Play operating mode Mixer Tuning FX Send Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to the Song tracks and vice versa SONG PLAY SE01 Mixer Tuning LCY Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 L Upper volume Link SONG PLAY SE01 Mixer Tuning LCY Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 SONG PLAY SE01 Mixer Tuning w Trk Upper 1 PGrand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 Upper Volume Link gt GBLSU This parameter allows you to define if changing the volume for one of the Upper tracks proportionally changes also the volume for the other Upper tracks To save this parameter status go to the Style Play mode then select the Write Global Style Play Setup from the page menu see Write Global Style Play Setup dialog box on page 103 Note This parameter is the same you can find in the Preferences Style Play Setup page of the Style Play mode see page 100 On When changing volume to one of the Upper tracks volume for the other Upper tracks changes in proportion Off When changing volume to one of the Upper tracks only that track s volume is changed Other Upper tracks are left unchanged Dry gt PERF STS Use this checkbox to turn the dry direct track signal on or off On When checked the dir
316. g the type of data you wish to save and press Open to open it The list of contained banks is shown BAMEBI STY 12 46 47 11 14 BAMKB2 STY 12 46 47 11 14 BAMKEB3 STY 12 46 47 11 14 12 46 47 11 14 BAMKB4 STY BAMKBS STY 12 66 47 11 14 4 5 Select the desired bank and press Open to gain access to the single files 81 81 Standard 8 Beat 18K 41 82 Standard 16 Beat 16K 01 03 Kool Beat 22k 12 66 67 11 14 41 44 Guitar Beat 11K 12 66 47 11 14 H1 B5 Easy Beat 1 3 6K 12 66 47 11 14 Once you have selected the file that you want to save press Save To to confirm the selection The list of files in the card is shown KORG USER FP CARD Sees Pi Clase At this point you can Press the New SET button and create a new SET folder see Creating a new SET folder on page 221 or Select an existing SET folder and press Save to confirm A dialog box appears asking you to select one of the avail able User locations inside the selected folder Save Standard amp Beat To KORG USER My Show SET Lr UG1 81 Standard 6 Beat In the above dialog box the previously selected Style will be saved to location 01 inside the bank U01 corresponding to the USERI button inside the selected folder Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort Warning After confirming the same item in the target folder is deleted Media edit mode Save 221 Creating a new SET fold
317. ge 140 PAD REC Pad Edit LCY Cv p evt c IS Start Tick 01 01 0068 End Tick 43 41 4808 Bottom Hote C 1 Top Note G9 After setting the various parameters press Execute CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing Event Type of MIDI event to delete All All events The measures are not removed from the Chord Variation Note All notes in the selected range Dup Note All duplicate notes When two notes with the same pitch are encountered on the same tick the one with the lowest velocity is deleted After Touch After Touch events Note This kind of data is automatically removed during recording Pitch Bend Pitch Bend events Prog Change Program Change events excluding the bundled Control Change 00 Bank Select MSB and 32 Bank Select LSB Note This kind of data is automatically removed during recording Ctl Change All Control Change events for example Bank Select Modulation Damper Soft Pedal CC00 32 2CGI27 Single Control Change events Double Control Change numbers like 00 32 are MSB LSB bun dles Note Some CC data are automatically removed during recording See the table on page 106 for more information on the allowed data Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to delete Pad Record mode Pad Edit Delete 141 Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the b
318. ge item from the page menu Here you can copy all Keyboard Range val ues for the current Style Element tracks to a different Style Ele ment Copy Key Range From Style Element Var 1 To Style Element ns From Style Element Non editable Currently selected Style Element To Style Element Target Style Element All Settings will be copied to all Style Element of the Style in edit Varl CountIn Single Style Element where to copy settings to Copy Chord Table dialog box Open this window by choosing the Copy Chord Table item from the page menu Here you can copy the Chord Table of the cur rent Style Element to a different Style Element Copy Chord Table From Style Element Var 1 To Style Element nos From Style Element Non editable Currently selected Style Element To Style Element Target Style Element All Settings will be copied to all Style Element of the Style in edit Varl CountIn Single Style Element where to copy settings to Overdub Step Recording window The Step Record allows you to create a new Style by entering sin gle notes or chords to each track by playing them on the key board one at a time with no need to play on time This is very useful when transcribing an existing score or needing a higher grade of detail and is particularly suitable to create drum and percussion tracks To access this page select the Overdub Step Recording com mand from the p
319. h Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synchro City Sync Kron Metallic Rez Brian Sync LoFi Ethnic i Strings amp Vocal Ether Voices Cyber Choir Fifths Lead GM Crimson 5ths Bass amp Lead GM Soft Wrl Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Electro Lead Rich Lead Thin Analog Lead 75 Jorchesra ae Woodwind 75 nemus res Lm 7 code Fate Woodwind xm s 7 mere Woodwind wr s 5 we o Wedwm xm 9 7 recorder Woodwind v xm 1 a feor Weeding xm 9 75 fran Fe Ga ETT IE Ca 01 5 ere Wexwm xm 9 76 atom some Woodwind v xm 9 7 EEE CTN v m 1 7 ETE Woodwind xm 2 7 Weed Weeding xm 9 e white Gar ETT 5 x 1 5 fwe Wexwm a 9 5 foeren Woodwind v x 9 ETE CTI o xr 1 reses mA o x 9 jede mh EC m 3 s fororem mh wr 4 9 oanceteod mh a 5 9 Wweted mh wr 9 fewe mh wr m s fewe mh Express Lead HipHop Lead Square Bass Big amp Raw Cat Lead OB Lead New Age Pad GM Virtual Traveler Sine Pad Master Pad Strings amp Vocal Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth Synth
320. he Sound assigned to the selected track Not only it is shown on the main page but also in several edit pages Trk S1TrB1 t Grand Piano B Piana 121 883 888 Track name Sound bank Sound name Program Change Track name Name of the selected track Sound name Sound assigned to the selected track Press anywhere in this area to open the Sound Select window and select a different Sound Sound bank Bank the selected Sound belongs to Program Change Program Change number sequence Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Program Change Sounds area This area lets you see Sounds and octave transposition for the eight tracks currently displayed Q Q c Q L Song track octave transpose 0 cc Sound bank icon Song track octave transpose Non editable Octave transpose of the corresponding track To edit the octave transpose go to the Mixer Tuning Tuning edit page see page 89 for programming information Sound bank s icon This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to Touch an icon a first time to select the corresponding track detailed information are shown on the Selected Track Info area see above Touch it a second time to open the Sound Select win dow 176 Sequencer operating mode Entering Record mode Track volume status area This area is where you can set the volume of each Song track and mute unmute tracks Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song Tr
321. he main display in Normal Mode appears Tempo and beat counter Style Element Recognized chord Page menu length in measures Style name Sounds assigned to the no chord amp Upper Keyboard tracks Style bank Grand Piano Upper Keyboard tracks Style meter Sound bank icon Sound name Songs assigned to Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 Sound assigned to the Lower Keyboard track Selected Performance or STS Lower Keyboard track Volume sliders They can be controlled by selecting one of them and using the DIAL to change the value Play Mute status LOWER UPPERS UPPERS UPPERL uS ae Tabs Playing the demos A variety of demo songs have been included to demonstrate the sonic power of the Pa500 1 To open the Demo page press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY buttons at the same time 2 Follow the instructions in the display That s it Playing Sounds 33 Selecting a Sound and playing it on the keyboard Playing Sounds You can play up to three sounds at the same time on the keyboard You can also split the keyboard into two parts to play up to three sounds with your right hand Upper and one with your left hand Lower Sound Select section
322. he pattern press the note before starting the Pad Reference 136 Pad Record mode Main page Guitar Mode Main page Guitar Mode While in the main page and a Guitar track has been selected press the Guitar Mode tab to see this page This is where you can access Guitar Mode programming Cho rd var HR Resolution High Pad Sync gt off CY Length Z Metro Lb off Record e 1 Mode Note To access this page a Guitar track must first be selected see Track Type on page 143 Otherwise the Guitar Mode tab will remain grey not selectable Note When programming a Guitar track from an external sequencer you must be sure the Guitar tracks is associated to the right channel Go to the Global gt MIDI gt MIDI IN Channels page and assign the corresponding Style track usually Accl Acc5 to the same channel of the Guitar track on the external sequencer Then go to the Style Record gt Style Track Controls gt Type Ten sion Trigger page and set the track as a track of type Gtr see Track Type on page 143 Guitar Mode allows to easily create realistic rhythm guitar parts without the artificial unmusical playing typical of MIDI pro gramming of guitar parts Just record a few notes and you will end up with realistic rhythm guitar tracks where each chord is played according to its real position on the guitar and not gener ated by simply transposing a written pa
323. his kind of lyrics you must press the Lyrics tab in the Song Play mode n SongBook mode you can see lyrics contained in a Stan dard MIDI File as Lyrics events To see this kind of lyrics you must press the Lyrics STS tab in the SongBook mode n SongBook mode you can see lyrics contained in a TXT file associated with a Style based SongBook entry To see this kind of lyrics you must press the Lyrics STS tab in the SongBook mode n SongBook mode you can see lyrics contained in a TXT file associated with a Song based SongBook entry To see this kind of lyrics you must press the Lyrics STS tab in the SongBook mode In the case of Song based entries this is the priority of lyrics data shown in the display i TXT file associated with the entry overriding ii TXT file contained in the same folder as the Standard MIDI File recalled by the entry overriding ii Lyrics events contained in the Standard MIDI File Info Use the Info page to see the name of the selected entry the asso ciated resource s the total number of Songs in the SongBook the number of filtered entries the number of available Custom Lists and the number of Songs in the current list ncase of an entry based on a Style eno chord B Selected entry l Style Easy Beat 1 Associated resource Songs Songs after filtering Custom Lists Songs in the Current List Lyrics STS ncase of an entry based on Sta
324. hm guitar parts without the artificial unmusical playing typical of MIDI pro gramming of guitar parts Just record a few notes and you will end up with realistic rhythm guitar tracks where each chord is played according to its real position on the guitar and not gener ated by simply transposing a written pattern Recording overview Recording a Guitar track is unlike the other tracks where you play the exact notes of a melody line With Guitar tracks you play the keys corresponding to the strumming modes or play an arpeggio by using the keys corresponding to the six strings and the special keys corresponding to the root and fifth notes The following sections describe the various control keys Q Jg Q L Q i Q cc 112 Style Record mode Main page Guitar Mode Recording strumming types The lowest octave of the 61 key keyboard is dedicated to select ing a strumming type By pressing these keys you play fast strumming samples AA A A Full Down Slow Mute Full Up Mute Up Mute 4 Strings Full Down Mute N Full Down NS Up 4 Strings Full Down Full Up Down 4 Strings Down Mute 4 Strings Slow Full Down Mute Body Full Up Slow Recording single strings The second octave of the 61 key keyboard is dedicated to select ing a single string or more than one for playing arpeggios or power chords You can either play a free arpeggio with the six guitar chords assigned to the C A keys or play on
325. hown in the display Help Language pin Em Program Change 42 Show Program Change Number Track Activity Display Hold L Show Track Activity L Display Hold On Auto Select 42 Auto Style Select L Auto Performances Sound Select Transp Help Language Language gt GBL Use this pop up menu to select one of the available languages for the interactive help system Change button Press this button to apply the selected language to the interactive help system How to select the Help language 1 Since Pa500 must be reset at the end of this procedure be sure to first save all unsaved data 2 While in this page select a language from the pop up menu The Change button will start flashing Press it 4 You will be asked if you want to save the Global and select the new language Press Yes to confirm The Global will be automatically saved and the language selected 5 A message will advice you to reboot the Pa500 Press OK to close the message window 6 Turn the Pa500 off then on again Program Change Show Program Change number gt GBL Check this parameter to show Program Change numbers next to Sound names in the Sound Select window By default this parameter is turned on Note Program Change numbers are always shown in Sound Edit mode and in the various Track Info areas o Jg c Q re Q Q cc 206 Global edit mode Controllers Pedal Switch Slider Track Activity
326. iation Pattern data vs track data While the Pad Record mode is where you can create or edit music patterns for the Pad track parameters like Volume Pan FX settings have to be edited in Style Play mode e After creating or editing music patterns in Pad Record mode save them by selecting the Write Pad command from the page menu of the Pad Record mode see Write Pad dialog box on page 145 After editing Pad Track parameters in Style Play mode save them to the Style Performance by selecting the Write Cur rent Style Performance command from the page menu of the Style Play mode see Write Style Performance dialog box on page 103 Entering the Pad Record mode To enter Pad Record mode go to the Style Play mode and press RECORD The Style Pad Record Select window appears STYLE PAD RECORD Current Style British Pop 1 Record Edit Current Style O Record New Style Recard Edit Pad C Record Mew Pad e Select Record Edit Pad to select an existing Pad to edit If it is a Factory Pad you may not be able to save it at the origi nal location depending on the status of the Factory Style and Pad Protect parameter in the Media Preferences page you will select a User Pad location instead e Select Record New Pad to start from a new empty Pad When finished recording you will save the new Pad into a User Pad location Pads can be saved into Factory Pad locations only when the Fa
327. ies Write Song New Song Name T BBBgiarni di noi D i Renamer Overwrite 1 Bmgiarni di noi 3 Mew Song Q Jg c Q re Q Q cc 170 SongBook Book Edit 2 To assign a different name to the entry press the T Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window Select an option to add the new entry to the SongBook Select Rename Overwrite to overwrite an existing entry optionally changing its name Warning The older entry will be deleted Select New Song to save a new entry to the SongBook data base Book Edit 2 The Book Edit 2 page is where you select Style options to be memorized link a TXT file and assign a unique number to the current entry SONGBOOK T B no chord B Hame i Baiarni di nai Resource ET Standard 16 Beat Synchro Start IB Linked TXT Synchro Stop Lr Unchanged Memory Lr Unchanged Song Selection Mmber 285 Custom Lyrics dit 2 List STS Synchro Start Synchro Stop Memory gt SB The status of these functions can be memorized in a SongBook entry Note If the SongBook entry is based on a Song Synchro Start and Synchro Stop appear in grey and cannot be modified since they have no effect on a Song Unchanged When selecting this SongBook entry the status of the corresponding function is left unchanged Off When selecting this SongBook entry the status of the corresponding function is turned off On When select
328. ill be inserted with this velocity value and the actual playing strength of the note played on the keyboard will be ignored Event list area List of inserted events Previously inserted events You may delete the last of these events and make it ready for a new event by pressing the Back button in the display Position where the event has been inserted The value is shown in the measure beat tick format Note RX Noise Name of the inserted Note or RX Noise When entering a chord a series of dots is shown after the name of the root note Position Vel Velocity of the inserted event Dur Percentage duration of the inserted event Buttons Rest Press this button to insert a rest Tie Press this button to tie the note to be inserted to the previous one A note with the same pitch and the specified length will be created and tied to the previous one o Jg c Q L Q Q cc 180 Sequencer operating mode Record mode Step Record page Back Goes to the previous step erasing the inserted event Next M Next Measure Goes to the next measure and fills the remaining space with rests Done Exits the Step Record mode Step Record procedure Here is the general procedure to follow for the Step Recording previous one with exactly the same pitch You don t need to play it on the keyboard again To insert a chord or a second voice see Chords and sec ond voices in Ste
329. in the display to recall the original cymbals volume Track Controls Easy Edit In this page you can edit the main parameters of the Sounds assigned to each track Note All values refer to the value of the original Sound STYLE PLAY Track Controls Trk Drum Jazz Kit RXZ Easy Sound Edit P3 r3 F Be E P Jii E Drum amp Perc 126 006 034 Reset Track Reset All Tracks En WER d LJ UPPER1 STYLE PLAY Track Controls LCY Trk Drum Pazz Kit RX2 E Drum amp Perc 128 888 034 ck 6 F pelea ES P Jii Si o Spd Sanaa a DRUM PERC ACC 1 ACLS REC ALCA ALCA Drum Reset Track Reset All Tracks PERF PERF STS Attack time This is the time during which the sound goes from zero at the moment when you strike a key to it s maximum level Parameters Attack Decay Decay time Time to go from the final Attack level to the beginning of the Sustain Release Release time This is the time during which the sound goes from the sustaining phase to zero The Release is triggered by releasing a key Cutoff Filter cutoff This sets the sound brightness Resonance Use the Filter Resonance to boost the cutoff fre quency LFO Depth Intensity of the Vibrato LFO LFO Speed Speed of the Vibrato LFO LFO Delay Delay time before the Vibrato LFO begins after the sound starts Select Use these buttons to select the track to edit The button corre sponding to the selected track turns black Re
330. in the display to save all markers If you are not in the Lyrics Markers page choose from the page menu the Save Song Marker Seq 1 or Save Song Marker Seq 2 depending on the sequencer where you created the markers The markers will be saved into the midifile Auto Scroll Check this parameter if you want the current marker to be always visible in the display during playback by making the list of markers scroll automatically Don t check this parameter if you prefer to prevent the list from scrolling This is useful if you want a marker to remain in the display ready to be selected as soon as you want to jump to its position with no need to scroll the list to catch it out STS Name of the four selected Single Touch Settings STS Touch one of them to select it Options side tab Press this side tab to access the Options panel and adjust the various video settings see details below Display Controls Characters LEE Show chards Display Controls Use these parameters to define how lyrics are shown in the dis play Characters gt GBL9 9 Size of fonts You can choose between a smaller and a bigger font Show chords gt GBL If this parameter is checked chords are shown above lyrics in the display provided the midifile contains them Text files loaded with Standard MIDI Files When a TXT file exists in the same directory as a Standard MIDI File and shares exactly the same nam
331. ing from a verse to a chorus adding extra dynamics and keeping the beat from getting too repetitive The Pa500 offers three Fill ins specifically programmed for each Style A Fill in may be drums alone drums with instrumenta tion of even a silent break Intro 8 Ending Each Style also allows you to embellish your performance with a set of musical introductions and endings A long and short ver sion of the Intro and Ending are usually provided with the former more harmonically elaborated and the latter with a fixed chord A count in style Intro is also provided Pads are like single track Styles that can be triggered by using the dedicated PAD buttons They can be used to play in realtime single sounds as well as short cycling sequences that play in time with the Style Keyboard tracks In addition to the Style and Pad tracks up to four additional parts can be played on the keyboard in real time Each of these Keyboard tracks can be limited to a particular range of keys or velocities but in general three can be assigned to play above the split point Upper and one below Lower This allows the Upper Sounds to be layered together The split point can be set to any note on the keyboard In addition to performing along with a Style these same Keyboard tracks will allow you to play along with the Sequencer s STS Single Touch Settings Single Touch Settings allow you to instantly change the sounds assigned to
332. ing this SongBook entry the status of the corresponding function is turned on Linked TXT gt SB You can select a text TXT file and link it to the Style or Song associated with the current SongBook entry When you select this entry the text file is automatically loaded Text files can be seen in the display Since there is no automatic synchronization between this kind of lyrics and the associated songs you must scroll them manually This can be accomplished in either of two ways When a TXT file is selected a special vertical scrollbar appears in the Lyrics STS page of the SongBook mode Touch it to scroll through the text during the performance See Lyrics STS on page 172 Scrolling is also possible by means of the Text Page Down Up command that can be assigned to a Footswitch EC Switch or Assignable Switch This section of the Book Edit 2 page contains two buttons Reset Press this buttons to unlink the text file from the entry Browse Press this button to open a standard File Selector and select a TXT file to be linked to the current SongBook entry Song Selection Number SB Here you can select a unique number up to 9 999 to be associ ated to the current SongBook entry By typing this number after pressing the SONGBOOK button again you will be able to quickly recall an entry from the Book page see Numeric selec tion of entries on page 167 Assigning a number is not mandatory but
333. ingered 3 mode is always selected and you must always play at least three notes to let a chord be recognized For more information on the various options see Chord Rec ognition Mode on page 99 Note This parameter is the same you can find in the Preferences Style Preferences page see page 99 Bass Inversion PERF STS This parameter allows you to turn the Bass Inversion function on or off Note This function can be automatically activated by playing the keyboard harder See Velocity Control on page 99 On The lowest note of a chord played in inverted form will always be detected as the root note of the chord Thus you can specify to the arranger composite chords such as Am7 G or F C Off The lowest note is scanned together with the other chord notes and is not always considered as the root note Lock icons gt GB O When locked the Split Point and Chord Recognition mode remain unchanged when selecting a different Performance or STS These locks are reset when turning the instrument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 212 For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 203 Edit menu From any page press the MENU button to open the Style Play edit menu This menu gives access to the various Style Play edit sections When in the menu select an edit section or press EXIT o
334. ings Strings on Strings amp Vocal Octave Strings Strings amp Vocal Strings Quartet Strings amp Vocal Symphonic Bows Strings amp Vocal Ensemble amp Solo Strings amp Vocal x ala al al al al al af al al al al a a a N N N NI N N N N NI N N N NI N N N N N NI NI N NI N N N N N ala aj al af al al o a So al af a al al al a a a a Chamber Strings Strings amp Vocal lt Strings amp Vocal lt Orchestra Tutti1 Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Horns Orch amp Oboe 1 Orch amp Oboe 2 Strings amp Glock Orchestra Tutti2 Orchestra amp Flute Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings Ens 3 Strings Ens 2 GM Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Sweeper Strings Strings amp Vocal Full Strings Strings amp Vocal Strings Ens 4 Synth Strings1GM Synth Strings 3 Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Analog Strings 2 Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Odissey Strings amp Vocal lt Analog Strings 1 Synth Strings 4 Synth Strings2GM Synth Strings 5 Choir Aahs GM Choir Aahs 2 Ooh Voices EN EN m NN NN KM ES NN MOS 48 48 48 EE E ER 49 49 49 49 E Ooh Slow Voice Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal lt Strings a
335. is connector the speakers are automatically turned off OUTPUT L MONO RIGHT Use these unbalanced connectors to send the audio signal sound to a mixer a PA system a set of powered monitors or your hi fi system Connect only the LIMONO jack to output the signal in mono Set the output level with the MASTER VOLUME slider Note This MASTER VOLUME slider does not control the signal entering the AUDIO INPUTS see below O INPUT L MONO RIGHT Use these unbalanced connectors to input another keyboard synthesizer a CD or MP3 player or a mixer s non powered output The signal goes directly to the final mix 10 DC 12 V power adapter connector Plug the supplied power adapter into this connector Cable holder Fix the power cable to this hook to avoid cable jamming Welcome to the world of Korg Pa500 Professional Arranger Pa500 is the most powerful arranger available today both for professional and home entertainment use Here are some of the features of your new instrument RX Technology the cutting edge engine that drives every aspect of the Pa500 from the synthesis to the display and how it all works together Powerful EDS Enhanced Definition Synthesis Korg sound generation system as seen in our best professional synthe sizers e 80 voices of polyphony e OPOS Objective Portable Operating System multitasking operating system to let you load data while playing your instrument
336. is is useful for playing Hits or Sequences that must only play once Loop When you press one of the PAD buttons the cor responding Pad plays up to the end then contin ues playing from the start Press STOP in the PAD section to stop it playing This is useful for play ing cyclic sequences Expression PAD Use this knob to set the Expression CC 11 value for the Pad track This value can be seen at the beginning of the Event Edit list The Expression is useful to balance the Pad with the other Pads For example if you want the Pad you are recording to be mel lower than the average just lower the Expression value Volume Use this slider to set the Volume CC 07 value for the Pad track This value is not saved with the Pad and is only used to test the Pad s volume during editing or recording Keyboard Range PAD The Keyboard Range automatically transposes any pattern note that would otherwise play too high or too low in pitch com pared to the original acoustic instrument when transposed by the arranger This will result in a more natural sound for the Pad instrument Note The Keyboard Range is ignored while recording The Pad track can play on the full range of the keyboard Trigger Mode gt PAD Not available if Track Type Drum This setting lets you define how Bass and Acc type tracks are retriggered when the chord is changed Off Each time you play a new chord current notes will be stopped The tra
337. is needed by some scales to set the preferred key see Scales on page 272 Quarter Tone ini Check the Quarter Tone parameter to make the the four SC Scale Preset buttons appear and the keyboard diagram become IEEE WEM Use the four SC Preset buttons to select one of the scale presets as programmaed in Global mode see General Controls Scale on page 202 ES SC1 a sce SC2 ES SES Sd PER Tone In the display touch any note you want to lower a quarter tone or any other programmed value making a big dot appear on the note diagram Touch the note again to make the dot disap pear This control is momentary and not saved to memory to allow for fast scale alteration while playing You can assign the Quarter Tone function also to a footswitch or the Assignable Switch As an alternative to programming the scale in the display you can use a footswitch or the Assignable Switch See below How to program a scale in realtime using a footswitch or Assignable Switch for more information SC Preset buttons Press these buttons to recall the corresponding presets Each pre set contains a custom detuning of each note of the scale and memorizes the selected degree s of the scale as programmed in Global mode see General Controls Scale on page 202 When no preset is selected the default scale is automatically recalled This scale assigns a 50 cent value to all notes and turns all scale degrees off
338. is the octave transpose value 3 Lowest octave 0 Standard tuning 3 Highest octave Detune PERF gt PERF STS This is the fine tuning value 64 Lowest pitch 00 Standard tuning 63 Highest pitch Play Mute icon PERF gt PERF STS Track s play mute status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard o Jg c Q re Q Q ec 90 Style Play operating mode Mixer Tuning Sub Scale Mixer Tuning Sub Scale This page lets you program an alternative scale for the tracks selected with the Scale Mode parameter see page 99 The remaining tracks if any use the basic scale set in Global mode see Main Scale on page 202 STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning Y Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano B Piano 121 883 888 Scale p Stretch A Key C PERS UPPERS UPPERL Note A different Scale can be associated to each Performance or STS Note Quarter Tone selection can be received by MIDI 1 e by an external sequencer or controller Conversely selection of Quarter Tone settings can be sent by the Pa500 to an external MIDI recorder as System Exclusive data PERF STS ini Selected scale See Scales on page 272 for a list of the available scales When selecting the User scale the keyboard diagram on the right becomes active see How to fine tune each note of the User scale below Scale Key PERF STS ii This parameter
339. is the same name of the associated Standard MIDI File of MP3 file or the associated Style The name can be up to 16 characters long Select Rename Overwrite to over write an existing entry Warning the older entry will be deleted Mew Song Name T 8BBgiorni di noi Write 50ng W Rename Overwrite 1808 8giorni di noi Select New Song to add a new entry to the SongBook database This option is automatically selected when a new entry has been created Camel o by pressing the New Song button ET Le while in the Edit 1 page The SongBook 67 Creating a Custom List Creating a Custom List You can create several Custom Lists in the SongBook to make a set of entries suitable for your various shows Before starting a new Custom List be sure you have added all needed entries to the SongBook main database see Adding entries above 1 While in SongBook mode open the page menu and check the Enable List Edit item SONGBOOK i ano chord B List Hame Fop benre Show Artist now Genre Dori py Mirtis Show Song Number now Key Sort by Key Ascending Descending Sart by Tempo Sort by Type Sort by Meter e Sort by Name Enable List Edit Sort by Genre Export as text fi Serif Artal After you check the Enable List Edit item the List Edit page becomes available i gigolo GT Long train going Pop Gr Mr Duke Pop ET I want your hand Pop vu Ta very supersti
340. ish to mute one or more tracks for example to sing along with the Song Note These changes or play an instrumental part live on the keyboard 0 A will not be saved to the Muting unmuting Song tracks works exactly as with Style tracks See Turning Style tracks on off on Song To save changes page 51 for more information edit the Song in Sequencer mode Soloing a track Contrary to the above you may want to make a single track play alone This is called the Solo func tion 1 While the Song is playing keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch the track you want to listen to in Solo mode N To set all tracks back to the Play status keep the SHIFT button pressed again and touch the track currently in Solo mode You can use the Solo function also in Style Play and Sequencer mode The Solo command can also be selected from the page menu Song Play 59 Mixing two Songs Mixing two Songs You can select two Songs at the same time and mix between them using the BALANCE slider 1 Press the Sequencer 1 area to open the Song Select window and select the Song to be played by Sequencer 1 Press Select to confirm lt no chord w m E Meter de EE 2 12H LU t Dark Pad Em T 128 Dark Pad gt Strings Ens GM wae Caron N 1 MUTE nalog Strings 2 us Altamare I L T EL oee 3 ctes Type paria aa mT 15 46 47 15 42 15 46 47 15 43 AS eee 38 47 96 17 44 B6 H3 B7 11 8
341. k the same language and let the one tell the other what to do From a physical point of view MIDI messages can travel across two different types of connectors on the Pa500 The MIDI interface that is composed of two different connec tors The MIDI IN receives data from another device the MIDI OUT sends data to another device The USB port that replaces both the MIDI IN and OUT con nectors with a single port and cable Both these devices are active at the same time Channels and messages Basically MIDI or USB cable transmits 16 channels of data Think to each MIDI channel as a TV channel the receiver must be set on the same channel of the transmitter The same happens with MIDI messages when you send a Note On message on channel 1 it will be received on channel 1 only This allows for multitimbricity you can have more than one sound playing on the same MIDI instrument There are various messages but here are the most commonly used Note On This message instructs an instrument to play a note on a specific channel Notes have both a name C4 standing for the center C and a number 60 being the equivalent for C4 A Note Off message is often used to say the note has been released In some case a Note On with value 0 is used instead Together with the Note On message a Velocity value is always sent This value tells the instrument how loud the note must play After Touch This message is generated by pre
342. l Pa 500 O 0 MIDI Over USB is supported so you can use this connector instead of the MIDI ports see What is MIDI Over USB on page 230 MIDI INTERFACE The MIDI interface allows your Pa500 to be connected to exter nal controllers master keyboard MIDI guitar wind controller MIDI accordion to a series of expanders or to a computer running a sequencer For more information on how to use the MIDI interface see the MIDI chapter IN This connector receives MIDI data from a com puter or a controller Connect it to an external controller s or computer s MIDI OUT OUT This connector sends MIDI data generated by Pa500 s keyboard controllers and or the internal sequencer Connect it to an expander s or com puter s MIDI IN Q PEDAL connectors These connectors allow for connection of external pedals DAMPER Use this to connect a Damper pedal like the Korg PSI or DSIH To change its polarity see Damper Polarity on page 207 Introduction 18 Rear panel ASSIGN PDL SW Use this port to connect a continuous or foot switch type pedal like the Korg EXP2 or XVP10 To program it see Pedal Footswitch on page 206 By default it controls Glide PHONES Connect a pair of headphones to this output You can use head phones with an impedance of 16 200 2 50 suggested Use a headphone splitter to connect more than one pair of head phones Note When inserting a jack into th
343. l set tings Input Trim PERF STS This knob allows you to limit the level of the signal passing through the equalizer Extreme equalization values can overload the audio circuits and lead to distorsion This control lets you set equalization as desired and at the same time avoid overloading Play Mute icon PERF STS gt GBLS 9 Track s play mute status See Keyboard track status on page 150 for more information Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Mixer Tuning Tuning Parameters in this page let you set various tuning settings See Mixer Tuning Tuning on page 89 for details Parameters gt PERF STS Note Song track values edited in this page are not saved and are only intended for realtime use Effects FX Select This page allows you to select effects to be assigned to the four Internal FX processors A D SONG PLAY SEO1 Effects Low AE FX Group Fu Amount z Send B FX B Ly 26 Stereo Chorus Fe Amount 54 Mad Track Off C D FX Group Send C FX C gt 7 Reverb SmoothHall t Fx Amount zB Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again with the new effects Edit the Song in Sequencer mode to permanently change the effects Note The default effect settings can be memorized 1n the Global
344. lad Artist both consid CT A Felicidad Latin 0 e ered even GT 4 gigolo Pop though only ETD A hard day night Pop Tempo From EE To 250 one of them may be shown in the List Clear All 2 Press the T Text Edit button next to the search criteria even more than one you want to enter 64 The SongBook Searching entries For example you may want to find all songs containing the word love in the title 1n any posi tion in the string If so select the Name criterion and enter the word love Capitals are not relevant for the search Filter m zx OGIGIGI COO OS Jta JGJC GIC GUC mu o JARMANNA Tempo From EE To 250 el MEI JEn JD Js Gear a q p Cm Ge Ds 3 Press OK in the display and close the Text Edit dialog box The entered text is now the search criteria Filter Name Genre Artist Meter Info Lr aS Tempo From IB To 250 DIniniB 5bDipBgIEB DIOIBIEBIBIBIDBBIUBd BIBIBIBIBIEBIBIBIB BHIBIBIEIBIEBIBIBIE a Cm ee Des creer Get oe 4 Press OK to close the Filter dialog box and return to the SongBook page Once the Filter dialog box has been closed by pressing OK the Filtered check box is automati cally checked and the filter is activated Only entries matching the entered criterion are seen in the Main List cT Could you below Reggae ETS Crazy little love Rack ET Feel love power Rack ETS Half time lover Pop ET Im out of love ET Indian Lov
345. lay a CM7 When you play a CM7 Key Chord 2 CMaj with NTT Root with NTT 5th AMMU LEI MMT Parallel i Series All original patterns must be programmed on the Maj7 or min7 chords When loading old Korg i Series Styles this option is automatically selected As recorded with NTT i Series When you play a CMaj When you play a C7 Key Chord CM7 with NTT 1 Series with NTT i Series MEM IE Leld Parallel No Transpose The chord is not modified and is moved to the new key unchanged The pattern plays exactly the recorded notes and is moved to the new key as is This is the standard setting of Intro 1 and Ending in Korg s original Styles where a chord pro gression is usually recorded and should remain unchanged in any key Fixed Chord This table moves as few notes as possible making legato lines and chord changes more natural It is ideally suited to chord tracks strings piano etc Contrary to the Parallel mode the pro grammed chord is not transposed according to the Wrap Around parameter but always stays around its original position looking for common notes between the chords Fixed No Transpose The programmed notes can only be transposed by the Master Transpose They are never trans posed when chords are changed Reference 110 Style Record mode Main page Record 2 Cue Delete Note button Use this command to delete a single note or a single percussive instrument from a t
346. layed before starting recording Onl Metronome on with a one bar precount before starting recording On2 Metronome on with a two bar precount before starting recording Tempo Select this parameter to use the TEMPO VALUE dial to set the tempo Hint You can always change the Tempo when other parameters are selected by keeping the SHIFT button pressed and rotating the DIAL Note When recording tempo old data is always replaced by the new data Note The actual tempo of the Style will be the one shown when saving the Style Performance in Style Play mode see Current tempo on page 82 Meter gt STYLE This is the meter time signature of the Style Element You can edit this parameter only when the Style Element is empty i e before you begin recording anything Selected track info area This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track Trk Dr t Standard Kit RAS E Drum amp Perc 128 8 0 002 Track name Sound bank Sound name Program Change Track name Name of the selected track Drum Acc5 Style track Sound name gt STYLE Sound assigned to the selected track The triangle means you can press the name to open the Sound Select window and select a different Sound Sound bank Bank the selected Sound belongs to Program Change Program Change number sequence Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Program Change Key Chord area Key Chord STYLE This parameter pair allows
347. ll manually change the Tempo with the DIAL When the Tempo Lock is activated the Link Mode is also acti vated see Link Mode on page 163 This makes both Sequenc ers use the same Tempo Master Volume Balance Sequencer Balance While the MASTER VOLUME slider controls the general volume of the instrument you can use the BALANCE slider next to the MASTER VOLUME slider to balance the Song tracks against the Keyboard and Pad tracks MASTER BALANCE VOLUME Balance of Song and Pad against RealTime Keyboard tracks Overall instrument s volume A lll irripirr1 3 Use the SEQUENCER BALANCE slider to mix between Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 Move it to the center for the maxi mum volume of both sequencers BALANCE Track parameters Keyboard track settings made in Song Play mode may be saved to a Performance You can then recall different settings by just selecting a single Performance Settings for Song tracks like pan volume and FX sends depend on the midifile Changes to Song tracks made in Song Play mode cannot be saved to a midifile and are only intended for realtime control To permanently save changes to the various Song parameters edit the midifile in Sequencer mode Standard MIDI Files and Sounds The native Song file format of the Pa500 is the Standard MIDI File SMF an universal standard set by all manufacturers You can read these files with any musical instrume
348. lo Stereo Auto Pan St Phaser Trml St Ring Modulator Detune Pitch Shifter Pitch Shifter BPM Pitch Shift Mod Organ Vib Chorus Rotary Speaker L C R Delay Stereo CrossDelay St Multitap Delay St Mod Delay St Dynamic Delay St AutoPanningDly Tape Echo Auto Reverse Sequence BPM Dly 64 Stereo BPM Delay St BPM Mtap Delay St BPM Mod Delay SL BPMAutoPanDly Tape Echo BPM Reverb Hall Reverb Smooth Hall Reverb Wet Plate Reverb Dry Plate L C R BPM Delay Reverb Room ReverbBrightRoom Early Reflections PAEQ Exciter PAEQ Wah PAEQ Cho Flng PAEQ Phaser PAEQ Mt Delay Comp Wah Comp Amp Sim Comp OD HiGain Comp PAEQ Comp Cho Flng Comp Phaser Comp Mt Delay Limiter PAEQ Limiter Cho Flng Limiter Phaser Limiter Mt Delay Exciter Comp Exciter Limiter Exciter Cho Flng Exciter Phaser 97 Exciter Mt Delay 98 OD HG Amp Sim 99 OD HG Cho Flng 100 OD HG Phaser 101 OD HG Mt Delay 102 Wah Amp Sim 103 Decimator Amp 104 Decimator Comp 105 AmpSim Tremolo 106 Cho Flng Mt Dly 107 Phaser Cho Flng 108 Reverb Gate FX assignable to FX processors B and D only 109 St Mltband Limiter 110 PianoBody Damper 111 OD HyperGain Wah 112 GuitarAmp P4EQ 113 BassTubeAmp Cab 114 St Mic PreAmp 115 Multitap Cho Delay 116 St Pi
349. log box on page 103 for more information Solo Track Select the track to be soloed and check this item You will hear only the selected track and the Solo warning will flash on the page header Uncheck this item to exit the Solo function The Solo function works in a slightly different way depending on the selected track Keyboard track The selected Keyboard track is the only track you can hear when playing on the keyboard All other Keyboard tracks are muted The status of the Style tracks is unaffected Style Play operating mode 101 Page menu Style track The selected track is the only Style track you can hear All other Style tracks are muted The status of the Keyboard tracks is unaffected Grouped Style tracks The Solo function does not work on these special tracks SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch one of the tracks to solo it Do the same on a soloed track to deactivate the Solo function Copy Paste FX You can copy a single or all four effects between Styles Perfor mances STSs and Songs To do this choose the Copy FX and Paste FX commands from the page menu of the Style Play Song Play or Sequencer modes To copy a single effect 1 Select the source Song Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the single effect you want to copy FX A FX B EX C or FX D or go to the Effects gt FX Select page to copy all four effects This may be useful
350. lowest velocity is deleted After Touch After Touch events Note This kind of data is automatically removed during recording Pitch Bend Pitch Bend events Prog Change Program Change events excluding the bundled Control Change 00 Bank Select MSB and 32 Bank Select LSB Note This kind of data is automatically removed during recording Ctl Change All Control Change events for example Bank Select Modulation Damper Soft Pedal CC00 32 CC127 Single Control Change events Double Control Change numbers like 00 32 are MSB LSB bun dles Note Some CC data are automatically removed during recording See the table on page 106 for more information on the allowed data Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to delete If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to delete If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track Note These parameters are available only when the All or Note option is selected Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Track status icon Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status Mute Mute status The track cannot
351. ltitrack Sequencer page Overdub The newly recorded events will be mixed to any existing events Overwrite The newly recorded events will replace any exist ing events Auto Punch Recording will automatically begin at the Start position and stop at the End position Note The Auto Punch function will not work on an empty Song At least one track must already be recorded PedalPunch Recording will begin when pressing a pedal set to the Punch In Out function and will finish when pressing the same pedal again Note The Pedal Punch function will not work on an empty Song At least one track must already be recorded Locate measure When checked the measure shown by this parameter is a tem porary start point of the song instead of measure 1 When you press the P Bl PLAY STOP button to stop recording or use the REWIND button to go back to the beginning the Song returns to this point Resolution Use this parameter to set the quantization during recording Quantization is a way of correcting timing errors notes played too soon or too late are moved to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid set with this parameter thus playing perfectly in time High A 4 32 1 8 Grid resolution in musical values For example when you select 1 16 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 16 division When you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division EA OA AE No quantizati
352. lute Frullato Flute GM Oboe GM Pan Flute GM a gt g e 3 D a G ey lt lt Z e lt Flute Dyn 5th Bassoon GM Whistle 2 N Folk Clarinet Double Reed NI N N EA ME MEN Uillean BagPipes KEN Kawala Hichiriki mma ET pH Fueda m Tr pu Bank Synth Bamme AA Emensm SSS Musads A wman Ce 3 e e Blown Bottle GM N Bambu Flute Shanai GM Recorder GM English Horn GM English Horn 2 Recorder 2 Bag Pipes GM N War Pipes N 73 73 73 71 78 75 72 73 73 73 71 70 78 77 73 72 79 71 77 76 73 73 71 72 71 71 71 74 74 77 75 3 9 Weed NN INT 8 pareada Freedom Ped Weemd mrs 8 Weed E NI E CO Ec Mwwemd 2 AA CIO foe IN CAT E e e Smpronic mr Sy Made A Baeswm Aa 8 Waemep mr 3 EA CTS NN s EIN Fe EA NT MEA COTE E MIN MEN eose A opio pod A Bem mr 3 T 3 posma mr 4 31 Fuemd AA WuwwWue E ICI GT panra AA CET Ec to weran NN INCI CI E 3 NC Mediate A Melowead Si INC EIN Emm A Reoccuing Asia mr 8 VintegeSweep A KC Ec CIN CN Weknoem A 5 Soundtrack S wos m o fesodown SSS mWmmd A 3 pema Weemd A 3 ps3 eS CTC pur p omae a erred SSS ICI EIA CIC Ec 7 CIN lees NN E E Synth Ghosty ECN 20 ET Nc leise A ETS NN INEA CIN pera AA 8 Waemd AO 89 BmWwae ooo o y fefee Wmened A ommes mr s CIN siding Sauare A a sineswich 0 NN AECI CI
353. ly appears when the Echo option is selected This parameter sets how many times the original note chord is repeated by the Echo option Ensemble Track Assign PERF STS Use these parameters to separately set Upper tracks for the Ensemble function Off There is no harmonization on this track Normal This track is included in the harmonization Mute This track only plays the Ensemble notes but not the original note Play Mute icon PERF STS Tracks play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Style Controls Drum Fill In this page you can select various general parameters for the Style STYLE PLAY Controls Trk Drum Jazz Kit RXZ B Drum amp Parc 128 888 834 var 1 e arr var 3 art var 2 Lb off var 4 off Kick and Snare Designation Kick bh off snare Dp orr Drum Mapping Fill Mode 1r ort 2 p ort s Dor El TT e e e e rur ACCEL ACC ACCS ACCA ACCS Drum Mapping Var 1 Var 4 gt PERF gt PERFSY The Drum Mapping lets you select an alternative arrangement of percussive instruments for the selected Drum Kit without any additional programming Just select a Drum Map and some percussive instruments will be replaced with different instru ments Off Standard mapping Drum Mapping 1 7 Drum Map number Mapping 1 is soft sound ing while mapping 7 is loud sounding Kick and Snare Designatio
354. me most Pa500 data can be read by any Pa800 However keep in mind that due to the different content and organization the SongBook will point to different Styles Loading Pa1X data You can load PalX data exactly as if they were Pa500 data Minor differences might exist between effect parameters Also keep in mind Pa500 cannot load PCM Sample data and does not include a Voice Processor section At the same time most Pa500 data can be read by any PalX provided it is fitted with Operating System v 3 0 or higher However keep in mind the following Pa500 has a more extensive range of effects that might not exist on the PalX Due to the different content and organization the Song Book will point to different Styles Loading Pa80 60 data You can load Pa80 60 data exactly as if they were Pa500 data The only difference is that the SOUND folder of Pa500 is called PROGRAM in the Pa80 60 Therefore to load Sounds from Pa80 60 disks you must accomplish one of the following opera tions Either rename the PROGRAM folder SOUND by using a personal computer before loading a SET folder or First load the SET folder then separately load the PCG file from the PROGRAM folder Reference 218 Media edit mode Save Loading i Series data Pa500 is compatible with the Styles of the older i Series instru ments You can load them as if they were ordinary Pa500 data 1
355. me panel Press the Volume tab to select this panel This is where you can set the volume of each track and mute unmute tracks Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from Normal Key board tracks to Song Tracks 1 8 and Song Tracks 9 16 views The Normal view shows Keyboard tracks Track status icon l LOWER UPPERS UPPERS UP PERI PONE 7 Virtual slider The Song Tracks 1 8 view shows individual Song tracks 1 8 188 Tai T82 T 3 Td T85 Toe Tor Tog Lyrics amp Mark The Song Tracks 9 16 view shows individual Song tracks 9 16 Tae 1 amp 8 186 188 188 198 img 1e8 Volume Tag IB Til 2 T13 Tid T15 IB Lyrics amp Mark Virtual sliders track volume Volume Virtual sliders are a graphical display of each track s volume Touch the track s area to select a track and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the value or touch and drag it in the dis play The volume of Keyboard tracks may be saved to a Performance while the Song track volume is not memorized Track status icons PPERF STS gt GBLS 9 Play mute status of the current track Select the track then press this area to change the track status The status of Keyboard tracks may be saved to a Performance or STS See Keyboard track status on page 150 for more information Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Note You can save this setting into the Global
356. me to select it Type EE 15 B6 H7 15 42 15 86 47 15 43 B K 61 65 96 19 3 Amore bello Altamare Use the scroll bar to see all Songs in the list Keep SHIFT pressed and touch the Up Down arrow to scroll to the next previous alphabetic section As an alter native you can use the DIAL Press the Select button to select the highlighted Song and assign it to Sequencer 1 Use the Sync P Synchronized Path Use the Open and Close buttons button to see the selected Song again to browse through the folders Use the Device pop up menu to re select the card and deselect everything 4 When the Song is selected press the Select button to confirm your selec tion and close the Song Select window SONG PLAY Canyon 15 66 67 15 42 i Meter dad M E cuipPena sang P Dark Pad p Mt E Meter dd Strings Ens Z GM n b Easy Beat 1 i J USI d Pert Stereo Grand b Analog Strings a Altamare B6 H3 H7 11 87 Selected Song Type pame a 15 66 47 15 43 Canyon 52K 41 68 96 19 3 z z c c J j m m mas rn Amore bello 30 87 96 17 44 El l POONER d Volume Aiea Mor After pressing the Select button in the display the main page of the Song Play mode appears again Song Play 55 Playing back a Song Playing back a Song mL Once a Song has been selected it may be played back by the sequencer 1 Be sure the SEQU
357. ment Track Control edit section is selected use this command to open the Copy Keyboard Range dialog box and copy all Keyboard Range values for the current Style Element tracks to a different Style Element See Copy Key Range dialog box on page 130 for more infor mation Copy Chord Table Only available while in the Style Element Chord Table page Select this command to open the Copy Chord Table dialog box see Copy Chord Table dialog box on page 130 Delete Current Track Only available in the Main Record pages Select this command to delete the selected track Overdub Step Recording Only available in the Main Record pages Select this command to open the Overdub Step recording window see Overdub Step Recording window on page 131 Solo Track Select the track to be soloed then check this item You will hear only the selected track and the Solo warning will flash on the page header Uncheck this item to exit the Solo function SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch one of the tracks to solo it Do the same on a soloed track to deactivate the Solo function Exit from Record Select this command to exit from Record without saving changes to the Style Write Style dialog box Open this window by choosing the Write Style item from the page menu Here you can save the recorded or edited Style to memory by choosing either a User Style bank Write Style British Pop 1 Style Bank
358. messages are to be sent on the Control channel see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 209 PC Style Elements 9 mei Tinto O e EEES vieni ECTS 5 vao Venen w an H2 S ares 3 Edna 9 fending jmAe3 1 1 Style and Sequencers Control Lo emos 3 Wes a 35 Ja 57 emeua O NES Single Touch 2 Style Change 100 Start Stop Style KUN Play Stop Seq 1 Play Stop Seq 2 Note The above Program Change numbers are given according to the 0 127 numbering system Control Change and Program Change message used as remote commands The following is a table including all Control Change Program Change messages used as remote Style and Sequencer controls These messages are to be sent on the Control channel see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 209 If a Style is already selected just send the Program Change message w ps 9 ps pes 9 pus The same as the Style to which the STS belongs MIDI Data 275 MIDI Implementation Chart MIDI Implementation Chart KORG Pa500 OS Version 1 10 Jan 08 2008 Default Memorized Basic Channel Changed 3 Default Messages X X Altered kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Nota 0 127 0 127 Number True Voice kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 0 127 Note On O 9n Vz1 127 O 9n V 1 127 Velocity oH ote Poly Key Sequencer data only Aftertouch Mono Channel Sequencer data only LI NN CI CO RN RN Bank Selec
359. meter is turned on notes received from MIDI or performed by one of the internal sequencers in the RX Noises range are recognized and converted to RX Noises When off notes are not recognized Note This parameter is automatically turned off when turning the instrument on again Q Jg Q re Q i Q cc 208 Global edit mode MIDI MIDI In Control General Controls Use these parameters to set MIDI Clock and Local Off Clock Send gt GBL Use this parameter to turn the clock information on the MIDI OUT or USB port on or off This parameter is common to all MIDI Setups Note In Song Play mode only the Tempo of Sequencer 1 will be sent to the MIDI OUT or USB port Off The Pa500 cannot send the MIDI Clock signal You cannot slave another instrument to the P2500 even when connected to the MIDI OUT or USB port On The Pa500 can send the MIDI Clock signal You can slave another instrument to the Pa500 Tempo Start Stop and Play Stop commands Connect the other instrument to the Pa500 MIDI OUT or USB port Clock Source This parameter selects the MIDI Clock source for the Style Play and Sequencer modes Note In Song Play mode the Internal clock 1s always used Note The Clock parameter 1s always set to Internal each time you turn the instrument on Internal Internal i e the clock generated by the Pa500 Sequencer 1 internal metronome Ext MIDI External from the MIDI IN port In Style Play or
360. meters area In d EG i Tabs Operating mode This indicates that the instrument is in Song Play mode Song Play operating mode 155 Edit menu Selected sequencer Before entering edit select one of the two sequencers by using the Song area of the main page see Switching between sequencers during editing below Edit section This identifies the current edit section corresponding to one of the items of the edit menu see Edit menu on page 155 Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu see Page menu on page 164 Parameters area Each page contains various parameters Use the tabs to select one of the pages For detailed information on the various types of parameters see sections starting from page 155 Tabs Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section Switching between sequencers during editing When you enter Edit mode you can edit the selected sequencer s parameters The selected sequencer is always shown on the page header 30NG PLAY SEQ1 Mixer Tuning Trbi llinnar 1 h Grand Diann To select a sequencer go to the main page of the Song Play mode and select the sequencers you wish to edit The selected sequencer is shown with a black background P Piara E d Canyon Q 1 Heter ded M Mixer Tuning Volume Pan This page lets you set the volume and pan for each of the Key board or Song tracks Note Son
361. middle To select more files or folders consecutively 1 Press the Mode button to choose the E option for the SHIFT button 2 Select the first file or folder to be selected 3 Pressand keep the SHIFT button pressed 4 Select the last file or folder to be selected 5 Release the SHIFT button To select more files or folders discontinuously 1 Press the Mode button to choose the option for the SHIFT button 2 Select the first file or folder to be selected Press and keep the SHIFT button pressed 4 Selecta second file or folder to be selected 5 While keeping the SHIFT button pressed continue select ing the other files or folders to be selected 6 Release the SHIFT button To deselect the files or folders To deselect one or more file or folder without deselecting everything keep SHIFT pressed and touch the file or folder to be deselected To deselect everything select any other file or folder All selected files and folders will be deselected Overwriting existing files or folders When copying files a file or folder with the same name of a source element might be found in the target device In this case Pa500 asks you if you want to overwrite it When a duplicate file or folder is met the following dialog box appears Overwrite on Copy File KORG USER altamare r11D already exists Overwrite Cancel The procedure is interrupted No The file or folder is not overwritten The sou
362. mmable Un rS U gt gt Up to 448 locations Preloaded Styles approx 320 User Styles 64 User all styles are re writable Arranger Tracks Style Edit Record amp Edit functions Guitar Mode Patterns Chord Variations Up to 42 patterns for each style including 3 Intros 3 Endings 3 Fills M E s o d c et A lt 2 D un un D ct a UN un Up to 512 x 4 Real time tracks Acc tracks all programmable Un m E m 5 i Separate transport controls for each Sequencer Balance Slider In SongBook Mode 16 16 Record amp Edit functions Real Time Record Step Record amp Edit Tracks On Screen compatible with most popular formats r og u I Sjaj E 3 1 a a n NI AIC 215 o io 2 un Qlal 3 oio a a lt lt c olny O olo oO 5 oO Q O rm D icio lu J a 2 2 D gt o O oja IE JJ D A O o 3 m m E Un Fully Programmable Programmable i Series Styles Pa series Style Perf Sound Song Song Book 4 Stop button OPOS Multitasking System Load while playing Upgradable Internal SSD Flash memory 16 MB for Operating System and Musical Resources Card drive for Secure Digital SD and MultiMedia Card MMC Memory Devices 2x15W nN gt O Ola PY Si 3 9 o Oo NE ASA e 13 o Q C y o xg 2D SE al 9 2 5 ae za e E pA N D co S o e s 2 T a N 3 g UJ O O
363. mode Hf Octave Piano EA Organ EJ Electric Guitar E Distortion Gtr Song Select window This page appears when you press one of the Song areas in the display or one of the SONG SELECT buttons in one of the SEQUENCER sections on the control panel Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the main page of the Song Play operating mode without selecting a Song Directory Page menu icon SEQUENCER 1 Sang Selection Type Mame a Size Date A Canyon 56K 26 86 87 12 23 b Me gustas 28 12 96 12 54 My Friend 61 85 96 19 15 My Show 15 66 47 15 37 Pinball B5 H3 B7 11 82 Storage device Song path While in this page select a Standard MIDI File or Karaoke file for the selected Sequencer A Jukebox file may only be assigned to Sequencer 1 Note There is a separate working directory for each onboard sequencer Hint We suggest to organize your Songs into separate folders instead of saving many files into the root 1 e the main level of the card This allows for faster accesses to the card thus a quicker response of the Pa500 to your Media commands Directory This is the list of the selected device s content File status File size Scrollbar Tupe Mame 15 H6 BH7 15 42 15 46 47 15 43 81 05 96 19 33 30 07 96 17 4 Amore bello Canyon 06 03 07 11 87 E Type of the File or folder Modification file or folder name date Use the scrollbar to scroll the list items As an alternative you can u
364. moved to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid set with this parameter thus playing perfectly in time Note To quantize after recording use the Quantize function 1n the Edit section see Style Edit Quantize on page 119 High A 0 32 1 8 Grid resolution in musical values For example when you select 1 16 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 16 division When you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division A 3 after the quantization value means triplet Rec Length Recording Length No quantization applied gt STYLE This parameter sets the recording length in measures of the selected track Its value is always equal to or a divider of the Chord Variation Length see next parameter This is not the total length of the Chord Variation but just of the current track For example you may have a Chord Variation eight measures long with a drum pattern repeating each two measures If so set the CV Length parameter to 8 and the Rec Reference 108 Style Record mode Main page Record 1 Length parameter to 2 before starting recording the Drum track When playing back the Style saving 1t or executing any edit operation on the Style the 2 measures pattern will be extended to the full 8 measures length of the Chord Variation Warning If you assign CV Length a value lower than Rec Length the value of Rec Length is not immediately updated in the dis
365. mp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Take Voices 1 Strings amp Vocal Take Voices 2 Ooh Choir Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Mmmh Choir Oh Ah Voices Slow Choir Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Grand Choir Choir Light Strings Choir Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Voice Oohs GM Humming Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Doolally Strings amp Vocal lt Strings amp Vocal Synth Voice GM Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Strings amp Vocal Classic Vox Strings amp Vocal Dream Voice Strings amp Vocal Orchestra Hit GM Bass Hit Plus 6th Hit Euro Hit Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass SFX Synth Synth Brass Impact Hit in India 7 12 13 15 17 20 21 2 3 2 3 5 2 3 5 7 12 13 2 3 2 3 5 2 3 5 7 Flip Blip Netherland Hit Brass zzzi RRE z gt gt x JEBE BEE 2 1 ES gt alo lo a A A 9 o 2 9 lt A 3 lt 8 Q 7 Trumpet 252 Factory data Sounds Program Change order cc ecsz pc Name sk ema ccm ccur mc name fean mar wr 1 3 pskmume ume MC O O e 8 exe p FS wr 2 3 mme ramet jr weemes em 1 wr 3 5 Mememamwe ume at at et eem farsi Par 3 rampa trumpet er mme e
366. n E FPerf Stereo Grand Selected Performance or STS Selected Performance or STS This is the latest selected Performance PERF or Single Touch Setting STS Press the name to open the Performance Select window As an alternative use the PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT section to select a different Performance To select a different STS from the latest selected Style use the four SINGLE TOUCH SETTING buttons under the display Keyboard tracks area This is where Keyboard tracks are shown Sound name Feran d Piano LE Dark Pad T L t Strings Ens 2 GH Ij t Analog Strings 2 e ERCEIHG us Sound bank s icon Track status Track s octave transpose Sound name PERF STS Name of the Sound assigned to the corresponding Keyboard track If the track is already selected black background press the Sound name to open the Sound Select window If the track is not selected white background first select it then press the Sound name to open the Sound Select window For more information about the Sound Select window see Sound Select window on page 76 Keyboard track octave transpose PERF STS Non editable Octave transpose of the corresponding track To individually edit the octave transpose for each track go to the Mixer Tuning Tuning edit page of the Song Play mode see Mixer Tuning Tuning on page 89 for more details Q Jg c Q re Q Q cc 150 Song Pla
367. n Start Tick 001 061 000 EndTick 003 601 000 Parameters Bottom Mote C 1 Top Note G9 area Tabs Operating mode This indicates that the instrument is in Pad Record mode Edit section This identifies the current edit section corresponding to one of the items of the edit menu see Edit menu on page 138 Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu see Page menu on page 144 Parameters area Each page contains various parameters Use the tabs to select one of the available pages For detailed information on the vari ous types of parameters see sections starting from page 138 Tabs Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section Event Edit Event Edit The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each single MIDI event of the selected Chord Variation You can for example replace a note with a different one or change its playing strength 1 e velocity value Page sub header Page header Page menu icon Gx REC Event Edit Event Edit Position Waluel Valez Length Event list H 0il Gi HHA Ctrl sis lll Hot e 166 0 066 192 M 063 601 6601 EndOfTrk Tabs Scrollbar This is very similar to the Style Record s Event Edit page See Event Edit Event Edit on page 117 for more information on the event editing procedure Event Edit Filter This page is where you can select the event types to be shown in the Event Edit page PAD
368. n notes and controllers on the Pa500 and any instrument connected to its MIDI OUT or the USB port by using the Panic key combination Just press SHIFT START STOP to stop all notes and reset all controllers 9 TEMPO VALUE dial PERF PERF SB The DIAL can be used to control the Tempo assign a different value to the selected parameter in the display or scroll a list of files in the Song Select and Media pages Turn the dial clockwise to increase the value or tempo Turn it counter clockwise to decrease the value or tempo c dn x Q O O E 14 Front panel SHIFT When used while pressing the SHIFT button this con trol always acts as a Tempo control MENU When used while pressing the MENU button this con trol always acts as a Display Contrast control b EXIT Use this button to perform various actions leaving from the cur rent status exit the edit menu page without selecting any item make the page menu disappear without selecting any item e return to the main page of the current operating mode e exit the Global or Media edit environment and return to the current page of the current operating mode exit from a Style Performance or Sound Select window MENU Press EXIT MENU together to reset the Tempo to the value memorized in the selected Style 9 MENU This button opens the edit menu page for the current operating mode or edit mode After opening an e
369. n SC1 4 SCA the control panel FX CC12 Switch Standard FX controllers FX CC13 Switch Text Page Up These options let you move to the previous or next page when reading a text file loaded with a Song see Text files loaded with Stan dard MIDI Files on page 154 or Song Book entry see Lyrics as text files associated to a SongBook entry on page 172 SongBook Next Moves to the next SongBook entry in the selected Custom List Text Page Down Scales The following is a list of scales or tunings you can select in var ious operating modes Equal Pure Major Pure Minor Arabic Pythagorean Werckmeister Kirnberger Slendro Pelog Stretch User Equal tuning the standard scale for modern Western music It is made of 12 identical semi tones Major chords in the selected key are perfectly tuned Minor chords in the selected key are perfected tuned An arabic scale using quarters of tone Set the Key parameter as follow C for the rast C bayati D scale D for the rast D bayati E scale E for the rast F bayati G scale G for the rast G bayati A scale A for the rast Bb bayati C scale Pythagorean scale based on the music theories of the great Greek philosopher and matematician It is most suitable for melodies Late Baroque Classic Age scale Very suitable for XVIII Century music Harpsichord scale very common during the XVIII Century Scale o
370. n gt PERF gt PERF Y The Kick Designation replaces the original Kick Bass Drum sound with a different Kick of the same Drum Kit while the Snare Designation replaces the original Snare Drum sound with a different Snare of the same Drum Kit Hint Select different Designations while listening to the Style and see how they affect the Style When you like the result save your setting to a Performance or Style Performance Off Original Kick or Snare Type 1 3 Kick or Snare replacing the original one MPERF PERFS ii These parameters set a Variation to be automatically selected at the end of each of the three available Fills 1 3 Fill Mode 1 3 Off The same Variation playing before selecting a Fill will be selected again VI amp V2 V3 amp V4 The specified Variations will be alternatively selected when one of them is selected For exam ple with the V1 amp V2 option if Variation 1 is selected Variation 1 and Variation 2 will be alter natively selected after the end of the Fill Var Up Var Down The next higher lower numbered Variation is selected in cycle After Variation 4 an Up com mand will select Variation 1 After Variation 1 a Down command will select Variation 4 97 Style Play operating mode Style Controls Drum Fill Var Inc Var Dec The next higher lower numbered Variation is selected When Variation 4 is reached an Inc command will select Variation 4 again When Variation 1 is
371. n Mazurka 2 Italian Mazurka 3 March French March _ 7 PC Bank World 1 UJ N Wi Wi NI N NI N N NI N N NIN W W N N N N N N NI N N N O W CJ NI om WT BY Uy N O 9 CO NI on wy BY W N O Party Polka 5 Polka Pop Bavarian Pop 7 ClassicSchlager1 ClassicSchlager2 ClassicSchlager3 Dance Schlager Fox Schlager Medium Schlager 3 olkst Schlager Disco Schlager h 5 17 o Party Mix NJ Petry Rock Movie Swing 7 s wis o Westen Mode 36 Mystery Man Tr eroon E 14 enema 15 Theatre sg Theatre March Army Band IN NN CC32 Bank World 2 Hawaiian T famewogi 4 Mexican ware s somnRe 36 Orchenalbolero T Mme 9 mama 3 oma 35 Quebrada 1 eme Zydeco 0 Hollywood 1 0 Unplugged Ballad 1 E M Hollywood 2 Unplugged Ballad 2 MO The Avalon 4 Desert Shuffle 6 Movie Ballad NE Unplugged 14 715 7 Meditando Medan MEC MECO 10 Unplugged rs T Uneiugged ra 36 Unplugged n 15 ureu 15 Acoustic Bae wc NE 5 3 mj RETA AAA Factory data 239 Style Elements Style Elements Note You can remotely select the various Style Elements on the Pa500 by sending it Program Change messages on the Control channel see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 209 PC Style Element Style Element Style Element Style Element Style Element 5 Veios
372. n for the corresponding track Reset All Tracks button Press this button to reset ie flatten equalization for all tracks Bypass Check any of these checkboxes to bypass equalization for the corresponding track When bypassed equalization has no effect on the track but all parameters are preserved When the box is unchecked equalization is activated again with the original set tings Input Trim This knob allows you to limit the level of the signal passing through the equalizer Extreme equalization values can overload the audio circuits and lead to distorsion This control lets you set equalization as desired and at the same time avoid overloading Play Mute icon SONG Track s play mute status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Mixer Tuning Tuning Parameters SONG See Mixer Tuning Tuning on page 89 Mixer Tuning Sub Scale This page lets you program an alternative scale for the selected tracks via the Track Assign parameter The remaining tracks 1f any use the basic scale set in Global mode see Main Scale on page 202 Trk S1TrBi P Grand Piano B Piana 121 883 888 ajimjaridajaja us uc usi un uma ura uc um Ir LEE Tad TAS THE Ta THe EG J Sub Note Quarter Tone selection and activation of the Sub Scale on each track of a Song can be received by MIDI 1 e by an external sequencer or controller Conv
373. n page 193 You may also lock the Master Transpose to avoid unwanted trans position See General Controls Lock on page 203 of the Global chapter As a general rule you should use the Master Transpose TRANS POSE buttons on the control panel when you need to transpose Keyboard tracks together with the Song You should use the Edit mode Transpose function see Song Edit Transpose on page 193 when only the Song has to be transposed Note The Master Transpose value is always shown on the page header SEQUENCER HT 9 199 Sequencer operating mode Save Song window Save Song procedure 1 If you are in Record mode stop the sequencer and exit from the Record mode Then go back to the main page of the Sequencer Play mode see Sequencer Play Main page on page 174 2 Select the Save Song command from the page menu The Save Song page appears 3 Select the folder where you want to save the Song into Use the Open and Close commands to browse open or close folders Use the scrollbar to browse through the files 4 When you are in the directory where you want to save your Song to press the Save button in the display To overwrite an existing file select it before pressing Save To create a new file do not select any file before pressing Save The NewSong NEWSONG MID on a card name will be automatically assigned to the Song 5 After pressing the Save button the Save So
374. n page contains the various panels you can select by pressing the corresponding tabs See more informa tion in the relevant sections starting from page 84 Volume panel AECA ORL FERC Molume Style Play operating mode 83 Style Tracks view page Style Tracks view page Press the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Normal view to the Style Tracks view In this view individual Style tracks are shown in the lower half of the display while the upper half of the main page changes to show parameters for the Style tracks L STYLE PLAY no chard B Selected track info area EN Jazz Kit R32 B Drum amp Pere 128 888 834 Sounds area DRUM PERC Volume f ASS ACC1 ACC ACCS ACCd Press TRACK SELECT again to return to the Normal view Key board tracks grouped Style tracks Original Style Sounds PERF gt PERF This parameter lets you assign different Sounds to the Style tracks overriding the Sounds recorded into each Style Element pattern These Sounds can be saved into a Performance or Style Performance with the Write Performance or Write Current Style Performance commands see page 101 Assigned Sounds with this parameter turned on are shown in the Sounds area of this page Note When assigning a Sound to a Style track the Original Style Sounds parameter is automatically turned off Note This parameter can be saved with the Performance or Style Performance
375. n played or muted note Thin bar Barr a finger crossing all the strings like a mobile capo Fat bar Capo Pad Record procedure Recording a Pad is very similar to recording a Style Please see the relevant chapter in the User s manual o Jg c Q he Q Q cc 138 Pad Record mode Edit menu Edit menu When pressing the MENU button while in Pad Record mode the Pad Record Edit Menu will appear STYLE RECORD Menu O Pad Track Note The Pad Edit pages are a simplified version of the Style Edit pages See the Users manual for information on the various parameters Note While the Pad is in play you cannot access the Edit section pages from the main page see page 133 Stop the playback before pressing MENU Note When switching from the Edit section pages Quantize Transpose Velocity Delete to the other pages or vice versa the Pad if in play is automatically stopped Edit page structure Most edit pages share some basic elements Operating mode Edit section Page menu icon AAA PAD REC Track Controls Pad Track b Standard Kit GM EDrum amp Perc 120 000 00 Pad track Pad Type Keyboard Range TrackType info Lp one Shot E Expression Trigger Mode Tension Parameters e area r Le ort 166 Ez Noise Humanize Tabs Other pages exhibit a slightly different structure Operating mode Edit section Page menu icon EAN EE REC Pad Edit C1 Quantize Cv p evt Resolutio
376. n use either of the following two methods e While the Tempo parameter is selected use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change its value TEMPO VALUE x L Easy Beat 1 e When the Tempo parameter is not selected or you are in any other page keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the Tempo The selected tempo will be shown in a small window TEMPO VALUE SHIFT p Style 4 125 e Press the EXIT and MENU buttons at the same time to recall the saved Tempo I Note You could sim ply press START STOP to start the Style but the Synchro Start function allows you to make the Style start in sync with your playing on the key board Therefore it may be considered a more musical way of starting a Style D Hint As an alterna tive to using the TEMPO VALUE dial hold the Tempo value in the dis play then move your fin ger up down or left right Selecting and playing Styles 47 Intro Fill Variation Ending Intro Fill Variation Ending When playing Styles you can select various Style Elements to make your playing richer A Style is made of up to four basic patterns Variations three Intros or two Intros and a Count In three Fills or two Fills and a Break and three Endings 1 2 3 Make sure the SYNCHRO START LED is turned on otherwise press the button to turn it on SYNCHRO START STOP gic Press one of the INTRO buttons to set the correspon
377. name Available only when an item is selected in a list Use this function to change the name of an existing file or folder You cannot change the 3 character extension of files and SET folders since they are used to identify the type of file or folder Rename Old name Canyon Mew name Canyon Press the Ti Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window Enter the new name then press OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window Erase Use this command to delete the selected file or folder Style Play operating mode The Style Play mode is the boot up operating mode When in this mode you can play with Styles 1 e automatic accompani ments while playing with one to four tracks Upper 1 3 and Lower on the keyboard You can select different Sounds and Effects by selecting Performances and STSs You can also use the SongBook to automatically select Styles for a desired music genre Style Play mode can also be used in Easy Mode see page 6 Start up settings Since Performance 1 of Bank 1 Performance 1 1 is automati cally selected when turning the instrument on you can save to it your preferred start up settings Select the Sounds Effects and other settings you would like to see automatically selected when turning the instrument on Then select the Write Performance command from the page menu When the Write Performance window appears save the settings to Performance 1 of Bank 1 See Write Perfo
378. nce Its value is always equal to or a divider of the Chord Variation Length see next parameter Warning If you assign CV Length a value lower than Rec Length the value of Rec Length is not immediately updated in the display Therefore you are still free of changing the value of CV Length before the measures exceeding its value are deleted see warning in CV Length Chord Variation Length below However if you press START STOP to begin recording the real Rec Length value is changed to the new one even if the display still shows the old value CV Length Chord Variation Length gt PAD This parameter sets the total length up to 32 measures for the selected Chord Variation When playing a Style this will be the length of the accompaniment pattern when the chord corre sponding to the Chord Variation is recognized on the keyboard Warning If you reduce the Chord Variation Length after recording any measure after the selected length will be deleted Be very careful when setting the CV Length to a lower value after recording If it happens we suggest to exit from record without saving see Exit from Record on page 145 Metro Metronome This is where you can set the metronome Off No metronome click will be heard during record ing In any case a one bar precount will be played before starting recording Onl Metronome on with a one bar precount before starting recording On2 Metronome on with a two
379. nd uncheck it when importing the following Chord Variations To E CV Use this parameter to select a target Chord Variation Execute After setting all parameters in this page press this button to import the Standard MIDI File into the target Chord Variation o Jg c Q he Q Q cc 128 Style Record mode Export SMF Export SMF The Export SMF function allows you to export a Chord Varia tion as a Standard MIDI File SMF and edit it on your pre ferred external sequencer STYLE REC Export OF Export SMF To Song v1 CV1l From EXCY ERI To Song This non editable parameter shows the name of the Standard MIDI File to be generated The automatically assigned name will be the same of the exported Chord Variation From E CV Use this pop up menu to select one of the available Chord Varia tions from the current Style Execute After selecting a Chord Variation press this button to export it as a Standard MIDI File A standard file selector will appear Select the target device and directory then press Save After you press Save a dialog box appears letting you assign a name to the file Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the page menu Press a com mand to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command write Style Copy Chord Table DoD ReugL nsud Copy Sound solo Track Copy Expression Exit from Record Copy Keyboard
380. nd Pads to record keyboard and pads and Ch Acc Chords Accompaniment to record Style commands and chords played on the keyboard While in Sequencer mode press the RECORD button and select the Backing Sequence Quick Record option The Backing Sequence Quick Record page appears Page sub header Page header Page menu icon Recording B 5EQ RECORD parame US E Song NEW SONG ters area gt Style Easy Beat 1 Free Memory 33 Selected Resolution I High track info J frrkupper 1 Grand Piano Piano 121 003 800 rk Upper 1 P Grand Piano B Piano 121 003 000 area Chord fAcc Track Kbd Pad Track m Hi cy T L T l T B S grouped tracks area Track volume status area See Backing Sequence Quick Record recording procedure on page 182 for information on the record procedure Page header See Page header on page 174 Page menu icon See Page menu icon on page 175 Page sub header See Page sub header on page 177 Recording parameters area Style This parameter shows the selected Style Either press it or press one of the STYLE buttons to open the Style Select window and select a different Style see Style Select window on page 77 Free memory Percentage of remaining memory for recording Sequencer operating mode 181 Record mode Backing Sequence Quick Record page Resolution Use this parameter to set the quantization during recording Quantizati
381. ndard MIDI Files Associated Selected entry resource s SONGBOOK EC RN tmo chord Al 581 Canyon 52 Pinball Songs Songs after filtering Custom Lists Songs in the Current List Lyrics STS Selected entry This parameter shows the currently selected entry If it is blank the latest selected entry has been modified or no entry has been selected yet Associated resource Style or Standard MIDI File associated to the selected entry Song number Total number of entries in the SongBook list Filtered Song number This parameter shows the number of entries shown in the Book page after applying the selected filter If no filter is selected this matches the total number of entries in the SongBook list see previous parameter Custom List number This parameter shows the number of available Custom Lists Songs in the Current List Number of entries in the selected Custom List Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command Show Artist now Genre Show Song Number now Key Sort by Key Ascending Descending Sort by Tempo sort by Meter w Enable List Edit Sort by Type amp Sort by Name Export as text file Sort by Genre wae Ie LI xU ES zx IS SongBook 173 Page menu Artist Genre Select this command to toggle between the Artist and Genre col
382. nformation Parameters area Side arrow The small arrow next to a parameter means that its value is effec tive at the current position For example if you are at the 003 01 000 position and an arrow lights up next to the Chord parameter this means that a chord change happens at the 003 01 000 position Measure This parameter shows the current position of the Step Editor To go to a different position within the Song use one of the follow ing systems Select this parameter then use the TEMPO VALUE dial to go to a different measure Use the Measure buttons in the display to move to a differ ent measure Use the Step buttons in the display to move in steps of 1 8 192 ticks Use the Event buttons in the display to jump to the next event Q Jg c Q re Q im Q cc 184 Sequencer operating mode Record mode Step Backing Sequence page The locator value is shown in the measure beat tick format Measure Measure or bar number Beat Divider in the Time Signature ratio e g a quar ter in a 3 4 time Tick Smallest position value Both Pa500 internal sequencers feature a resolution of 384 ticks per quarter Style This is the latest selected Style To insert a Style change at the current position touch the Style name to open the Style Select window or follow the standard selecting procedure using the buttons of the STYLE SELECT section Note Any Style Change inserted after the
383. nformation on MIDI Setup settings see MIDI Setup on page 269 Note After selecting a MIDI Setup you can go to the Global mode and apply any change to each channel setting To store these changes to a MIDI Setup while still in Global mode select the Write Global Midi Setup command from the page menu All MIDI Set ups can be freely customized and overwritten Hint To restore the original MIDI Setups load the original Fac tory data again downloadable from www korgpa com Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command Write Global Seg Setup Load Song Delete Current Track save Song sala Track Unda Overdub Step Recording Overwrite Step Recording Exit from Record Write Global Seq Setup Select this command to open the Write Global Seq Setup dialog box and save global settings that are unique to the Sequencer mode See Write Global Sequencer Setup dialog box on page 197 Load Song Select this command to open the Song Select window and load a Song to the sequencer See Song Select window on page 197 Save Song Select this command to save the new or edited Song to a card as a Standard MIDI File The file is automatically added the MID extension After selecting this command the Save Song page appears see Save Song window on page 198 Warning Turning the instr
384. ng one Select Record New Style if you want to start from scratch with an empty Style E After you select your preferred option the main page of the Style Record mode will appear Select the Element Style Element and Chord Var Chord Variation parameters to select the Chord Variation to be recorded edited Note For more information on the Style Elements and Chord Variations and the Style structure in general see The Style structure on page 104 d Use the Rec Length Recording Length parameter to set the length in measures of the pattern to record o Use the Meter parameter to set the Style Element s meter Note You can edit this parameter only if you selected the Record New Style option when entering the Record mode or when editing an empty Style Element 7 Select the Tempo parameter and set the tempo 8 Press the Record 2 tab to see the Sounds area Here you can assign the right Sound to each Style track For more details see Sounds area on page 110 9 If needed set the Octave Transpose for each track Note The Octave Transpose will affect only the notes coming from the keyboard and not from the arranger 10 Atthis point if you want to do a Realtime Recording go on reading Realtime Record procedure below Otherwise if you prefer to do a Step Record jump to Step Record pro cedure on page 114 Q Jg c Q re Q im Q cc 114 Style Record mode Style Recor
385. ng Play 53 Selecting a Song to play Song Play Pa500 is equipped with two onboard sequencers that can be run at the same time to mix between dif ferent Songs Pa500 can read Songs in Standard MIDI File SMF and Karaoke KAR format It may be of great interest to singers and guitar players to know that if a midifile contains lyrics and chords they can be seen in the display Sequencers controls The SONG PLAY button smsuct E NGLETOUCHSETTIMG Vo Ro 3 4 SEQUENCER 1 n p T E B O J T J Q U JI Selecting a Song to play 1 Press the SONG PLAY button to switch to the Song Play mode MODE O Hint In Style Play STYLE PLAY SONG PLAY SEQUENCER SOUND SONG P
386. ng dialog box will appear 6 If you like press the T Text Edit button to edit the name 7 Press OK to confirm saving or Cancel to stop the Save operation Q y c Q re Q Q cc 200 Global edit mode What is it and how the Global is structured Global edit mode The Global edit environment is the place where you can set glo bal functions i e functions overriding the single Performance STS or Style This edit environment overlaps the current operat ing mode Style Play Song Play Sequencer Sound Edit What is it and how the Global is structured The Global is a file that can be written to memory and may sub sequently be saved to a card containing global parameters for the whole instrument or each single operating mode Global parameters can be written to memory by selecting the various Write Global commands from the page menus each dedicated to one of the areas of the Global file They can be saved to a card by using the ordinary Media operations Note Saving or loading a SET folder also saves or loads the Glo bal file Parameter changing may be avoided by turning the Lock on for any single parameter or groups of parameters in the Lock page of the Global mode see General Controls Lock on page 203 There are separate areas in the Global file that may be separately written to memory to avoid writing all global parameters at once when not needed Global Setup
387. ng is selected while a folder is open in the display you can copy the folder s content without copying the folder itself Note During the Copy procedure you can t open a SET folder You can however open any generic folder 1 Inserta card into the card drive 2 If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder select this latter and press the Open button to open it Press the Close button to go back to the parent folder 3 To copy the current folder s content without copying the folder itself do not select anything in the display 4 Press Copy To to confirm 5 To select a different folder use the Open and Close buttons to move through the directories e To copy into an existing generic folder not a SET folder select that folder To copy into the current folder do not select anything 6 Once the target is selected press Copy If a file or folder with the same name of the source data already exists at the target location the Overwrite dialog box will appear see Overwriting existing files or folders on page 223 During Copy a dialog box shows the progress of the opera tion Copy Progress File Mame SETUP GBL files Ho Copying a single file or folder You can copy a single file or folder from a generic folder to a dif ferent one The file or folder must be located in the root the main highest level in the card hierarchy or into a generic folder You can
388. ng track Channel 3 COo rai n 8 Accompaniments 08 Reference 182 Sequencer operating mode Record mode Backing Sequence Quick Record page Kbd Pad This Backing Sequence track includes the four Key board tracks and the four Pads After finishing recording they will be saved as Song tracks 1 8 as in the following table Song track Channel Metro Metronome MEN ee E N a E This parameter sets the metronome mode during recording Off No metronome click will be heard during record ing A one bar precount will be played before starting recording Onl Metronome on with a one bar precount before starting recording On2 Metronome on with a two bar precount before starting recording Tempo Metronome tempo Select this parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the tempo As an alternative when a dif ferent parameter is selected or you are in a different page keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the tempo of the sequencer Meter Non Editable This parameter shows the Time Signature of the selected Style for reference PERF or STS Performance or STS This parameter shows the selected Performance or STS depend ing on the latest item selected To select a Performance either press it or press one of the PER FORMANCE SOUND buttons provided the PERFORMANCE SELECT LED is turned on to open the Style Select window and select a different Performance
389. ngBook entries these entries will be damaged due to broken links to the resources contained in the device Q Jg c Q L Q a Q cc Protect Select this command to protect the selected file or folder from writing erasing The lock icon will appear next to the file or folder name Unprotect Select this command to unprotect the selected file or folder if protected Ordered by Name Select this display option to see the list of files and folders in rough alphabetical order with different file types mixed in the list The Name label above the file list is shown in white 228 Media edit mode SD and MMC cards This command is the same as directly touching the Name label above the file list Ordered by Type Select this display option to see the list of files and folders ordered by type Inside any type group files are still in alphabet ical order The Type label above the file list is shown in white rupe Hame lt KAR This command is the same as directly touching the Type label above the file list Order by Size Select this display option to see the list of files and folders ordered by size The Size label above the file list is shown in white 13K z5 Ha H3 19 This command is the same as directly touching the Size label above the file list Order by Date Select this display option to see the list of files and folders ordered by date The Date label above the file lis
390. nge to be transposed If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instru ment in a Drum or Percussion track Since in a Drum Kit each instrument is assigned to a different note of the scale transpos ing a percussive instrument means assigning the part to a differ ent instrument Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Track status icon Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Track names Under the buttons a label for each track is shown Style Edit Velocity In this page you can change the velocity dynamics value of notes in the selected track An Advanced mode is available allowing you to select a velocity curve for the selected range This is useful to create fade ins or fade outs STYLE REC Edit Lw Drum E b vari cv e evi HO tu ve Dasg DELE vs Daag t ark HRIDESSLTYTU PHP velocity Value I Start Tick 001 061 009 EndTick 005 091 000 Bottom Mote C 1 L Advanced Top Mate G3 H B After setting the various parameters press Execute Note When an RX Sound is assigned to the track being edited the resulting sound may change since this kind of Sounds 1s made of several different layers triggered by different velocity values Also a fade out may result in the level jumping up next to
391. nging these settings select the Write Global Style Play Setup command from the page menu to save them to the Global Midi Setup gt GBLS MIDI channels for the Style Play mode can be automatically configured by selecting a MIDI Setup with this parameter See MIDI on page 230 for more information on using MIDI Set ups Note To automatically select a MIDI Setup when entering the Style Play mode select the Write Global Style Setup command from the page menu For detailed information on MIDI Setup settings see MIDI Setup on page 269 Note After selecting a MIDI Setup you can go to the Global mode and apply any change to each channel setting To store these changes to a MIDI Setup while still in Global mode select the Write Global Midi Setup command from the page menu All MIDI Setup can be freely customized and overwritten Hint To restore the original MIDI Setups load the original Fac tory data again downloadable from www korgpa com Performance Sound Default gt GBLSY Performance banks and Sound banks share the same buttons on the control panel Use this parameter to define whether the PER FORMANCE SELECT or the SOUND SELECT LED must be on when you turn the instrument on Style Change On By Default gt GBLSY This parameter allows you to define the status of the STYLE CHANGE button at startup On At startup the LED of the STYLE CHANGE but ton will automatically turn on Off At startup the LED of
392. nition Mode on page 99 Recognized chords may vary with a different Chord Recognition mode Note Fingered 2 1s selected while in Split keyboard mode in Full Upper keyboard mode Fingered 3 or Expert are selected instead Major 3 note 2 note nn pt e Major 7th 4 note 3 note nu un duni Tun 2 note 3 note J E Dominant 7th 4 note 3 note l l l mA e m e Dominant 7th Sus 4 4 note 3 note B em Dominant 7th 5 Major 7th 5 4 note 4 note COLAS e constituent notes of the chord e 2 note nu j 2 note AME Sus 2 3 note J i 2 note e Flat 5th 3 note Major 7th Sus 4 4 note nin T can be used as tension Recognized chords 277 dun nm nn pan pus qun denn Diminished Diminished 7th Diminished Major 7th nar nau JENI
393. nt or computer Differences may appear in sounds If you recorded a Song on the Pa500 Sequencer mode using only General MIDI sounds you can be confident you can play the same Song on virtually any other musical instrument or computer If you used Korg native sounds you cannot play back the same sounds on instruments from other manufacturers When you read SMFs in Song Play mode there is no problem reading files made using only General MIDI sounds Sounds could be different when playing a Song made on a different instrument despite the wide compatibility of Pa500 with other non standard formats differences may arise If so go to the Sequencer operating mode and load the SMF Then manually reassign the non matching Sounds replacing them with similar Sounds on the Pa500 Finally save the SMF again and you will be able to play it in Song Play mode with the correct Sounds NRPN Sound parameters GM compliant Standard MIDI Files can contain NRPN 99 98 Control Change messages These messages are used to mod ify some Sound parameters before starting a Song The following NRPN messages are recognized by the Pa500 CC 99 CC 98 MSB LSB CC 06 Data Entry Vibrato Rate 127 Vibrato Depth 2 127 Vibrato Delay 1270 Filter Cutoff 127 Resonance 127 EG Attack Time 427 EG Decay Time 127 EG Release Time 127 Drum Filter Cutoff 0 1279 Drum Filter Resonance 0 127 Drum EG Attack Time 427 Drum
394. nternal memory is already shown Select it and press Open to open it A list of User data types appear each type is a separate folder GLOBAL PAD 23 03 07 18 44 15 46 47 16 53 29 45 97 18 44 23 45 47 18 44 45 47 18 44 P 3 Select the folder containing the type of data you wish to save and press Save To to confirm the selection The list of files in the card is shown KORG USER r caRD Sees Pi Clase FE 4 At this point you can e Press the New SET button and create a new SET folder see Creating a new SET folder on page 221 or Select an existing SET folder and press Save to confirm Warning After confirming all data of the selected type 1n the target folder is deleted o Jg c o L Q i Q cc 220 Media edit mode Save Saving a single bank 6 You can save a single User bank with a single operation A bank corresponds to a button on the control panel of the instrument 1 e a button of the STYLE section 1 Inserta card into the card drive 2 The full content All of the internal memory is already shown Select it and press Open to open it A list of User data types appear each type is a separate folder 15 46 47 16 53 23 45 47 18 44 23 45 47 18 44 23 45 47 18 44 45 47 18 44 P 3 Select the folder containing the type of data you wish to save and press Open to open it The list of contained banks is shown 1 2 BANKGL
395. ntrast 12 14 M Markers 153 D Master Transpose 16 202 Damper 23 95 Master Tune 201 Polarity 207 Master Volume 10 22 2 Media 213 229 Demo 23 Format 224 Display contrast 12 14 Menu 14 Double Sequencer 13 155 Drum tracks 93 97 e gt Clock 146 208 General MIDI 231 E Global channel 231 i D i p C 101 164 197 p OUT channels 209 Sequencer mode 187 189 Song Play mode 156 158 159 Style Play mode 88 91 189 Setup 100 162 196 207 231 Standard MIDI File 146 174 MIDI interface 17 233 Ending 13 ic MIDI Setup 100 162 196 207 231 Ensemble 96 Write 212 Midifile 146 174 231 F Mode Fade In Out 201 Pad Record 132 145 Fill 13 Sequencer E Footswitch 206 Song P A 46 Format 224 SongBook 166 173 Style Play 81 103 Style Record 104 131 G General MIDI 231 O Global 200 212 Wri Octave Transpose 15 89 P Auto Octave 204 Global Setup 212 en l DE MIDI Setup 212 1d1 In Operating Modes 14 OS Operating System Backup 21 Update 21 Sequencer Setup 197 Song Play Setup 165 Style Play Setup 103 Outputs 18 22 210 P Pads 12 98 Pan Pads 98 Song tracks 156 186 Style tracks 87 PANIC SHIFT START STOP 13 Pedals 206 Performance 15 81 Selecting 15 76 Selecting Auto 206 Writing 102 Pitch Bend 90 189 Program Change 233 Q Quarter Tone 85 90 R RX 195 S Scale Main scale 202 Sequencer Link mode 163 Sequencer 2 FX mode 163 Transport controls 13 15 Sequencer mode 174 199 Shift 1
396. ntrollers can be assigned to an Assignable Pedal Slider Switch MIDI Control Change messaged inserted by using a software on an external computer are imported when using the import function Import Import SMF on page 127 Some controllers are reset at the end of the pattern Main page Record 1 After pressing the RECORD button and having chosen whether you want to edit an existing Style or create a new one the main page of the Style Record mode appears with the tab Record 1 selected Page sub header Page header Page menu icon Gait RECORD MT Bh ad Recording parame EA Stue British Pop 1 ters area Element n Var 1 Rec Length 4 Tempo J 94 Chord var CY CY Length 4 Meter 4 4 Selected Resotution High Metro gt or track info p Standard Kit RXS EDrum amp Perc 120 000 08 area Y ts Key NTT Chord area a r e a IRUM FERC Rone hecorde 1 Cue I Track volume status area Page header This line shows the current operating mode and transposition STYLE RECORD HT BH Operating mode name Master Transpose in semitones Operating mode name Name of the current operating mode Master transpose Master transpose value in semitones This value can be changed using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu See Page menu on page 128 Page sub header This area shows some performing info on the Style
397. ny This indicator may be easier to read than chords shown within the lyrics Master Transpose Master transpose value in semitones This value can be changed using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel Current beat Beat number of the current measure that is currently playing Current measure Current measure number Selected sequencer SEQ 1 SEQ 2 Use these side tabs to select a sequencer whose Song to show STS Name of the four selected Single Touch Settings STS Touch one of them to select it Song Play operating mode 153 Lyrics amp Markers panel Markers side tabs Standard Song Markers contained in a midifile can be read with the Pa500 to quickly jump to a given position in the Song Addi tionally you can set your own marker points on the fly Press one of these side tabs to access the Marker panel corre sponding to one of the two sequencers no chord 8 MT 8 NENEN 2 Intra M 6108 01 006 Verse 1 M B16 81 88B Bridge 1 M B18 81 88B Chorus 1 M 6 26 81 666 Verse 2 M 632 01 008 Bridge 2 L 1S BME Piano EJ Jazz Man E Tenor Sax EE Dist Guitar Note Markers do not work when the Groove Quantize is activated Note It is not advisable to program them with a Jukebox file assigned to Sequencer 1 since pressing PLAY STOP would delete the markers How to add a marker 1 Go to the Song Play gt Mark Seq 1 Seq 2 page 2 Start the Song by pressing the SEQ 1 SEQ
398. nyon H 52 Pinball Entry in play To select a different one highlight it and press the Select button in the display i gigolo ET Long train going Pop Gr Mr Duke Pop GT I wank your hand Pop ET Vry superstitious Pop Tib Senza donne Pop Press Select to set the highlighted entry to play if different than the Custom Ust Es 15 one automatically cc N CHE selected Use the List pop up menu to Press Next to select the next entry in the list select one of the available Cus This command can also be assigned to an tom Lists Assignable Switch 3 Select one of the entries in the list it turns black then press the Select button in the display to confirm selection Press the PLAY button to start playing back the selected Song Selecting a SongBook STS Up to four STSs can be associated to any SongBook entry It doesn t matter if it is based on a Style or a Standard MIDI File 1 Press the Lyrics STS tab to open the Lyrics STS page and see the four STSs associated to the current SongBook entry IMT EEEH r GH G HAVE SOME FUN FH THROW AWAY THE WORK ELL MY FRIENDS THE TIME HAS COME ___ STSs associated with the current entry 2 Select the desired STS by pressing the corresponding SINGLE TOUCH SET TING button on the control panel As an alternative touch its name in the display The STS is selected Keyboard tracks settings may change 70 Recording a new Song Entering
399. o Par 3 s fers wide ae xm 3 s EI Pan wn s e freson CTI wn s s Meme peo o 121 2 7 Clav Wah RX per 3 7 aavsnap Pme wm 4 7 sewda Yano wm s s feen Eme 5 Paar o 5 sedemseGM EFam y Dm me Emm wr o 9 mascara Emme 3 Per 1 jme fer Ln 9 W vibraphone eerie Paar 1 8 Meaew e EF fv wn 3 M Mae fero Paar o Memes EP fv wr 1 9 Merimba wide fere v wn vermeer Eae wr 3 8 moneys feren Par 4 essem Jarama reo ra 5 fereca Jeria wm s 9 mw EFme x o 8 pohonem fere 3 Fn s M warsensd Eam v Pere jeweser CEI EC Paar 2 M ek CECI wr 3 M fown fero xm 9 5 pomers Jeria y wr 5 mma Emm m 9 5 orawbas org ew omm Y Ln 1 jose organ Par 2 3 fie sosorgan omm Y ra 3 9 proes organz omm 5 Paar 4 9 parida organ omm x 3 3 finer par organ omm wn s 5 ruttorawbars omm ra 7 3 ams organ own wr s feron omm Paar e 3 soperas oem wn ie w jeeious ow wr m 36 Women omm xm 12 16 avabian organ Omm Lum 3 o espe Organ vel foron rar M 3 orawbars orans oem ws 3 a CT m 3e w maia omm Per 7
400. o O N c 7i S G D ct ct A D D o c a 0 m m U ul c m G W ct D ct lt N o U O o ot U S z O 2 z c h O h N BX3 Vel Sw Classic Click Gospel Organ Vel Distortion Organ N Perc StereoOrgan Dark Jazz Organ BX3 Short Decay N Percuss BX3 Killer B Pipe Tutti 1 Pipe Tutti 2 Pipe Tutti 3 N N N N N N o Pipe Flute Drawbars Org GM Det DrawbarsOrg It 60 s Organ Drawbars Organ2 Old Wheels Pipe Mixture N N o Flauto Pipes Positive Organ Perc Organ GM Det Perc Organ Perc Organ 2 Rock Organ GM Good Old B Dirty B Iper Dark Organ P y ko N 3 3 E o lt X Ke O O hi B D N 241 Factory data Sounds Bank order Mm emen Full Drawbars ENEEXES Church Oct Mix ETA Detuned Church Church Pipes Full Pipes Reed Organ GM Puff Organ Church Organ GM NJ eo N N o N N N o Small Pipe DWGS Organ Gospel Organ Perc Short Decay Perc Wheels Dirty Jazz Organ Rotary Organ M1 Organ Drawbars Organ3 Perc Organ 3 Rock Organ 2 Tibia amp Vox Post Horn Trem Big Theatre Org Bank Guitar Nylon Gtr Pro1 NJ Nylon Slide Pro N vI N N 12 Strings Pro N N Ms N N ao ui UJ NJ NJ N Ww NJ N Clean Funk RX1 Dist Guitar RX1 Nylon Gtr Pro2 N N N Nylon Vel Harm N
401. o deacti vate the Easy Mode Switching between Styles and Songs Depending on what you want to play you must switch to Style Play mode or Song Play mode e Press the STYLE PLAY button to switch to the Style Play mode and play Styles This is the mode you are in when you first turn the instrument on e Press the SONG PLAY button to switch to the Song Play mode and play Songs MODE STYLE PLAY SONG PLAY SEQUENCER SOUND O O ULUL The Style Play page in detail Easy Mode 7 The Style Play page in detail Style name and info Touch the Style s name to open the Style Select window and choose a different Style page 77 Tempo Use the DIAL to change it Length of the accompaniment pattern and current beat Performance or STS Touch it to open the Performance Select win dow and choose a different Per formance Sounds on the keyboard will change page 76 M Pert Stereo Grand Mixer Effects y gt Touch it to adjust the tracks pan and volume page 50 Organ Touch it to choose and program the effects page 91 EA Sounds assigned to the right hand UP1 to UP3 and to the left hand LOW Touch the Sound s name to open the Sound Select window and choose a different Sound page 76 Sound icon and status If the LITE icon appears the Sound is in mute and cannot be heard If the icon does not appear the Sound is in play and can be heard page 35
402. o the Upper above the split point and Lower below the split point parts The notes that arrive to a Global channel are used for the chord recognition of the automatic accompaniment If the SPLIT LED is turned on only the notes below the split point will be used MIDI Standard MIDI Files 231 These notes will be combined with the ones of the special Chord and Chord 2 channels The Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels You can set two special Chord channels see page 209 to send to the Pa500 notes for the chord recognition The notes will be combined with the notes that go through the channel set as Glo bal Global notes are recognized only under the split point if the SPLIT LED is lit up The Chord channels are not affected by the split point and the status of the SPLIT button of the control panel All the notes both above and below the split point will be sent to the chord recognition The SPLIT button has a particular effect on the Chord channels if the SPLIT LED is on the chord recognition mode will be set by the Chord Recognition Mode parameter in the Style Play mode see page 99 if the SPLIT LED is off the chord recognition mode will always be Fingered 3 you need to play at least three notes in order for the chord to be detected If Expert was selected before turning the SPLIT off it will remain selected These two channels are especially useful for accordion players to assign a different Chord channel
403. oard tracks a 7 128 E Em H Meter dd H Bresse JP Strings Ene 2 eri 5 Ens z GM 1 El Easy Beti o Beat 1 NEN MUTE gt Analog Strings 2 Strings 2 L LIPPER 1 LOWER UPPERS UPPERZ TRACK SELECT SONG PLAY E emschords B m Meter ded H Kd 2 Keyboard tracks 5 Press the lil PLAY STOP button to start the Song scd ps SONG SELECT lt lt O00 de 6 While listening to the Song switch from Normal view to Track 1 8 and Track 9 16 view to see which tracks are playing To see if a track is playing look at its name and see if it changes color e Touch each track s channel strip to see each track s detail in the Track Info line SONG PLAY E SE Canyon a 1 Meter d d H is i 1 PF Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piano 121 818 888 Selected track Assigned Sound Press it to Sound bank Program Change open the Sound Select win dow 58 Song Play Turning Song tracks on off e Alternatively you can see which type of Sound is assigned to each track in the Sound area of the Track 1 8 and Track 9 16 views SONG PLAY em Canyon Jd dur Pinball a SS icm paeem a a SS a MICE E LARRY Meter ara M J 128 Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano B Piana 121 883 888 CED ECES ECEE ise e i88 ee 188 Octave Transpose Sound Bank icons Press to open the Sound Select window Turning Song tracks on off During playback you may w
404. ode Page sub header Track Name of the selected track in record S1Tr01 Tr16 Sequencer 1 track In Sequencer mode you always work with Sequencer 1 Pos Position This is the position of the event note rest or chord to be inserted Step Time area Step Time Length of the event to be inserted od Standard Note value Standard value of the selected note Dot Augments the selected note length by one half of its value Triplet 3 Triplet value of the selected note 179 Sequencer operating mode Record mode Step Record page Note parameter area Meter Time signature of the current measure This parameter cannot be edited You can set a Meter change by using the Insert func tion of the Edit menu and inserting a new series of measures with a different Meter see Song Edit Cut Insert Measures on page 194 Free Memory Available memory for recording Duration Relative duration of the inserted note The percentage is always referred to the step value 50 Staccato 85 Ordinary articulation 100 Legato Velocity Set this parameter before entering a note or chord This will be the playing strength i e velocity value of the event to be inserted Kbd Keyboard You can select this parameter by turn ing all counter clockwise the dial When this option is selected the playing strength of the played note is recognized and recorded La 127 Velocity value The event w
405. ode Select this command to open the Overdub Step recording window see the Style Record chapter in the User s Manual for more informa tion Exit from Record Select this command to exit from Record without saving changes to the Pad Write Pad dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Pad item from the page menu Here you can save the recorded or edited Pad to memory Write Pad Mew Pad Parameters saved in the Pad are marked with the pap symbol through the user s manual Name gt PAD Name of the Pad to be saved Press the Ti Text Edit button next to the name to open the Text Edit window Pad Bank Target Pad bank Only User banks can be selected Pad Target Pad location in the selected bank Use the TEMPO VALUE dial to select a different location Note A User Pad is usually prompted when writing a Pad How ever you can overwrite a Factory Pad when the Factory Style and Pad Protect parameter is left unchecked see page Media gt Prefer ences Select button Press this button to open the Pad Select window and select a tar get location Pad Record mode Write Pad dialog box 145 Q y c Q re Q Q cc 146 Song Play operating mode Transport controls Song Play operating mode The Song Play operating mode is where you can listen to Songs Since the Pa500 is equipped with two onboard sequencers you can play two Songs at the same time This is ver
406. ode Tempo is the same for both Sequenc ers Off When you select a different Style or Performance or select a different Song the memorized tempo is automatically selected The Link Mode is also turned off for the Song Play mode so each Sequencer plays with its own Tempo SHIFT You can jump to the Global gt Lock page by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing the TEMPO LOCK button FADE IN OUT When the Style or Song is not playing press this button to start it with a volume fade in the volume goes from zero to the max imum When the Style or Song is playing back press this button to stop it with a volume fade out the volume gradually decreases You don t need to press START STOP or PLAY STOP to start or stop the Style or Song Note This does not work in Sequencer mode SHIFT You can jump to the Global gt Basic page by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing the FADE IN OUT button SONGBOOK Press this button to recall the SongBook mode While in this mode you can browse through the music database SHIFT You can jump to the SongBook gt Custom List page by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing the SONGBOOK button D ENSEMBLE PERF STS STSS This button turns the Ensemble function on or off When on the right hand melody is harmonized with the left hand chords Note The Ensemble function works only when the keyboard is in Split mode c n x Q O O gt E 16 Front panel
407. ok entry and this parameter is checked you can save a single STS or all four Style s STSs lt STS Name gt A single STS is saved to the chosen SongBook STS The source are the Keyboard tracks as they have been configured by selecting a Performance Style STS SongBook STS or after manual edit ing When you press Write and choose the Rename Overwrite option only the new STS is overwrit ten while the others are left untouched All Current Style STS All four STSs are saved to the current SongBook entry The source STSs are those contained in the Style currently selected in Style Play mode When you press Write and choose the Rename Overwrite option all STSs are overwritten STS Name gt SB Name of the current STS Press the Ti Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window and modify the name To STS Location One of the four STS available for each entry where you can save the current settings for Keyboard tracks Buttons New Song Press this button to create a new entry Settings are copied from the currently selected Style or from the Standard MIDI File assigned to Sequencer 1 The selected resource will be shown in the Resource Name field see above Del Song Press this button to delete the current entry Write Press this button to open the Write Song dialog box and save the current entry to the main list of the SongBook Note The maximum number of entries in a SongBook file is 3 000 entr
408. ol panel to select a Style Element VARIATIONI ENDING 3 Chord Chord Variation STYLE Use these parameters to assign a Chord Variation to each of the most important chords Style Track Controls Type Trigger Tension In this page you can set the Mode Retrigger mode for the Style tracks and activate deactivate the Tension for the Accompani ment tracks STYLE REC Style Track Controls Trk cc3 PAcousticPiano GI B Piano 121 888 888 HES AF ALIO Track Type ACC ACCS When in this page press the corresponding button on the con trol panel to select a Style Element VARIATIONI ENDING 3 Track Type STYLE Use this parameter to set the type of the corresponding track Drum Drum track This type of track is not transposed by the arranger and is used for Drum Kits made of Drum sounds It can be affected by the Drum Mapping of the Style Play mode see Drum Mapping Var 1 Var 4 on page 97 Perc Percussion track This type of track cannot be transposed and is used for Drum Kit made of Percussion sounds It is NOT affected by the Drum Mapping Dass Bass track This type of track always plays the root when changing chord Acc Accompaniment track This type of track can be used freely for melodic or harmonic accompani ment patterns Gtr Guitar track This type of track uses Guitar Mode to create guitar strumming see Main page Guitar Mode on page 111 When this type is selected the Tensi
409. omatically analyze the Standard MIDI File and add RX Noises to Guitar tracks This command scans a single track or the whole Standard MIDI File looking for guitar strummings played by nylon steel or electric guitars After scanning a suitable Guitar sound will be automatically assigned to the relevant track s and RX Noises automatically added where needed This means that you can transform any flat SMF into an ultra realistic song with a real guitar player inside at the touch of a button Preferences Sequencer Setup In this page you can select a MIDI Setup for the Sequencer mode SEQUENCER Preferences LCY Global Sequencer Setup 43 Sequencer 1 Midi Setup Note These settings are stored in the Sequencer Setup area of the Global file Parameter of this kind are marked with the GBL o Jg c Q re Q im Q cc 196 Sequencer operating mode Page menu abbreviation through the manual After changing these settings select the Write Global Sequencer Setup command from the page menu to save them to the Global Midi Setup gt GBLS24 MIDI channels for the Sequencer mode can be automatically configured by selecting a MIDI Setup with this parameter See MIDI on page 230 for more information on using MIDI Set ups Note To automatically select a MIDI Setup when entering the Sequencer mode select the Write Global Sequencer Setup com mand from the page menu For detailed i
410. on parameter can no longer be edited Trigger Mode STYLE This setting lets you define how Bass and Acc type tracks are retriggered when the chord is changed Off Each time you play a new chord current notes will be stopped The track will remain silent until a new note will be encountered in the pattern Rt Retrigger The sound will be stopped and new notes matching the recognized chord will be played back Rp Repitch New notes matching the recognized chord will be played back by repitching notes already playing There will be no break in the sound This is very useful on Guitar and Bass tracks Tension gt STYLE Tension adds notes a 9th 11th and or 13th that have actually been played to the accompaniment even if they haven t been written in the Style pattern This parameter specifies whether or not the Tension included in the recognized chord will be added to the Acc type tracks On The Tension will be added Off No Tension will be added Import Import SMF The Import SMF function allows you to import MIDI data from a Standard MIDI File SMF created on your preferred external sequencer and transform them in a Chord Variation Note You cannot use this function to import data from any generic Song The Standard MIDI File to be imported must be pro grammed as if 1t was one of Pa500 s Chord Variations STYLE REC Import OF Import SMF From Song sn song L Initialize fa Do Expo
411. on applied 1 8 Start End Start and End locators These parameters area available only when the Auto Punch recording mode is selected They set the starting and ending points of the Punch recording Metro Metronome This is the metronome heard during recording Off No metronome click will be heard during record ing A one bar precount will be played before starting recording Onl Metronome on with a one bar precount before starting recording Q Jg c Q L Q Q cc 178 Sequencer operating mode Record mode Multitrack Sequencer page On2 Metronome on with a two bar precount before starting recording Tempo Select this parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to set the tempo Note You can always change the Tempo when other parameters are selected by keeping the SHIFT button pressed and rotating the DIAL Meter This is the basic meter or time signature of the Song You can edit this parameter only when the Song is empty i e before you begin recording anything To insert a meter change in the middle of the Song use the Insert Measure function see page 194 Tempo Tempo mode This parameter sets the way tempo events are read or recorded Manual Manual reading The latest manual Tempo setting made using the TEMPO VALUE dial is consid ered the current Tempo value No Tempo change events will be recorded This is very useful to record the Song much slower than its a
412. on channel 2 melody on channel 4 drum kit on channel 10 control of a voice harmonizer on channel 5 Q y c Q re Q Q cc 234 MIDI Playing another instrument with the Pa500 Playing another instrument with the Pa500 You can use the Pa500 as the master controller for your MIDI setup 1 Connect the Pa500 MIDI OUT connector to the other instrument s MIDI IN m Set the other instrument to the same channels you want to play from Pa500 For example if you wish to play the Upper 1 and Upper 2 tracks with sounds of the other instrument enable the other instrument to receive on the same channels Pa500 is transmitting from tracks Upper 1 and Upper 2 by default channels 1 and 2 ia Set the master volume of the other instrument with its own volume controls gt Mute unmute any track right from the Pa500 Adjust each track s volume by using Pa500 sliders Play the keyboard of the Pa500 The Keyboard Pa500 s keyboard can drive up to four tracks via the MIDI OUT Upper 1 3 and Lower MIDI output channels are set in Global mode see MIDI MIDI Out Channels on page 209 As a default situation 1 Default MIDI Setup each of Pa500 Keyboard tracks transmit on the following channels Out Channel When a track is muted it cannot transmit any MIDI data to an external expander or sequencer connected Pa500 s MIDI OUT To hear only the expander s sounds you can lower the MA
413. on is a way of correcting timing errors notes played too soon or too late are moved to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid set with this parameter thus playing perfectly in time High No quantization applied J 1 32 1 8 Grid resolution in musical values For example when you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 division High no i l quantiza J n D tion l Chord Acc Kbd Pad These parameters let you define grouped track status during recording This status is reflected by the big status indicator above the track sliders Play The Backing Sequence track is set to play If there are recorded data they will be heard while recording the other Backing Sequence track Mute The Backing Sequence track is muted If this tracks has already been recorded it will not be heard during recording of the other Backing Sequence track Rec The Backing Sequence track is in record All pre viously recorded data will be deleted After press ing P N PLAY STOP to start recording the track will receive notes from the keyboard and the MIDI IN connector Ch Acc This Backing Sequence track groups all Style tracks together with recognized chords and Style controls and Style Elements selection After finishing recording they will be saved as Song tracks 9 16 as in the following table Chord Acc track So
414. on the list to edit ETS Vry superstitious Pop ET Senza donne Pop Press Write to save the current Custom List List Lyrics Press New List to create a new Custom List to move the selected delete the selected Press Del List to delete the current Custom entry up or down in entry List Warning Del List will delete the cur the list rent Custom List Use the vertical arrows Press Del Song to 5 When the Custom List is ready press the Write button in the display to save it to memory Assign a new name to the Custom List Write List BIDIBIBEBDBIDBDBNHGE MEI BIBIBIBIBIEIBB BS HIBIBIBIBIEIIIBIBIB 7 New List Press the T symbol to open the Text Edit dialog box Press Clear to delete the whole string Delete to cursor delete just a single charac ter Use the lt and gt buttons to move the Press Symbol to enter special charac hters Use alphabetic characters to enter text Use the SHIFT but ton to switch between capitals and small charac ters When done press OK to confirm the new name or Cancel to abandon all changes The SongBook 69 Selecting and using a Custom List Selecting and using a Custom List After creating one or more Custom Lists you can select one and use it for your show 1 Press the Custom List tab to select the Custom List page 2 Use the List pop up menu to select one of the available Custom Lists SONGBOOK eno chord B StCa
415. oose the Write Global Global Setup from the page menu Split Keyboard Mode Accompaniment When this lock is closed the Keyboard Mode Full or Split and Chord Scanning Full or Lower remain unchanged when a different Per formance or STS is selected This is useful if for example you prefer to always play in Full Keyboard Mode with chords recog nized on the whole keyboard range Note The Keyboard Mode and Chord Scanning settings are reset when switching to a different oper ating mode Hint If you want the same Keyboard Mode and Chord Scanning settings to be used during all your shows save your preferred settings to Performance 1 1 automatically selected on startup then close this lock and choose the Write Global Global Setup from the page menu Lock FX pane Upper 1 Fas F P Transp Upper 1 FXs In Sound mode you can assign a Sound two effects FX1 and FX2 When you assign a new Sound to the Upper 1 track the FX1 and FX2 set tings saved with that Sound can be automatically selected overriding Performance STS settings for this track Whether Sound or Performance STS effect parameters will be considered depends on the status of this lock f the Upper 1 FX Lock is turned on when assigning a new Sound to the Upper 1 track Per formance STS parameters are left untouched selected effects and FX Send values are not changed f the Upper 1 FX Lock is turned off when assigning a new S
416. opy operation deletes all data at the target location overwrite STYLE REC Edit m Copy From Pad lt no pad 3eq gt From CY n All To Erev e Yar To Track n Drum ae ACC1 ACE ACC After setting the various parameters press Execute Note If you copy too many events on the same tick the Too many events message appears and the copy operation 1s aborted Note When you copy over an existing Chord Variation Program Change data is not copied to leave the original Sounds unchanged for that Chord Variation From Pad Choose this option to select the source Pad to copy the Chord Variation from Press the Select button to open the Pad Select window and select the source Pad From CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the source Chord Variation All All Chord Variations i e the whole Pad You can t change the target that is automatically set to All CV1 CV6 Single Chord Variation To CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select a target Chord Variation inside the current Pad CV1 CV6 Target Chord Variation Automatically set to All if the From CV parameter is also set to All To Track Use this parameter to select the target track to copy All All tracks of the selected Style Style Element or Chord Variation Drum Acc5 Single track of the selected Style Style Element or Chord Variation Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this
417. ord Edit page structure All edit pages share some basic elements Edit mode Edit section Page menu icon MN feros General Controls B 2h Keyboard Settings Velocity Curve Lr Medium 2 Global Tuning Reverb Master Tuning cent 8 Reverb Offset ms A E EE Parameters Fade In Out Time area Fade In Time s Fade Out Time s so Accelerando Ritardands Glide E Step D Curve Ly curve e Time gt 8e ms Tabs Edit mode This indicates that the instrument is in Global mode Edit section This identifies the current edit section corresponding to one of the items of the edit menu see Edit menu on page 200 Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu see Page menu on page 211 Parameters area Each page contains various parameters Use the tabs to select one of the available pages For detailed information on the vari ous types of parameters see sections starting from page 201 Tabs Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section General Controls Basic This page contains various general parameters setting the status of the keyboard the fade in out and the accelerando ritar dando GLOBAL General Controls Y Keyboard Settings Velocity Curve Lr Medium 2 Global Tuning Reverb Master Tuning cent 8 Reverb Offset ms A Fade In Out Time Fade In Time s 14 Fade Out Time s 18 Accelerando Ritardands Glide Step
418. ord mode A dialog box appears asking you to either cancel discard or save the changes Exit From Step Record Step sequence has been changed Do you want to save it i If you press Cancel exit is canceled and you can continue editing If you choose No changes are not saved and the Step Record window is closed If you choose Yes changes are saved and the Step Record window is closed When back to the main page of the Style Record mode you may turn all tracks to the play status then press START STOP to listen to the Style Press START STOP again to stop the playback 9 From the main page of the Style Record mode select either the Write Style or the Exit from Record command to exit from the Style record mode respectively by saving the Style to memory see Write Style dialog box on page 129 or by canceling any change Chords and second voices in Step Record mode You are not obliged to insert single notes in a track There are several ways to insert chords and double voices Lets look at some Entering a chord Simply play a chord instead of a single note The event name will be the first note of the chord you pressed followed by the abbreviation Entering a chord made of notes with different velocity values You can make the upper or lower note of a chord for example louder than the remaining ones to let the most important stand out from the chord Here is how to insert a three note chord
419. ot benefit from servicing under the warranty This regulation is for the consumer s own protection Assistance and service for musicians For repairs contact your nearest Authorized KORG Service Cen ter For more information on KORG products and to find soft ware and accessories for your piano please contact your local Authorized KORG distributor For up to date information please point your web browser to www korgpa com KORG on the Internet KORG Inc www korg co jp KORG USA www korg com KORG UK www korg co uk KORG Canada www korgcanada com Copyright 2007 KORG Italy Spa Printed in China Keep your keyboard up to date Your Pa500 can be constantly updated as new versions of the operating system are released by Korg You can download the operating system from www korgpa com Please read the instructions supplied with the operating system The BALANCE slider When turning the instrument on please be assured the BALANCE slider is set to the cen ter This sets both Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 to their maximum level This will avoid you start a Song without hearing anything i la SEQ 1 I SEQ 2 Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Introduction Easy Mod sss acuit nana ba aa a 6 The Ste Play pace an detalla 22er eae ita diante 7 The Sone Play pagein detail arios rc eti stc 8 The Lyrics page Mastall cocino erc px err kee sd tonta 9 Front Panel 2 226 3ele e peii dada peus 10 Rear panel 0
420. otect switch Protected j Inserting exchanging cards Inserting a card Insert the card making sure that it is oriented correctly The gold contacts should be facing down and the angled corner to your right A card HA SD card slot SD card Removing a card Press the card inward and release it and the card will pop out Note Before you can use an SD card you must format it on the Pa500 The card may not work if it was formatted on another device Organizing your data into separate folders We suggest to organize your data into separate folders instead of saving many files into the root i e the main level of the card This allows for faster accesses to the card thus a quicker response of the Pa500 to your Media commands Media edit mode SD and MMC cards 229 Q y c Q re Q Q cc 230 MIDI What is MIDI What is MIDI Here is a brief overview of MIDI as related to the Pa500 If inter ested you may find more information on the general use of MIDI in the various specialized magazines and dedicated books In general MIDI stands for Musical Instruments Digital Interface This interface lets you connect two musical instruments or a com puter and various musical instruments From a software point of view MIDI is a protocol that describes messages for playing notes and controlling them It is sort of a grammar to let different instruments and computers spea
421. ottom and top of the keyboard range to delete Note These parameters are available only when the All or Note option is selected Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Pad Edit Delete All This function lets you quickly delete a single Chord Variation or the whole Pad PAD REC Pad Edit e Delete All cv e AM After setting the various parameters press Execute CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation to be deleted All All Chord Variations i e the whole Pad After deletion all parameters are set to the default sta tus CV1 CV6 Single Chord Variation Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Q Jg c Q he Q im Q cc Pad Edit Copy from Style Here you can copy a track from a Style and transform it into a Pad pattern Warning The Copy operation deletes all data at the target location overwrite PAD REC Pad Edit e From Style MEMES From Erev b var t To Cv pan From Track n Drum After setting the various parameters press Execute 142 Pad Record mode Pad Edit Copy from Pad Note If you copy too many events on the same tick the Too many events message appears and the copy operation 1s aborted Note When you copy over an existing Chord Variation Program Change data is not copied to leave the original Sounds unchanged for that Chord Variation
422. ou can control the proportional volume of all four Pads at the same time Please note that the status of the Pad s volume after having been modified with a pedal or slider is made current and will be saved in a Performance or STS by using the rel evant Write procedure 272 Assignable parameters List of Assignable Switch functions List of Assignable Switch functions The following functions can be assigned to the Assignable Switch No function assigned Ritardando Progressively increases the Tempo value Accelerando Progressively decreases the Tempo value Style Up Selects the next Style Style Down Selects the previous Style Perform Up Selects the next Performance Perform Down Selects the previous Performance FX A Mute FX B Mute FX C Mute FX D Mute FX All Mute Style Upper1 Mute Style Upper2 Mute Style Upper3 Mute Style Lower Mute Style Drum Mute merse wesse Buewe Mae wean BuewGMue sie Acc Mate BueA TSMue Mode Bass and 10 usually Drum SeosdededTak fo Bass amp Lower Backing When the Style is not playing and you are in Split mode you can play the Lower track with your left hand while the Bass still plays the chord root See Bass amp Lower Backing on page 100 Turns Quarter Tone on off Global Scale When the switch or footswitch is pressed the Global General Controls Scale is recalled in the display SubScale Preset 1 Same functions of the SC Preset buttons i
423. ouch the Song name to make the Song Select window appear allowing for selection of a different Song see Song Select win dow on page 78 To select a Song you can also press the SONG SELECT button in the SEQUENCER 1 section of the control panel Press SONG SELECT a second time to select a Song by dialing in its ID num ber see Selecting a Song by its ID number on page 79 boo E Current Time Signature Meter Measure number Current measure number Tempo Metronome tempo Select this parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the tempo As an alternative when a dif ferent parameter is selected or you are in a different page keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the tempo of the sequencer Locate measure When checked the measure shown by this parameter is a tem porary start point of the song instead of measure 1 When you press the q HOME button or use the lt lt REWIND button to go back to the beginning the Song returns to this point Metro Check this box to turn the metronome on during playback Sequencer operating mode 175 Sequencer Play Main page Tempo Tempo mode Use this menu to select the Tempo change mode Manual In this mode you can change the Tempo using the TEMPO VALUE dial The Song will be played back using the manually selected tempo Auto The Tempo recorded to the Song will be used Selected track info area This line lets you see t
424. ound to the Upper 1 track Sound parameters are considered selected effects and FX Send values are changed accord ing to the Sound s stored data Note If effects associated to the selected Sound are not compatible with effects already assigned to the CD FX block C and or D Send values on the other Keyboard tracks will be automatically set to zero For example assume a chorus effect 1s assigned to the D effect processor If the new Sound assigns a distortion effect to the D effect processor the D Send value on the Upper 2 Upper 3 and Lower tracks will be set to zero to avoid these tracks sound in the wrong way This way the Upper 1 track usually the most important one for solo playing will sound with the needed effect while the other Keyboard tracks will just sound dry Lock Style pane GLOBAL General Controls c i Style Preferences ia Style Tracks Volume ia Bass Inversion ia Manual Bass in Fin Mode ia Style Element i Style Tracks Play Mute x Transp Style Preferences When locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the value of parameters contained in the Style Preferences pages By default it is turned on See Preferences Style Preferences on page 99 and Preferences Style Play Setup on page 100 Bass Inversion When locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the Bass Inversion status Bass Inver sion can be assigned to the Assignable Swit
425. ow LCD screens along with an explanation of functions and operations All sound names parameter names and values are merely examples and may not always match the actual display you are working on Cleaning the display Use a soft cotton cloth to clean the screen Some materials such as paper towels could cause scratches and damage it Computer wipes are also suggested provided they are specifically designed for LCD screens Do not spray any liquids on the LCD screen directly Always apply the solution to your cloth first then clean the screen Trademarks Company names product names and names of formats etc are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective own ers Disclaimer The information contained in this manual have been carefully revised and checked through Due to our constant efforts to improve our products the specifications might differ to those in the manual KORG is not responsible for any eventual differ ences found between the specifications and the contents of the instruction manual the specifications being subject to change without prior notice Warranty KORG products are manufactured according to the strictest electrical and mechanical regulations that exist in various coun tries of the world These products are warranted by the KORG distributor only in each country Any KORG product that is not sold with the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty or with out a serial number cann
426. ower Kit RX1 Power Kit RX2 Dance Kit RX Room Kit 1 Room Kit 2 HipHop Kit 1 HipHop Kit 2 120 N o N N O 3 3 3 4 4 1 7 3 3 7 7 3 1 Jungle Kit 5 2 3 4 5 2 3 25 2 0 1 3 4 7 3 Analog Kit 23 1 gt 2 EJE o amp n oO o 23 2 3 5315 aloa 5 alaja a o o oio o a 2 ai aia Bl x 25 c A l oe P 2 2 UJ N afe f a eo f afe f Dm e pw m D o fo afe afo afe afe afe afe afe afo afe BC MI a a a a a a a lt lt lt lt Power Kit 1 Power Kit 2 House Kit 1 House Kit 2 House Kit 3 Electro Kit Elektro Kit 1 Elektro Kit 2 Pop Std Kit 1 Pop Std Kit 2 Room Kit GM Power Kit GM Electro Kit GM Brush Kit GM Orchestra Kit GM 5 Bdrum amp Sdrum Kit 5 Percussion Kit Latin Perc Kit Trinity Perc Kit i30 Perc Kit 6 Arabian Kit 1 Arabian Kit 2 120 0 117 ce ja wem apar af o IT 121 Concert BassDrum 121 Melodic Tom GM 117 Melodic Tom 2 117 2 17 ao apo CARE m9 wo wo wo BN HN 9 lt a NE NN 7 6 7 8 97 24 25 32 6 0 65 y Log Drum Reverse Tom Rhythm Box Tom Electric Drum Reverse Snare Reverse CymbalGM Reverse Cymbal 2 Dragon Gong L D gt j a n mI Y 4 4 S D Q 5 X mls n ala a 2 O O15 N Y 3 737 3 gt o es A O o 53 3 53 J g o 2 rt zs eiee c E Q ae c QISA E A 214 3 a ea ee E s Ee Bes G G Q 2 lt lt lt e sz O9 y 3 23
427. p Record mode on page 115 of the Style Record mode chapter After inserting a new event you may go back by pressing the Back button in the display This will delete the previ ously inserted event and set the step in edit again When finished recording press the Done button in the dis play A dialog box appears asking you to either cancel dis card or save the changes Exit From 5tep Record Step sequence has been changed Do you want to save it 1 Press SEQUENCER to enter Sequencer mode 2 Press the RECORD button and select the Multitrack Yes Sequencer option to enter the Multitrack Record mode prom the Pepe menu select me Overdub Step Recording If you press Cancel exit is canceled and you can continue or Overwrite Step Recording mode At this point the di amp no Tf h Noch t FE arch IU elaine ser editing If you choose No changes are not saved and the BUSDHNSCORPNIM PP pus Step Record window is closed If you choose Yes changes 3 The next event will be entered at the position shown by the are saved and the Step Record window is closed Pos indicator in the upper right corner of the display From the main page of the Multitrack Recording mode If you don t want to insert a note at this position insert a either select the Exit from Record command from the rest instead as shown in step 5 page menu or press the RECORD button to exit the To jump to the next measure filling the remaining beats RECUIC
428. p dialog box Write Global Sequencer Setup dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Global Song Setup item from the page menu Here you can save MIDI Setups see Midi Setup on page 196 that are saved to the Global file Write Global Sequencer Setup Write Global Sequencer Setup to memory Parameters saved in the Sequencer Setup area of the Global are marked with the GBL symbol through the user s manual Song Select window This window appears when you select the Load Song com mand from the page menu or press the SONG SELECT button in the SEQUENCER 1 sections on the control panel See Song Select window on page 78 for details Q y c Q re Q Q cc 198 Sequencer operating mode Save Song window Save Song window The recorded Song is contained in RAM and is lost when turn ing the instrument off The Song is also lost when you over write it in Record mode or if you confirm the warning message when switching to the Style Play or Song Play mode You must save to a card any Song you wish to preserve This window appears when you select the Save Song command from the page menu Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the main page of the Sequencer operating mode without saving the Song Directory AA CFO 1 Gawea Gnana Type Mame a SHOW Altamare Bak 30 07 96 17 44 Amare bella 56K H6 H3 H 11 87 Song path Tmomsusm
429. page Style Element Track Controls Sound Expression In this page you can assign a different Sound to each track of the selected Style Element Each Style Element can have different Sound after saving the new Style please don t forget to check the Original Style Sounds parameter in the Style Play mode see page 83 to let the Style select the Sound bypassing the Style Performance settings In this page you can also check and modify the Expression CC 11 value for each of the Style Element tracks This lets you reduce the relative level of a track in a single Style Element with out reducing the overall Volume of the Style This is a very useful control when you have different Sounds assigned to the same track in different Style Elements and the internal level of these Sounds must be different STYLE REC SE Track Controls E Yar 1 Lw Trk brum Standard Kit Rx3 EzDrum amp Perc 128 888 882 Esprescion uiu DRUH Ea P Eod When in this page press the corresponding button on the con trol panel to select a Style Element VARIATIONI ENDING3 To copy the settings of this page to another Style Element use the Copy Sound and Copy Expression commands from the page menu see Copy Sounds dialog box and Copy Expres sion dialog box starting from page 130 Selected Track Info area STYLE See Selected track info area on page 108 for detailed informa tion Sounds area STYLE See So
430. personal computer instead of pressing this button on the Pa500 Caveat Do not disconnect USB communication before the personal computer has really finished transferring files Sometimes the on screen indica tor tells the procedure has been completed BEFORE it is actually finished Disconnecting USB communication or discon necting the USB cable before data transfer has been completed may cause loss of data Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command Create Hew Folder Object s Info Device Info ow Ordered by Name Ordered by Type Ordered by Size Ordered by Date Ascending Descending Write Global Media Pref Protect Unprotect Create New Folder This command lets you create a new generic folder in the root of any device or inside any other generic folder You can t create a SET folder with this command since this type of folder is reserved to the Save operations and can be created with the New SET button in any Save page Create New Folder T NEWNAME By pressing the T Text Edit button you can open the Text yP 8 y p Edit window Enter the name then press OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window Rename Available only when an item is selected in a file list Use this function to change the name of an existing generic file or folder To
431. play Therefore you are still free of changing the value of CV Length before the measures exceeding its value are deleted see warning in CV Length Chord Variation Length below However if you press START STOP to begin recording the real Rec Length value is changed to the new one even if the display still shows the old value For example you may have CV Length 4 and Rec Length 4 If you set CV Length to 2 and press START STOP to begin recording Rec Length is still shown as 4 but it is in reality set to 2 and recording will cycle for just 2 measures After you press START STOP to stop recording Rec Length is updated to 2 and all measures after the second measure are deleted STYLE This parameter sets the total length up to 32 measures for the selected Chord Variation When playing a Style this will be the length of the accompaniment pattern when the chord corre sponding to the Chord Variation is recognized on the keyboard CV Length Chord Variation Length Warning If you reduce the Chord Variation Length after recording any measure after the selected length will be deleted Be very careful when setting the CV Length to a lower value after recording If it happens we suggest to exit from record without saving see Exit from Record on page 129 Metro Metronome This is where you can set the metronome Off No metronome click will be heard during record ing In any case a one bar precount will be p
432. play prior to pressing Save the name of the selected file will be automatically assigned to the Song In any of the above situations press the Ti Text Edit button to edit the Song name Warning If a file with the same name 1s already in the current directory a message will warn you If you confirm the existing file will be overwritten Select a file before saving only if you want to overwrite it 1 e in case you are saving changes to an existing file Empty measure at the beginning of the Standard MIDI File When saving a Song as an SMF an empty measure is automati cally inserted to the beginning of the Song This measure con tains various Song initialization parameters Play Mute status saved with the Song When saving a Song the Play Mute status is saved with the Song This status is preserved also when playing back the same Song in Song Play mode Master Transpose saved with the Song When saving a Song the Master Transpose value is saved with the Song Since this value is saved as System Exclusive data it is preserved also when playing back the Song in Song Play mode Hint Since the Master Transpose is a global parameter loading a Song with a non standard transposition may result in unwanted transposing when loading other Songs that do not contain their own transposition data To transpose a Song it 1s advisable to use the Transpose function in the Edit section of the Sequencer mode see Song Edit Transpose o
433. ple file selection on page 222 for information on how to select more files or folders to be erased at the same time o Jg c Q he Q Q cc 224 Media edit mode Format Format The Format function lets you initialize an SD Secure Digital or MMC MultiMedia memory card Format vValume Label KORG USER Please select an option and press Execute E Utility Warning When formatting a card all data it contains is lost for ever Volume Label Use this parameter to assign a name to the card to be formatted Press the T Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window Enter the name then press OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window Note When changing the name to a card containing midifiles used by the SongBook the links are broken We suggest to give the card the same name it had before formatting Execute button Press this button after setting all the options in this page to exe cute the Format command Format procedure Here is how to format a device 1 Inserta card into the card drive 2 Press the Execute button in the display to confirm format ting 3 The If you confirm all data in the media will be lost Are you sure message appears in the display Press Yes to con firm or No to cancel Utility This page includes a set of backup utilities Full Resource Backup C Full Resource Restore Please select an option and press Execute OS V
434. plit key board mode the Upper tracks transposition is left unchanged If Off when switching to the Full keyboard mode SPLIT LED turned off the Upper tracks Octave Transpose is automatically set to 0 When switching to the Split keyboard mode SPLIT LED turned on the Upper tracks Octave Transpose is automatically set to 1 Lock Control pane GLOBAL General Controls c ica Assignable Switch ica Spit Point ia Pad ia Lower ia Split Keyboard Mode Accompaniment Transp Assignable Switch Split Point Pad Lower n Inter Sustem ES face palette When locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the Assignable Switch assignment See Pad Switch Assignable page 98 Switch on When locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the split point See Split Point on page 86 When locked selecting a Style or SongBook entry will not change the Pad assignment See Pad Switch Pad on page 98 When this lock is closed the Lower track remains unchanged when a different Style Performance or STS is selected This is useful if for example you prefer to always play with the left hand muted and reserved only to playing chords for the arranger Hint If you want the same Lower settings to be used during all your shows save your preferred Lower settings to Performance 1 1 automatically selected on startup then close this lock and ch
435. preserve consistency through the data structure you cannot rename files and folders inside a SET folder Also you cannot change the 3 character extension of files and SET folders since they are used to identify the type of file or folder Rename Old name Canyon Mew name Canyon Press the Ti Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window Enter the new name then press OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window Media edit mode Page menu 227 Object s info Select this command to see the size of any selected file or folder Also the number of files and directories folders it contains are shown Selected Item s 1 Mame MyShow SET Size 692224 bytes Directory File Note The single file size is always shown to the right of the file name in any file list Type Mane RARE HOMEST K AR H5 HB8 H3 12 55 m Device Info Select this command to see various info on the selected device To select a different device use the Device pop up menu on the lower left corner of most Media pages Device Information Label Total size KORG USER 9 35 G bytes Free size 6 63 6 bytes Damaged size B bytes By pressing the T Text Edit button you can open the Text yP 8 y p Edit window Enter the name label of the selected device then press OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window Warning If you change the name of a card and it contains midi files used by some So
436. r STYLE PLAY to exit the menu and return to the main page To return to the main page you can also select the Main Page menu item When in an edit page press EXIT or the STYLE PLAY button to return to the main page of the Style Play operating mode STYLE PLAY Menu L Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages that may be selected by press ing the corresponding tab on the lower part of the display Edit page structure All edit pages share some basic elements Operating mode Edit section Page menu icon Ku EN STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 PGrand Piano E Piano 121 883 8 Selected l track info L Upper volume Link Parameters area Tabs Operating mode This indicates that the instrument is in Style Play mode Edit section This identifies the current edit section corresponding to one of the items of the edit menu see Edit menu on page 86 Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu see Page menu on page 101 Parameters area Each page contains various parameters Use the tabs to select one of the available pages For detailed information on the vari ous types of parameters see sections starting from page 87 Tabs Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section Mixer Tuning Volume Pan This page lets you set the volume and pan for each of the Key board or Style tracks Volume settings a
437. r down Lower scale diagram Use this scale to turn detuning on or off Applied detuning will depend on the programming set with the Upper scale diagram or recalled by selecting one of the SC Presets When a note is detuned a black dot appears in the correspond ing note of the diagram An LED turns on over the correspond ing key of the Quarter Tone SubScale Keypad in the control panel only available on some models Global edit mode General Controls Lock 203 General Controls Lock This page split in four panes that can be selected by means of the corresponding side tabs contains all the available locks sometimes grouped under just a single lock Locks prevent parameter values to be changed when loading data from a card or selecting a different Performance Style or STS Locks gt GBL All the available locks Lock them to prevent changes due to loading or selecting different elements These locks are also found in various other pages next to the locked parameter Hint To save the status of the various parameters as a fixed status for the Pa500 save all the parameters to Performance 1 of bank 1 automatically selected when turning on the instrument and save these locks to the Global Lock Tuning pane ica Master Transpose ica Style Perf M Transpose ica Sub Seale Quarter Tone ia STS SubScale Quarter Tone ia Auto Octave Master Transpose When locked master transpose
438. r recording parameters For more details see Record mode Multitrack Sequencer page on page 177 3 Be sure the Overdub or Overwrite recording options is selected see Rec mode Recording mode on page 177 4 Set the tempo There are two ways of changing tempo Keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the tempo Move the cursor to the Tempo parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change tempo 5 Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song Tracks 1 8 and Song Tracks 9 16 and assign the right Sound to each track see Sound bank s icon on page 175 6 Select the track to record Its status icon will automatically change to Record see Track status icons on page 178 7 Use the Locate measure parameter to enter a measure where you want to start recording 8 Press P ll PLAY STOP to start recording Depending on the Metro option you selected a 1 or 2 bars precount may play before the recording actually begins After precount play freely If you selected the Auto Punch recording mode the recording will begin only when reaching the Start point f you selected the Pedal Punch recording mode press the pedal when you want to begin recording Press it again to finish recording Note The Punch functions will not work on an empty Song At least one track must already be recorded 9 When finished recording press P M PLAY STOP to stop the sequencer
439. r the store where the equipment was purchased e When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over THE FCC REGULATION WARNING for U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Notice regarding disposal for EU only If this crossed out wheeled bin symbol is shown on the Xx product or in the operating manual you must dispose of the product in an appropriate
440. rack For example to delete a snare keep the D2 note corresponding to the snare pressed 1 Select a track 2 Press the Delete Note button and keep it pressed 3 Press START STOP to start the Style 4 When you reach the passage containing the note to be deleted play the note on the keyboard Keep it pressed up to the last note to be deleted 5 When finished release the Delete button and the note to be deleted and press START STOP again to stop the Style Note If the note is at the beginning of the pattern press the note before starting the Style Tracks volume status area Virtual sliders Press the track s area to select a track and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the value or touch and drag it in the dis play Track status icons STYLE Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status F Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard R Record status After starting recording the track will receive notes from the keyboard and the MIDI IN connector Track names Under the sliders a label for each track is shown Drum Acc5 Shown Style tracks Main page Record 2 Cue While in the main page press the Record 2 Cue tab to see this page Most parameters in this page are the same as in Main page Record 1 In addition here you can see and select Sounds for each Style track and the Cue mode for the Style Element BAUAXTIDIDENENOHO NN
441. rans pose Velocity or Delete pages you can listen to the selected Chord Variation Press START STOP to check how it works Press START STOP again to stop the playback When you are in the Sounds Expression Keyboard Range Chord Table Trigger Tension Delete All Copy Style Ele ment Controls or Style Control pages you can listen to the whole Pad Press START STOP and play some chords to do your tests Note In this mode the pattern is always played back in loop even if the Pad Type parameter is set to One Shot see page 142 Note While in Pad Record mode the Fingered 3 Chord Recogni tion mode is automatically selected Pad Record mode Exit by saving or deleting changes 133 Main page Record 1 The Main page of the Pad Record mode looks like a simplified version of the Main page of the Style Record mode with just a single track to be recorded and no Style Elements to be chosen The only addition is the Pad Sync parameter PAD RECORD Ue Pad Mew Pad Chord var RR Resolution b High Pad Sync i off Pad Track CY Length 2 Metro Lb off b Standard Kit GM E Drum amp Perc 120 600 000 MTT Type Lp Paratiet Delete Mate NTT Table Lp riri DD Guitar 1 Mode Please look at the User s Manual for more information on the various parameters Only general information and differences with the Style Record mode are described here Recording parameters area Chor
442. ransmits over the same channel pro grammed as Global in the Pa500 I li MIDI IN i il Mmmm If the master keyboard transmits over the Global channel of the Pa500 the split point and the status of the SPLIT button in the control panel will affect the notes received from the master key board Connections and settings To connect the master keyboard to the Pa500 follow this proce dure 1 Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the master keyboard to the MIDI IN connector of the Pa500 2 Program the master keyboard to transmit over the Global channel of the Pa500 see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 209 For information on the master keyboard programming see the master keyboard own user s manual 3 Select the MIDI Setup parameter You can do this by going to the MIDI MIDI Setup General Controls page of the Global mode or in the dedicated page of the Style Play Song Play or Sequencer mode see Midi Setup on page 100 Midi Setup on page 162 and Midi Setup on page 196 Note A different MIDI Setup may be selected for the Style Play Song Play and Sequencer modes The 1 Default MIDI Setup is automatically selected when entering the Sound Edit mode MIDI settings are therefore modified when switching to a different operating mode The
443. ransposes any pattern note that would otherwise play too high or too low in pitch com pared to the original acoustic instrument when transposed by the arranger This will result in a more natural sound for each accompaniment instrument For example the lower limit for a guitar is E2 If you play a chord under the E2 the transposed pattern could exceed this limit and sound unnatural A Bottom limit set to E2 for the guitar track will solve the problem Different Keyboard Range values can be set for each Style Ele ment STYLE REC SE Track Controls E Yar 1 Lw Trk Drum 128 888 882 t Standard Kit RX3 E Drum amp Pero Note The Keyboard Range 1s ignored while recording The selected track can play on the full range of the keyboard When in this page press the corresponding button on the con trol panel to select a Style Element VARIATIONI ENDING3 To copy the settings of this page to another Style Element use the Copy Keyboard Range command from the page menu see Copy Key Range dialog box on page 130 Style Record mode 125 Style Element Track Controls Keyboard Range Top Bottom STYLE Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range for the corresponding track of the current Style Element Volume area Use these controls to set the volume and status of each track See page 110 for more information Style Element Track Controls Noise Guitar The new Noise
444. rce file or folder is not copied The procedure will continue with the other files and folders Yes The file or folder is overwritten The procedure will continue with the other files and folders Yes to All The file or folder is overwritten Any following duplicate file or folders will be overwritten as well without this dialog box appearing again The procedure will continue with the other files and folders Media edit mode Erase 223 Erase The Erase function lets you erase files and folders from the card CARD or internal memory SSD 26 43 47 18 43 Ek RG USERT STARTUP FE Do pes f Dese With the Erase function you will be able to select the internal system memory SSD device and erase files from there You cannot however delete folders from the internal memory since they are used by the operating system Erase procedure 1 If erasing from a card insert a card into the card drive 2 If needed select a different device by using the Device pop up menu 3 If the file or folder you are looking for is inside another folder select this latter and press the Open button to open it Press the Close button to go back to the parent folder 4 Select the file or folder to erase 5 Press Erase to delete the selected item During erase a dialog box shows the progress of the opera tion Erase Progress File Mame LISERA1 5TY files DE Multiple file selection See Multi
445. rd The inserted note length will match the step length You may change the velocity and relative duration of the note by editing the Duration and Velocity parameters see page 131 To insert a rest just press the Rest button in the display Its length will match the step value To tie the note to be inserted to the previous one press the Tie button in the display A note will be inserted tied to the previous one with exactly the same name You don t need to play it on the keyboard again To insert a chord or a second voice see Chords and sec ond voices in Step Record mode below After inserting a new event you may go back by pressing the Back button in the display This will delete the previ ously inserted event and set the step in edit again When the end of the pattern is reached the End of Loop event is shown and the recording restarts from the 001 01 000 position Any note exceeding the pattern length inserted at its end will be reduced to fit the total length of the pattern At this point you may go on inserting new events in over dub mode the previously inserted events will not be deleted This is very useful when recording a drum or per cussion track where you may want to record the bass drum on a first cycle the snare drum on the second cycle and the hi hat and cymbals during the following cycles When finished recording press the Done button in the dis play to exit the Step Rec
446. rd USB cable press this button to enable file transfer In this case Pa500 is the B USB device called Device or Slave while the personal computer is the A USB device called Host or Master KORG USER a Disable The MEDIA LED will start blinking while the personal computer reads the card inserted in the Pa500 When finished this may take some time depending on the card size the icon of the card will appear among the other storage devices con nected to the computer RURAL Caveat Do not modify SET folders or you will no longer be able to use them on the Pa500 Only use the USB connection for backup purpose or to modify ordinary folders Note After starting the USB connection accessing Pa500 data from the computer may take some time depending on the size of the card and the data con tained in the card itself Press this button to disconnect the USB file trans fer Be careful to press it only when you are abso lutely sure data transfer has been completed Note USB connection 1s also automatically discon nected when disconnecting the USB communica tion on the personal computer side To disconnect USB communication on a PC you usually select the dedicated command by clicking on the USB device icon with the right mouse but ton On the Mac select the USB device icon then select the Eject command or drag it to the eject icon in the Dock Hint We suggest to disconnect USB connection from the
447. rd Variation on page 107 When you are in the Main Event Edit Quantize Trans pose Velocity or Delete pages you can listen to the selected Chord Variation Press START STOP to check how it works Press START STOP again to stop the playback When you are in the Sounds Expression Keyboard Range Chord Table Trigger Tension Delete All Copy Style Ele ment Controls or Style Control pages you can listen to the whole Style Press START STOP and play some chords to do your tests Select any Style Element using the control panel buttons VARIATION 1 4 INTRO 1 3 FILL 1 3 ENDING 1 3 Press START STOP again to stop the play back When you are in the Guitar Mode page you can listen to the pattern you are programming played in the selected Key Note While in Style mode the Fingered 3 Chord Recognition mode is automatically selected List of recorded events The Style Record mode filters out some events that may cause wrong operation of the Style Here are the recorded events and the most important filtered out events Control function Allowed Note On RX Noise On Pitch Bend Modulation Breath Expression CC 12 CC 13 Damper Hold 1 Filter Resonance Harmonic Content Low Pass Filter Cutoff Brightness CC 80 General Purpose 5 CC 81 General Purpose 6 CC 82 General Purpose 7 Note Some Control Change messages cannot be recorded directly by using Pa500 integrated controls All allowed co
448. re notes A full Major chord will be recognized even if only a single note is played Fingered 1 You must always play two or more notes for a chord to be recognized If you play just one note a unison will be played If you play a suspended chord a root 5th a suspended chord will be played The full chord will be recognized when you play three or more notes Fingered 2 You must always play three or more notes for a chord to be recognized This option is automati cally selected when the SPLIT LED is turned off Fingered 3 You can also compose a chord using a simplified chord playing technique One Finger f you play only one note a Major chord is rec ognized Play the root note plus a white key on the left for a 7th For example play C3 B2 for a C7 Play the root note plus a black key on the left for a Minor chord For example play C3 Bb2 for a C minor Play the root note plus a white and a black key on the left for a Minor 7th For example play C3 B2 Bb2 for a C min 7 This mode is an extension of the Fingered 2 add ing rootless and slashed chord recognition often used in Jazz fusion modern pop and light music Expert This type of chord recognition is very useful to play piano chords typical of jazz piano players You don t need to play the root note doubling the note already played by the bass track 99 Style Play operating mode Preferences Style Preferences PER
449. re the same as in the Vol ume panel of the main page Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to the Style tracks and vice versa STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano B Piano L Upper Yolume Link sr 121 885 888 mr UPPERS UPPER sors eS Grouped Style tracks Keyboard tracks STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano B Piano L Upper volume Link gt 121 885 888 Individual Style tracks Upper Volume Link gt GBLStv This parameter allows you to define if changing the volume for one of the Upper tracks proportionally changes also the other Upper tracks Note This parameter is the same you can find in the Preferences Style Play Setup page see page 100 On When changing volume to one of the Upper tracks volume for the other Upper tracks changes in proportion Off When changing volume to one of the Upper tracks only that track s volume is changed Other Upper tracks are left unchanged Style Play operating mode 87 Mixer Tuning Volume Pan Dry PERF gt PERF STS Use this checkbox to turn the dry direct track signal on or off On When checked the direct dry signal is sent to the output mixed with the FXs Out L R Off When unchecked the direct dry signal is removed from the audio output and only sent to the FXs The effected signal will still be panned in stereo FXs only according to the Pan value Out UR
450. reached a Dec command will select Variation 1 again To Var 4 Fill to Variation gt 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 automati cally selects one of the four available Style Varia tions at the end of the fill To Var 1 Fill Mode lock icon gt GBL This lock prevents the Fill Mode being changed when selecting a different Performance or Style This lock is reset when turning the instrument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 212 For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 203 Track status MPERF PERF Track play mute status Press these icons to change it Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Style Controls Keyboard Range On Off Wrap Around In this page you can program the Wrap Around point and turn on off the Keyboard Range included in each Style tracks C 128 086 034 STYLE PLAY Controls Trk Drum Jazz Kit RXZ B Drum amp Parc sassssss ACEI n LA ACCS ACCA ACCS Keyboard Range On Off gt PERF PERF9 This parameter is an on off switch for the Key Range parameter memorized into each Style Element track On The Keyboard Range is considered provided it has been programmed see Style Element Track Controls Keyboard Range on page 125 in Style Record mode When a track goes over the lower or higher Keyboard Range point i
451. red Use the Style controls to start or stop the Style Style Select section Style Elements Style Controls Selecting and playing Styles 45 Selecting and playing a Style Selecting and playing a Style 1 Press the Style area in the display The Style Select window appears Set of banks 1 8 corresponds to the top row of Note You carm oper Styles on the control panel 9 16 to the lower the Style Select window row also by pressing one of the buttons in the STYLE SELECT section This will E SELECT Guitar Ballad 1 let you jump directly to sank 1 8 se the desired Style bank O L M Beat 8 16 BEAT POP BALLAD BALLROOM ee FUNK amp SOUL JAZ O Guitar Ballad 1 RECUERDOS Pro 4 Gopi a Ms Funk P d Orleans 2 POURBOY zm Es RECUERDOS __ Sl Easy Beat 1 MES Beat Meter 4 4 L 5 The selected Style is highlighted Press a Style s name to select it Press one of the side tabs to select a different Style bank Press one of the lower
452. rmance dialog box on page 102 Note If you like some settings to be preserved even when choosing different Performances STSs and Styles turn on the desired locks to avoid changes to the selected parameters see General Controls Lock on page 203 Save these locks to the Global see Write Glo bal Global Setup dialog box on page 212 How Styles Performances and STSs are linked together Styles Performances and STSs are linked in many ways When the SINGLE TOUCH LED is steadily on or blinking selecting a Style also changes Keyboard tracks STS 1 is automat ically selected Performance settings are overridden When the STYLE CHANGE LED is on selecting a Performance also selects a Style the one whose number is memorized with the Performance Current track settings can be saved either in a Performance an STS or a Style Performance depending on the page menu com mand you select Style Play operating mode 81 Start up settings Main page Normal view This is the page you see after you turn the instrument on To access this page from another operating mode press the STYLE PLAY button To return to this page from one of the Style Play edit pages press the EXIT button Style area Page header Page menu icon STYLE PLAY at Easy Beat 1 Grand Piano u F nu 1 E Em Sequ 94 Key ues BA d os area ust tracks area no chord B ELE EES Perfor mance ACC
453. rol GMX HitBit and XF formats and the chord abbreviations of SMF in Solton M live Midisoft GMX and XF format Note The above trademarks are the property of their respective holders No endorsement is intended by inclusion in this list Standard MIDI Files usually have the MID or KAR filename extension The General MIDI standard Some years ago the musical instruments world felt a need for some further standardization Then the General MIDI Standard GM was born This extension of the basic MIDI sets new rules for compatibility between instruments A minimum of 16 MIDI channels was required A basic set of 128 Sounds correctly ordered was manda tory The Drum Kit had a standard order Channel 10 had to be devoted to the Drum Kit A most recent extension is the GM2 that further expands the Sounds database The Pa500 is soundwise compatible with the GM2 standard The Global channel Any channels with the Global option assigned see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 209 can simulate the Pa500 integrated keyboard When the Pa500 is connected to a master keyboard transmission should take place over the Global channel of the Pa500 The MIDI messages received over a Global channel and not over a standard channel are affected by the SPLIT button as well from the split point Therefore if the SPLIT button LED is lit up the notes that arrive to the Pa500 over this channel will be divided by the split point int
454. ronment overlaps the current operating mode Style Play Song Play Sequencer Sound Edit Storage devices and internal memory User accessible storage devices During a Media operation files are usually exchanged between a storage device SD or MMC card and the internal memory SSD Depending on the page you can access the following mass storage device types CARD Secure Digital SD or MultiMedia MMC mem ory card Internal SSD Flash ROM memory Only accessible when updating the Operating System and Musi cal Resources or exchanging Factory Sound Styles and Pads or erasing files In some pages a device can be selected by using the Device pop up menu shown in the lower left corner of most Media pages Device pop up menu Device name Selecting and deselecting files While a file list is shown in the display you can select any item by touching it The selected item is highlighted You can deselect all items in any of the following ways Touch an empty area in the file list if available Press the Device pop up icon and select the current device agaln File types The following tables describe all the file and folder types the Pa500 can manage Here are the files you can read or write with the Pa500 Peon meme 00 eC Odena other folders Backup file created with the Full Resource Backup function of the Media gt Utility page PKS Operating System and Musi
455. roove Quantize only works on Sequencer 1 Solo Track Select the track of the current Sequencer to be soloed and check this item You will hear only the selected track and the Solo warning will flash on the page header Uncheck this item to exit the Solo function The Solo functions works in a slightly different way depending on the selected track Keyboard track The selected Keyboard track is the only track you can hear when playing on the keyboard All other Keyboard tracks are muted Sequencer tracks are left in play status Song track The selected track is the only Song track you can hear All other Song tracks are muted Keyboard tracks are left in play status SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch one of the tracks to solo it Do the same on a soloed track to deactivate the Solo function Copy Paste FX You can copy a single or all four effects between Styles Perfor mances STSs and Songs To do this choose the Copy FX and Paste FX commands from the page menu of the Style Play Song Play or Sequencer modes To copy a single effect 1 Select the source Song Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the single effect you want to copy FX A FX B FX C or FX D or go to the Effects gt FX Select page to copy all four effects This may be useful if you want to copy two or three of the four effects into different Performances Styles or STSs 2 Choose the Copy FX comman
456. rt by Meter amp Sort by Name v Enable List Edit Export as text file Sort by Genre MASS M The gt ne VIG mitia SongBook 167 Book After you select this command the Num column appears GT 541 days Pop ET A day in Paradise Ballad ET A Felicidad Latin ET 4 gigolo Pop ETS A hard dav night Pop To see the Key column again select the Show Key now Song Numbers command from the page menu To select a SongBook entry by entering its number press the SONGBOOK button again while you are in any page of the SongBook mode The numeric keypad will appear allowing you to enter the number corresponding to the desired entry Selecting SongBook entries via MIDI SongBook entries can be selected via MIDI through the special Control channel by using the NRPN dedicated Control Change messages 99 MSB with value 2 and 98 LSB with value 64 See Selecting SongBook entries via MIDI on next page Setting the special Control MIDI channel First of all go to the Global gt MIDI gt Setup General Control page and select a MIDI Setup to be used when you will remotely select SongBook entries Then go to the Global gt MIDI gt Midi In Channel page to assign a MIDI channel to the special Control channel Assign the Con trol option to one of the sixteen available MIDI channels usu ally one of the higher numbered ones When done save this setting to the current MIDI Setup by choosing the
457. rum ae Orch Harp 1 Solo Slide Steel 8 Grv HipHop 3 EH Bass Slap 8 Piano Accomp 8 8 Gtr Steel Arp 1 8 Orch Harp 2 ES Solo Banjo EN Grv HipHop 4 EX Bass Digital EN Piano Accomp 9 EN Gtr Steel Arp 2 ES Orch Harp 3 ea Solo Violin Grv HipHop 5 Bass Synth Piano Arpeg 1 10 Gtr Steel Arp 3 Orch Harp 4 Solo Harpsi Grv HipHop 6 Bass DigiFilter1 Piano Arpeg 2 GtrSteel Arp 6 8 EG Orch Harp 5 Solo Harpsi 4 4 Grv Funk 1 Bass DigiFilter2 Piano Arp 1 ae Gtr Steel Mute 1 French Horns 1 Solo Gtr Funk Grv Funk 2 Bass DigiFilter3 Piano Arp 2 ae Gtr Steel Mute 2 French Horns 2 Solo Piano 1 Grv Techno 2 par o O 23 Pno GlissDwnBlak Gtr Nylon Arp 3 2x E Solo Guitar 1 E E A E A E E E A E HAHAHA mp m ES IES E ENS EC EEN m E S EC INN E IESO E EEN E IE A A A AA RA Factory data Pads 9 18 EE DI reser E ay Synth Seq 2 ulii 2 ICO CECI Dr iai 6 4 9mhses s Mmi Ss P Ls omnes s Wn 8 S T sms A Ens rp LEE a omnes epora TCP 5 3 Sminseas sumi 9 dP 10 simi ea 1010 flutaby2 A Pr ETE n atwre Rver up I 2 simi Por A nature JR 3 SynthPortam 2 13 Mewwmomem 9 RO va simi Porn 3 m precon at a 115 simi Porn 415 Mewmome a efm 1 mecemas 1 iP o S rfe o mecemanos pw S 18 SynthPadPanned 1 tocata 8 0 Ds Synth maserPad m A 8 20 SynthDarkPad m primavera 2m
458. s V String A II String B IV String D III String G Recording RX Noises Further on the upper three octaves of the 61 key keyboard are used to trigger RX Noises A T RX Noises Selecting a Capo Together with strumming types single strings and RX Noises you can choose a capo capotasto Note that this might prevent some single strings to sound depending on the composed chord You can always see with strings are playing and which are not as described in the Diagram section below Choosing a Key Chord The pattern is recorded in the key indicated by the Key Chord pair of parameters However this parameter is only considered during playback of the Intro 1 and Ending 1 Style Elements With Intro 1 and Ending 1 both Chord Variation 1 and 2 you can also enter a chord progression This is done with the lowest MIDI octave C 1 B 1 Chord types are inserted by using velocity as shown in the following table D Worms a Weormhfaneds 5 suspendedath fe suspended 7 major nn suspendan 8 Minor minors fo Minor Pad Record mode Pad Record procedure 137 Playing back the pattern When in Stye Play mode the recorded Guitar pattern is trans posed according to the chord recognized on the keyboard The way it is transposed depends on the programmed pattern with the chosen positions strumming mods etc Guitar mode parameters Here is a detailed description of
459. s Performances and Styles will be preserved Controlling the Volume Master Volume Use the MASTER VOLUME slider to control the MASTER overall volume of the instrument This slider con VOLUME trols the volume of the Pa500 sound going to the internal speakers the main L MONO and RIGHT OUTPUTS and the PHONES connector It does not control the volume of sound entering the INPUT connectors Note Begin with a moderate level then raise the MASTER VOLUME up Don t keep the volume at an uncomfortable level for too long Keyboard Style and Song Volume Use the BALANCE slider to control the relative vol ume of RealTime tracks RT keyboard Pad and Style Accompaniment tracks ACC drums percus sions bass and Song tracks SEQ BALANCE Note This slider does not work in Sequencer and Sound mode When in Style Play mode this slider balances between the Realtime keyboard tracks and the Accompaniment Style and Pad tracks Pitrigrirriy 3 e ecc When in Song Play mode this slider balance between the Realtime keyboard tracks and both Sequencer and Pad tracks The Sequencer s BALANCE slider The Sequencer s BALANCE slider sets the relative volume of the two onboard sequencers Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 BALANCE XI Move it fully left to set Sequencer 1 to the maximum level and Sequencer 2 to zero Move it fully right to set Sequencer 1 to zero and Sequencer 2
460. s chord Operating mode name Name of the current operating mode PERF STSS3 inj Master Transpose value in semitones This value can be changed using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel Master Transpose Note Transpose may be automatically changed when selecting a different Performance It may also be changed when loading a Standard MIDI File generated with an instrument of the Korg Pa series To avoid transposing lock the Master Transpose parameter in the Global see General Controls Lock on page 203 then write the Global to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 212 Recognized chord Displays the recognized chord when you play a chord on the keyboard If no chord abbreviation is shown it means the ACCOMP LED is turned off see page 11 Page menu icon Press the page menu icon to open the menu See Page menu on page 164 for more information er Songs area This is where Song names are shown together with parameters depending on the selected type of Song Sequencer 1 Sequencer 2 This is how a Song s area appears when a Standard MIDI File or Karaoke file has been selected Song type icon Song name Meter Current measure Tempo Seq 1 2 A different Song may be assigned to each of the two onboard sequencers Seq 1 and Seq 2 Each sequencer has its own parameters Song type icon Songs of different types can be assigned to the sequencers This
461. s rior 28 Non available grayed out parameters 28 o Po E souode sce entantosereaws 28 Quick Guide Turning the instrument on and listening to the demos 2 529 sns REESE e 30 T rnine the Instrumen on ud esed ua pte reyes 30 Turning the Easy Mode Ol oua ovens dese eurer EN 31 Playing Me demos escapo rro URS P UTR 22 Playing SOUNGS sexi kei chaine aw bx ow Ew 33 Selecting a Sound and playing it on the keyboard 23 Playing two or three Sounds at the same time 35 Playing different Sounds with your left and right hand Dr Changing the Split pO ersaytanues pre RE S PES E 38 Raising or lowering the Upper Octave vvesves es or n 39 Selecting and saving Performances 40 Selecting a Perlor manes torpedos de 40 Saving your settings to a Performance o oooooomomoo 41 Selecting and playing Styles 44 Selecting and playing a Style a oa outer ark ioa eee 45 TEMPO r 46 Intro Pill Variation Padine 445323 mos rarbecetm es 47 Sinple Touch Setines STS reescrito sees des 48 WWE Patatas told spore rada 49 Adjusting balance between the Style and the keyboard 49 Adjusting volume of each single track 50 Turning Style tracks on off secas sandia 51 Adding harmony notes to your right hand melody with the ENSEMBLE function servers cris 51 A 53 Delectus a Sono 10 Plat a thar ddnde drtctaardeen dior d een 53 Playing ba
462. s afores 4 raven cong wer a Esia E Tom tamena E fensi rero E CE 16 Barcer ar ormsa 0 eme wv fered 1e ormsins umAe E IO E CI E 18 vos pecas Ds ormsngiec 19 feme op fo ope 5 KeA afem m OT m ar BramsingHouser 21 Timbale fat m 22 prom mg Houses 22 Timbatetow Ja RA m B Wemm i E B m 24 brumsigHoweD 2a Wmbaenmz 2 2 m m TAS TS AS EP NNNM EMEN E o spom spree 5 5 S EAC E awez E E me ar CITI EEC E IN E Ea afomo m wuwe m 2 S EJ Bw 5 AO EJ ofpe 3 WmhmeT 3 3 EJ Y inma En mjwmkmes efi NJ wj w w N N N N N N N N Dle SiB o u IAIA RIS NS Sts UJ NI N N O W 09 N UJ 266 Factory data Pads u HIT Voice g HIT Blocks K HIT Misc amp SFX 1 u HIT Misc amp SFX 2 SEQ Drum 4 SEQ Percussion DEN CECI DON CLICS T jAwmue Rbe E TT NN a Secon FE CISCO EC GON EC EI E TEO 4 TN efenn HE okras FE feites E 1 ET S TN erro e esie e Hekoter 8 Drumerash ze 8 Percona proa fo pos S fet Pane S rumbos S Jfecconsestide pro w Bkormang i6 Boorcreak 15 toser un 15 oram Diso2 1 Pere Congar cone Yi fooorsem Yi aimes
463. s given in each Reference chapter gt SB The parameter can be saved to a SongBook entry Making a backup of the original data A backup copy of all original data can be found on our website www korgpa com You can freely download it in case you want to restore the Pa500 to its original status In case you customize your Musical Resources Sounds Perfor mances and Styles we suggest you make frequent backup copies of them to avoid accidental loss To backup the Factory Musical Resources Styles Programs see Full Resources Backup on page 224 Loading the Operating System Your Pa500 can be constantly updated as new versions of the operating system are released by Korg You can download the operating system from www korgpa com Please read the instructions supplied with the operating system on the site You can see which version of the operating systems is installed in your Pa500 by going to the Utility page of the Media mode see OS Version Number on page 225 Warning Do not install an OS other than the official OS supplied by Korg for the Pa500 Trying to install an OS created for different models may cause data loss and permanent damage to the instru ment Korg 1s not responsible for any damage caused by improper installation of the OS Loading the Musical Resources Should you need the original Musical Resources a copy of them can be downloaded from www korgpa com You may also hav
464. s ion ios a ess 100 a eouPeEPEREDTMQISRERLE STEPS 101 Write Performance dialog DOX 245x233 x oqeoue str RR 102 Write Single Touch Setting dialog DOX 41 459 etr RRRRR 102 Write Style Performance dialog DOX 0 44 ew tm em 103 Write Global Style Play Setup dialog box 103 Style Record mode 104 TS le SE UIDES os esencia coa ads PORE DPPLPPPES 104 Sle DODGE ESDUEE cacecce qe iode ood tis OR SERES 105 Entering the Style Record modes 43 vos xoa do ero virer 105 Exit by saving or deleting Chances 42e viec tr verbes 106 Listening to the Style while in Edit mode 4 593 cac 106 BISCO recorded GVOR S arenero E SSSPUIPUME 106 Mati pages Record lcodsoscnekePPiEEe REPE 107 Main page Record 2 C UE sesgo sod Viadeo e 110 Main pase Guitar Mode xe ones seris sns titri PR SY 111 SIS IS Record DBOSEO MES AA ri EEEa ERr EEIN 113 ECOL EDS BUG sae SUR ERES Ub ed aet EsUPAED TUER come nes 116 Edi Paro SUCH osque esie 9 aE RRT 116 Event Edit Event Edit S vdd br verior TROP US dO TAPER 117 Event Edit A devour erent IS Ra PRI E 119 Sile Editt Oud caes rper bred donde 119 Style Edit TEdDSDUSE unes to hoot bred r6 a VOR PEU eios 120 Sle Edie Velo esae dapibu buses donna 120 Style PUC rombo dudes porras donadas de 121 A A e Ae wedrouces 122 Sivle Pdi Delete Al seva capear eco ias 122 Style E ot CODY HOM SIVe ve euo ua xe e p oats ls 123 Pad Edit CODY bom Pad saesauauuie suere ete e nieder 124 Style Element Track
465. s page by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing the SONGBOOK button List header See List Header on page 166 Custom list List of files contained in the selected Custom List Use the scroll bar to browse through the list Scrollbar Use the scrollbar or the TEMPO VALUE dial to scroll the entries Commands List pop up menu Use this pop up menu to select one of the available lists Next Press this button to select the next entry in the list Hint You can assign this command to an Assignable Switch or Assignable Footswitch Select Press this button to confirm selection of the highlighted entry in the list After pressing this button the name of the selected entry appears in the left upper corner of the display N Hint This command is useful to browse through the list and select an entry different than the following one in the list 171 SongBook Custom List List Edit This page is only available after checking the Enable List Edit command in the page menu see page 173 Use this page to edit the available Custom Lists A Custom List is a set of SongBook entries created by selecting items from the Main List To add entries to a Custom List first create or select the list to be edited in this page Then go to the Book page select the entry to be added and press the Add to list button When finished add ing entries return to this page and edit the selected list Li
466. s parameter to select one of the six curves and to specify how the velocity will change over time Start Value 0 End Value 100 Curve 1 Curve 2 Curve 3 127 127 127 Velocity Velocity 1 1 1 Start End Start End Start End Value Value Value Value Value Value Curve 4 Curve 5 Curve 6 127 127 127 Velocity Velocity Velocity RANDOM i Start End Start End l Start End Value Value Value Value Value Value Start End Vel Value Only available in Advanced mode Velocity change at the start ing and ending ticks of the selected range 0 100 Velocity change in percentage Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Style Record mode 121 Style Edit Cut Track status icon Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Track names Under the buttons a label for each track is shown Style Edit Cut This function lets you quickly delete a selected measure or a series of measures from the selected Chord Variation All fol lowing events are moved back to replace the cut measure s STYLE REC Edit LCY Cut Measure E gt ari cv p ev Start 1 Length 1 After setting the various parameters press Execute E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Vari ation for editing Start First measure to be
467. s to bypass equalization for the corresponding track When bypassed equalization has no effect on the track but all parameters are preserved When the box is unchecked equalization is activated again with the original set tings Input Trim PERF PERF STS This knob allows you to limit the level of the signal passing through the equalizer Extreme equalization values can overload the audio circuits and lead to distortion This control lets you set equalization as desired and at the same time avoid overloading Play Mute icon PERF PERF STS Tracks play mute status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard 89 Style Play operating mode Mixer Tuning EQ Control Mixer Tuning Tuning This page is where you can set the octave transpose and fine tun ing for each track Plus you can program the Pitch Bend range for each track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to the Style tracks and vice versa STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning LCY Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 UPPER2 UPPER STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano B Piano aaa FERC a ACC ACCS ACCA PB Sensitivity PERF gt PERF STS These parameters show the Pitch Bend range for each track in semitones EA Maximum up down pitch bend range in semi tones 12 1 octave 0 No pitch bend allowed Octave Transpose PERF gt PERF STS This
468. s turned off see page 11 Page menu icon Press the page menu icon to open the menu See Page menu on page 101 for more information lr Style area This is where the Style name is shown together with its tempo and meter parameters Style name Current y Easy Beat 1 beat Style bank Current tempo Style Element s meter Measure number Style name PERF Currently selected Style Press the Style name to open the Style Select window As an alternative use the STYLE SELECT section on the control panel Style bank gt PERF Bank the current Style belongs to Style Element meter Meter of the current Style Element Measure number While the Style is playing an M appears and it shows the cur rent measure number of the current Style Element playing While it is in stop an T appears and it shows the total number of measures of the current Style Element Current beat Beat number of the current measure that is currently playing Current tempo PERF gt PERFSY Metronome tempo from 30 to 250 Select this parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the tempo As an alternative you don t need to select this parameter just keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the tempo To recall the Tempo stored in the current Style press the EXIT and MENU buttons at the same time Note Tempo may change while a Style Element 1s playing Each Style Element may contain Tempo Change data
469. se the TEMPO VALUE dial to scroll Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the arrows to jump to the previous or next alphabetical section You can touch one of the labels on top of the list to reorder the list items accordingly By pressing the label again the order of the files switches between ascending and descending A list can contain several different types of files or folders File folder type MID Standard MIDI File SMF g Karaoke file KAR E a iai E Jukebox file JBX EM B A file or folder may be in one of the following status See Pro tect and Unprotect on page 227 for information on how to change the file status File folder status a o Hd Unprotected Page menu icon Press the page menu icon to open the menu See Song Select page menu on page 79 for more information Storage device Use this pop up menu to re select the card and deselect every thing CARD SD Secure Digital or MMC MultiMedia card The actual name label of the device may appear within square brackets Song path This line shows the current device path Open Opens the selected folder item whose icon looks like this one m Close Closes the current folder returning to the parent upper folder Sync P Synchronized Path Press this button to see the Song assigned to the selected Sequencer This is useful to quickly return to it after you have
470. see Local Control On on page 208 is also automatically set to On to allow playing on the keyboard When finished recording press START STOP to stop the arranger Select a different track and go on recording the full Chord Variation Note You can select a different track only when the arranger 1s not running When finished recording the Chord Variation select a dif ferent Chord Variation or Style Element to go on recording the full Style When finished recording the new Style select the Write Style command from the page menu to open the Write Style dialog box see Write Style dialog box on page 129 and save it to memory To exit the Style Record mode without saving any change select the Exit from Record command from the page menu or press the RECORD button Step Record procedure 1 While in the main page of the Style Record mode select the Overdub Step Recording command from the page menu to enter the Overdub Step Record mode The Pos parameter shows the current position If you do not want to insert a note or chord at the current position insert a rest instead as shown in step 4 To jump to the next measure filling the remaining beats with rests press the Next M button in the display To change the step value use the Step Time values area in the display Insert a note rest or chord at the current position To insert a single note just play it on the keyboa
471. sert effects like Rotary Distortion EQ just set the Dry parameter to Off see Dry above There are four Internal FX processors in Sequencer mode grouped in two pairs AB and CD Usually you will create Songs with only a pair preferably AB but you can create Songs using both FX pairs We suggest to use A and C as reverb processors and B and D as modulating effect processors Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 and 9 16 and vice versa SEQUENCER Hixer Tuning LCY Trk S1TrBi k Grand Piano 121 883 888 oa THz IE E TH5 THE Tar SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Trk S1TrBi P Grand Piano B Piana 121 883 888 la eren e ener em 3 Tih LiE Til Tid Sequencer operating mode 187 Mixer Tuning FX Send FX Groups SONG Use this pop up menu to select one of the two FX groups AB or CD Send level SONG 0 127 Level of the track direct signal sent to the effect processor Play Mute icon SONG Tracks play mute status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Q y c Q re Q Q cc 188 Sequencer operating mode Mixer Tuning EQ Gain Mixer Tuning EQ Gain In this page you can set the three band equalization EQ for each individual track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 and 9 16 and vice versa SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Trk S1TrBi P Grand Piano B Piana 121
472. set Track Press this button to reset all changes to Sound parameters in the selected track Reset All Tracks Press this button to reset all changes to Sound parameters in all tracks Play Mute icon PERF PERF STS Track s play mute status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard How to adjust sound parameters for a sin gle Sound Here is a quick example of the use of the Easy Sound Edit func tion 1 If needed while in this page press TRACK SELECT to see Keyboard tracks 2 Press the Select button in the display above the Upper 1 track 3 While playing on the keyboard to hear the Sound select the Cutoff knob and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to turn its value completely off You ll notice how the filter progressively cuts out high fre quencies making the sound darker and mellower 4 Press the Reset Track button in the display to recall the original Cutoff value Keyboard Ensemble Keyboard Control This page lets you enable disable the Damper and Expression pedals plus the Joystick for each of the Keyboard tracks STYLE PLAY Keyboard Ensemble Jazz Kit RXZ B Drum amp Perc 128 888 83d Joystick X o Trk Drum Joystick Y o Expression OWER UPPERS UPPERS UPPER DR PERC RCCOMP BASS LOWER UPF Kbd 2 En ey Morini M elocitu Damper PERF STS On When you press the Damper pedal and release the keys the track s sound is kept
473. setting memo o LOWER UPPERS UPPER UP Pram rot Pi P2 FER1 EN rized in the selected Perfor Volume Ey mance 3 Play the keyboard STYLE CHANGE Settings memorized in the selected Performance have D ibo If ia O been selected Sounds effects and other settings have LED o the C been recalled STYLE CHANGE button is turned on selecting a Performance may auto matically select a differ ent Style and its settings Sounds and effects set tings for the Style tracks Saving your settings to a Performance All the control panel settings plus the Keyboard track settings and selected effects can be saved to a single Performance to be quickly recalled at a later time Cp Note To open the Write Performance dia Page menu icon log box you can press the SHIFT one of the PERFORMANCE buttons 1 Press the page menu icon to open the page menu Easy Mode Page menu 42 Selecting and saving Performances Saving your settings to a Performance 2 Select the Write Performance command to open the Write Performance dialog box Write Performance Name Stereo Grand Write Performance To Performance B1 Stereo Grand JG Easy Mode After choosing the Write Performance menu item the Write Performance dia log box appears 3 If you like you may assign a new name to the Performance Write Performance PL IRALA C b UC b6JUC U JU TET Gs a LES IE ER
474. settings are saved with Genre T paled Tempo 86 Currently selected resource If a the entry Artist Meter Info I 4 4 different Style SMF or KAR file This parameter is mandatory when creat T Nnm has been selected it may differ ing a new entry by pressing the New Song gt A from the saved resource button P Write Current Resource Canyon When checked current Keyboard track y write STS SE P Sterse Srami ioi pOH One OF Me tour aTe available settings are saved to one of the four STSs CUTAN Current Sig bcn peda Lcd available for each entry You can also exit Hew Song boa eche the SongBook edit Keyboard tracks then pook y return to the SongBook and save the new ale Dni Ae A Edit settings to a different STS Press the Text Edit icon to edit the STS name Press New Song to Choose All Current Style STS to save the four create a new entry STSs recalled by the latest selected Style with the new entry 5 When done with this page press the tab to go to the Book Edit 2 page Name of the Style SMF or KAR file memorized with the entry provided Write Current Resource is selected when saving it Entry s name Nec T eU ERU AI A SONGBOOK T B eno choros A Hame 1 BBaiorni di noi Resource GT Standard 16 Beat Text file linked to the entry synchro Start EE Linked TXT This text will be seen as Lyrics in the display See Lyrics as text files associated to a Song Memory Unchanged Reset Browse Book
475. sing the STOP button on the display or by exiting the Demo mode by pressing any MODE but ton The music stand A music stand comes standard with your Pa500 Insert its legs into the two dedicated holes on the rear panel amp o v O ES i 24 Glossary of Terms Sound Glossary of Terms Before you begin take a few moments to familiarize yourself with the names and terms we will be using to talk about the var ious elements of the Pa500 In this section you will find a brief description of various key elements of the Pa500 A professional arranger Pa keyboard uses different terminology than a traditional synthesizer or workstation By familiarizing yourself with the names and func tions in this section you will get a better understanding of how all the different parts of the Pa500 work together to create a real istic musical performance This will also help you to get the most out of the rest of the User s Manual Sound A Sound is the most basic unit of an Arranger Keyboard perfor mance A Sound is basically a playable instrument timbre plano bass sax guitar that can be edited saved recalled and assigned to any track An individual Sound can be played on the keyboard in the Sound mode In the Style Play mode or Sequencer mode Sounds may be freely assigned to Sequencer tracks Style tracks or Keyboard tracks Style U Q The Style is the heart of a professional arranger keybo
476. single Style a time 7 Go to the Style Play mode and select one of the loaded Style Adjust the Tempo then select the Write Current Style Performance to write changes to the Style Perfor mance Press OK twice to confirm 8 Due to the difference in Sounds you will probably want to make some adjustments to the old Styles once they are loaded in Pa500 changing the Sound Volume Pan Tempo Drum Mapping Wrap Around 9 To make the Sound assignment to the Style tracks effective be sure the Original Style Sounds parameter is not checked see page 83 10 Save the Style Performance again Select the Write Current Style Performance to write changes to the Style Perfor mance Press OK to confirm Save In this page you can save User data from the internal memory SSD to a card You can save single files banks or all the User files of the internal memory 26 83 87 18 43 KORG USERT STRRTUP Note While in this page only data allowed for saving are shown All other files are hidden Here are the various types of files contained in the internal memory The file folder and will create on type the target device All All the User data in A SET folder memory Style The USER 01 02 Styles A STYLE folder inside a SET folder Sound The USER Sounds and A SOUNDS folder Drum Kits inside a SET folder The USER Pads A PAD folder inside the SET folder Perform Per The Performances
477. slider The virtual slider in the display shows the track s vol ume To change the volume touch the slider and use 1858 the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the value or touch and drag it in the display This value is not saved with the Pad and is only used to test the Pad s volume during editing or recording Track status icons Status of the track Press this icon to change the status a Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard R Record status After starting recording the track will receive notes from the keyboard and the MIDI IN connector Key Chord area Key Chord PAD This parameter pair allows you to define the track s original key and chord type for the current Chord Variation When playing the pattern back this chord will be played back exactly as it was recorded without any NTT processing see below NTT Area NTT Type Table PAD NTTs Note Transposition Tables are the sophisticated algo rithms that allow Korg arrangers to convert recognized chords into musical patterns The Note Transposition Table NTT determines how the arranger will transpose pattern notes when a chord is recognized that does not exactly match the original chord of a Chord Variation For example if you only recorded a Chord Variation for the CMaj chord when a CMaj7 is recog nized on the keyboard the arranger must transpose some notes to create the missing 7th Note These parameters cannot b
478. ssing on the key board after the note has been struck It usually activates vibrato or other sound parameters Pitch Bend PB You can generate this message acting on the joystick X direction The pitch is translated up or down Program Change PC When you select a Sound a Program Change message is generated on the channel Use this message together with Control Change 00 and 32 to remotely select Pa500 data from a sequencer or a master keyboard Control Change CC This is a wide array of messages con trolling most of the instrument parameters Some examples e CC00 or Bank Select MSB and CC32 or Bank Select LSB This message pair is used to select a Sound Bank Together with the Program Change message they are used to select a Sound CCOI or Modulation This is the equivalent of pressing up the joystick A vibrato effect is usually triggered on CCO07 or Master Volume Use this controller to set the channel s volume e CCIO or Pan This one sets the channel s position on the stereo front CC11 or Expression Use this controller to set the relative volume of tracks with the maximum value matching the current setting of the CC07 control CC64 or Damper Pedal Use this controller to simulate the Damper pedal Tempo Tempo is a global MIDI message that is not tied to a particular channel Each Song includes Tempo data Lyrics Lyrics are non standard MIDI events made to display
479. st Name SONGBOOK T 8 f List Hame Pop no chord B Type Hame Genre i gigolo ET Long train going Pop Gr Mr Duke Pop GT I want your hand Pop Custom list Scrollbar ET Vry superstitious Pop ET Senza donne Pop sj Commands Custom L Lyrics List STS List Name Name of the selected list To select a Custom List go to the Cus tom List page and use the List pop up menu Custom list List of songs contained in the selected Custom List Use the scrollbar to browse through the list Scrollbar Use the scrollbar or the TEMPO VALUE dial to scroll the entries Commands Move Use these buttons to move the selected song entry up or down in the list Del Song Press this button to delete the selected song entry from the list New List Press this button to create a new empty Custom List Note The maximum number of Custom Lists in a SongBook file is 256 lists Del List Press this button to delete the current list o Jg c Q he Q Q cc 172 SongBook Lyrics STS Write Press this button to save changes to the selected Custom List Write List New List Name Pap Renamer Overwrite Pop C New List To assign a different name to the selected list press the T Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window Select an option to save the edited Custom List Select Rename Overwrite to overwrite an existing list optionally changing its n
480. st measure Immediate current measure The Style Element enters immediately and begins from the current measure Next measure first measure The Style Element enters at the beginning of the next measure and begins from the first measure Style Record mode Main page Guitar Mode Main page Guitar Mode While in the main page and a Guitar track has been selected press the Guitar Mode tab to see this page This is where you can access Guitar Mode programming STYLE RECORD ELA Stule Easy Beat 1 Element Ly var Rec Length 4 Tempo J 94 Chord Yar cv1 Cv Length 4 Meter 4 4 Resolution e High M Emm li Key Chord Key gt C Chordi Maj Record Record METE 1 Cue Mode Note To access this page a Guitar track must first be selected see Track Type on page 126 Otherwise the Guitar Mode tab will remain grey not selectable Note When programming a Guitar track from an external sequencer you must be sure the Guitar tracks is associated to the right channel Go to the Global gt MIDI gt MIDI IN Channels page and assign the corresponding Style track usually Accl Acc5 to the same channel of the Guitar track on the external sequencer Then go to the Style Record gt Style Track Controls gt Type Ten sion Trigger page and set the track as a track of type Gtr see Track Type on page 126 Guitar Mode allows to easily create realistic rhyt
481. sually you will record all chord and Style Element changes during the first take and record Keyboard tracks and Pads during the second take 1 Press the RECORD button to enter Record again When the Song Record Mode Select dialog box appears select Backing Sequence Quick Record again 2 If you are recording just one of the grouped tracks set the track to be preserved to the Play mode ML Rec Mode a 3 Repeat the recording process and press the lll PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER 1 section to stop recording and to return to the main page of the Sequencer mode 4 While in the main page of the Sequencer mode press the gt E PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER 1 section to listen to the recorded Song Again the Backing Sequence Song has been converted to an ordinary Song Saving a Song to a card After recording a Song that you like it is a good idea to save it to a card to avoid losing it when the instrument is turned off 1 Insert a card into the card drive 2 While in the main page of the Sequencer mode press the page menu icon to open the page menu Write Glabal Seq Setup Load Song Delete Current Track Save Song sola Track Undo Overdub Step Recording Overwrite Step Recording Exit from Record 74 Recording a new Song Saving a Song to a card 3 Select the Save song command to open the Save Song window ETT a C ETE ET write Global Seg Setup C CLUB 15 06 07 15 42 Load
482. sustained Off The Damper pedal is not active on any track set to this status Joystick X PERF STS This enables disables the left right movement of the Joystick Pitch Bend and sometimes a Sound parameter s control for Pitch Bend settings see Mixer Tuning Tuning on page 89 Joystick Y PERF STS This enables disables the front rear movement of the Joystick Y Modulation and sometimes a different Sound parameter s control Y Various controls or non active Expression PPERF STS This parameter allows you to switch the Expression control on off on each individual Keyboard track The Expression control is a relative level control always subtracted from the Volume value of the track As an example imagine you have a Piano sound assigned to Upper 1 and a Strings sound assigned to Upper 2 If you turn the Expression switch on on Upper 2 and off on Upper 1 you can use a continuous pedal to control only the Strings volume while the Piano remains unchanged To program a pedal or Assignable Slider to act as an Expression control see Controllers Pedal Switch Slider on page 206 You can only assign this function to a volume type pedal not to a switch type one Assign the KB Expression option to the pedal or Assignable Slider then select Write Global Global Setup from the page menu to save the setting to the Global Play Mute icon PERF STS Tracks play mute status Mute Mute status The
483. t on page 94 Parameters PERF STS Note Song track values edited in this page are not saved and are only intended for realtime use Keyboard Ensemble Keyboard Control These parameters let you set parameters for the Keyboard tracks See Keyboard Ensemble Keyboard Control on page 95 Parameters PERF STS Keyboard Ensemble Key Velocity Range These parameters let you select a note and velocity range for the Keyboard tracks See Keyboard Ensemble Key Velocity Range on page 95 Parameters gt PERF STS Keyboard Ensemble Ensemble See Keyboard Ensemble Ensemble on page 96 Parameters PERF STS Pad Switch Pad See Pad Switch Pad on page 98 Parameters PERF STS Pad Switch Assignable Switch See Pad Switch Assignable Switch on page 98 Parameters gt PERF STS Jukebox Editor The Jukebox function lets you play a list of Songs 127 max at the simple touch of a button You can play a Jukebox file by assigning it to Sequencer 1 after having selected it in the Song Select page just as if it was an ordinary Song see Jukebox panel on page 152 SONG PLAY SEQ1 JukeBox Editor al KORG USERT My Show JES Type Hum Mame 1 Canyon MID E 2 ALI DORO MID 3 Pinball MID 4 AMOREBEL MID Ed Del Alt Song number d In this page you can create edit and save a Jukebox file A Juke box list can contain Standard MIDI Files
484. t 3 lt lt O 2 et A e 9 O gt gt zh 2 o O v u 5 O v o a DE z E D o D o a 5 E m D gt 2 Ke lt o o e D r a D 5 lt Q a NJ Appendix 246 Factory data Sounds Bank order Bank Bass pomes mr Fingersescm m p 5 ws T Per 8 ajja EE ES 3 3 ua ua un un m m D 2 lt lt A ct 2 2 po po gt ct Y m 5 a gt ve 5 o w e A to U 0 a Y UU O c Uu Es D O a D Uu n D 00 un Un n Es o O A A o x x a 2 3 7 3 ww aaa EAEE Ems s m3 Finger Bass 3 Bass amp Ride 1 Ac Bass Buzz Slap Bass 3 Slap Bass 4 More mid Bass Slap Bass 5 Dyna Slap Bass Dyna Bass Thumb Bass Bass Mute ynth Bass 4 Stick Bass Stein Bass v o S o n o o elem v a 7 m al Na o x o o 2 u u w a vlz v v nu gt l gt lo 2 zl ala S 31 2 5 899 SS S m alala 5 2 SISI ojala 3 25 9 9 an 9 9 25 S lt A 5 alalalals 2 5 ala aAloiaiz zalial amp AILALAX o o o 9 ae re ee oOololrl Alael lxAlololelea OiI Sg OSgi dun olol lal la w KR Oo o o SIS5S S olg o D a S o 2 l o 9 ojo 2 o 2 2 0 0lou 2 2 0 Sis5ilo w ojoj o igg w A gt aol ol al ajale cz o S amp D n a 9 RIPE em mm eem j o 2 SA Pee mx ee olgiz a P gt a la ee rm m 5 m un un 5 mi go m m m o zm lm wuw wuwl m t mjav D w al olllsju lF7j o O u ow wI go d ee e cw wl ilo a mw n ult un O
485. t MSB LSB 1 2 6 38 Modulations Data Entry MSB Data Entry LSB 7 11 Volume Expression 10 91 93 Panpot A C FX Send B D FX Send Control Change 64 66 67 Damper Sostenuto Soft 65 5 Portamento On Off Portamento Time 71 72 73 Harmonic Content EG time Release Attack 74 75 Brightness Decay Time 76 77 78 98 99 Vibrato Rate Depth Delay NRPN LSB MSB O O O O O O O O O O O O DO O O O O O O O O O O O O O 100 101 RPN LSB MSB 120 121 X O All sounds off Reset all controllers Program O 0 127 O 0 127 Change Add dede 0 127 ee A 2 Song Position Song Select Tune System Clock Real Time Commands Local On Off X E Nox All Notes Off X O 123 127 Messages Active Sense O O Reset X a 1 Sent and received when MIDI Filters In and Out are set to Off in Global mode 2 Sound parameters Selection of SongBook entries 3 LSB MSB 00 00 Pitch Bend range 01 00 Fine Tune 02 00 Coarse Tune 4 Includes Inquiry and Master Volume messages FX settings Quarter Tone settings GM Mode On 5 Transmitted only when the Clock Send parameter Global mode is set to on Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 0MNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No 276 Recognized chords Recognized chords The following pages show the most important chords recognized by the Pa500 when the selected Chord Recognition mode is Fingered 2 see Chord Recog
486. t is shown in white 13K z5 Ha H3 19 This command is the same as directly touching the Date label above the file list Ascending Descending Use this command to switch between the ascending Numbers A Z and descending Z A Numbers order This is the same as directly touching the white label above the file list Write Global Media Preference Select this command to open the Write Global Media Prefer ences dialog box and save settings made in the Preferences page see Preferences on page 225 Write Global Media Preferences Write Global Media Preferences to memory Parameters saved in the Media Preferences area of the Global are marked with the gt GBL symbol through the user s manual SD and MMC cards You can use an SD or MMC card to save or load data to and from the Pa500 s internal memory Note Before you can use the SD MMC card you must format 1t on the Pa500 Don t use your computer or digital camera to format initialize a card you plan to use with the Pa500 If the card was formatted on a different device it may not work correctly with the Pa500 Note The SD MMC card is not included It must be purchased separately Note The Pa500 supports SD cards with a power supply voltage of 2 7 3 6V and capacities of 16 MB 2 GB and SD card with ID SD and MMC card handling Do not remove the card from the drive while the Pa500 is read ing or saving data The SD MMC card
487. t copy single files or folders from inside a SET folder 1 Inserta card into the card drive 2 Select the folder containing the file or folder you wish to copy If it is contained in another folder press the Open button to open it Press Close to go back to the previous hierarchic level 3 Press Open to open the folder containing the file or folder to be copied 4 Select the file or folder to be copied then press Copy To to confirm its selection 5 Select the target folder Press Open to open a folder or Close to close it 6 Once the target is selected press Copy If a file or folder with the same name of the source data already exists at the target location the Overwrite dialog box will appear see Overwriting existing files or folders below Multiple file selection While in the Copy and Erase pages of the Media mode you can select several files or folders at the same time before executing the operation Files or folders can be selected consecutively i e in a row or discontinuously i e with other files or folders in the middle To choose either to select files in a consecutive or discontinue way use the Mode button on the right of the page command buttons to choose an option for the SHIFT button Choose this option to select files or folders con secutively 1 e in a row Choose this option to select files or folders dis continuously i e with other files or folders in the
488. t is automati cally transposed to stay in the programmed range Off No Keyboard Range used o Jg c Q he Q Q cc 98 Style Play operating mode Pad Switch Pad Wrap Around PERF PERF9 The wrap around point is the highest register limit for the back ing track The accompaniment patterns will be transposed according to the detected chord If the chord is too high the Style tracks might play in a register that is too high and there fore unnatural If however it reaches the wrap around point it will be automatically transposed an octave lower The wrap around point can be individually set for each track in semitone steps up to a maximum of 12 semitones relative to the chord root set in Style Record mode see Key Chord on page 108 It is advisable to set different Wrap Around points for each track to avoid all tracks jump to a different octave at the same time ren Maximum transposition in semitones of the track referred to the original key of the Style pat term Play Mute icon PERF gt PERF Y Track s play mute status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Pad Switch Pad This page lets you select a different sound for each of the four PAD buttons STYLE PLAY Pad Assign Switch LCY Pad Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad d t China Prtindchimes 1 pb Rain Stick Tamb Att 1 volume volume 118 Volume 116 Volume 118 P
489. tch 2 X 15 Watt digital amplification USB 1 1 Full Speed Device port to connect a personal computer to your Pa500 This port can be used for file transfer and for MIDI connection without the need of a dedicated MIDI interface for the PC Live Performing Pa500 has been carefully designed to be used live The realtime word has its full meaning in this instrument Performances allow the instant selection of all the tracks on the keyboard and a suitable Style STSs allow an instant selection of the keyboard tracks Styles are the realtime backing companions for your real time playing Songs can be mixed in realtime the SongBook is the quick way to select a song from a sophisticated music data base Easy Mode If you are the kind of musician that prefers to play more than deal with technical matters you can use the Pa500 in Easy Mode and forget all its most powerful features and let them out of your way amp o v O ES i 20 Welcome Useful links Useful links Your preferred Korg dealer not only carries this keyboard but also a whole bunch of hardware and software accessories You should ask him for more Sounds Styles and other useful music materials Each Korg distributor can give you useful information Just give them a call for additional services In the English speaking world here are the relevant addresses USA KORG USA 316 South Service Road Melville N
490. tch Shifter 117 St PitchShift BPM 118 Rotary SpeakerOD 119 L C R Long Delay 120 St Cross Long Dly 121 Hold Delay 122 LCR BPM Long Dly 123 St BPM Long Dly 124 Early Reflections IA Factory data 269 MIDI Setup MIDI Setup a a 3 wm wm sur sw we see 3 wm um sus ss we so sees a dee ee sun see dem soe p see 3 pus o s ss ous xw Eae pp e e ELEME m UJ A A N A A N N T gt UJ N N E UJ A A N N T gt UJ uo in gt md UJ Normal Normal TONA IG IS 270 Assignable parameters List of Footswitch functions Assignable parameters List of Footswitch functions The following functions can be assigned to a footswitch No function assigned Q Style Start Stop Play Stop Seq1 Play Stop Seq2 Pause Seq1 Same functions of the control panel but Pause Seq2 tons with the same name Synchro Start Synchro Stop Tap Tempo Reset Tempo Lock Intro 1 Intro 2 Intro 3 Count In Ending 1 Ending 2 Fill 1 Same functions of the control panel but Fill 2 tons with the same name Fill 3 Break Variation 1 Variation 2 Variation 3 Variation 4 Variation Up Selects the next Variation Variation Down Selects the previous Variation Fade In Out Same functions of the control panel but Memory tons with the same name Bass Inversion Same fun
491. te parameter When selecting this option a transpo sition value appears 24 24 semitones to the original note Brass Typical Brass section harmonization Reed Typical Reed section harmonization Trill When two notes are played on the keyboard this option trills them If three or more notes are played only the last two are trilled You can set the trill speed by using the Tempo parameter see below Repeat The played note is repeated in sync with the Tempo parameter see below When playing a chord only the last note is repeated Echo As the Repeat option but with the repeated notes fading away after the time set with the Feedback parameter see below AutoSplitl If more than a single Upper track is in play the Upper 1 track plays the melody in mono while the other Upper tracks play the chord notes If only the Upper 1 track is in play it plays poly phonically all the chord notes AutoSplit2 Similar to AutoSplitl but the Upper 1 track always plays the uppermost note Note Velocity PERF STS This parameter sets the velocity difference between the right hand melody and the added harmonization notes 10 0 Subtracted velocity value Tempo PERF STS Note This parameter only appears when the Trill Repeat or Echo options are selected Note value for the Trill Repeat or Echo Ensemble options This is in sync with the Metronome Tempo Feedback PERF STS Note This parameter on
492. ted STSs are still available when switching to Song Play mode from Style play mode to let you select a dif ferent configuration of Keyboard tracks while listening to the Songs D Note STSs are very similar to Performances but they are fine tuned to the Style they are 2 3 4 1 Press one of the four STS buttons under the display SINGLE TOUCH SETTING 2 Play the keyboard Settings memorized in the selected STS have been selected Sounds effects and other settings have been D Hint You may see recalled 3 Try all the other STSs and see how settings change with each of them the name of the four available STSs for the current Style by pressing the STS Name tab Selecting and playing Styles 49 The Pads When the STYLE CHANGE LED is turned on each Style can assign different sounds or patterns to the four PADS These sounds or patterns can be played along with the Keyboard and Style tracks 1 Press one of the four PADS PAD STOP cann C 2 If the selected PAD triggers an endless sound or pattern i e an applause or a guitar arpeggio pressing STOP will stop that sound PAD STOP nooo al 3 Select a different Style and see how the sounds or patterns assigned to the PADS change You can even press more Pads at once and play two or more sounds or patterns at the same time Pressing STOP stops them all at the same time Keeping STOP pressed and pressing one of
493. ted Style are also saved Note Only the SMF or KAR file assigned to Sequencer 1 will be saved in the SongBook entry However when recalling the entry the Song will be assigned to either Sequencer depending on which one is currently free and not in play When unchecked no new resource will be saved with the entry The original resource associated with the entry will be preserved when pressing Write When pressing New Song to create a new blank entry this parameter is automatically checked and cannot be modified A reference to the associated resource will be saved with the new entry Resource Name gt SB Name of the currently selected Style or Standard MIDI File It may differ from the name of the resource already saved in the entry shown on top of the page see Resource above You can select a different resource by just using the STYLE SELECT section or the SEQI SONG SELECT button on the control panel to select a different Style or Standard MIDI File As an alternative you can exit to the Style Play or Song Play mode and select resources from there Then press the SONG BOOK button to return to the Book Edit page SongBook 169 Book Edit 1 When you press Write a link to the selected resource s is saved with the entry provided Write Current Resource is selected when saving The resource s will be recalled when you selected the entry it is associated to Write STS gt SB When saving a SongBo
494. ter to select from six types of curve and specify how the velocity will change over time Start End Vel Value Only available in Advanced mode Velocity change at the start ing and ending ticks of the selected range Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to be modified Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to be modified Advanced When this checkbox is checked the Intensity Curve Start Velocity Value and End Velocity Value parameters can be edited Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Pad Edit Cut This function lets you quickly delete a selected measure or a series of measures from the selected Chord Variation All fol lowing events are moved back to replace the cut measure s PAD REC Pad Edit Lw Cut Measure C p evt Start 1 Length 1 After setting the various parameters press Execute CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing Start First measure to be cut Length Number of measures to be cut Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Pad Edit Delete This page is where you can delete MIDI events out of the Pad This function does not remove measures from the pattern To remove a whole measure use the Cut function see Pad Edit Cut on pa
495. text together with the music Pa500 can read many of the available Lyrics format on the market What is MIDI Over USB You can let the Pa500 communicate MIDI data with a computer using the USB port instead of the MIDI ports This way you can connect your Pa500 to a personal computer without the need of a dedicated MIDI interface Most Pa500 MIDI features can be used on a Windows XP Vista or Mac OS X computer with no need of special software Howev er for full and easy use of all MIDI features we suggest you to in stall the KORG USB MIDI Driver a special software that you can find in the CD that comes with your Pa500 Relevant instruc tions come with the software itself See Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver on page 278 Standard MIDI Files Midifiles or Standard MIDI Files a k a SMF are a practical way of exchanging songs between different instruments and computers Pa500 uses the SMF format as its default song for mat so reading a song from a computer or saving a song that a computer software can read is not a problem at all The Pa500 sequencers are compatible with the SMF in format 0 all data in one track it is the most common format and 1 multitrack It can read the SMF in Song Play mode and mod ify save them in Sequencer mode It can save a song in SMF 0 format in the Sequencer mode When in Song Play mode the Pa500 can also display SMF lyrics in Solton M Live Midisoft Tunel1000 Edi
496. the Song to a card Q y c Q re Q Q cc 1 86 Sequencer operating mode Edit menu Edit menu From any page press the MENU button to open the Sequencer edit menu This menu gives access to the various Sequencer edit sections When in the menu select an edit section or press EXIT to exit the menu When in an edit page press EXIT or the SEQUENCER button to go back to the main page of the Sequencer operating mode SEQUENCER Menu L Effects Track Controls Tuning Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages that may be selected by press ing the corresponding tab on the lower part of the display Edit page structure All edit pages share some basic elements Operating mode Edit section Page menu icon SS SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Trk S1TrB1 P Grand Piano E Piano Selected track info Parameters area PUTES Pan i Tabs Operating mode This indicates that the instrument is in Sequencer mode Edit section This identifies the current edit section corresponding to one of the items of the edit menu see Edit menu on page 186 Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu see Page menu on page 196 Parameters area Each page contains various parameters Use the tabs to select one of the pages For detailed information on the various types of parameters see sections starting from page 186 Tabs Use tabs to sel
497. the parameters of the Guitar Mode page Key Chord STYLE This parameter pair allows you to define the track s original key and chord type This parameter works in a different way when compared to the other tracks While with other tracks this is always the reference key used for NTT transposition with Guitar tracks there is a difference whether you are recording a Chord Variation contained in an Intro or Ending Style Element or a different Chord Variation With most Chord Variations this chord will be used only for listening during recording During playback in Style Play mode the chord will follow chord recognition With Intro and Ending Chord Variations 1 and 2 this chord will be used as the reference key for the chord pro gression Capo 0 I X gt STYLE A capo from the Italian fcapotasto head of fingerboard is a movable bar attached to the fingerboard of the guitar to uni formly raise the pitch of all the strings Its use makes the strings shorter therefore changing the timbre and position of the chords but not its shape 0 Open string no capo IX Position of the capo over the fingerboard 1 e T corresponds to the first fret II to the second one and so on Diagram The diagram shows how a chord would be composed on the fin gerboard Here is the meaning of the various symbols Black dot Fingered string i e played note White dot Fifth playing on the D 2 key X No
498. ting an entry the corresponding Style SMF or KAR file will be recalled together with the relevant operating mode Style Play or Song Play Up to four STSs will also be recalled Any TXT file associated with the entry can be seen in the Lyrics STS page The selected Style SMF or KAR file is shown in the higher part of the screen 62 The SongBook Displaying Artist or Genre Displaying Artist or Genre For space matter either the Genre or Artist column can be seen in the display You cannot see both at the same time 1 Press the page menu icon to open the page menu dl Show Artist now Genre Sari ing Reine Show Song Number new Key Sort by Key Ascending Descending Sort by Tempo Sort by Tupe Sort by Meter Sort by Name Enable List Edit Sort by Genre Export as text file Aen omit EC EA 2 Choose Show Artist now Genre to switch from Genre to Artist in the List view The Artist column will be shown Name Genre Ro Y Mame Artist n 3 Open the page menu again and choose the Show Genre now Artist item The Genre column will be shown again sd Name irtist Ro Name Genre DR Sorting entries You can change the order entries are shown in the display 1 Press the page menu icon to open the page menu D BEEN wm Show Artist now Genre heridu pMunber Choose whether the list Show Song Number now Key Sort by Key Sort by Tempo Sort b
499. tion Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Track status icon Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard Track names Under the buttons a label for each track is shown Copying to a Chord Variation of a different length You can copy a Chord Variation to a different one of a different length Just keep in mind the following If the source length is a divider of the target length the source Chord Variation will be multiplied to fit the target Chord Variation For example if the source is 4 measures long and the target 8 measures the source will be copied two times If the source length is not a divider of the target length the source Chord Variation will be copied for as many mea sures as can fit the target Chord Variation For example if the source is 6 measures long and the target 8 measures Q Jg c Q L Q Q cc 124 Style Record mode Pad Edit Copy from Pad the source will be copied once then the first 2 measures will be copied to fit the remaining 2 measures 1 2 3 4 5 6 O y y ifl2 s 4 5 e 1 2 Note Avoid copying to a Chord Variation with a different meter for example a 4 4 Chord Variation onto a 3 4 one Pad Edit Copy from Pad Here you can copy a Chord Variation from a Pad Furthermore you can copy a whole Pad Warning The C
500. tious Pop 2 Select a Custom List to be edited To edit an existing list press the Custom List tab to open the Custom List page and select one of the available Custom Lists To create a new list press the List Edit tab to open the List Edit page and press the New List button to create a new blank list 3 Press the Book tab to open the Book page and see the full database Use the various sorting searching and filtering options seen above to find the entries you are looking for Press the Add to List button when the desired entry has been selected SONGBOOK T 8 no chord A Use the scroll bar to see all Songs in the list Keep SHIFT GT 6 1 days Fop ETS A day in Paradise Ballad pressen eng taug the Up Down arrow GU A Felicidad Latin to scroll to the next SongBook list GT A gigolo Pap previous alphabetic 72 A hard day night Pop section As an alter native you can use Press this check the DIAL box to turn the view filter on if any Press this button to edit Adds the highlighted entry to the the view filter Custom List 68 The SongBook Creating a Custom List 4 When finished adding entries to the Custom List press the List Edit tab to go to the List Edit page and use the various commands to edit the list SONGBOOK LE anao chord B M ist Hame Pop Scrollbar Type Hame Genre el gigolo ETS Long train going Pop ETS Mr Duke Pop ET I want your hand Pop List name Select an entry
501. to Sequencer 1 amp 2 rranspose Applies to Midi In Mates Position Scale and Transpose Position gt Post KB Pre Scale Transp Contral Hint When playing the keyboard while a Song is running 1f you want to play the keyboard in C while seeing the original chords in the display set to Off the Transpose applies to Style and Kbd tracks parameter and check the Transpose applies to Sequencer 1 2 parameter Transpose Control Transpose applies to Style and Kbd tracks gt GBL Use this parameter to turn the Master Transpose on or off an define the way it is applied to Style and Keyboard tracks Off No Master Transpose is applied to Style and Key board tracks In Sync When you press either the TRANSPOSE p or El buttons the new transpose setting will not take effect until the first beat of the next measure is reached In Realtime When you press either the TRANSPOSE p or El buttons the new transpose setting will occur when the next note is played for both the Style and Keyboard tracks individually The next key or chord you press will sound with the new transpose setting applied Note that if you play a Keyboard track prior to a new chord the Keyboard track will play in the new key as the Style will continue to play in the old key until a new chord is entered Transpose applies to Sequencer 1 2 gt GBL This flag lets you turn the Master Transpose on or off for the two onboard Sequencers
502. to a different value you can t go back to the original value This rather uncommon zero length value may be found in the drum and percussion tracks of Songs made in Backing Sequence mode Track Use this pop up menu to select the track to edit Track 1 16 One of the ordinary tracks of the Song These tracks contains musical data like notes and con trollers Master This is a special track containing Tempo changes Meter changes Scale and Transpose data and the effect parameters Scrollbar Use the scrollbar to browse the event through the list You can also scroll by using the SHIFT DIAL combination 191 Sequencer operating mode Event Edit Event Edit Go Catch This is a dual function command While the sequencer is not running it works as a Go to Mea sure command Press it to open the Go to Measure dialog box When in this dialog box select a target measure and press OK The first event available in the target measure will be selected While the sequencer is running it works as a Catch Locator command Press it to show the event that is currently playing Insert Press the Insert button in the display to insert a new event at the current shown Position The default values are Type Note Pitch CA Velocity 100 Length 192 Note You can t insert new events in an empty non recorded Song To insert an event you must first insert some empty measures by using the Insert Measure function
503. to assign the sub scale to the various tracks before accessing the Record mode Effects FX Select This page allows you to select effects to be assigned to the four Internal FX processors A D SEQUENCER Effects LCY A B FX Group FE B Lr ZE Stereo Chorus Fs Amount 38 FH C Ly 72 Reverb SmoothHall Fa Amount zB Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again Save the Song to per manently change the effects FX A D SONG Effects assigned to the corresponding effect processors Usually A and C are reverbs while B and D are modulating effects cho rus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD FX Amount SONG Volume of the effect that is added to the dry uneffected signal BtoA DtoC SONG Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect or of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect Mod Track Modulating Track SONG Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modulate an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller Q Jg c Q L Q Q cc 190 Sequencer operating mode Effects FX A D Effects FX A D These pages contain the editing parameters for the four effect processors Here is an example of the F
504. ton to go back to the parent folder 3 Select the SET folder containing the data you wish to load and press Open to open the SET folder A list of Reference 216 Media edit mode Load User data appears Global Performance SongBook Sounds Style GLOBAL PAD PERFORM SOUND STYLE Select the folder containing the type of data you are looking for and press Load to confirm your selection Note Data loaded from a card and data already in memory are merged For example if there is data in all two USER Style banks in memory USERO1 USERO2 and there is only the USEROI Style bank on a card the USEROI bank is over written while the USERO2 bank is left unchanged As a result you will have a STYLE folder in memory contain ing the USEROI bank you just loaded and the old USERO2 bank Loading a single bank You can load a single bank of User data User Sounds User Styles Performances with a single operation A bank corre sponds to a STYLE SELECT or PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT button 1 4 5 Insert a card into the card drive Its content will appear in the display If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder select this latter and press the Open button to open it Press the Close button to go back to the parent folder Select the SET folder containing the data you wish to load and press Open to open the SET folder A list of User data appears
505. ts contained in the Master track First value Second value Tempo change Master Volume value One of the available pre Root note for the set Scales selected Scale UScale User Scale Altered note Note alteration D Type Tempo Volume Meter Scale QT Quarter Tone Altered note Note alteration 0 50 QT Clear Quarter Tone Clearing Reset of all Quarter Tone QT changes One of the four available Effect number FX processors Feedback Send B gt A or Feedback send D C level a Meter changes can t be edited or inserted separately from a mea sure To insert a Meter change use the Insert function in the Edit sec tion and insert a series of measures with the new meter Existing data can then be copied or entered to these measures b To edit User Scale and Quarter Tone settings select the first value then select the scale s degree to edit Edit the second value to change the tuning of the selected note of the scale C When selecting a different effect number during this edit default settings will be assigned to this event FXType FXSend To edit the event Type and Values select the parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change their value In case of numeric values you can also press them twice to open the numeric keypad Length Length of the selected Note event The value format is the same as the Position value Edit it in the same way Note If you change a length of 000 00 000
506. ttern Recording overview Recording a Guitar track is unlike the other tracks where you play the exact notes of a melody line With Guitar tracks you play the keys corresponding to the strumming modes or play an arpeggio by using the keys corresponding to the six strings and the special keys corresponding to the root and fifth notes The following sections describe the various control keys Recording strumming types The lowest octave of the 61 key keyboard is dedicated to select ing a strumming type By pressing these keys you play fast strumming samples MMM Full Down Slow Mute Full Up Mute Up Mute 4 Strings Full Down Mute N Full Down NS Up 4 Strings Full Down Full Up Down 4 Strings Down Mute 4 Strings Slow Full Down Mute Body Full Up Slow Recording single strings The second octave of the 61 key keyboard is dedicated to select ing a single string or more than one for playing arpeggios or power chords You can either play a free arpeggio with the six guitar chords assigned to the C A keys or play one of the faster sampled arpeggios on the higher keys The root note is always available on the C key while the fifth note is always assigned to the D key with them you can always play the lowest notes of an arpeggio This octave also includes an all mute key F mH All Mute Fifth Power Chord Root Full Down Up N ee VI String E String e Down Up 4 String
507. ttons together to reset the Master Transpose to zero Note The Master Transpose has no effect on tracks set to Drum mode and even if set in a different status on the Drum and Per cussion tracks See Track Controls Mode on page 92 and Track Controls Mode on page 159 b Lowers the Master Transpose in steps of a semi tone 4 Raises the Master Transpose in steps of a semi tone SHIFT You can jump to the Global gt Transpose Control page by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing one of the TRANSPOSE buttons Music stand holes A music stand comes standard with your Pa500 Insert its legs into these two dedicated holes Q STANDBY ON switch Use this switch to turn the instrument on or off On The instrument is turned on Standby Q CARD DRIVE The instrument is turned off Use this drive to read and write data from Secure Digital SD or MultiMedia MMC cards Data are managed in the Media mode Note Do not remove a card while it is being used Note The card inserted in this drive can be read by a personal computer by connecting it to the Pa500 via the USB port See USB on page 226 a USB connector USB Type B Slave Device connector USB 1 1 compliant Full Speed Use it to connect the Pa500 to a personal computer and transfer data to from a card inserted in the card drive of the Pa500 See CARD Connection on page 226 for more informa tion Rear panel 17 Rear pane
508. u can play a single Sound with your left hand in addition to playing up to three Sounds with your right hand 1 Press the SPLIT button on the control panel to turn its LED on and split the keyboard into Lower left hand and Upper right hand parts WU If the Lower track is muted press Analog Strings 2 its MITE icon to make it disap EACEKIHG UGI pear from this area 3 Play the keyboard i AS D Hint You can select a Note how the keyboard is split into two parts each playing dif f iran Sou different Sound for the Lower part by follow ing the same procedure used for the Upper 1 track See page 33 Lower Upper Grand Piano um t Dark Pad 1 a MUTE t Strings Ens 2 GM MUTE EDN G o t Analog Strings Z 1 4 Return to the full keyboard playing mode by pressing the SPLIT button on the control panel to turn its LED off SPLIT O d A 1 gt mi pan 38 Playing Sounds Changing the split point 5 Play the keyboard Note how the keyboard once again plays the Upper tracks for the entire length of the keyboard Upper r Grand Piano um P Dark Pad 388 c
509. uch Setting STS1 is auto matically selected The Keyboard sounds and effects will change along with the Style sounds and effects Pad sounds will change too Variation STS Link function activated This func tion makes each Variation recall the correspond ing STS when selected For example select Variation 2 and STS 2 will be automatically recalled select Variation 3 and STS 3 will be automatically recalled Flashing Off When you select a different Style or the same again the Style sounds and effects will change as well as Pad sounds The Keyboard sounds and effects will not change 9 SEQUENCER 1 TRANSPORT CONTROLS Pa500 is equipped with two sequencers Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 each with its own set of transport controls The Sequencer 1 group is also used for the Sequencer mode lt lt and gt gt Rewind and Fast Forward commands If you use them while the Song is in play they make it scroll back or forward When pressed once these buttons move the Song to the previous or following measure When kept pressed they make the Song scrolling continu ously until you release them In Sequencer mode if you set a Locate Measure other than 1 the Song goes back up to that mea sure see Locate measure on page 175 In Jukebox mode Sequencer 1 keep the SHIFT button pressed and press these buttons to scroll to the previous or next Song in the Jukebox list see Jukebox Editor on page 160 q HOM
510. uences The sequences will play up to the end Then they will stop or continue repeating depending on their One Shot Loop status see Pad Type on page 142 You can stop all sequences or just some of them by pressing the STOP button of the PAD section Press STOP to stop all sequences at once Keep STOP pressed and press one or more of the PAD buttons to stop the corresponding sequence s Note Melodic harmonic sequences are automatically stopped when selecting Intro 1 or one of the Endings On the contrary rhythmic sequences will continue playing Note Pads share polyphony voices with the other tracks so avoid using too many of them together with a dense Style or Song arrangement About Pad synchronization In Style Play mode Pads are sync d to the Styles tempo In Song Play mode they are sync d to the latest Sequencer you set to play For example assume you pressed SEQ2 PLAY when pressing one of the PAD buttons it will play in sync with Sequencer 2 About Pads and the Sequencers Play command When you press one of the PLAY buttons to start the corresponding Sequencer all Pads will stop playing SHIFT You can jump to the Style Play gt Pad Assignable Switch page by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing one of the PAD buttons 9 SINGLE TOUCH This button turns the Single Touch and Variation STS Link functions on or off On When a different Style or the same again is selected a Single To
511. um Selected Chord Variation Selected track Selected Style Element Selected track Name of the track in edit Use the Track pop up menu to select one of the Style tracks SE CV Style Element Chord Variation Selected Style Element and Chord Variation This parameter cannot be edited To select a different Style Element and Chord Variation press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Style Record mode see Main page Record 1 on page 107 Event list Use the Event list to see all events contained in the selected track in the selected Style Element Use the scrollbar to browse through the events You can also scroll by using the SHIFT DIAL combination Touch the event to be selected Selected events are highlighted and can be heard Style Record mode 117 Event Edit Event Edit Position Position of the event expressed in the form aaa bb ccc aaa is the measure bb is the beat e ccc is the tick each quarter beat 384 ticks You can edit this parameter to move the event to a different posi tion You can edit a position in either of the following ways a select the parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to change the value or b select the parameter then touch it again the numeric key pad will appear Enter the new position by dialing in the three parts of the number separated by a dot Zeroes at the beginning can be omitted as well as the least important parts of
512. um Family Yolume 0 ori r3 Hat bore e El 6 zl E Reset Track Reset All Tracks Drum Volume Drum families MPERF PERF sTs Kick Kick drums volume o Snare Snare drums volume Tom Toms volume g HiHat Hi Hat volume E Cymbal Ride Crash and other cymbals volume Perc 1 Low pitched percussions volume Perc 2 High pitched percussions volume EFX Special effects volume Select Use these buttons to select the track to edit The button corre sponding to the selected track turns black Reset Track Press this button to reset all changes to percussive instrument volumes in the selected track Reset All Tracks Press this button to reset all changes to percussive instrument volumes in all tracks 94 Style Play operating mode Track Controls Easy Edit Play Mute icon gt PERF PERF STS Track s play mute status Mute Mute status The track cannot be heard Play status The track can be heard How to adjust volume for a single Drum Family Here is a quick example of the use of the Drum Volume func tion 1 While in this page press TRACK SELECT to see individual Style tracks 2 Press the Select button in the display above the Drum track 3 Press START STOP to let the Style go 4 While listening to the Style select the Cymb knob and use the TEMPO VALUE dial to turn the volume completely off You ll notice how all cymbals stops sounding 5 Press the Reset Track button
513. ument instead of the equal tuning Beating may occur at the extreme pitch when the sound is used in conjunction with other sounds 0 GrandPiano L 1 GrandPiano_R 2 MI Piano 3 E GrandPiano 4 E Piano FM 1 5 E Piano FM 1LP 6 E PPiano FM 2 7 E Piano Dyno Soft 8 E Piano Dyno SoftLP 9 E Piano Stage Hard 10 E Piano Stage HardLP 11 E Piano Wurly Soft 12 E Piano Wurly Hard 13 E Piano Pad 1 14 E Piano Pad 2 15 Clavi 16 Harpsichord 17 Gospel Organ Slow L 18 Gospel Organ Slow R 19 Gospel Organ Fast L 20 Gospel Organ Fast R 21 E Organ Perc 1 22 E Organ Perc 2 23 E Organ Perc 3 24 E Organ Perc 4 25 M1 Organl 26 M1 Organ2 27 Organl 28 Organ2 29 Organ2LP 30 Organ3 Jazz 31 BX3 amp Perc 3rd 32 E Organ Vox 33 E Organ Soft 34 E Organ Full 35 E Organ Dist 36 Rotary Organ 1 37 Rotary Organ 1LP 38 Rotary Organ 2 39 Super BX3 40 Super BX3LP 41 PipeFlute L 42 Pipe Flute R Pipe Positive Pipe Mixture Pipe Full 1 L Pipe Full 1 R Pipe Full 2 Kalimba Music Box Music BoxLP Marimba MarimbaLP Xylophone Vibraphone VibraphoneLP Celesta CelestaLP Glockenspiel GlockenspielLP Tubular Bell Log Drum Steel Drum Hard Steel Drum HardLP Gamelan FM Bell Flute Flute Frull Voice Flute Jazz Flute Piccolo Pan Flute Shakuhachi Shakuhachi Atk Bottle Recorder Ocarina Clarinet M1 DoubleReed Oboe English Horn Bassoon Baritone Sax mf Baritone Sax f 110 111 112 11
514. ument off will delete the Song from memory Save your Song to a card to avoid losing it Warning The Song is also lost when switching from Sequencer to Style Play or Song Play mode without previously saving the Song to a card Undo When selecting this command the latest operation is canceled and data are reverted to the previous situation Overdub Step Recording Only available in Record mode Select this command to enter Overdub Step Record mode This recording mode lets you enter events one at a time adding events to the existing events See Record mode Step Record page on page 179 Overwrite Step Recording Only available in Record mode Select this command to enter Overwrite Step Record mode This recording mode lets you enter events one at a time overwriting all existing events See Record mode Step Record page on page 179 Delete Song Select this command to delete the Song and create a new blank Song Delete Current Track Select this command to delete the track currently selected in the Track area see Track volume status area on page 178 Solo Track Select the track to be soloed and check this item You will hear only the selected track and the Solo warning will flash on the page header Uncheck this item to exit the Solo function SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch one of the tracks to solo it Do the same on a soloed track to deactivate the Solo function Copy Paste
515. unds The following windows are shown in the various operating modes whenever you try to select a Sound Performance Style or Song Sound Select window Press the Sound area whereas it appears in the display or one of the SOUND SELECT buttons on the control panel provided the SOUND SELECT LED is lit to open the Sound Select window Use the SOUND SELECT buttons to go directly to the selected bank Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the previous page without selecting any Sound Side tabs banks _ Bank sets Classic Piano Honky Tonk GM 121 804 640 121 600 003 Bright Piano GH Harpsi KeyOff Rz 121 888 581 121 883 885 Piano amp Strings 121 807 840 BEA SS A MN icir i l Sounds If more than four pages are available the Previous Next tabs are shown in this area Lower tabs pages Note Depending on the status of the Auto Performance Sound Select parameter see page 206 a Sound may be immediately selected when pressing one of the SOUND SELECT buttons The latest selected Sound for that bank will be selected Bank sets Selected set of banks top or bottom row of Factory Styles User banks Side tabs banks Use these tabs to select a bank of Sounds Each tab corresponds to one of the SOUND SELECT buttons on the control panel Lower tabs pages Use these tabs to select one of the available pages in the selected bank If you press again the same PERFORMANCE
516. unds area on page 110 for detailed information Expression area Expression Monitor You can use these indicators to check if CC 11 Expression messages are contained in a track Expression messages con tained in a track can vary the volume of the track It is very diffi cult to catch them out unless you carefully read all the events in the Event Edit page This monitor should help you keeping track of them and let you access Event Edit only on the tracks containing the messages Press the START STOP button to start playback and look at the indicators When one of them lights up you can enter Event Edit on the corresponding track and edit or remove the Expression messages STYLE Use these knobs to set the Expression CC 11 value for the cor responding track This value can be seen at the beginning of the Event Edit list see Event Edit Event Edit on page 117 Expression Different Expression values can be defined for each Style Ele ment This way you can set a different volume in each Style Ele ment relative to the general Volume value set in the Style Header Volume area Use these controls to set the volume and status of each track See page 110 for more information The Volume value is the same for the whole Style Use the Expression controls to adjust the relative balance between tracks in each Style Element Style Element Track Controls Keyboard Range The Keyboard Range automatically t
517. uper Detuned PWM An Strings1 An Strings2 Analog Vintage White Pad N1 Air Vox Ether Bell Ether BellLP Lore Lore NT Space Lore Wave Sweepl Wave Sweep2 Wave Sweep3 Syn Ghostly Syn Air Pad Dream Str Syn AirVortex Syn Clicker Cricket Spectrum Noisel Noise2 314 219 316 317 318 319 320 321 222 2323 324 IL 326 927 328 329 330 3al 352 333 334 2355 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 Jal 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 959 360 361 362 Swish Terra Gamelan XEQ Sawl Saw2 Saw3 Pulse 02 Pulse 05 Pulse 08 Pulse 16 Pulse 33 Pulse 40 Square Square MG Square JP Triangle MG Ramp Ramp MG Sine DWGS Syn Sinel DWGS Syn Sine2 DWGS Organl DWGS Organ2 DWGS Bell1 DWGS Bell2 DWGS Bell3 DWZGS Bell4 DWGS Clav DWGS Digil DWGS Digi2 DWGS Wirel DWGS Wire2 DWGS Syncl DWGS Sync2 DWGS Sync3 Orchestra Hit Band Hit Impact Hit Brass Fall Vox Wah Gtr Vibe Chord Zapl Zap2 Stadium Applause Birds1 Birds2 Crickets Church Bell Thunder 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 275 376 2377 Stream Bubble Dog Gallop Laughing Telephone Ring Scream Punch Heart Beat Footstepl Footstep2 Door Creak Door Slam Car Engine Car EngineLP 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 Car Stop Car Pass Car Crash Train Helicopter Gun Shot Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Wind Timpani
518. ur available SC Pre sets See Write SC Preset dialog box on page 212 for more informa tion Delete Help Language command Choose this command to remove the Help languages you do not need to use saving space in the internal SSD memory for other types of data notably OS Upgrades See Delete Help Language dialog box on page 212 for more information Reference 212 Global edit mode Write Global Global Setup dialog box Write Global Global Setup dialog box Open this dialog box by selecting the Write Global Global Setup item from the page menu Here you can save most settings pro grammed in the Global edit mode to the Global file in memory Write Global Setup Write Global Setup to memory Parameters saved in the Global Setup area of the Global are marked with the GBL symbol through the user s manual Write Global Midi Setup dialog box Open this dialog box by selecting the Write Global Midi Setup item from the page menu Here you can save all MIDI settings to a MIDI Setup that is included in the Global file in memory Write Midi Setup Default Ta Midi Setup JEANS Cancel Parameters saved in the MIDI Setup area of the Global are marked with the GBL symbol through the user s manual Name Name of the MIDI Setup to be saved Press the T Text Edit button next to the name to open the Text Edit window and mod ify the name Midi Setup One of th
519. ust the volume of RX Noises in the track This control applies to all types of tracks provided the Sound includes RX Noises Humanize GTR PAD Use this control to apply a random value to the position velocity and length of notes of a Guitar track see Track Type on page 143 This control has no effect on other types of track Wrap Around PAD The wrap around point is the highest register limit for the Pad track The Pad pattern will be transposed according to the detected chord If the chord is too high the Pad track might play in a register that is too high and therefore unnatural If how ever 1t reaches the wrap around point it will be automatically transposed an octave lower The wrap around point can be individually set in semitone steps up to a maximum of 12 semitones relative to the chord root set in the main page of the Pad Record mode see Key Chord on page 134 en Maximum transposition in semitones of the track referred to the original key of the Pad pat tern Pad Chord Table This is the page where you can assign a Chord Variation to each of the most important recognized chord When a chord is recog nized the assigned Chord Variation will be automatically selected by the arranger to play the Pad track PAD REC Chord Table LCY Chord Table Chord Chord Variation gt PAD Use these parameters to assign a Chord Variation to each of the most important chords Q Jg c Q L
520. y Meter st Edit Sort by Genre e text file must be seen in ascending or descending order Ascending Descending Sort by Type Sort by Name Choose one of the sorting options to change the list view order The selected option will be shown in white over the list of file 2 Select one of the available sorting options The order of entries in the display changes reflecting the selected sorting option 0 Note The Artist and Key fields of all supplied entries have been inten tionally left empty The SongBook 63 Searching entries e As an alternative you can change the sorting order by touching one of the labels in a list of names Touch the Name label eno chord E 52 Pinb ll CL 15 46 47 15 42 ES 5 15 66 47 15 43 to alphabetically order the names in the list Each time you touch the label the order changes between Ascending and Descending You can do the same by touching the Type Name Genre Artist Key Number Tempo or Meter label e Each time you touch the same label again the order changes between ascending and descending Searching entries The SongBook database may be really huge You can however look for say specific artists or song titles using the filtering functions 1 Press the Filter button in the display to open the Filter dialog box Filter Available Name FY search criteria GT 65641 days Pop 7 in E o a Gri A day in Paradise Bal
521. y operating mode Song Tracks 1 8 and 9 16 pages You can also transpose all Upper tracks by using the UPPER OCTAVE buttons on the control panel Keyboard track name Non editable Name of the corresponding track mamme row CN um wei furs wes How tower im PERF STS Sound bank s icon This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to Keyboard track status PPERF STS Play mute status of the current track Press this icon to change the status No icon Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Panels The lower half of the main page contains the various panels you can select by pressing the corresponding tabs See more informa tion in the relevant sections starting from page 151 Volume panel 188 m TB TAS Tad Is THE Ta THE Lyrics STS amp Mark ll Hame Tabs Sub Scale Malume Song Tracks 1 8 and 9 16 pages Repeatedly press the TRACK SELECT button to cycle between the Normal Song Tracks 1 8 and Song Tracks 9 16 view In Song Track views the upper half of the main page changes to show parameters for the Song tracks cour DI A W Songs area EH Canyon 1 Meter ded M Selected track info area Sounds area gsm Canyon g LL I MU E 7 12H MEI Meter dd Track name Press TRACK SELECT again to return to Normal view Key board tracks See Main page on page 148
522. y useful to mix between two Songs during a live performance Songs can be in Standard MIDI File or Karaoke format You can play along with the Song with up to four Keyboard tracks Upper 1 3 Lower You can select different Sounds and Effects for Keyboard tracks by selecting Performances and STSs While in Song Play you can use the SongBook to automatically select Songs for a desired music genre With each Song entry in the SongBook up to four STSs are associated Song Play mode can also be used in Easy Mode see page 6 Transport controls You can use the separate transport controls for each of the two onboard sequencers Use the SEQUENCER 1 controls for Sequencer 1 and SEQUENCER 2 controls for Sequencer 2 See SEQUENCER 1 TRANSPORT CONTROLS on page 13 for more information MIDI Clock In Song Play mode the MIDI Clock is always generated by the internal sequencer even if the Clock parameter is set to MIDI or USB see Clock Source on page 208 While in this mode Pa500 cannot receive MIDI Clock messages from the MIDI IN Pa500 transmits to the MIDI OUT and USB port only the MIDI Clock messages generated by Sequencer 1 For MIDI Clock mes sages to be sent the Clock Send parameter must be activated see Clock Send on page 208 Tempo Lock and Link Mode If you don t want the Tempo to change when selecting a new Song turn on the TEMPO LOCK function When the LED of this button is turned on you can sti
523. yboard and controller s data to the MIDI application running on the Mac Pa500 SOUND This allows for transmission of MIDI messages from the MIDI application running on the Mac to the internal tone generator of the Pa500 Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver Mac OS X Installing KORG USB MIDI Driver 279 p 10 Shortcuts Shortcuts You can keep the SHIFT button pressed and press another but ton on the control panel to directly jump to an edit page Here is the list of shortcuts ee RN Any operating modes Tempo Change When a list of Songs or SongBook entries is shown Next Previous alphabetical section It also works in Media mode Sound Sends the Sound assigned to the selected track to the Sound mode Global Selects the Setup General Controls page MIDI section of the Global mode This is a quick way to jump to MIDI editing pages Selects the Preferences page of the Media mode Panic Selects the MIDI Setup parameter in the Setup General Controls page MIDI section of the Global mode Selects the Lock page General Controls sec tion of the Global mode Selects the Custom List page of the SongBook mode Transpose either Selects the Transpose Control page General Controls section of the Global mode Selects the Scale page General Controls sec tion of the Global mode Style Play mode Style Play Selects the Style Setup page Preferences sec tion Memory Selects the Style Preferences page
524. yboard tracks along with the Song s In the main page Keyboard tracks are shown in the right half of the display You can reach the main page by pressing EXIT from any of the Song Play edit pages If you are in a different operating mode press SONG PLAY to recall the Song Play mode Use the TRACK SELECT button to cycle between Keyboard and Song tracks SEQUENCER Sequencer mode where you can play record or edit a Song The Backing Sequence mode lets you record a new Song based on the Keyboard and Style tracks and save it as a new Standard MIDI File SOUND Sound mode to play single Sounds on the key board or edit them Press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY buttons together to select the Demo mode This mode lets you listen to some Demo Songs to let you under stand the sonic power of the Pa500 To exit from this mode press any of the MODE buttons GLOBAL DEMO This button recalls the Global edit environment where you can adjust various global settings This edit environment overlaps any operating mode that still remains active in the background Press EXIT to go back to the underlying operating mode 9 MEDIA This button recalls the Media edit environment where you can execute various operations on the files and the card Load Save Format etc This edit environment overlaps any operating mode that still remains active in the background Press EXIT to go back to the underlying operating mode 9 HELP
525. you can freely save edited Sounds either in the Factory or User Sound area Note This parameter is automatically set to On when turning the instrument off Note If your accidentally delete some Factory Data reload the Backup data or download the original data from www korgpa com 226 Media edit mode USB Hide Unknown Files When this option is checked non proprietary files are hidden when using Media operations therefore making browsing direc tories easier USB Use this page to enable or disable the USB port for file transfer 55D U Connection The USB port allows you to access a card inserted in the card drive of the Pa500 from a personal computer either Windows or Mac by just connecting the Pa500 to the computer s USB inter face This way you can exchange files between the Pa500 and a personal computer for example for making a quick backup of Pa500 data on your computer or moving midifiles to your P2500 Note Windows 2000 XP and Vista as well as Mac OS X can be directly connected to the Pa500 Note While USB file transfer is enabled you cannot access other functions on the Pa500 CARD Connection Normally the USB port is not enabled for file transfer on the Pa500 it is always on however for MIDI connection Press the Enable button to turn it on or the Disable button with all the caveats to turn it off Enable After connecting Pa500 to a personal computer by using a standa
526. you to define the track s original key and chord type for the current Chord Variation When in Style Play mode this chord will be played back exactly as it was recorded without any NTT processing see above To record just one Chord Variation for a Style Element the sug gested original key chord is maj7 with NTT i Series Be very careful to play the 7th note i e with a Cmaj7th key chord the B to avoid the lack of notes or a bad NTT conver sion when playing different chords Note To conform to Korg specifications it is advisable to record both the Major and minor Chord Variations for the Intro 1 and Ending 1 Style Elements When you select a track the original key chord assigned to the selected track will be shown All recorded tracks will play back on that key chord For example if the original key chord for the Accl track is A7th when selecting the Acc1 track all the remain ing tracks will play on the A7th key chord In the example above you will record the Acc1 track in the AMa jor key with notes pertaining to the A7th scale This exact pat tern will be recalled when an A7th chord will be recognized Note This does not apply to Guitar Mode relying on a different rule See Main page Guitar Mode on page 111 for more infoma tion NTT Area NTT Type Table STYLE NTTs Note Transposition Tables are the sophisticated algo rithms that allow Korg arrangers to convert recognize

User Manual - Full Compass

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents